2023 GRAND WAGONEER/WAGONEER
OWNER’S MANUAL
2023 GRAND WAGONEER
WAGONEER
Third Edition V2
23_WS_OM_EN_USC
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take
following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your Wagoneer brand
vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store® or Google
Play® Store and enter the search keyword “Wagoneer” (U.S. residents only).
©2023 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Wagoneer is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Wagoneer est une
marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
owners.mopar.ca
CanadaUSA
mopar.com/om
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust,
do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear
gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also
include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment
described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Radio Instruction Manual
and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and
personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off the road.
Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices by the driver while the vehicle is moving
is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself
unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of
cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Wagoneer vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source for common
questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit mopar.com/om (USA), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local
Chrysler, Dodge, Jeep®, or Ram dealer.
U.S. Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by
calling 1-833-667-4825 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com.
Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet or purchase
a replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal
minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a rideshare, a friend or use public transportation.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms or discontinue the Roadside Assistance Program at any time. The Roadside Assistance Program is subject to restrictions and conditions of use,
that are determined solely by FCA US LLC.
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
24 HOURS, 7 DAYS A WEEK AT YOUR SERVICE.
CALL 1-833-667-4825 OR VISIT WAGONEER.RSAHELP.COM (USA)
CALL 1-800-363-4869 OR VISIT HTTPS://FCA.ROADSIDEAID.COM/ (CANADA)
SERVICES: Flat Tire Service, Out Of Gas/Fuel Delivery, Battery Jump Assistance, Lockout Service and Towing Service
Please see the Customer Assistance chapter in this Owner’s Manual for further information.
CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................8
1
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE.............................................................17
2
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL...................................93
3
4 STARTING AND OPERATING........................................................................... 115
4
5 MULTIMEDIA .........................................................................................................186
5
6 SAFETY ................................................................................................................. 226
6
7 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY...............................................................................273
7
8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE................................................................. 291
8
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS......................................................................350
9
10
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE................................................................................357
10
11 INDEX...................................................................................................................... 362
11
INTRODUCTION
KNOW & GO...........................................................9
SYMBOLS KEY.....................................................11
ROLLOVER WARNING..........................................11
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS ......... 12
SYMBOLS GLOSSARY......................................... 12
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS ................................................................... 17
Key Fob........................................................... 17
SENTRY KEY........................................................20
IGNITION SWITCH................................................21
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition....................... 21
REMOTE START................................................... 22
How To Use Remote Start............................. 22
To Exit Remote Start Mode .......................... 23
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation —
If Equipped................................................23
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If
Equipped................................................... 23
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De-Icer
Activation — If Equipped........................... 24
Remote Start Abort Message........................24
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED.... 24
To Arm The System........................................ 24
To Disarm The System................................... 24
Rearming Of The System...............................25
Security System Manual Override................ 25
Tamper Alert...................................................25
DELUXE VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED ......................................................25
To Arm The System
........................................ 25
To Disarm The System...................................26
Security System Manual Override................ 26
DOORS ................................................................26
Manual Door Locks........................................26
Power Door Locks ......................................... 27
Power Side Steps — If Equipped .................. 27
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry......... 27
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit................... 29
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped............30
Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors................................................ 30
STEERING WHEEL...............................................30
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column..... 30
Heated Steering Wheel..................................31
DRIVER AND PASSENGER MEMORY
SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED............................. 31
Programming The Memory Feature..............32
Linking And Unlinking The Key Fob To
Memory..................................................... 32
Memory Position Recall.................................33
SEATS ..................................................................33
Manual Adjustment Rear Seats....................33
Power Adjustment Front Seats — If
Equipped................................................... 38
Power Adjustment Rear Seats — If
Equipped................................................... 40
Power Seat Massage — If Equipped............. 41
Heated Seats — If Equipped..........................42
Ventilated Seats — If Equipped.....................43
Head Restraints.............................................44
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS — IF EQUIPPED.......................................47
Introducing Voice Recognition.......................47
Basic Voice Commands................................. 47
Get Started..................................................... 47
Additional Information...................................48
DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS............................48
MIRRORS ............................................................49
Inside Rearview Mirror.................................. 49
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors............................. 50
Outside Mirrors.............................................. 50
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror — If
Equipped................................................... 50
Conversation Mirror....................................... 51
Power Mirrors................................................. 51
Automatic Power Folding Mirrors — If
Equipped................................................... 51
Heated Mirrors...............................................52
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse...........................52
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®)................................................ 52
Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink®...............................................53
Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels......... 53
Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling
Code Or Non-Rolling Code Device........... 53
Programming HomeLink® To A Garage
Door Opener..............................................53
2
Programming HomeLink® To A
Miscellaneous Device...............................54
R
eprogramming A Single HomeLink®
Button........................................................54
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming.......54
Security...........................................................55
Troubleshooting Tips..................................... 55
EXTERIOR LIGHTS ..............................................55
Headlight Switch............................................55
Multifunction Lever........................................56
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs).................... 56
High/Low Beam Switch................................. 57
Automatic High Beams — If Equipped.......... 57
Flash-To-Pass .................................................57
Automatic Headlights.................................... 57
Parking Lights And Panel Lights................... 57
Headlights On Automatically With Wipers....57
Headlight Illumination On Approach.............58
Headlight Delay..............................................58
Lights-On Reminder.......................................58
Fog Lights.......................................................58
Turn Signals....................................................59
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped............... 59
Battery Saver..................................................59
INTERIOR LIGHTS................................................59
Courtesy Lights.............................................. 59
Illuminated Entry — If Equipped....................60
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS.............. 61
Windshield Wiper Operation......................... 61
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped..............62
Rear Wiper And Washer................................ 62
Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped...... 62
CLIMATE CONTROLS........................................... 62
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
And Functions........................................... 63
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC).......... 69
Climate Voice Recognition.............................69
Operating Tips ...............................................69
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT...............71
Storage........................................................... 71
Center Console Cooler — If Equipped...........72
Center Console Safe — If Equipped.............. 73
Sun Screens — If Equipped........................... 74
USB/AUX Control ........................................... 74
Electrical Power Outlets.................................76
Power Inverter................................................ 77
Wireless Charging Pad — If Equipped...........78
WINDOWS ...........................................................79
Power Window Controls.................................79
Wind Buffeting .............................................. 80
Radio Signal Devices On Windshield —
If Equipped................................................80
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED ....................81
Tri-Pane Power Sunroof................................. 81
HOOD ..................................................................83
Opening The Hood......................................... 83
Closing The Hood...........................................83
LIFTGATE..............................................................83
To Unlock/Open The Liftgate........................ 83
To Lock/Close The Liftgate........................... 84
Adjustable Power Liftgate Height................. 84
Hands-Free Liftgate....................................... 85
Cargo Area Features......................................86
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED..............88
Installing The Crossbars................................88
Removing The Crossbars...............................91
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ...........................93
Instrument Cluster Descriptions...................94
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ................... 95
Instrument Cluster Descriptions...................95
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY....................... 96
Location And Controls................................... 96
Engine Oil Life Reset......................................98
Display And Messages.................................. 99
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items ... 100
Head Up Display (HUD) — If Equipped........102
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode
Message — Electrical Load
Reduction Actions (If Equipped)............ 103
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES................ 104
Red Warning Lights..................................... 104
Yellow Warning Lights..................................107
Yellow Indicator Lights.................................110
Green Indicator Lights.................................111
White Indicator Lights................................. 112
Blue Indicator Lights................................... 112
Gray Indicator Lights................................... 113
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II .....113
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity.......................................... 113
3
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS .......................11
3
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE.................................... 115
Automatic Transmission..............................115
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Ignition................. 115
Normal Starting........................................... 115
AutoPark.......................................................116
Extended Park Starting............................... 117
If Engine Fails To Start ................................117
Cold Weather Operation (Below –22°F
Or −30°C)............................................... 118
After Starting............................................... 118
Turbocharger “Cool Down” — 3.0L
Engine Only............................................. 118
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED.........118
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS........118
PARKING BRAKE ..............................................118
Electric Park Brake (EPB) ...........................118
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ........................... 121
Ignition Park Interlock.................................122
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
(BTSI) System ........................................ 122
8-Speed Automatic Transmission...............122
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION.................... 125
Quadra-Trac I Operating Instructions/
Precautions — If Equipped.....................125
Quadra-Trac II Operating Instructions/
Precautions — If Equipped.....................125
Shift Positions..............................................125
Shifting Procedures.....................................126
Quadra-Drive II System — If Equipped........126
SELEC-TERRAIN — IF EQUIPPED...................... 126
Selec-Terrain Mode Selection.....................126
Instrument Cluster Display Messages....... 127
QUADRA-LIFT — IF EQUIPPED...........................127
Description...................................................127
Air Suspension Modes................................ 129
Instrument Cluster Display Messages....... 129
Operation..................................................... 130
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L AND 6.4L
ONLY — IF EQUIPPED...................................130
POWER STEERING............................................ 130
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED............. 131
Autostop Mode.............................................131
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop.................................................. 131
To Start The Engine While In Autostop
Mode....................................................... 131
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start
System.................................................... 132
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start
System.................................................... 132
System Malfunction.................................... 132
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED..132
Cruise Control.............................................. 132
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC).....................134
TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED.....................................................141
Activation/Deactivation...............................141
Traffic Sign Assist Modes............................ 141
Indications On The Display..........................141
ACTIVE DRIVING ASSIST SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED.................................................... 142
Operation..................................................... 142
Turning Active Driving Assist On Or Off...... 143
Indications On The Display......................... 144
System Status..............................................145
System Operation/Limitations....................145
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM........................................................ 146
ParkSense Sensors..................................... 146
ParkSense Display.......................................146
ParkSense Warning Display........................149
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense............ 149
Service The ParkSense Park Assist
System.....................................................149
Cleaning The ParkSense System................149
ParkSense System Usage Precautions...... 150
Side Distance Warning System — If
Equipped.................................................150
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM
— IF EQUIPPED.............................................152
Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense
Active Park Assist System...................... 152
ParkSense Automated Parking — If
Equipped.................................................153
Semi-Automatic ParkSense Active Park
Assist — If Equipped............................... 156
ACTIVE LANE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED.................................................... 159
Active Lane Management Operation..........159
4
Turning Active Lane Management On
Or Off....................................................... 1
60
Active Lane Management Warning
Message..................................................160
Changing Active Lane Management
Status...................................................... 161
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA................161
Zoom View....................................................162
Viewing At Speed......................................... 163
FAMCAM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED................... 163
NIGHT VISION CAMERA SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED.................................................... 163
Detection Range..........................................165
Service The Night Vision System................ 165
Night Vision System Limitations.................166
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED.................................................... 166
Zoom View....................................................168
REFUELING THE VEHICLE................................ 168
VEHICLE LOADING ........................................... 169
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) ........ 169
Payload.........................................................169
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).............. 169
Tire Size........................................................169
Rim Size....................................................... 169
Inflation Pressure........................................ 169
Curb Weight................................................. 169
Loading.........................................................169
TRAILER TOWING ............................................. 170
Common Towing Definitions....................... 170
Trailer Hitch Classification.......................... 172
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)........................... 173
Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal —
If Equipped..............................................175
Trailer And Tongue Weight...........................175
Towing Requirements ................................. 176
Towing Tips ..................................................179
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME).............................................. 179
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Vehicle.....................................................180
Recreational Towing — Two-Wheel Drive
Models.................................................... 180
Recreational Towing — Quadra-Trac I
(Single-Speed Transfer Case) Four-
Wheel Drive Models............................... 181
Recreational Towing — Quadra–Trac II/
Quadra–Drive II Four-Wheel Drive
Models.....................................................181
DRIVING TIPS....................................................183
On-Road Driving Tips...................................183
Off-Road Driving Tips.................................. 183
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS ......................................186
CYBERSECURITY ..............................................186
UCONNECT SETTINGS .....................................186
Customer Programmable Features............ 187
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS ............ 210
Radio Operation...........................................210
Media Mode.................................................210
PASSENGER SCREEN — IF EQUIPPED ............ 210
Passenger Screen Permissions..................211
Home Screen............................................... 211
Audio And Video...........................................212
Rear Seat Entertainment with Amazon
Fire TV Built-in — If Equipped.................213
HDMI Projecting...........................................213
Device Manager...........................................213
Navigation.................................................... 214
Camera.........................................................214
3RD PARTY APPS — IF EQUIPPED....................214
REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT (RSE) WITH
AMAZON FIRE TV BUILT-IN — IF EQUIPPED 215
Overview.......................................................215
Getting Started............................................ 216
Accessing Rear Seat Entertainment
with Fire TV built-in from the Front
Radio Screen...........................................216
Accessing Rear Seat Entertainment
with Fire TV built-in from the Rear
Screens................................................... 216
Accessing Rear Seat Entertainment
with Fire TV built-in from the
Passenger Screen — If Equipped...........216
First Time Starting Up (Using the Rear
Screens).................................................. 217
Alexa Voice Control...................................... 217
Listen Via Vehicle Speakers........................ 217
Quick Menu.................................................. 217
Parental Controls (Using the Rear
Screens).................................................. 218
5
Voice Remote with Alexa Pairing (Using
the Rear Screens)...................................2
18
Media Sources Input (Using the Front
Radio and Rear Screens).......................218
Voice Remote with Alexa............................. 219
Replacing the Voice Remote with Alexa
Batteries..................................................219
Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV
Built-In streaming (Using the Front
Radio and Rear Screens)....................... 219
Fire TV Apps/Games (Using the Rear
Screens)..................................................220
Using The Video USB Port...........................220
Play Video Games........................................221
Headphones Operation...............................221
Rear Climate Controls................................. 221
Legal & Compliance.................................... 223
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED .................. 223
Off-Road Pages Status Bar......................... 223
Vehicle Dynamics........................................ 223
Accessory Gauges....................................... 224
Pitch & Roll...................................................224
Selec-Terrain — If Equipped........................ 224
Suspension — If Equipped.......................... 225
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES .....225
Regulatory And Safety Information............ 225
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES............................................226
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................... 226
Rear Seat Reminder Alert (RSRA).............. 226
Drowsy Driver Detection (DDD) — If
Equipped................................................. 227
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System......227
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS......................... 234
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)...................... 234
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation................................................ 237
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).. 239
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ...................243
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ......243
Important Safety Precautions.....................243
Seat Belt Systems ...................................... 244
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS).... 250
Child Restraints .......................................... 260
SAFETY TIPS .................................................... 269
Transporting Passengers............................ 269
Transporting Pets ........................................270
Connected Vehicles.....................................270
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle .............................................270
Periodic Safety Checks You Should
Make Outside The Vehicle......................271
Exhaust Gas ................................................ 271
Carbon Monoxide Warnings .......................272
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ....................... 273
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM— IF EQUIPPED.......273
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ....................... 275
Preparations For Jacking ............................276
Jack And Tools Location.............................. 276
Spare Tire Stowage......................................277
Spare Tire Removal..................................... 277
Jacking Instructions.....................................278
JUMP STARTING ...............................................282
Preparations For Jump Start...................... 282
Jump Starting Procedure............................ 283
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY............................284
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS.......................... 285
MANUAL PARK RELEASE .................................286
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE.............................287
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE........................ 287
Rear-Wheel Drive Models........................... 288
Four-Wheel Drive Models............................289
Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped........ 289
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE
SYSTEM (EARS)............................................290
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)........................290
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING.................................. 291
Maintenance Plan....................................... 291
ENGINE COMPARTMENT .................................295
3.0L Engine..................................................295
5.7L Engine..................................................296
6.4L Engine..................................................297
Checking Oil Level — 3.0L Engines.............297
5.7L & 6.4L..................................................299
Adding Washer Fluid................................... 299
Maintenance-Free Battery ......................... 299
Pressure Washing....................................... 300
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE.................................. 300
Engine Oil ....................................................300
Engine Oil Filter ...........................................301
6
Engine Air Cleaner Filter..............................301
Air Conditioner Maintenance .....................30
1
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection................. 303
Body Lubrication .........................................304
Windshield Wiper Blades ...........................304
Exhaust System ..........................................305
Cooling System............................................306
Brake System ..............................................308
Automatic Transmission..............................309
Front/Rear Axle Fluid...................................310
Transfer Case .............................................. 310
Fuses............................................................ 310
Bulb Replacement ......................................331
TIRES................................................................. 331
Tire Safety Information ...............................331
Tires — General Information ...................... 337
Tire Types..................................................... 340
Spare Tires — If Equipped .......................... 341
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care....................... 342
Snow Traction Devices................................ 343
Tire Rotation Recommendations................345
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES...............346
Treadwear.................................................... 346
Traction Grades........................................... 346
Temperature Grades................................... 346
STORING THE VEHICLE ....................................347
BODYWORK.......................................................347
Protection From Atmospheric Agents ........347
Body And Underbody Maintenance............347
Preserving The Bodywork............................347
INTERIORS ....................................................... 348
Seats And Fabric Parts................................348
Plastic And Coated Parts............................ 348
Leather Surfaces.........................................349
Glass Surfaces ........................................... 349
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)....... 350
BRAKE SYSTEM................................................ 350
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . 350
Torque Specifications..................................350
FUEL REQUIREMENTS......................................351
3.0L Standard Output Engine ....................351
3.0L High Output Engine ............................351
5.7L Engine..................................................351
6.4L Engine..................................................351
Reformulated Gasoline .............................. 351
Materials Added To Fuel .............................351
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ...................... 352
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles352
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications.... 352
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese
Tricarbonyl (MMT) In Gasoline............... 352
Fuel System Cautions..................................352
FLUID CAPACITIES............................................ 353
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS................. 354
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS................355
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE .................................... 357
Prepare For The Appointment.....................357
Prepare A List...............................................357
Be Reasonable With Requests................... 357
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE................................357
Roadside Assistance................................... 357
FCA US LLC Customer Center.....................358
Wagoneer Client Services Canada.............358
Mexico..........................................................358
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands..............358
Customer Assistance For The Hearing
Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)............. 358
Service Contract.......................................... 359
WARRANTY INFORMATION...............................359
MOPAR® PARTS............................................... 359
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS........................ 359
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C..................................... 359
In Canada.....................................................360
ORDERING AND ACCESSING ADDITIONAL
OWNER’S INFORMATION.............................360
CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP OR ADDRESS......... 360
GENERAL INFORMATION..................................360
7
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Wagoneer/Grand Wagoneer. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
The Wagoneer/Grand Wagoneer is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and perform tasks that are not intended for conventional passenger vehicles. It handles and
maneuvers differently from many passenger vehicles both on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If equipped, the two-wheel drive version of
this vehicle was designed for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving on rugged terrain or use in other severe conditions suited for a four-wheel drive vehicle.
Before you drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and transfer
case shifting. Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces. Driving skills improve with experience. When driving off-road, or working the vehicle, don’t overload the
vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics. Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of this
type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision
ð
page 183.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is
supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its customers as well as the details
of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the
instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help ensure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner's Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the text. Therefore, you
should only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced throughout the Owner's Information,
which may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”. All data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your
vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model
described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your vehicle best, have factory-trained technicians, genuine Mopar® parts, and care about your satisfaction.
8
KNOW & GO
Explore The Exciting New Features Of Your Wagoneer Or Grand Wagoneer With The Know & Go App
INTRODUCTION 9
1
*Available for US Residents only
Scan me
10 INTRODUCTION
Augmented Reality
See your vehicle like never before. Move your smartphone around your vehicle to discover and identify features, and to reveal information about how to use
them to enhance your ownership and driving experiences.
Features Library
Want to learn about your vehicle’s features anytime, anywhere? Look them up in the Features Library to access the same information that you would get via
augmented reality – including how-to videos and feature-specific Owner’s Manual pages – when you are not at your vehicle.
Push Notifications
Do not miss out on all your vehicle has to offer. Enable push notifications, on your smartphone, to get alerts about features and capabilities you have not
explored on the app yet.
SYMBOLS KEY
WARNING!
These statements apply to operating
procedures that could result in a colli-
sion, bodily injury and/or death.
CAUTION!
These statements apply to procedures
that could result in damage to your vehi-
cle.
NOTE:
A suggestion which will improve installa-
tion, operation, and reliability. If not fol-
lowed, may result in damage.
TIP:
General ideas/solutions/suggestions on
easier use of the product or functionali-
ty.
PAGE REFERENCE ARROW
Follow this reference for additional infor-
mation on a particular feature.
FOOTNOTE
Supplementary and relevant information
pertaining to the topic.
If you do not read the entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important information.
Observe all Cautions and Warnings.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many
passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off-road
applications. Driven in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because
of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of control, it may roll over while
some other vehicles may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions that
can cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a
collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drive carefully.
Rollover Warning Label
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts pr
ovided is a major cause of severe
or fatal injury. In fact, the US government notes that the universal use of existing seat
belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more each year and could reduce
disabling injuries by two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
INTRODUCTION 11
1
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its
roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury
or death.
SYMBOLS GLOSSARY
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating precautions to
be observed when using this component. It is important to follow all warnings when
operating your vehicle. See the following for the definition of each symbol
ð
page
104.
NOTE:
Warning and Indicator lights are different based upon equipment options and current
vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
Red Warning Lights
Air Bag Warning Light
ð
page 104
Brake Warning Light
ð
page 105
Battery Charge Warning Light
ð
page 105
Red Warning Lights
Door Open Warning Light
ð
page 105
Drowsy Driver Detected Warning Light
ð
page 105
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault Warning Light
ð
page 106
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
ð
page 106
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
ð
page 106
Hood Open Warning Light
ð
page 106
Liftgate Open Warning Light
ð
page 106
Night Vision Animal Detected Warning Light
ð
page 106
12 INTRODUCTION
Red Warning Lights
Night Vision Pedestrian Detected Warning Light
ð
page 106
Oil Pressure Warning Light
ð
page 106
Oil Temperature Warning Light
ð
page 107
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
ð
page 107
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
ð
page 107
Vehicle Security Warning Light
ð
page 107
Yellow Warning Lights
Air Suspension Fault Warning Light
ð
page 107
Yellow Warning Lights
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
ð
page 107
Drowsy Driver Detected System Fault Warning Light
ð
page 107
Electric Park Brake Warning Light
ð
page 107
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light
ð
page 108
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light
ð
page 108
Service Active Lane Management Warning Light
ð
page 108
Active Lane Management Warning Light
ð
page 108
Fuel Cutoff Failure Warning Light
ð
page 108
INTRODUCTION 13
1
Yellow Warning Lights
Low Fuel Warning Light
ð
page 108
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
ð
page 108
Night Vision Animal Detected Warning Light
ð
page 109
Night Vision Pedestrian Detected Warning Light
ð
page 109
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL)
ð
page 108
Oil Level Sensor Fault Warning Light
ð
page 109
Service 4WD Warning Light
ð
page 109
Service Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Warning Light
ð
page 109
Yellow Warning Lights
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Or Pedestrian Emergency
Braking (PEB) Warning Light
ð
page 109
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light
ð
page 109
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
ð
page 109
Towing Hook Breakdown Warning Light
ð
page 110
Yellow Indicator Lights
4WD Low Indicator Light
ð
page 110
Air Suspension Active Indicator Light
ð
page 110
Air Suspension Aerodynamic Height Indicator Light
ð
page 110
14 INTRODUCTION
Yellow Indicator Lights
Air Suspension Entry/Exit Indicator Light
ð
page 110
Air Suspension Off-Road 1 Indicator Light
ð
page 110
Air Suspension Off-Road 2 Indicator Light
ð
page 111
Auto HOLD! Fault Indicator Light
ð
page 111
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) / Pedestrian Emergency Braking
(PEB) Off Indicator Light
ð
page 111
NEUTRAL Indicator Light
ð
page 111
Maximum Payload Exceeded Indicator Light
ð
page 111
TOW/HAUL Indicator Light
ð
page 111
Green Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Indicator Light
ð
page 111
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Target Detected Indicator
Light
ð
page 111
Auto HOLD Indicator Light
ð
page 111
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light
ð
page 111
Front Fog Indicator Light
ð
page 111
Active Lane Management Indicator Light
ð
page 111
Night Vision Active Indicator Light
ð
page 111
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
ð
page 111
INTRODUCTION 15
1
Green Indicator Lights
Sport Mode Indicator Light
ð
page 112
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light
ð
page 112
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
ð
page 112
White Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Indicator Light
ð
page 112
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
ð
page 109
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light
ð
page 112
White Indicator Lights
Active Lane Management Indicator Light
ð
page 112
Rear Seat Unoccupied Indicator Light
ð
page 112
Selec-Speed Control Indicator Light
ð
page 112
Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
ð
page 112
Gray Indicator Lights
Night Vision Suppressed Indicator Light
ð
page 113
16 INTRODUCTION
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
KEY FOB
Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which supports
Passive Entry, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE), Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™, Remote Air Suspension Lowering, and
Remote Start. The key fob allows you to lock or unlock
all doors and liftgate, as well as activate the Panic
Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m).
The key fob does not need to be pointed at the vehicle
to activate the system. The key fob also contains an
emergency key, which is stored in the rear of the key
fob.
NOTE:
In vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the key fob will
operate at distances up to 328 ft (100 m).
NOTE:
● The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked if the
key fob is located next to a mobile phone, laptop,
or other electronic device. This may result in poor
performance.
● If your vehicle is equipped with a Wireless Charging
Pad, the key fob may not be detected if it is placed
within 6 inches (15 cm) of the pad
ð
page 78.
● With the ignition in the ON position and the vehicle
moving at 2 mph (4 km/h), all RKE commands are
disabled.
Key Fob
1 — LED Indicator
2 — Unlock
3 — Remote Start
4 — Air Suspension Remote Lowering (If Equipped)
5 — Lock
6 — Power Liftgate
7 — Panic
8 — Emergency Key
In case the ignition switch does not change positions
with the push of a button, the key f
ob may have a low
or fully depleted battery. A low key fob battery can be
verified by referring to the instrument cluster, which will
display directions to follow.
For more information on ignition positions, see
ð
page 21.
NOTE:
A lo
w key fob battery condition may be indicated by a
message in the instrument cluster display, or by the
LED light on the key fob. If the LED key fob light no
longer illuminates after a key fob button is pushed, then
the key fob battery requires replacement
ð
page
360.
To Lock/Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once
to unlock the driver’s door, or twice within five seconds
to unlock all the doors and liftgate. To lock all the doors
and liftgate, push the lock button once.
When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals will
flash and the illuminated entry system will be activated.
When the doors are locked, the turn signals will flash
and the horn will chirp.
NOTE:
● If the vehicle is equipped with the Auto Relock
feature, and is unlocked with the key fob, and no
door is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will
relock and the Vehicle Security system will arm (if
equipped). This feature can be enabled/disabled
within Uconnect Settings.
● If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate is
open, the doors will lock. The doors will unlock
again automatically if the key fob is left inside the
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
2
passenger compartment, otherwise the doors will
stay locked.
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first
push of the unlock button through Uconnect Settings
ð
page 186.
Using The Panic Feature
To turn the Panic feature on or off, push the Panic
button on the key fob. When the Panic feature is
activated, the turn signals will flash, the horn may
pulse on and off (if equipped with horn alarm), and the
interior lights will turn on.
The Panic feature will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by either pushing the Panic button a
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h) or greater.
NOTE:
● The interior lights will turn off if you place the ignition
in the ON/RUN position while the Panic feature is
activated. However, the exterior lights and horn (if
equipped with horn alarm) will remain on.
● You may need to be closer than 66 ft (20 m) from
the vehicle when using the key fob to turn off the
Panic feature due to the radio frequency noises
emitted by the system.
Key Left Vehicle Feature
If a valid key fob is no longer detected inside the vehicle
while the vehicle’s ignition system is in the ON/RUN
or START position, the message “Key Fob Has Left The
Vehicle” will be shown in the instrument cluster display
along with an interior chime. An exterior audible and
visual alert will also be activated to warn the driver.
The vehicle’s horn will rapidly chirp three times along
with a single flash of the vehicle’s exterior lights.
NOTE:
● The doors have to be open and then closed in order
for the vehicle to detect a key fob; the Key Left
Vehicle feature will not activate until all of the doors
are closed.
● These alerts will not be activated in situations where
the vehicle’s engine is left running with the key fob
inside.
Air Suspension (Remote Lowering Of The
Vehicle) — If Equipped
For easy entry and loading, your vehicle
can be lowered to Entry/Exit height by
pushing the key fob air suspension button
two times. When air suspension lowering
is requested using the key fob, the vehicle will send
a series of chirps and flashes (when enabled within
Uconnect Settings) to alert the customer that the
operation has begun and will continue these alerts until
it successfully lowers.
The following conditions must be met for the vehicle to
lower remotely:
● The vehicle must not already be in Entry/Exit (Park)
ride height.
● The vehicle battery must be fully charged.
● All doors must be closed.
● The key fob must be out of the vehicle.
NOTE:
Ensure the vehicle is clear of all objects, pets, and
people prior to remote lowering.
Canceling Remote Lowering
Vehicle lowering can be canceled at anytime. When
vehicle lowering is canceled, the vehicle will raise up to
the next defined level and lock out the remote lowering
feature for five seconds before a new request can be
made.
To cancel vehicle lowering, push the key fob air
suspension button one time during the lowering
process. When vehicle lowering is canceled, the horn
will chirp two times and the turn signals will flash four
times. Once raising is completed, the horn will chirp one
time.
NOTE:
For more information on Air Suspension, see
ð
page
127.
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
The replacement battery model is one CR2450 battery.
NOTE:
● Customers are recommended to use a battery
obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket coin battery
dimensions may not meet the original OEM coin
battery dimensions.
● Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
for further information.
● Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the
back housing or the printed circuit board.
18 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
● Do not replace the coin battery if the LED on the key
fob abov
e the top row buttons blinks when a button
is pressed. The coin battery should last a minimum
of three years with normal vehicle usage.
1. Remove the emergency key by pushing the
emergency key release button (1) on the side of
the key fob, and pulling the emergency key (2) out
with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal
1 — Emergency Key Release Button
2 — Emergency Key
Emergency Key Removed
2. Hold the key f
ob with the button side facing down,
and locate the small rectangular gap on the left
side between the housing and the back cover of
the key fob. Use a small flat-bladed tool to pry
open the left side of the fob cover while applying
pressure until the cover snaps open.
Pry Apart Key Fob Halves
3. Next, locate the gap on the right side of the k
ey
fob, which is positioned farther to the edge than
the left side gap. Pry open the right side, and
remove the back cover.
4. Remove the battery by using your thumb to slide
the batt
ery down
ward and back toward the key
ring.
Key Fob Battery Location
NOTE:
You can also insert a scre
wdriver or similar tool
into the battery removal pocket to pry the battery
out.
Battery Removal Pocket
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
2
NOTE:
When replacing the battery, ensure the (+) sign on
the battery is facing upward. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean
it with rubbing alcohol.
5. Replace the battery by using your thumb to push
down and slide the battery under the small lip on
the top edge of the opening.
Key Fob Battery Replacement
6. To assemble the ke
y fob case, line up the top edge
of the back cover with the top of the fob, and
press the edges into the interlocking hinges until
all edges snap together with no large visual gaps.
7. Reinsert the emergency key until it locks into
place.
NOTE:
The key fob battery should only be replaced by qualified
technicians. If the battery requires replacement, see an
authorized dealer.
WARNING!
● The int
egrated key fob contains a coin cell battery.
Do not ingest the batter
y; there is a chemical burn
hazard. If the coin cell battery is swallowed, it can
cause severe internal burns in just two hours and
can lead to death.
● If you think a battery may have been swallowed
or placed inside any part of the body, seek
immediate medical attention.
● Keep new and used batteries away from children.
If the battery compartment does not close
securely, stop using the product and keep it away
from children.
Programming And Requesting Additional
Key Fobs
Pr
ogramming the key fob may be performed by an
authorized dealer.
NOTE:
● Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to another
vehicle.
● Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle.
WARNING!
● Alw
ays remove the key fobs from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the v
ehicle
unattended.
● For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in
the OFF position when exiting the vehicle.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at
an authorized dealer. This procedure consists of
programming a blank k
ey fob to the vehicle electronics.
A blank key fob is one that has never been
programmed.
NOTE:
● When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
● Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut to match
the vehicle locks.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine.
The system does not need to be armed or activated.
Operation is automatic, regardless of whether the
vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button
ignition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to prevent
unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only key
fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used
20 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
to start and operate the vehicle. The system cannot
reprogram a key fob obtained from another vehicle.
After placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for
a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb
check, it indicates that there is a problem with the
electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after
the bulb check, it indicates that someone attempted to
start the engine with an invalid key fob. In the event
that a valid key fob is used to start the engine but there
is an issue with the vehicle electronics, the engine will
start and shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the
electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced
as soon as possible by an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible
with some aftermarket R
emote Start systems. Use of
these systems may result in vehicle starting problems
and loss of security protection.
IGNITION SWITCH
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition
switch with the push of a button as long as the key fob
is in the passenger compartment.
The START/STOP ignition button has several operating
modes that are labeled and will illuminate when in
position. These modes are OFF, ON/RUN, and START.
START/STOP Ignition Button
1 — OFF
2 — ON/RUN
The push button ignition can be placed in the following
modes:
OFF
● The engine is stopped
● Some electrical devices (e.g. power locks, alarm,
etc.) are still available
● All electrical devices are available (e.g. climate
controls, heated seats, etc.)
START
● The engine will start (when foot is on the brake
pedal)
NOTE:
● If the ignition position does not change with a push
of the ignition button, and the instrument cluster
displays a message such as “Key Fob Not Detected”,
the key fob may have a low or depleted battery.
In this situation, a backup method can be used to
operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side of the
key fob (side opposite of the emergency key) against
the START/STOP ignition button and push to operate
the ignition switch.
● Replacement of the key fob battery is recommended.
Depleted Key Fob Battery Procedure
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
2
ON/RUN
● Driving position
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics page
360.
NOTE:
A key fob that has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key.
WARNING!
● When e
xiting the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the vehicle and lock y
our vehicle.
● Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
● Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
● Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in
the ON/RUN position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
● Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves.
Always remove k
ey fob from the vehicle and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
NOTE:
● The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ system if it is located next to
a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device;
these devices may block the key fob’s wireless signal
and prevent the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ system from
starting the vehicle.
● For more information on the engine starting
procedure, see
ð
page 1
15.
● When opening the driver's door and the ignition is in
the ON/RUN position (engine not running), a chime
will sound to remind you to place the ignition in the
OFF position. In addition to the chime, the message
“Ignition ON” will display in the cluster.
REMOTE START
This system uses the key fob to start
the engine conveniently from outside the
vehicle while still maintaining security. The
system has a range of approximately 328 ft
(100 m).
Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold
weather, and to reach a comfortable climate in all
ambient conditions before the driver enters the vehicle.
NOTE:
Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may
reduce this range
ð
page 360.
WARNING!
● Do no
t start or run an engine in a closed garage
or confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
injur
y or death when inhaled.
● Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of
the Remote Start system, windows, door locks or
other controls could cause serious injury or death.
HOW TO USE R
EMOTE START
Push and release the Remote Start button on the key
fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will
lock, the parking lights will flash, and the horn will chirp
twice (if programmed). Then, the engine will start, and
the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for
a 15 minute cycle. Pushing the Remote Start button a
third time shuts the engine off.
NOTE:
● With Remote Start, the engine will only run for 15
minutes.
● Remote Start can only be used twice.
● If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
● The parking lights will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
● Headlight animation (if equipped) will occur when
Remote Start is activated, if “Headlight Illumination
On Approach” is enabled within Uconnect Settings.
● For security, power window and power sunroof
operation (if equipped) are disabled when the
vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
● The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN position
before the Remote Start sequence can be repeated
for a third cycle.
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
● Gear selector in PARK
● Doors closed
22 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
● Hood closed
● Liftgate closed
● Hazard switch of
f
● Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
● Battery at an acceptable charge level
● System not disabled from previous Remote Start
event
● Vehicle Security Light flashing
● Ignition in OFF position
● Panic button is not pushed
● Fuel level meets minimum requirement
● Vehicle Security system is not signaling an intrusion
● Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is not illuminated
WARNING!
● Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage
or confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
mono
xide is poisonous and can cause serious
injury or death when inhaled.
● Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of
the Remote Start system, windows, door locks or
other controls could cause serious injury or death.
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE
To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote Start
system, either push and release the unlock button
on the key fob to unlock the doors, or unlock the
vehicle using Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry
via the door handles, and disarm the Vehicle Security
system (if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the
15 minute cycle, push and release the START/STOP
ignition button.
The Remote Start system will turn the engine off if the
Remote Start button on the key fob is pushed again,
or if the engine is allowed to run for the entire 15
minute cycle. Once the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position, the climate controls will resume previously set
operations (temperature, blower control, etc.).
NOTE:
● To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will
disable for two seconds after receiving a valid
Remote Start request.
● For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter ‘n
Go™ — Passive Entry feature, the message “Remote
Start Active — Push Start Button” will display in the
instrument cluster display until you push the START/
STOP ignition button.
REMOTE START FRONT DEFROST ACTIVATION
— IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active, and the outside ambient
temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the system
will automatically activate front defrost for 15 minutes
or less. The time is dependent on the ambient
temperature. Once the timer expires, the system will
automatically adjust the settings depending on ambient
conditions. See “Remote Start Comfort Systems — If
Equipped” in the next section for detailed operation.
REMOTE START COMFORT SYSTEMS — IF
E
QUIPPED
When Remote Start is activated, the front and rear
defrost will automatically turn on in cold weather. The
heated steering wheel and driver heated seat feature
will turn on if selected in the Comfort menu within
Uconnect Settings
ð
page 186. In warm weather,
the driver vented seat feature will automatically turn
on when Remote Start is activated, if programmed in
the Comfort menu. The vehicle will adjust the climate
control settings depending on the outside ambient
temperature.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped
The climate controls will automatically adjust to the
optimal temperature and mode settings depending on
the outside ambient temperature. This will occur until
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position where the
climate controls will resume their previous settings.
For more information on ATC and climate control
settings, see
ð
page 62.
NOTE:
These features will stay on through the duration of
Remote Start until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position. The climate control setting will change, and
exit automatic operation, if manually adjusted by the
driver while the vehicle is in Remote Start mode. This
includes the OFF button on the climate controls, which
will turn the system off.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
2
REMOTE START WINDSHIELD WIPER DE-ICER
ACTIVATION
— IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active and the outside ambient
temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C), the Windshield
Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting Remote Start will
resume its previous operation. If the Windshield Wiper
De-Icer was active, the timer and operation will
continue.
REMOTE START ABORT MESSAGE
One of the following messages will display in the
instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to remote
start or exits Remote Start prematurely:
● Remote Start Canceled — Door Open
● Remote Start Canceled — Hood Open
● Remote Start Canceled — Liftgate Open
● Remote Start Canceled — Fuel Low
● Remote Start Canceled — System Fault
● Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset
The instrument cluster display message stays active
until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle doors,
hood, liftgate, and the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition
for unauthorized operation. While the Vehicle Security
system is armed, interior switches for door locks
and liftgate release handle are disabled. If something
trigger
s the alarm, the Vehicle Security system will
pr
ovide the following audible and visible signals:
● The horn will pulse
● The turn signals will flash
● The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster
will flash
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security system:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the
OFF position.
● For vehicles equipped with Keyless Entry, make
sure the vehicle’s keyless ignition system is OFF.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
● Push the lock button on one of the front interior
power door lock switches with the driver and/or
passenger door open.
● Touch the lock button on the exterior Passive
Entry door handle with a valid key fob available
in the same exterior zone
ð
page 27.
● Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the Vehicle
Security Light (located in the lower right portion of the
instrument cluster display) will begin to flash every two
seconds until it is disarmed.
NOTE:
● If the syst
em is armed by pushing the lock button on
the interior door panel, the Vehicle Security Light will
flash rapidly for about 15 seconds once the door is
closed, then slow down to every two seconds.
● Pushing a lock button on the rear interior power
door lock switches will not arm the Vehicle Security
system.
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed using any
of the following methods:
● Push the unlock button on the key fob.
● Grab the Passive Entry door handle to unlock the
door
ð
page 27.
● Cycle the ignition out of the OFF position to disarm
the system.
NOTE:
● The driver's door key cylinder cannot arm or disarm
the Vehicle Security system. Use of the door key
cylinder when the alarm is armed will sound the
alarm when the door is opened.
● The Vehicle Security system remains armed when
the power liftgate is opened using the liftgate button
on the key fob. If someone enters the vehicle
through the opened liftgate, then opens any door
from the inside, the alarm will sound.
● If Passive Entry (if equipped) is used to unlock the
liftgate, the Vehicle Security system is disarmed and
the rest of the vehicle doors will remain locked
24 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
unless all doors are set to unlock on first press
within Uconnect Settings.
● When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the
interior power door lock switches will not unlock the
doors.
The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect
your vehicle. However, you can create conditions where
the system will give you a false alarm. If one of the
previously described arming sequences has occurred,
the Vehicle Security system will arm regardless of
whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain
in the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If
this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security system will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.
REARMING OF THE SYSTEM
If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken
to disarm it, the Vehicle Security system will turn the
horn off after a 29 second cycle (with five seconds
between cycles and up to eight cycles if the trigger
remains active) and then rearm itself.
SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL OVERRIDE
The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock, or an emergency
lock lever
ð
page 26.
TAMPER ALERT
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security syst
em
in your absence, the horn will sound three times and
the exterior lights will blink three times when you
disarm the Vehicle Security system.
DELUXE VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
The Deluxe Vehicle Security system monitors the doors,
hood latch, and liftgate for unauthorized entry and
the ignition switch for unauthorized operation. The
system also includes a dual function intrusion sensor
and vehicle tilt sensor. The intrusion sensor monitors
the vehicle interior for motion. The vehicle tilt sensor
monitors the vehicle for any tilting actions (tow away,
tire removal, ferry transport, etc.).
If a perimeter violation triggers the security system, the
horn will sound for 29 seconds and the exterior lights
will flash followed by approximately five seconds of no
activity. This will continue for eight cycles if no action is
taken to disarm the system.
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the security system:
1. If any doors, windows, or the sunroof (if equipped)
are open, close them.
2. Make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF.
3. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
● Push lock on the interior power door lock switch
with the driv
er and/or passenger door open.
● Touch the lock button on the exterior Passive
Entry door handle with a key fob available in the
same exterior zone
ð
page 27.
● Push the lock button on the key fob.
NOTE:
● When armed, the interior motion sensor detects
movement within the vehicle's interior, including
moving objects (i.e. people and pets) and air
currents through open windows or the sunroof. The
windows and sunroof should be closed, and moving
objects should not be left in the vehicle when the
intrusion detection is armed, otherwise false alarms
can occur.
● Once the security system is armed, it remains in
that state until you disarm it by following either of
the disarming procedures described. If a power loss
occurs after arming the system, you must disarm
the system after restoring power to prevent alarm
activation.
● The ultrasonic intrusion sensor (motion detector)
actively monitors your vehicle every time you arm
the Vehicle Security system. If you prefer, you can
turn off the ultrasonic intrusion sensor when arming
the Vehicle Security system. To do so, push the
lock button on the key fob three times within 15
seconds of arming the system (while the Vehicle
Security Light is flashing rapidly). The vehicle will
remain locked but will disable the alarm in the case
of repeated false alarms due to ambient conditions.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
2
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security syst
em can be disarmed using any
of the following methods:
● Push the unlock button on the key fob.
● Grab the Passive Entry door handle to unlock the
door
ð
page 27.
● Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
position by pushing the START/STOP ignition button
(requires at least one valid key fob in the vehicle).
NOTE:
● The driver's door key cylinder and the liftgate button
on the key fob cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle
Security system.
● The Vehicle Security system remains armed during
power liftgate entry. If a valid key fob or the Passive
Entry liftgate button is used to open the liftgate,
the motion sensing will be suppressed until after
the liftgate is closed. If someone enters the vehicle
through the opened liftgate, then opens any door,
the alarm will sound.
● When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the
interior power door lock switches will not unlock the
doors.
● The ultrasonic intrusion sensor (motion detector)
actively monitors your vehicle every time you arm
the Vehicle Security system. If you prefer, you can
turn off the ultrasonic intrusion sensor when arming
the Vehicle Security system. To do so, push the
lock button on the key fob three times within 15
seconds of arming the system (while the Vehicle
Security Light is flashing rapidly). The vehicle will
remain locked but will disable the alarm in the case
of repeat
ed false alarms due to ambient conditions.
The V
ehicle Security system is designed to protect
your vehicle; however, you can create conditions where
the system will give you a false alarm. If one of the
previously described arming sequences has occurred,
the Vehicle Security system will arm regardless of
whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain
in the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If
this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security system will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash and the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.
SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL OVERRIDE
The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock, or an emergency
lock lever
ð
page 26.
DOORS
MANUAL DOOR LOCKS
The front doors can be manually unlocked with a single
pull of the inside door handle. The driver’s door can
also be manually locked/unlocked by inserting the
emergency key into the lock cylinder on the outside
door handle.
Driver’s Door Cylinder Lock
The rear doors can be manually unlocked with a double
pull of the inside door handle.
All doors e
xcept the driver’s door can be manually
locked by inserting the emergency key into the
emergency lock lever and sliding the lever upward. The
emergency lock lever is located on the door latch face
of each door.
Emergency Lock Lever
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
● The emergency lock lever is only accessible when
the door is open.
● Manually locking the vehicle will not arm the Vehicle
Security system.
WARNING!
● For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors bef
ore you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
● When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
● Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children
to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for
a number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the gear selector.
● Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in
the ON/RUN position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
POWER DOOR LOCKS
The power door lock butt
ons are located on each front
door panel. Use these buttons to lock or unlock all
doors and liftgate.
When the doors are locked, an indicator light in the lock
button will illuminate.
Power Door Lock Switches
The driver’s door will unlock automatically if the ke
y
fob is detected inside the vehicle when the door lock
button on the front door panel is used to lock the door,
then the door is closed. The horn will also chirp to alert
the driver. This will occur for two attempts. On the third
attempt, the doors will lock even if the key fob is inside.
NOTE:
If the key fob is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop, or other electronic device, the wireless signal
may get blocked, and the driver’s door may not unlock
automatically.
If the door lock switch is pushed while the ignition is
in ON/RUN and the driver's door is open, the doors will
not lock.
Rear Passenger Power Door Locks
Power door lock buttons are located on each rear door
trim panel. Push the lock button to lock the rear door or
push the unlock button to unlock the rear door.
PO
WER SIDE STEPS — IF
EQUIPPED
The Power Side Steps will extend for easier entry and
exit of the vehicle.
When configured for “Auto” mode, the Power Side Steps
will deploy when any of the doors are opened, and they
will retract when the doors are closed. This mode can
be turned on or off in the Uconnect Settings
ð
page
186.
NOTE:
● When enabled within Uconnect Settings, the Power
Side Steps can also be manually extended or
retracted by pressing the Power Side Step button on
the Controls menu of the Vehicle screen.
● If the vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h), the
steps will retract.
● When Proximity Wake-Up (if equipped) is enabled
within the Uconnect settings, Power Side Steps will
deploy when approaching the vehicle with a valid key
fob and stay extended until the headlight delay cycle
times out or any door is opened and closed.
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ — PASSIVE ENTRY
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
feature of Keyless Enter ‘n Go™. This feature allows you
to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having
to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
If equipped, the rear doors will also have Passive Entry
capabilities.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
2
NOTE:
● Passive Entry may be programmed on/off through
Uconnect Settings
ð
page 186.
● The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle
Passive Entry system if it is located next to a
mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device;
these devices may block the key fob's wireless signal
and prevent the Passive Entry handle from locking/
unlocking the vehicle.
● Passive Entry Unlock initiates illuminated approach
(low beams, license plate lamp, parking lights, door
handle pocket lights [if equipped]) for whichever
duration is set between 0, 30, 60 or 90 seconds.
Passive Entry Unlock also initiates two flashes of the
turn signals.
● If wearing gloves, if it has been raining/snowing,
or if there is salt/dirt covering the Passive Entry
door handle, the unlock and lock sensitivity can be
affected, resulting in a slower response time.
● The doors may lock and unlock when water is
sprayed on the Passive Entry door handles, if the
key fob is located outside of the vehicle within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the handle.
● Passive Entry lock initiates one horn chirp and
one flash of turn signals. These settings can be
programmed on/off within Uconnect Settings
ð
page 186.
● If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no
door is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will
relock and will arm the Vehicle Security system (if
equipped).
To Unlock From The Driver Or Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of
the door handle, grab the handle to unlock the vehicle.
Grabbing the driver’s door handle will unlock the driver
door automatically. Grabbing the front passenger door
handle (or a rear handle when equipped with four-door
Passive Entry) will unlock all doors and the liftgate
automatically.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE:
● Either the driver’s door only or all doors will unlock
when you grab hold of the front driver’s door handle,
depending on the selected setting in the Uconnect
system
ð
page 186.
● All doors will unlock when the front passenger (or
a rear door when equipped with four-door Passive
Entry) door handle is grabbed regardless of the
driver’s door unlock preference setting.
Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key (FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive
Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch
is in the OFF position.
There are f
ive situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe
search in any Passive Entry vehicle:
● A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry key
fob while a door is open.
● A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
handle while a door is open.
● A lock request is made by the door panel switch
while the door is open.
● When the Vehicle Security system is in pre-arm
or armed status and the liftgate transitions from
opened to closed.
● When the liftgate transitions from open to closed
and Remote Start is active.
When any of these situations occur, after all open doors
are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it
detects a Passive Entry key fob inside the vehicle, the
vehicle will unlock and alert the customer.
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid
Passive Entry key fob is detected inside the vehicle.
The vehicle will not unlock the doors when any of the
following conditions are true:
● The doors are manually locked using the emergency
lock lever.
● Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
door panel switch and then the doors are closed.
28 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
● There is a valid Passive Entr
y key fob outside the
vehicle within 5 ft (1.5 m) of a Passive Entry door
handle.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs within
5 ft (1.5 m) of a Passive Entry door handle, touch the
lock icon on the door handle to lock all four doors and
liftgate.
Touch The Door Handle Lock Icon To Lock
NOTE:
Do NOT grab the door handle when touching the lock
icon. This could unlock the door(s).
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
NOTE:
● After t
ouching the door handle lock icon, you must
wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock
the doors using any Passive Entry door handle.
This is done to allow you to check if the vehicle
is locked by pulling the door handle, without the
vehicle unlocking.
● If Passive Entry is disabled using the Uconnect
Settings, the key fob protection described in
"Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key (FOBIK-
Safe)" remains active/functional.
● The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key
fob battery is depleted.
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate Passive Entry unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate release button. With a valid Passive
Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate, push
the electronic liftgate release handle for a power open
on vehicles equipped with Power Liftgate. Push the
electronic liftgate button and lift for Manual Liftgate
v
ehicles.
Liftgate Entry
1 — Passive Entry Lock Button
2 — Electronic Liftgate Release Handle
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entr
y key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of
the liftgate, push the Passive Entry lock button located
on the outside liftgate door handle.
NOTE:
The liftgate Passive Entry lock button will lock all doors
and the liftgate
ð
page 360.
AUTOMATIC UNLOCK DOORS ON EXIT
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks after the following sequence of
actions:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is
enabled within Uconnect Settings
ð
page 186.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
2
2. All doors are closed.
3. The gear selector was not in PARK, then is placed
in PARK.
4. Any door is opened.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS — IF EQUIPPED
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h).
The auto door lock feature is enabled or disabled by an
authorized dealer per written request of the customer.
Please see an authorized dealer for service.
CHILD-PROTECTION DOOR LOCK SYSTEM —
REAR DOORS
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat-
blade screwdriver (or emergency key) and rotate the
dial to the lock or unlock position. When the system on
a door is engaged, that door can only be opened by
using the outside door handle even if the inside door
lock is in the unlocked position.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
NOTE:
● When the Child-Prot
ection Door Lock system is
engaged, the door can be opened only by using the
outside door handle even though the inside door
lock is in the unlocked position.
● After disengaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
system, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the unlocked position.
● After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
system, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the locked position.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside with the Child-Pr
otection locks
engaged (locked).
NOTE:
Always use this device when carrying children. After
engaging the child lock on both rear doors, check for
effective engagement by trying to open a door with
the internal handle. Once the Child-Protection Door
Lock system is engaged, it is impossible to open the
doors from inside the vehicle. Before getting out of
the vehicle, be sure to check that there is no one left
inside.
STEERING WHEEL
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen
or shorten the steering column. The power tilt/
telescoping steering column control is located below
the multifunction lever on the steering column.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Control Location
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Use the four-way control to adjust the steering column.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Settings, use
the key fob or the memory switch on the driver's door
trim panel to return the tilt/telescopic steering column
to saved positions
ð
page 31.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving
with the steering column unlock
ed, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL
The steering wheel contains a heating
element that helps warm your hands in
cold weather. The heated steering wheel
has three temperature settings. Once the
heated steering wheel has been turned on, it will stay
on until the operator turns it off. The heated steering
wheel may not turn on when it is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is located
on the left side of the radio screen or within the
Uconnect system. You can gain access to the control
button on the top left side of the screen by tapping
the temperature controls, which will provide a quick
drop-down menu containing the controls, or through the
controls screen of the touchscreen. If your vehicle is not
equipped with the button on the side of the radio, you
can also access the control button through the climate
screen.
● Press the heated steering wheel button once t
o turn
the HI setting on.
● Press the heated steering wheel button a second
time to turn the MED setting on.
● Press the heated steering wheel button a third time
to turn the LO setting on.
● Press the heated steering wheel button a fourth time
to turn the heating elements off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated steering
wheel to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start system,
see
ð
page 23.
WARNING!
● Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic illness,
diabe
tes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol
use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions
must exercise care when using the steering
wheel heater. It may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long periods.
● Do not place anything on the steering wheel
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or
steering wheel covers of any type and material.
This may cause the steering wheel heater to
overheat.
DRIVER AND PASSENGER MEMORY
SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver, and if equipped, also the
front passenger to save up to two different memory
profiles for easy recall through a memory switch. Each
memory profile saves desired position settings for the
following features:
Driver’s Side
● Seat position
● Easy entry/exit seat (if equipped)
● Side mirrors
● Power tilt and telescopic steering column
● Power adjustable pedals (if equipped)
● A set of desired radio station presets
Passenger’s Side (If Equipped)
● Seat position
The memory settings switches are located on the front
door panels, next to the door handle, and consists of
two or three buttons, depending on trim level:
● The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall
either of two saved memory profiles
● The set (S) button (Wagoneer models only), which is
used to activate the memory save function
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
2
Wagoneer Memory Settings Buttons
Grand Wagoneer Memory Settings Buttons
NOTE:
● Your vehicle is eq
uipped with two key fobs, each can
be linked to either driver’s side memory position 1 or
2.
● Front passenger memory settings cannot be linked
to a key fob.
PR
OGRAMMING THE MEMORY FEA
TURE
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
NOTE:
Saving a new memory profile will erase the selected
profile from memory.
Wagoneer
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON/RUN position
(do not start the engine).
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired
preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror, power tilt
and telescopic steering column, and radio station
presets).
3. Push and release the set (S) button on the
memory switch.
4. Within five seconds, push and release either of the
memory buttons (1) or (2). The instrument cluster
display will indicate which memory position has
been set.
Grand Wagoneer
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON/RUN position
(do not start the engine).
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired
preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror, power tilt
and telescopic steering column, and radio station
presets).
3. Press memory button (1) or (2) for two or
more seconds. The instrument cluster display will
indicate which memory position has been set.
NOTE:
Memory profiles can be se
t without the vehicle in PARK,
but the vehicle must be below 5 mph (8 km/h) to recall
a memory profile.
LINKING AND UNLINKING THE KEY FOB TO
MEMORY
Your key fobs can be programmed to recall one of two
saved driver’s side memory profiles.
NOTE:
Before programming your key fobs you must select the
“Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob” feature through
the Uconnect Settings
ð
page 186.
To program your key fobs, perform the following:
Wagoneer
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF position.
2. Select a desired driver’s side memory profile, 1 or
2.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and
release the set (S) button on the memory switch.
4. Within five seconds, push and release button (1)
or (2) accordingly. “Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2)
will display in the instrument cluster.
5. Push and release the lock button on the key fob
within 10 seconds.
NOTE:
Your key fobs can be unlinked from your driver’s side
memory settings by pushing the set (S) button, and
within 10 seconds, pushing the unlock button on the
key fob.
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Grand Wagoneer
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF position.
2. Recall the desired memory profile (1 or 2).
3. Press the memory button (1) or (2) (according to
the previous selection) for two seconds or more,
and release.
4. Push and hold the lock button on the key fob
within 10 seconds.
NOTE:
Your key fobs can be unlinked from your driver’s side
memory settings by pushing the memory button (1) or
(2) for two seconds or more and releasing, and then
within 10 seconds, pushing and holding the unlock
button on the key fob.
MEMORY POSITION RECALL
NOTE:
Memory Recall is available when not in PARK, if the
vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
● To recall a memory settings using the memory
switches, push memory button (1) or (2) on the
memory switch.
● To recall the driver’s side memory settings using the
key fob, push the unlock button on the key fob linked
to memory position 1 or 2.
A recall can be canceled by pushing any of the memory
buttons during a recall, or by pushing any of the seat
adjustment switches. When a recall is canceled, the
seat and power tilt/telescopic steering column will stop
moving. A delay of one second will occur before another
recall can be selected.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint system of
the vehicle.
WARNING!
● It is danger
ous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely t
o be seriously injured
or killed.
● Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
● Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT REAR
SEATS
WARNING!
Do not place luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback
. This could impair visibility or become a
dangerous projectile in a sudden st
op or collision.
Second Row Bench Seat — If Equipped
SECOND ROW BENCH SEAT FORWARD/
REARWARD ADJUSTMENT
Lift up on the adjusting bar located at the front of the
seat near the floor and release it when the seat is at
the desired position. Then, using body pressure, move
forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the
seat adjusters have latched.
Rear Seat Adjustment Bar
SECOND ROW BENCH SEAT RECLINE
ADJUSTMENT
To recline, lean forward slightly and lift the lever located
on the outboard side of the seat. Then, push the
seat rearward to the desired position and release the
lever. To return the seatback to its normal position,
lean forward and lift the lever. To ensure the seatback
is latched, use body pressure to lean forward and
rearward.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
2
NOTE:
You may experience deformation in the seat cushion
from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded
for an extended period of time. This is normal and by
simply unfolding the seats to the open position, over
time the seat cushion will return to its normal shape.
Rear Seat Recline Lever
To recline the center seat, pull the recline strap located
on the seatback, and mo
ve forward or backward as
desired. Release the strap when the desired seat
position has been reached.
Center Seat Recline Strap
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
SECOND ROW BENCH FOLD FLAT SEAT
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can
be f
olded flat. This allows for extended cargo space and
still maintains some rear seating room.
NOTE:
Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary
to position the front seat to its mid-track position
especially if the seat is equipped with Rear Seat
Entertainment. Also, be sure that the front seats are
fully upright and positioned forward. This will allow the
rear seat to fold down easily.
To lower the seatback, pull upward on the recline lever
located on the outboard side of the seat, and let the
seatback fold forward automatically.
Second Row Bench Seat Folded Flat
To lower the center seatback
, pull the recline strap,
located on the left side of the seatback, and let the
seatback fold forward automatically.
Center Seat Recline Strap
To raise the seatback, fold the seatback up into its
original position and lock it int
o place.
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
SECOND ROW BENCH SEAT EASY ACCESS
FOR THIRD ROW
The second ro
w bench seats can slide forward to allow
passengers to easily access the third row seats.
Press the easy entry button located on the outboard
side of the seatback. Once pressed, the seat will pitch
forward, allowing the seat to slide forward.
Bench Seat Easy Entry Button
Emergency Straps
In the event that the vehicle loses power, the Easy Entry
butt
ons will not function. There are emergency straps
located on the back of the second row outboard seats
to allow the third row occupants to manually fold the
seats flat to exit the vehicle.
Emergency Straps
Pull the emergency straps to fold the second row seat
flat.
Second Row Captain’s Chairs — If
Equipped
SECOND ROW CAPTAIN’S CHAIRS FORWARD/
REARWARD ADJUSTMENT
Lift up on the adjusting bar located at the front of the
seat near the floor and release it when the seat is at
the desired position. Then, using body pressure, move
forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the
seat adjusters have latched.
Rear Seat Adjustment Bar
SECOND ROW CAPTAIN’S CHAIRS RECLINE
ADJUS
TMENT
To recline, lean forward slightly and lift the lever located
on the outboard side of the seat. Then, push the
seat rearward to the desired position and release the
lever. To return the seatback to its normal position,
lean forward and lift the lever. To ensure the seatback
is latched, use body pressure to lean forward and
rearward.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
2
T
o return the seat to a sitting position, push the
seatback rearward until the seat locks.
Rear Seat Recline Lever
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against y
our chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
SECOND ROW CAPTAIN’S CHAIRS FOLD FLAT
SEATS
The second row seatbacks can be folded flat t
o carry
cargo.
NOTE:
Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary
to position the front seat to its mid-track position
especially if the seat is equipped with Rear Seat
Entertainment. Also, be sure that the front seats are
fully upright and positioned forward. This will allow the
rear seat to fold down easily.
Pull upward on the recline lever located on the
outboard side of each second row seat, and let the
seatback f
old forward automatically.
Second Row Captain’s Chair Folded Flat
To Raise The Rear Seats
Fold the seatbacks upwar
d to their original position,
and lock them into place.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is no
t securely locked into
position the seat will not pr
ovide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
SECOND ROW CAPTAIN’S CHAIR EASY
ACCESS FOR THIRD ROW
The second r
ow captain’s chairs can slide forward to
allow passengers to easily access the third row seats.
Press the easy entry button located on the outboard
side of the seatback. Once pressed, the entire seat will
pitch forwar
d, allowing the seat to slide forward.
Captain’s Chair Easy Entry Button
To return the seat to a sitting position, push the
seatback rearw
ard until the seat locks.
Emergency Straps
In the event that the vehicle loses power, the Easy Entry
buttons will not function. There are emergency straps
located on the back of the second row outboard seats
to allow the third row occupants to manually fold the
seats flat to exit the vehicle.
36 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Emergency Straps
Pull the emergency straps to fold the second ro
w seat
flat.
Manual Folding Third Row — If Equipped
Both third row seats can be folded flat to increase the
cargo area. To lower either seat, pull on the release
straps located on both sides of the rear cargo area,
near the bottom of the seat.
NOTE:
The second row seats must be in their full upright
position or folded flat when folding the third row seats.
Release Straps
Third Row Folded
To raise the seat, pull the seatback up and push back
to lock it into place. Y
ou can also use the return straps
in the rear cargo area, on the back of the seat.
Return Straps
To recline the seat, pull the recline straps, located on
the sides of the seat.
Recline Straps
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is no
t securely lock
ed int
o
(Continued)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
2
WARNING!
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
POWER ADJUSTMENT
FRONT SEATS — IF
EQUIPPED
Wagoneer models will be equipped with 8-way power
driver and front passenger seats. The power seat
switches are located on the outboard side of the seat.
There are two switches that control the movement of
the seat cushion and the seatback.
Wagoneer Power Seat Switches
1 — Seat Switch
2 — Seatback Switch
Grand Wagoneer models will be equipped with 20-way
power driver and fr
ont passenger seats. The power seat
switches are located on the driver and front passenger
door panels near the door handles. These switches
control the movement of the seat cushion and the
seatback.
Grand Wagoneer Power Seat Switches
1 — Front Headrest Adjustment Switch
2 — Power Massage Switch
3 — Decrease Back/Thigh Bolster & Lumbar Switch
4 — Increase Back/Thigh Bolster & Lumbar Switch
5 — Upper Seatback Switch
6 — Seatback Recline Switch
7 — Seat Switch (Multiple Functions)
8 — Cushion Extender Switch
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both for
ward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down.
Pull upward or push downward on the rear of seat
switch, the seat will move in the direction of the switch.
Release the switch when the desired position has been
reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in tw
o
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front
of the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push the seatback recline switch forward or
rearward, the seat will move in the direction of the
switch. Release the switch when the desired position is
reached.
For Grand Wagoneer models, the angle of the upper
seatback can also be adjusted forward or rearward.
Push the upper seatback switch forward or rearward,
and the seat will move in the direction of the switch.
Release the switch when the desired position is
reached.
WARNING!
● A
djusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injur
y or death.
● Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
(Continued)
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
● Do no
t ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injur
y or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to mov
e as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat's
path.
Power Seat Bolster Adjustment — If
Equipped
In Grand Wagoneer models, the fr
ont driver and
passenger seatback and seat cushion bolsters can be
extended outward, or retracted inward by using the
(+) and (–) adjustment switches on the door panel.
The bolsters can also be adjusted directly in the Front
Comfort And Convenience Display or the Uconnect
display.
Push the (+) switch to extend the bolsters, or push the
(–) switch to retract the bolsters.
Seat Bolster Adjustment Switches
When either the (+) or the (–) switch is pushed, the
Front Comfor
t And Convenience Display
ð
page 63
will change to the Seat menu. The last selected seat
item of lumbar in/out, lumbar up/down, back bolster,
or thigh bolster will be retained. Select the desired
adjustment type, and then press the (+) or (–) switch
to adjust.
NOTE:
If the Front Comfort And Convenience Display is in the
stowed position, the Seat menu will appear in the main
Uconnect display.
Cushion Extender — If Equipped
In Grand Wagoneer models, the cushion can be
extended forward a couple inches (centimeters) to
increase thigh support. Push the cushion extender
switch forward or rearward to extend or retract the
cushion. Release the switch when the desired position
has been reached.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
The fr
ont driver and passenger seats may be eq
uipped
with power lumbar adjustment.
The Wagoneer power lumbar switch is located on the
outboard side of the power seat. Push the switch
forward to increase the lumbar support. Push the
switch rearward to decrease the lumbar support.
Pushing upward or downward on the switch will raise
and lower the position of the support.
Wagoneer Power Lumbar Adjustment Switch
The Grand Wagoneer power lumbar adjustment
switches are locat
ed on the door trim. The (+) and (–)
switches can be used to adjust lumbar support in/out
and up/down. The power lumbar can also be adjusted
directly in the Front Comfort And Convenience Display
or the Uconnect display.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
2
Grand Wagoneer Power
Lumbar Adjustment Switches
When either the (+) or the (–) switch is pushed, the
Fr
ont Comfort And Convenience Display
ð
page 63
will change to the Seat menu. The last selected seat
item of lumbar in/out, lumbar up/down, back bolster,
or thigh bolster will be retained. Select the desired
adjustment type, and then press the (+) or (–) switch
to adjust.
NOTE:
If the Front Comfort And Convenience Display is in the
stowed position, the Seat menu will display on the main
Uconnect screen.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning
to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting
the vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where
you have the driver seat positioned when you place the
vehicle’s ignition in the OFF position.
● When you place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF
position, the driver seat will mov
e about 2.4 inches
(6 cm) rearward if the driver seat position is greater
than or equal to 2.7 inches (7 cm) forward of the
rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set
position when you place the vehicle’s ignition in the
ON/RUN position.
● The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when
the driver seat position is less than 0.9 of an inch
(2.3 cm) forward of the rear stop. At this position,
there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat
for Easy Exit or Easy Entry.
When enabled in Uconnect Settings, Easy Entry and
Easy Exit positions are stored in each memory setting
profile
ð
page 31.
NOTE:
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when
the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy
Entry/Exit feature is enabled or disabled through the
programmable features in the Uconnect system
ð
page 186.
POWER ADJUSTMENT REAR SEATS — IF
EQUIPPED
WARNING!
● A
djusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injur
y or death.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● Seats should be adjust
ed before fast
ening the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
● Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
● Do not place the seat belt webbing behind the
third row stow clip when using the seat belt to
restrain an occupant. The seat belt will not be
positioned properly on the occupant and they
could be more seriously injured in an accident as
a result.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
im
pede its ability to mov
e as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat's
path.
Third Row Power Recline — If Equipped
If equipped, the power recline switch f
or the third row
seats is located on the trim panel next to the seat. This
switch adjusts the seatback angle forward/rearward for
occupant comfort.
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Third Row Power Recline Switch
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forw
ard
or rearward. Push and hold the forward or rearward
button. The seat will move in the direction of the button
push. Release the button when the desired position is
released.
Rear Seat Power Folding Seatbacks — If
Equipped
A one-touch power folding seat switch is located in the
right rear trim panel inside the cargo area, as part of a
switch bank.
The switch bank allows multiple power folding positions
for the second and third row seats.
The second row seats can be folded using these
switches, while the third row can be folded or unfolded.
NOTE:
The third row seat belts may interfere with the power
folding of the seat. Place the seat belt webbing behind
the stow clip before stowing or opening the seat. When
the seat is in the desired position, remove the webbing
from the stow clip so that it is ready for use. Never leave
the seat belt in the st
ow clip when it is used to restrain
an occupant.
NO
TE:
● The head restraints will lower automatically as
necessary when the power seat begins to move
ð
page 44.
● The head restraint can also be lowered manually
using the pull strap located at the back of the seat.
Rear Panel Power Switch Bank
1 — Second Row Left Side Fold
2 — Second Row Right Side Fold
3 — Third Row Left Side Fold/Unfold
4 — Third Row Right Side Fold/Unfold
There are also power folding switches for the third row
seats located on the C-pillar (just behind the rear doors
on the trim panels).
C-Pillar Power Folding Switches (Left Side Shown)
1 — Third Row Left Side Fold/Unfold
2 — Third Row Right Side Fold/Unfold
POWER SEAT MASSAGE — IF EQUIPPED
In Grand Wagoneer models, the driver’s and fr
ont
passenger’s seats may be equipped with power
massage.
The seat massage feature can be turned on/off through
the massage button located on the door panel near
the handle, or through the Controls menu on the radio
screen.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
2
Door Panel Massage Button
Once activated by either me
thod, the massage
controls screen will display on the Front Comfort And
Convenience Display
ð
page 63, or on the standard
Uconnect display if the Front Comfort And Convenience
Display is stowed. “Massage Type” and “Intensity Level”
can be selected for the activated seat.
There are four intensity levels and five massage types
that can be selected.
Intensity Levels:
● High
● Med
● Low
● Off
Massage Types:
● Waterfall
● Lower Back
● Extend
● Lo
w Extend
● Rock Climb
The massage type and intensity le
vel status will be
synchronized between the main Uconnect display and
the Front Comfort And Convenience Display.
The selected settings will save in the system’s memory
when turned off, and will resume the next time the
system is turned on.
NOTE:
● For vehicles equipped with a selectable back/
cushion feature for massage seats, the massage
feature can be deselected for either the seatback
or seat cushion. If both options are deselected,
massage will turn off.
● The engine must be running for the power seatback
massage to operate.
● The massage feature will turn off after 20 minutes of
use. However, if the massage type or intensity level
is changed, the timer then resets.
HEATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
● P
ersons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic illness,
diabe
tes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol
use, exhaustion or other physical condition must
exercise care when using the seat heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially
if used for long periods of time.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● Do no
t place anything on the seat or seatback
that insulates against heat, such as a blanke
t
or cushion. This may cause the seat heater
to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been
overheated could cause serious burns due to the
increased surface temperature of the seat.
Front Heated Seats
The front heated seats control butt
ons are
located on the sides of the radio or within
the Uconnect system. You can access the
controls through the Climate screen.
● Press the heated seat button once to turn the HI
setting on.
● Press the heated seat button a second time to turn
the MED setting on.
● Press the heated seat button a third time to turn the
LO setting on.
● Press the heated seat button a fourth time to turn
the heating elements off.
The heating elements can be turned on in the seatback
only, seat cushion only, or both. Press the seat image
on the touchscreen or push the seat zone button on
the side of the radio to cycle through these seat zones.
An LED will illuminate next to the selected zone(s). If
equipped with touchscreen buttons, the selected zones
will be highlighted on the seat image.
NOTE:
● Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
● The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operat
e.
● The level of heat selected will stay on until the
operator changes it.
For information on use with the Remote Start system,
see
ð
page 23.
Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped
The two second row outboard seats may
be equipped with heated seats. There
are two heated seat switches that allow
the rear passengers to operate the seats
independently. The heated seat switches for each
heater are located on the rear of the center console.
If equipped with a Rear Comfort And Convenience
Display, heated seat settings can be selected within the
display
ð
page 67.
You can choose from HI, MED, LO, or OFF heat settings.
Indicator lights in each switch illuminate indicating the
level of heat in use.
● Push the heated seat switch once to turn the HI
setting on.
● Push the heated seat switch a second time to turn
the MED setting on.
● Push the heated seat switch a third time to turn the
LO setting on.
● Push the heated seat switch a fourth time to turn the
heating elements off.
The level of heat selected will stay on until the operator
changes it.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
VENTILATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
Located in the seat cushion and seatback are fans
that draw the air from the passenger compartment and
move air through fine perforations in the seat cover
to help keep the occupant cooler in higher ambient
temperatures.
Front Ventilated Seats
The ventilated seats control buttons are
located on the sides of the radio or within
the Uconnect system. The fans operate at
three speeds: HI, MED and LO.
● Press the ventilated seat button once to choose HI.
● Press the ventilated seat button a second time to
choose MED.
● Press the ventilated seat button a third time to
choose LO.
● Press the ventilated seat button a fourth time to turn
the ventilation off.
The fans can be turned on in the seatback only, seat
cushion only, or both. Press the seat image on the
touchscreen or push the seat zone button on the side
of the radio to cycle through these seat zones. An LED
will illuminate next to the selected zone(s). If equipped
with touchscreen buttons, the selected zones will be
highlighted on the seat image.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to
operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start system,
see
ð
page 23.
Rear Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
The two second row outboard seats may
be equipped with ventilated seats. The
rear ventilated seat control switches are
located on the rear of the center console
and allow the rear passengers to operate the seats
independently.
If equipped with a Rear Comfort And Convenience
Display, ventilated seat settings can be selected within
the display
ð
page 67.
You can choose from HI, MED, LO, or OFF fan speed.
Indicator lights in each switch illuminate indicating the
level of fan speed in use.
● Push the ventilated seat switch once to choose HI.
● Push the ventilated seat switch a second time to
choose MED.
● Push the ventilated seat switch a third time to
choose LO.
● Push the ventilated seat switch a fourth time to turn
the ventilation off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to
operate.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
2
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
b
y restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the
top of the head restraint is located above the top of
your ear.
WARNING!
● All occupants, including the driv
er, should not
operat
e a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions
in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a crash.
● Head restraints should never be adjusted while
the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the
head restraints improperly adjusted or removed
could cause serious injury or death in the event of
a collision.
Front Head Restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with fr
ont four-way driver and
passenger head restraints.
The Wagoneer is equipped with manual four-way head
restraints, and the Grand Wagoneer is equipped with
power four-way head restraints with adjustable wings.
If your vehicle is equipped with manual front head
restraints, to raise the head restraint, push the
adjustment button, located on the left side of the head
restraint, and pull upward on the head restraint. To
lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button,
and push downward on the head restraint.
Wagoneer Head Restraint Adjustment Button
To adjust the head restraint forw
ard, press the
adjustment button on the left side of the head restraint,
and pull the top of the head restraint toward the front of
the vehicle as desired and release. To adjust the head
restraint rearward, press the adjustment button, and
push the top of the head restraint toward the rear of
the vehicle as desired and release.
Upright Position (Manual Head Restraint)
Upward Adjustment (Manual Head Restraint)
Grand Wagoneer Head Restraint Adjustment Switch
If your vehicle is equipped with po
wer front head
restraints, push upward or push downward on the
head restraint adjustment switch, located on the door
trim panel, to raise or lower the head restraint. The
head restraint will move in the direction of the switch.
Release the switch when the desired position has been
reached.
44 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The head restraint can also be adjusted both forward
and rearward. Push the head restraint switch forward or
rearward. The head restraint will move in the direction
of the switch. Release the switch when the desired
position has been reached.
Upright Position (Power Head Restraint)
Forward Adjustment (Power Head Restraint)
Grand Wagoneer front power head restraints are
also equipped with adjustable wings, located on the
outer left-hand and right-hand front face of the head
restraint.
Adjustable Wing (Left-Hand Side Shown)
To adjust the wings for additional comfort and support,
pull forward on the wings. To return the wings, push the
wings rearward to the flat position.
Wing Adjustment
Wing Extended (Left-Hand Side Shown)
NOTE:
The head restraints should only be removed by
q
ualified technicians, for service purposes only. If
either of the head restraints require removal, see an
authorized dealer.
WARNING!
● All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions
in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a crash.
● Head restraints should never be adjusted while
the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the
head restraints improperly adjusted or removed
could cause serious injury or death in the event of
a collision.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
2
Head Restraints — Second Row Captain’s
Chairs
If the second row is equipped with captain’s chair
s,
the head restraints are not adjustable or removable.
They automatically fold forward when the seatback is
folded, and do not return to their normal position when
the seatback is raised. After returning the seatback to
its upright position after a folding operation, raise the
head restraint until it locks in place.
The driver can also fold the second row outboard head
restraints through the radio, for improved visibility when
the vehicle is in REVERSE and there are no occupants
in the seats.
Press the Headrest Fold button within the
Controls menu of the Uconnect system to
power fold the second row outboard head
restraints.
NOTE:
● The head restraints must be raised manually when
occupying the second row.
● Do not fold if there are passengers seated in the
second row seats.
WARNING!
● All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a v
ehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions
in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a crash.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● Head restraints should ne
ver be adjusted while
the vehicle is in mo
tion. Driving a vehicle with the
head restraints improperly adjusted or removed
could cause serious injury or death in the event of
a collision.
Head Restraints — Second Row Bench
If the second row is equipped with a bench seat,
the head restraints on the outboard seats are no
t
adjustable or removable. They automatically fold
forward when the seatback is folded, and do not return
to their normal position when the seatback is raised.
After returning the seatback to its upright position after
a folding operation, raise the head restraint until it
locks in place.
The driver can also fold the second row outboard head
restraints through the radio, for improved visibility when
the vehicle is in REVERSE, and there are no occupants
in the seats.
Press the Headrest Fold button within the
Controls menu of the Uconnect system to
power fold the second row outboard head
restraints.
NOTE:
● The head restraints must be raised manually when
occupying the second row.
● Do not fold if there are passengers seated in the
second row seats.
The center head restraint has one adjustment position,
and can be adjusted up, when the seat is occupied, or
down for storage. To adjust this head restraint, push
the adjustment button, located on the base of the head
restraint, while pulling upward or pushing downward
until it locks into place.
NOTE:
The center head restraint is not removable.
Center Seat Head Restraint Adjustment Button
NOTE:
For information on child restraint te
thering, see
ð
page 243.
WARNING!
● All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a v
ehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions
in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a crash.
● Head restraints should never be adjusted while
the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the
(Continued)
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
head restraints improperly adjusted or removed
could cause serious injury or death in the event of
a collision.
Third Row Head Restraints
The head restraint in the center position can be raised
and lowered for t
ether routing or height adjustment
ð
page 243.
Center Head Restraint Adjustment Button
NOTE:
The center head restraint should only be removed by
qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If the
head restraint requires removal, see an authorized
dealer.
The third row outboard head restraints are not
adjustable or removable, but can be folded for
improved visibility when the vehicle is in REVERSE, and
there are no occupants in the seats.
Press the Headrest Fold button within the
Contr
ols menu of the Uconnect system to
power fold the third row head restraints.
The head restraints will also automatically
fold when the seatbacks are folded forward using the
release handles on the backs of the seats from the
cargo area.
NOTE:
● The head restraints must be raised manually when
occupying the third row.
● Do not fold if there are passengers seated in the
third row seats.
WARNING!
● All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions
in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a crash.
● Head restraints should never be adjusted while
the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the
head restraints improperly adjusted or removed
could cause serious injury or death in the event of
a collision.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS — IF EQUIPPED
INTRODUCING VOICE RECOGNITION
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these
helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands
and tips you need to know to control your vehicle’s
Voice Recognition (VR) system.
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
The following basic voice commands can be given at
any point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button or say the vehicle’s Wake Up
word “Hey Uconnect”. The factory default Wake Up word
is set to “Hey Uconnect” and can be reprogrammed
through the Uconnect Settings. After the beep, say:
● “Cancel” to stop a current voice session.
● “Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands.
● “Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again.
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your Voice
Recognition system’s status.
GET STARTED
The VR button is used to activate/deactivate
your Voice Recognition system. Y
ou can also use the
system’s Wake Up word to activate voice recognition.
The Wake Up word can be set through the Uconnect
Settings
ð
page 186.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
2
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
● Reduce background noise. Wind noise and
passenger conversations are examples of noise that
may impact recognition.
● Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead.
● Each time you give a Voice Command, first push the
VR button
or say the Wake Up word, wait until
after the beep, then say y
our Voice Command.
● You can interrupt the help message or system
prompts by pushing the VR button and saying a Voice
Command from the current category.
● You can also interrupt the help message or system
prompts by speaking. This feature is called “barge-
in” and can be set through the Uconnect Settings
ð
page 186.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is not equipped with Voice Recognition,
you may still have the Phone and VR buttons. These
buttons will work with Android Auto™ and Apple
CarPlay®.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — For Vehicles Equipped With Navigation: Push
The V
oice Recognition Button T
o Begin Radio, Media,
Navigation, Climate, Start Or Answer A Phone Call,
And Send Or Receive A Text
1 — For Vehicles Not Equipped With Navigation: Push
The Phone Button To Answer An Incoming Phone Call
2 — Push The Hang Up Button To End A Call Currently
In Progress
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
© 2024 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. SiriusXM®
and all related marks and logos are trademarks of
SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
ð
page 360.
For Uconnect system support, call 1-877-855-8400 (24
hours a day 7 days a week) or visit DriveUconnect.com
(US) or DriveUconnect.ca (Canada).
DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS
The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a
greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and
seat position. This feature allows the brake and
accelerator pedals to move toward or away from the driver
to provide improved position with the steering wheel.
The adjustable pedal switch is located on the instrument
panel, next to the headlight switch.
Adjustable Pedals Switch
● The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition in the
OFF position.
● The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle
is in REVERSE or when the Cruise Control system
or Adaptive Cruise Control system is on. If there is
an attempt to adjust the pedals when the system
is locked out, one of the following messages will
appear:
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
○ Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control
Engaged
○ Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse
NOTE:
● Always adjust the pedals to a position that allows full
movement of the pedal.
● Further small adjustments may be necessary to find
the best possible seat/pedal position.
● For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Settings
ð
page 31, you can use your key fob or the
memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel to
return the adjustable pedals to saved positions.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
or impede its ability to move, as it may cause damage
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become
limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in
the adjustable pedal's path.
MIRRORS
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and
right. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the
view through the rear window.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
Digital Rearview Mirror — If Equipped
The Digital Rearview Mirror provides a high definition,
wide and unobstructed view of the road behind while
driving.
Position the mirror in the regular Automatic Dimming
Mirror mode, then activate the Digital Rearview Mirror
mode.
To activate the Digital Rearview Mirror, pull the on/off
control lever on the bottom of the mirror rearward
toward the driver.
Digital Rearview Mirror
1 — On/Off Control/Toggle
2 — Menu Button
3 — Left Scroll Button
4 — Right Scroll Button
Push the menu button next to the on/off control/toggle
to access the following mirror options:
● Brightness
● Tilt
Use the lef
t and right buttons to scroll through menu
options.
When not in use, push the on/off forward toward the
windshield to return the mirror to the regular Automatic
Dimming Mirror.
NOTE:
● The Digital Rearview Mirror is not as effective
during nighttime driving in low light applications
due to low ambient light levels. In the event that
it provides the user with less than expected vision,
the mirror can be reverted to a normal reflective
Automatic Dimming Mirror by pushing the control/
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
2
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled when
the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve the driver’s view.
You can turn the feature on or off through the Uconnect
system page 186.
toggle forward in the vehicle and putting the mirror
into Automatic Dimming Mirror mode.
● When the rear window washer is activated by
pushing the windshield wiper/washer lever forward,
the rear Back Up and Digital Rearview Mirror (if
equipped) cameras are also washed. For more
information, see
ð
page 62.
ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRRORS
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of
the visors.
Lift the cover to reveal the mirror. The light will turn on
automatically.
Lift Cover On Vanity Mirror
Sun Visor Slide-On-R
od F
eature — If
Equipped
The sun visor Slide-On-R
od feature allows for additional
flexibility in positioning the sun visor to block out the
sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2.
U
nclip the visor from the cent
er clip.
3.
Pivot the sun visor toward the side window.
4. Extend the sun visor blade for additional sun
blockage.
NOTE:
The sun visor blade can also be extended while the
sun visor is against the windshield for additional sun
blockage through the front of the vehicle.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside
mirror(s) to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a
slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex
mirror will look smaller and farther away than they
really are. Relying too much on side convex mirrors
could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other
object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or
distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex mirror.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
three detent positions:
● Full forward position
● Full rearward position
● Normal position
Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And
Approach Lighting — If Equipped
Driver and passenger outside mirrors with turn signal
and approach lighting contain four LEDs, which are
located in the upper outer corner of each mirror.
Three of the LEDs are turn signal indicators, which flash
with the corresponding turn signal lights in the front
and rear of the vehicle. Turning on the Hazard Warning
flashers will also activate these LEDs.
The fourth LED supplies illuminated entry lighting,
which turns on in both mirrors when you use the
key fob or open any door. This LED shines outward
to illuminate the front and rear door handles. It also
shines downward to illuminate the area in front of the
doors.
The illuminated entry lighting fades to off after about
30 seconds or it will fade to off immediately once the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
The approach lighting will not function when the gear
selector is moved out of the PARK position.
OUTSIDE AUTOMATIC DIMMING MIRROR — IF
EQUIPPED
The exterior driver side mirror will automatically adjust
for glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is
controlled by the inside automatic dimming mirror. The
mirror will automatically adjust for headlight glare when
the inside mirror adjusts.
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CONVERSATION MIRROR
Located in the over
head console there is a conversation
mirror to view all of the passengers in the vehicle. Push
the panel to release the drop down mirror, raise it back
up to 3/4 of the way and let go; a latch will hold the
mirror in place. Raise the mirror all the way and push to
latch it back in the stowed position.
NOTE:
From the conversation mirror position, do not pull the
door fully open because it will damage the door. The
door must be put back in the closed position before
fully opening it.
Conversation Mirror
POWER MIRRORS
The power mirror control switch is located on the
driver's side door trim panel.
To adjust a mirror, rotate the control switch to the
desired mirror: (L) or (R). Then push the switch in the
direction that you want the mirror to move.
Power Mirror Switch
1 — Neutral Position
2 — Left Mirror
3 — Control Switch
4 — Right Mirror
5 — Power Folding Position (If Equipped)
NOTE:
Once adjustment is complete, ro
tate the knob to the
neutral position to prevent accidental movements.
Power Folding — If Equipped
To fold the door mirrors in using the Power Folding
Mirror function, rotate the control switch to the power
folding position. Rotating the control to the left, right,
or neutral position will return the mirrors to the driving
position.
If the power mirror control switch is moved again during
door mirror folding (from closed to open position and
vice v
ersa), the movement direction is reversed.
NOTE:
The Power Folding Mirror function is only available
when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if the
following occurs:
● The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding.
● The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/
unfolded (by hand or by pushing the power folding
mirror switch).
● The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.
● The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving
speeds.
To reset the power folding mirrors: Fold and unfold
them by turning the switch (this may require multiple
switch activations to synchronize the driver and
passenger mirror). This resets them to their normal
position.
Power mirror position can be saved as part of the Driver
Memory Settings (if equipped)
ð
page 31.
AUTOMATIC POWER FOLDING MIRRORS — IF
EQUIPPED
When enabled within Uconnect Settings
ð
page 186,
the exterior mirrors will automatically fold when the
vehicle’s ignition is placed in the OFF position, and after
the doors are locked and closed.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
2
The exterior mirrors will auto-fold in the following
situations after the ignition is placed in the OFF
position:
● Pushing the lock button on the door panel before the
door is opened.
NOTE:
If the doors are already locked, push the lock button
again.
● Opening the door, then pushing the lock button on
the door panel, followed by closing the door.
● After exiting the vehicle, close the doors then push
the lock button on the key fob.
● After exiting the vehicle, close the doors then touch
the lock icon on the Passive Entry door handle.
Automatic Unfolding
If the exterior mirrors were folded automatically, they
will unfold based on the selection with the Uconnect
system:
● When the vehicle is unlocked using the key fob
● When the vehicle is unlocked using a Passive Entry
door handle
● When Proximity Wake-Up is activated
ð
page 58
● When the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position
NOTE:
If the mirrors were folded manually by using the power
folding mirror switch on the driver’s door panel, they will
not automatically unfold.
HEA
TED MIRRORS
These mirrors are heat
ed to melt frost or
ice. This feature will be activated whenever
you turn on the rear window defroster (if
equipped)
ð
page 62.
TILT SIDE MIRRORS IN REVERSE
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse provides automatic outside
mirror positioning which will aid the driver’s view of the
ground rearward of the front doors. Outside mirrors will
move slightly downward from the present position when
the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. Outside mirrors will
then return to the original position when the vehicle is
shifted out of REVERSE position. Each stored memory
setting will have an associated Tilt Side Mirrors In
Reverse position.
NOTE:
The Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse feature can be turned
on and off using the Uconnect system
ð
page 186.
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®)
HomeLink® Buttons And Indicator Light
● HomeLink® replaces up to three
hand-held transmitters that operate
de
vices such as garage door
openers, motorized gates, lighting,
or home security systems. The
HomeLink® unit is powered by your
vehicle’s 12 Volt battery.
● The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the
overhead console or sun visor designate the three
different HomeLink® channels.
● To operate HomeLink®, push and release any of the
programmed HomeLink® buttons. These buttons will
activate the devices they are programmed to with
each press of the corresponding HomeLink® button.
● The HomeLink® indicator light is located above the
center button.
Scan me
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security
system is active
ð
page 360.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN PROGRAMMING
HOMELINK®
For efficient programming and accurate transmission
of the Radio Frequency (RF) signal, it is recommended
that a new battery be placed in the hand-held
transmitter of the device that is being programmed
to the HomeLink® system. Make sure your hand-held
transmitter is programmed to activate the device you
are trying to program your HomeLink® button to.
Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
It is recommended that you erase all the channels of
your HomeLink® before you use it for the first time.
ERASING ALL THE HOMELINK® CHANNELS
To erase the channels, follow this procedure:
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink®
buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or until
the HomeLink® indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
IDENTIFYING WHETHER YOU HAVE A ROLLING
C
ODE OR NON-ROLLING CODE DEVICE
Before programming a device to one of your
HomeLink® buttons, you must determine whether the
device has a rolling code or non-rolling code.
Rolling Code Devices
To determine if your device has a rolling code, a good
indicator is its manufacturing date. Typically, devices
manufactured after 1995 have rolling codes. A device
with a rolling code will also have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
button located where the antenna is attached to the
device. The button may not be immediately visible when
looking at the device. The name and color of the button
may vary slightly by manufacturer.
NOTE:
The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the button you
normally use to operate the device.
Non-rolling Code Devices
Most devices manufactured before 1995 will not have a
rolling code. These devices will also not have a “LEARN”
or “TRAIN” button.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A GARAGE
DOOR OPENER
To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to activate
your garage door opener motor, proceed as follows:
NOTE:
All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using this
procedure. You do not need to erase all channels when
programming additional buttons.
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the garage door opener transmitter 1 to 3
inches (3 to 8 cm) a
way from the HomeLink®
button you wish to program, while keeping the
HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you want
to program while you push and hold the garage
door opener transmitter button you are trying to
replicate.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe
the HomeLink® indicator light. The HomeLink®
indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly.
Once this happens, release both buttons.
NOTE:
Make sure the garage door opener motor is plugged in
before moving on to the rolling code/non-rolling code
final steps.
Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling code
final step 2, after completing rolling code final step 1.
1. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire
is attached to the garage door opener motor.
Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
button.
2. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink® button three times (holding the button
for two seconds each time). If the garage door
opener motor operates, programming is complete.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
2
3. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to
confirm that the garage door opener motor
operates. If the garage door opener motor does
not operate, repeat the final steps for the rolling
code procedure.
Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
1. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink®
button and observe the HomeLink® indicator
light. If the HomeLink® indicator light stays on
constantly, programming is complete.
2. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to
confirm that the garage door opener motor
operates. If the garage door opener motor does
not operate, repeat the steps from the beginning.
WARNING!
● Y
our motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the univer
sal
transmitter. Do not program the transmitter if
people or pets are in the path of the door or gate.
● Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage or
confined area while programming the transmitter.
Exhaust gas from your vehicle contains carbon
monoxide which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
monoxide is poisonous when inhaled and can
cause you and others to be severely injured or
killed.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
M
ISCELLANEOUS DEVICE
The procedure on how to program HomeLink® to a
miscellaneous device follows the same procedure as
programming to a garage door opener
ð
page 53.
Be sure to determine if the device has a rolling code,
or non-rolling code before beginning the programming
process.
NOTE:
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require
transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several
seconds of transmission, which may not be long
enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S.
gate operators are designed to time-out in the same
manner. The procedure may need to be performed
multiple times to successfully pair the device to your
HomeLink® buttons.
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE HOMELINK®
BUTTON
To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that has been
previously trained, without erasing all the channels,
proceed as follows. Be sure to determine whether the
new device you want to program the HomeLink® button
to has a rolling code, or non-rolling code.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position, without
starting the engine.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the HomeLink® indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds. Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Step
2 in “Programming HomeLink® T
o A Garage Door
Opener” and follow all remaining steps.
CANADIAN/GATE OPERATOR PROGRAMMING
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission:
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require
transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several
seconds of transmission, which may not be long
enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S.
gate operators are designed to time-out in the same
manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™,
place the ignition in the RUN position. Make sure
while programming HomeLink® with the engine on
that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that
the garage door remains open at all times.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to
8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish
to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink® button
while you push and release (cycle) your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink®
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
has successfully accepted the frequency signal.
The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly
when fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change
flash rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It
may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases.
The garage door may open and close while you are
programming.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink®
button and observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
● If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and the garage door/
device should activate when the HomeLink®
button is pushed.
● To program the two remaining HomeLink®
buttons, repeat each step for each remaining
button. DO NOT erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button
until the indicator light begins to flash after 20
seconds. Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” Step 2
and follow all remaining steps.
SECURITY
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in y
our vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds until the indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLink® universal transmitter is disabled when
the Vehicle Security system is active.
TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,
here are some of the most common solutions:
● Replace the battery in the garage door opener hand-
held transmitter.
● Push the LEARN button on the garage door opener
to complete the training for a rolling code.
● Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
● Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a
dangerous gas. Do not run your v
ehicle in
the garage while programming the transmitter.
Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● Y
our motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the univer
sal
transmitter. Do not program the transmitter if
people, pets or other objects are in the path of
the door or gate. Only use this transmitter with a
garage door opener that has a “stop and reverse”
feature as required by Federal safety standards.
This includes most garage door opener models
manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage
door opener without these safety features.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel, ne
xt to the steering wheel.
The headlight switch controls the operation of the
headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights, and
fog lights (if equipped).
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
2
Headlight Switch
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Push Front Fog Light Control
3 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
4 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
Headlight Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Push Front Fog Light Control
3 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
4 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
NOTE:
Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a headlight
switch with an AUTO and ON detent but without an
OFF detent. Headlights will be deactivated when the
headlight switch is placed in the parking lights position.
However, the Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will be
activated along with the front and rear marker lights.
The DRLs may be deactivated when the parking brake
is engaged.
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight switch
clockwise. When the headlight switch is on, the parking
lights, taillights, license plate light and instrument panel
lights are also turned on. To turn off the headlights,
rotate the headlight switch back to the O (off) position.
For vehicles sold in Canada, rotate the headlight switch
clockwise from the parking lights and instrument panel
lights position to the AUTO position for automatic
headlights. Rotate to the second detent to turn on
headlights, parking lights, and instrument panel lights
operation.
NOTE:
● Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and
fog light (if equipped) lenses that are lighter and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass lights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be
followed.
● To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses
and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry
cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap
solution followed by rinsing.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,
st
eel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the
lenses.
MULTIFUNCTION LEVER
The multifunction lever is located on the lef
t side of the
steering column.
Multifunction Lever
DAYTIME RUNNING
LIGHTS (DRLS)
The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) come on whenever
the engine is running, and the low beams are not on.
The lights will remain on until the ignition is placed in
the OFF or ON/RUN position, or the parking brake is
engaged. The headlight switch must be used for normal
nighttime driving.
NOTE:
● For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime Running
Lights will automatically deactivate when the front
fog lights are turned on.
● If allowed by law in the country in which the vehicle
was purchased, the Daytime Running Lights can be
56 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
turned on and off using the Uconnect system
ð
page 186.
● On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights may
deactivate, or reduce intensity, on one side of the
vehicle (when a turn signal is activated on that side),
or on both sides of the vehicle (when the hazard
warning lights are activated).
HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument
panel to switch the headlights to high beams. Pulling
the multifunction lever back toward the steering wheel
will turn the low beams back on, or shut the high
beams off.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAMS — IF EQUIPPED
The Automatic High Beam Headlight system provides
increased forward lighting at night by automating high
beam control through the use of a digital camera
mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera
detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches
from high beams to low beams until the approaching
vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
● The Automatic High Beam Headlight system can be
turned on or off by selecting or deselecting “Auto
High Beam” within Uconnect Settings
ð
page 186.
● The headlight switch must also be turned to
the AUTO position after Automatic High Beams is
enabled within Uconnect Settings for the feature to
activate.
● Automatic High Beams will only activate when the
vehicle speed is above 22 m
ph (35 km/h).
● Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause
headlights to remain on longer (closer to the
vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other obstructions on
the windshield or camera lens will cause the system
to function improperly.
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlight
Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed
to ensure proper performance. See a local authorized
dealer.
FLASH-TO-PASS
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will cause the high beam headlights to turn on, and
remain on, until the lever is released.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system
on, rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the
AUTO position. When the system is on, the headlight
time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the
ignition into the OFF position. The headlight time delay
can be programmed 0/30/60/90 seconds
ð
page
186.
To turn the automatic system off, move the headlight
switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the headlights will
come on in the automatic mode.
PARKING LIGHTS
AND PANEL LIGHTS
To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel
lights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise. To turn off
the parking lights, rotate the headlight switch back to
the O (off) position.
NOTE:
Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a headlight
switch with an AUTO and ON detent but without an
OFF detent. Headlights will be deactivated when the
headlight switch is placed in the parking lights position.
However, the Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will be
activated along with the front and rear marker lights.
The DRLs may be deactivated when the parking brake
is engaged.
HEADLIGHTS ON AUTOMATICALLY WITH
WIPERS
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights,
it also has this customer-programmable feature. When
your headlights are in the automatic mode and the
engine is running, they will automatically turn on when
the wiper system is on. This feature is programmable
through the Uconnect system
ð
page 186.
NOTE:
When your headlights come on during the daytime, the
vehicle will monitor outside brightness and decide if the
instrument panel needs to be dimmed or not
ð
page
59.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
2
HEADLIGHT ILLUMINATION ON A
PPROACH
When enabled, the headlights, exterior door handle
pocket lights (if equipped), and interior lights will
illuminate when the unlock button on the key fob is
pushed as the operator is approaching the vehicle. This
feature can be turned on/off, and the length of time
the headlights stay on can be programmed for up to 90
seconds within Uconnect Settings
ð
page 186.
Proximity Wake-Up — If Equipped
This feature is enabled/disabled within the Uconnect
system, and is activated when the operator approaches
the driver’s door, passenger’s door, or liftgate with
a valid key fob on their person. Some exterior and
interior lights will illuminate in order to provide an
increased sense of welcome and security as the
operator approaches the vehicle in the dark. “Headlight
Illumination On Approach” must be selected and set to
a time value other than zero within Uconnect Settings
for Proximity Wake-Up to activate.
The doors may be locked or unlocked for this feature to
activate, as long as the ignition is in the OFF position,
or during a Remote Start event. It will not activate if
the doors are locked and the ignition was placed in the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
Proximity Wake-Up may not activate under the following
conditions:
● After numerous consecutive activations, in order to
conserve the vehicle’s battery
● After the vehicle’s engine has been off for several
days
Headlight Animation — If Equipped
When “Headlight Illumination On Approach” is turned
on, and set to a time value abo
ve zero, the exterior
lights illuminate in a theatrical manner during approach
to the vehicle. This feature is activated in the following
situations:
● Proximity Wake-Up (if equipped) is activated
● Remote Start is activated
● The unlock button on the key fob is pushed
NOTE:
For Headlight Animation to activate with Remote Start
or with the push of the unlock button, “Greeting Lights”
must also be selected within the Uconnect system.
HEADLIGHT DELAY
To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a
headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for
approximately 90 seconds. This delay is initiated when
the ignition is placed in the OFF position while the
headlight switch is on, and then the headlight switch
is cycled off. Headlight delay can be canceled by either
turning the headlight switch on then off, or by placing
the ignition in the ON position.
NOTE:
The headlight delay time is programmable through
Uconnect Settings
ð
page 186.
LIGHTS-ON REMINDER
If the headlights or parking lights are left on after the
ignition is placed in the OFF position, a chime will
sound when the driver’s door is opened.
FOG LIGHTS
To activate the front f
og lights, turn on the parking lights
or the low beam headlights, and push the fog light
button on the headlight switch.
Fog Light Button
Fog Light Button (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights
are on, or when the vehicle headlights are on lo
w beam.
An indicator light located in the instrument cluster
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
display will illuminate when the fog lights are on. The
fog lights will turn off when the button is pushed a
second time, when the headlight switch is rotated to
the off position, or the high beam is selected.
Cornering Lights
The cornering lights are a feature to improve visibility at
night while turning the vehicle. When activated, a light
incorporated in the front fog light will illuminate on the
side of the vehicle the steering wheel is rotated or the
turn signal indicator is on. It can be activated through
the Uconnect system
ð
page 186.
TURN SIGNALS
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster will flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
Tap the multifunction lever up or down once, without
moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or
left) will flash three times then automatically turn off.
BATTERY SAVER
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, load
shedding is provided for both the interior and exterior
lights.
If the ignition is placed in the OFF position and any door
is left ajar for 10 minutes or if the overhead console
Dome ON switch is pressed, and the interior lights are
on for 10 minutes, the interior lights will automatically
turn off.
NOTE:
Battery saver mode is canceled if the ignition is in the
ON position.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is placed
in the OFF position, the exterior lights will automatically
turn off after eight minutes. If the headlights are turned
on and left on for eight minutes while the ignition is in
the OFF position, the exterior lights will automatically
turn off.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
COURTESY LIGHTS
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front
doors are opened or the Dome ON button is pushed on
the overhead console. If your vehicle is equipped with
Remote Keyless Entry and the unlock button is pushed
on the key fob, the courtesy and dome lights will turn
on. When a door is open and the interior lights are
on, pressing the Dome Defeat button on the overhead
console will cause all of the interior lights to turn off.
This allows the doors to stay open for extended periods
of time without discharging the vehicle’s battery.
Front Map/Reading Lights
The overhead console lights can also be operated
individually as reading lights by pushing the
corresponding buttons.
Courtesy Lights
1 — Reading Light On/Off Buttons
2 — Dome Defeat Button
3 — Ambient Light
4 — Dome ON Button
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights
Located above the rear passenger seating in both
second and third rows, along the trim, are courtesy/
reading lights. The courtesy lights turn on when a door
or the liftgate is opened. The lights will also turn on
when the unlock button on the key fob is pushed.
The courtesy lights also function as reading lights. Push
the lens button to turn these lights on while inside the
vehicle. Push the lens button a second time to turn
each light off.
Dimmer Controls
The dimmer controls are inboard and adjacent to
the headlight switch located on the left side of the
instrument panel.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
2
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating
the right dimmer control upward will increase the
brightness of the instrument cluster lights. Rotating the
left dimmer control will adjust the interior light levels
of the ambient lighting on the instrument panel and
doors. The ambient lighting may be color customizable
ð
page 60.
Dimmer Controls
1 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
Dimmer Controls (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
1 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
NOTE:
● Ambient lighting in the second and third row seating
areas may not be equipped in the vehicle.
● The dimming of the touchscreen is programmable
through the Uconnect system
ð
page 186.
Multicolor Ambient Lighting — If
Equipped
The color of certain ambient lighting inside of the
vehicle can be selected within the Apps menu on the
radio screen, or within Uconnect Settings
ð
page
186. Brightness is adjusted using the ambient light
dimmer control on the headlight switch.
Five colors can be selected for the following two zones
inside of the vehicle:
● Zone 1:
○ Instrument panel decorative ambient lights
● Zone 2:
○ Front seat footwell areas below the instrument
panel
○ Lighting below the second row seats
○ Map pocket lighting on all four door panels
These areas can be set to different colors, or if the
SYNC button is selected within the settings menu,
all colored lights will be set to the same color
automatically.
NOTE:
All other ambient lighting inside of the vehicle will
remain white, and the ambient light dimmer control
switch will adjust all ambient lighting at the same time.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY — I
F EQUIPPED
The Illuminated Entry feature allows you to activate the
low beam, parking lights, and side marker lights for 25
seconds when the vehicle is unlocked (through the key
fob or the Passive Entry door handles [if equipped]).
This feature can be activated or deactivated through
the Uconnect Settings
ð
page 186.
NOTE:
● When a door is open with the feature active, the
activation of the lights is extended for five seconds.
● The feature is disabled when the vehicle is locked or
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
60 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer lever is located on the
right side of the steering column. The front wipers are
operated by rotating a switch, located on the end of the
lever.
Windshield Wiper Operation
1 — Pull For Front Washer
2 — Rotate For Rear Wiper Operation
3 — Rotate For Front Wiper Operation
4 — Push Forward For Rear Washer
5 — Push Up For Mist
WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION
The wipers and washers are operat
ed by a switch within
the wiper lever. Rotate the switch at the end of the lever
upward, to the first detent past the intermittent settings
for low-speed wiper operation. Rotate the switch at the
end of the lever upward to the second detent past the
intermittent settings for high-speed wiper operation. To
turn the windshield wipers off, rotate the switch within
the lever all the way do
wn to OFF.
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the
windshield wiper blades from returning to the parked
position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off,
and the blades cannot return to the parked position,
damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cy
cle with a variable pause
between cycles desirable. Rotate the switch at the end
of the wiper lever to the first detent position, and then
turn the switch at the end of the lever to select the
desired delay interval. There are four delay settings,
which allow you to regulate the wipe interval from a
minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of
approximately 36 seconds between cycles. The delay
intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed
is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h),
delay times will be doubled.
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, pull the lever rearward toward you
and hold. If the lever is pulled while on the intermittent
setting, the wipers will turn on and operate for several
wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then resume
the intermittent interval previously selected. If the lever
is pulled while the wipers are in the off position, the
wipers will operate several cy
cles, then turn off.
NOTE:
● As a protective measure, the pump will stop if the
switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the
switch is released the pump will resume normal
operation.
● If the front window washer feature is activated, all of
the front cameras (if equipped) on the vehicle will be
washed as well.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
v
ehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing
of the windshield during freezing weather, warm
the windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Mist
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make
occasional usage of the wipers necessar
y. Push the
lever upward to the MIST position and release for a
single wiping cycle.
NOTE:
The Mist feature does not activate the washer pump;
therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The washer function must be used in order
to spray the windshield with washer fluid.
For information on wiper care and replacement, see
ð
page 304.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
2
RAIN SENSING WIPERS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature senses rain or snowfall on the windshield
and automatically activates the wipers. Rotate the end
of the windshield wiper lever to one of the four detent
positions to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system is adjustable from the
windshield wiper lever. Wiper sensitivity position 1 is
the least sensitive, and wiper sensitivity position 4 is
the most sensitive.
NOTE:
● The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the low or high position.
● The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice or dried saltwater is present on the
windshield.
● Use of products containing wax or silicone may
reduce rain sensor performance.
● The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off
through the Uconnect system
ð
page 186.
The Rain Sensing system has protective features for the
wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under the
following conditions:
● Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing
feature will not operate when the ignition is first
placed in the ON position, when the vehicle is
stationary and the outside temperature is below
32°F (0°C), unless the wiper control on the
windshield wiper lever is moved, the vehicle speed
becomes greater than 3 mph (5 km/h) or the
outside temperature rises above freezing.
● Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing f
eature
will not operate when the ignition is ON, when
the transmission gear selector is in the NEUTRAL
position and the vehicle speed is less than 3 mph (5
km/h), unless the wiper control on the windshield
wiper lever is moved, the vehicle speed is greater
than 3 mph (5 km/h) or the gear selector is moved
out of the NEUTRAL position.
● Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped
with the Remote Start system, Rain Sensing wipers
are not operational when the vehicle is in the
Remote Start mode. Once the operator is in the
vehicle and has placed the ignition switch in the
ON/RUN position, rain sensing wiper operation can
resume, if it has been selected, and no other inhibit
conditions (mentioned previously) exist.
REAR WIPER AND WASHER
The rear wiper/washer is operated b
y rotating a switch,
located at the middle of the lever.
Rotate the center portion of the lever
upward to the first detent for intermittent
operation and to the second detent for
continuous rear wiper operation.
Rear Window Washer Operation
Pushing the windshield wiper lever forward
activates the rear window washer. If the
lever is pushed while on the intermittent
setting, the wiper will turn on and operate
for several wipe cycles after the lever is released,
and then resume the intermittent interval previously
selected. If the lever is pushed while the wiper is in the
off position, the wiper will operate several wipe cycles,
then turn off.
● Activation By Front Defrost — The Windshield Wiper
De-Icer shall be activated automatically in the case
of a cold weather manual start with full front defrost,
and when the ambient temperature is below 33°F
(0.6°C).
● Activation By Rear Defrost — The Windshield Wiper
De-Icer shall be activated automatically when the
rear defrost is turned on and when the ambient
temperature is below 33°F (0.6°C).
● Activation By Remote Start Operation — When
Remote Start is active and the outside ambient
temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C), the
Windshield Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting
Remote Start will resume its previous operation. If
the Windshield Wiper De-Icer was active, the timer
and operation will continue.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to regulate the
temperature, air flow, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on
the touchscreen and on the instrument panel below
the radio.
62 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
When the rear window washer is activated, the rear
Back Up camera and Digital Rearview Mirror (if
equipped) cameras are also washed.
WINDSHIELD WIPER DE-ICER — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Windshield Wiper
De-Icer feature that may be activated under the
following conditions:
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS
AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 5 NAV With 10.1-inch
Or 12-inch Display Temperature Controls
Instrument Panel Climate Control Toggle Switches
Front Comfort And Convenience Display
— If Equipped
The Front Comf
ort And Convenience Display is a
retractable screen located below the main Uconnect
display that controls the front and rear climate settings
just as the Controls menu would within the Uconnect
system.
Other front seat functions can also be adjusted from
this screen, such as:
● Power Massage Seat
ð
page 41
● Power Lumbar
ð
page 39
● Power Bolster
ð
page 39
Front Comfort And Convenience Display Location
NOTE:
The Front Comf
ort And Convenience Display can only be
used if the vehicle is in the ON/RUN position.
To stow this display and access the power outlet, USB
ports, and wireless charging pad, push the screen
open/close hard button below the display, in front of
the gear selector. Pushing the button again will lo
wer
the screen for use.
Screen Open/Close Button
NOTE:
When the open/close button is pushed to st
ow the
Front Comfort And Convenience Display screen, the
screen will turn off and save the menu it was on prior to
being stowed.
Max A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button
on the touchscreen to automatically turn
the air conditioning on to the coldest
temperature setting and the highest blower
speed. The MAX A/C indicator illuminates when MAX
A/C is ON. Performing this function again will cause the
MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the
MAX A/C indicator will turn off. Pressing other setting
buttons will also cause the MAX A/C to turn off.
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling
performance.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
2
NOTE:
● The MAX A/C button is only available on the
touchscreen.
● Pressing the MAX A/C button on the front climate
control screen will not set the rear A/C to MAX
unless the rear A/C was already active. If the rear
A/C is not active, pressing the MAX A/C button will
not turn on the rear A/C.
● For best A/C performance, it is recommended that
the rear A/C be turned to ON or AUTO and synced to
the driver’s climate settings.
A/C Button
Press and release the A/C button on
the touchscreen, or push the toggle
switch on the faceplate down, to turn
the air conditioning on. The A/C indicator
illuminates when A/C is on.
Recirculation Button
Press and release the Recirculation button
on the touchscreen, or push the toggle
switch on the faceplate down, to change
the system between recirculation mode
and outside air mode. Recirculation can be used
when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust,
or high humidity are present. Recirculation can be
used in all modes. Recirculation may be unavailable
if conditions exist that could create fogging on the
inside of the windshield. The A/C can be deselected
manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
Continuous use of Recirculation mode may make
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may lead
to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation feature
may be unavailable if conditions exist that could create
fogging on the inside of the windshield.
AUTO Button
Press the AUTO button on the touchscreen,
or push toggle switch on the faceplate down
to automatically control the front driver and
passenger area’s temperature by adjusting
distribution and amount of airflow. Performing this
function will cause the system to switch between
manual mode and automatic modes
ð
page 69.
AUTO mode is highly recommended for efficiency.
MAX Defrost Button
Press the MAX Defrost button on the
touchscreen, or push the toggle switch
on the faceplate down, to change the
current airflow setting to Defrost mode.
The indicator illuminates when this feature is on.
Performing this function will cause the automatic
climate controls to change to manual mode.
When MAX Defrost mode is selected:
● The blower speed increases to full (all LEDs on)
● Air conditioning compressor is turned on (LED on)
● Both driver and passenger temperature controls are
set to HI
● Defrost mode is selected (LED on)
● Rear defroster is turned on (LED on)
● Air recirculation is turned off (LED off)
If MAX Defrost mode is turned off, the Climate Control
system will return to the previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the button on the
touchscreen, or push the toggle switch on
the faceplate down, to turn on the rear
window defroster and the heated outside
mirrors (if equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator
illuminates when the rear window defroster is on. The
rear window defroster automatically turns off after 10
minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
● Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
● Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface
of the window.
● Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Driver And Passenger Temperature
Switches
These toggle switches provide the driver and passenger
with independent t
emperature control by pushing the
single switch upward or downward.
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Instrument Panel Toggle Switches
Push upward on the driver’s or passenger’s
side toggle switch on the f
aceplate, or press
and slide the temperature bar towards
the red arrow button on the touchscreen
for warmer temperature settings. Push downward the
driver’s or passenger’s side toggle switch on the
faceplate, or press and slide the temperature bar
towards the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for
cooler temperature settings.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen
to turn the SYNC feature on/off. The
SYNC indicator illuminates when SYNC
is on. SYNC is used to synchronize the
front passenger temperature and rear passenger
temperature, mode, and blower settings with the driver
temperature, mode, and blower settings. Changing
the front passenger temperature or rear passenger
temperature, mode, and blower settings while in SYNC
will automatically exit this feature.
NOTE:
● When SYNC is not active, the rear passenger climate
control settings will need to be adjusted manually
to achieve desired comfort. See
ð
page 66 and
ð
page 67 for more information.
● The SYNC setting is only available on the
touchscreen.
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the
amount of air forced through the Climate
Control system. There are several blower
speeds available. The speeds can be
selected using the blower control buttons on the
touchscreen.
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower
setting. Blower speed can also be selected by pressing
the numbered blower speed on the bar area between
the blower icons.
NOTE:
You can also adjust the blower speed by pushing the
single blower control toggle switch on the faceplate.
Push the toggle switch downward to decrease speed, or
upward to increase speed.
Blower Control Toggle Switch
Tri-Mode Climate
Three airflow distribution modes can be select
ed on/off
individually by pressing the icons on the touchscreen
for up to seven combinations of airflow. The icons on
the screen will illuminate when selected, and turn off
when deselected.
The three airflow modes are:
Windshield (Front Defrost outlets)
Face (instrument panel outlets)
Feet (floor outlets)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
2
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls
From The Front Climat
e Screen
Four-Zone Rear Climate Controls
From Front Climat
e Screen
The Three-Zone and Four-Zone Climate Control system
allows for adjustment of the rear climate controls from
the front screen. This can be done through either
the main Uconnect display, or the Front Comfort And
Convenience Display (if equipped).
NOTE:
If equipped with a Four-Zone Climate Control system,
the temperature of left and right sides of the rear
passenger zones can be adjusted separately from the
front or rear climate screens.
To change to the rear climate control screen:
● Press the “Rear” icon on the touchscreen to display
the rear climate controls. The control functions now
operate the rear system.
● Press the “Front” icon on the touchscreen to return
to the front climate controls.
LOCK REAR CLIMATE
Press and release the “Lock R
ear” icon
t
o lock out manual control of the rear
t
em
perature and blower settings made from
the rear climate control display. The “Lock
Rear” icon will illuminate and the text will update to
“Unlock Rear” when this feature is selected. When the
feature is deselected, the text will change back to “Lock
Rear” and will no longer be illuminated.
REAR AUTO BUTTON
Press and release “Auto” on the rear
climate control screen to control the
selected rear passenger temperature by
automatically adjusting airflow distribution
and amount. The “Auto” icon will illuminate when this
feature is selected, and will turn off when deselected.
Pressing any other climate control function for the rear
system will cause the rear system to switch between
manual mode and automatic modes
ð
page 69.
SYNC BUTTON
Press the SYNC To Driver icon on the rear
climate control screen to turn the SYNC
feature on/off. SYNC is used to synchronize
all front and rear passenger zones to the
driver’s set temperature, mode, and blower settings.
The SYNC indicator will illuminate when SYNC is on.
Changing the front driver climate settings will adjust all
passenger settings automatically. If the front passenger
or rear climate settings are adjusted while SYNC is on,
SYNC will automatically exit.
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Mode Control Button On The Instrument Panel
The airflow distribution mode can also be
selected by pushing the hard toggle switch
on the instrument panel, below the radio
screen. Pushing this toggle switch down will
cycle through the seven mode combinations in order:
Face, Face/Feet, Feet, Windshield/Feet, Windshield,
Windshield/Face, and Windshield/Face/Feet. The cycle
will repeat if the button is continually pushed.
NOTE:
The distribution modes on the climate control screen
will also illuminate when a selection is made using the
button on the instrument panel.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release the OFF button on the
touchscreen, or push the blower control
button on the faceplate and release when
the OFF setting has been reached, to turn
the Climate Control system on/off.
NOTE:
When SYNC is not active, the rear passenger climate
control settings will need to be adjusted manually to
achieve desired comfort. See
ð
page 66 and
ð
page 67 for more information.
REAR BLOWER CONTROL
Rear Blower Control is used to regulate
the amount of air forced through the
rear climate system. There are several
blower speeds available. The speeds can
be selected using the buttons on the touchscreen.
Use the small blower icon (or blower icon with the
downward arrow) to reduce the blower setting, and
the large blower icon (or blower icon with the upward
arrow) to increase the blower setting. Blower can also
be selected by pressing the blower bar area between
the icons.
REAR MODE CONTROL
Two airflow distribution modes for the rear seat
passengers can be selected on/off from the front
climate screen by individually by pressing the icons on
the touchscreen for up to three combinations of airflow.
The icons on the screen will illuminate when selected,
and turn off when deselected.
The two airflow modes are:
Face (panel outlets)
Feet (floor outlets)
NOTE:
If Auto is selected, these icons will no longer be
available and the current mode selection will be
overwritten.
REAR CLIMATE CONTROL OFF
To turn the rear climate controls off, press
the OFF button on the touchscreen, near
the blower buttons.
Rear Climate Control Description And
Functions
Rear Climate Touchscreen (If Equipped)
Rear Climate Buttons (If Equipped)
Rear Comfort And Convenience
Display Screen (If Equipped)
The rear climate controls are locat
ed on rear of the
front center console, or if equipped, on the Rear
Comfort And Convenience Display screen located at the
front of the rear center console.
The rear Climate Control system has floor air outlets
at the right and left sides of the second and third row
seats. There are also airflow outlets on the B-pillars
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
2
in the second row seating area, as well as the side
trim panels in the third row seating area. The system
provides heated or cooled air through the floor outlets,
and dehumidified air through the B-pillar and side trim
panel outlets.
NOTE:
If equipped with a Four-Zone ATC system, the left
and right sides of the rear passenger zones can be
adjusted separately from the front or rear climate
control displays.
AUTO BUTTON
Push the AUTO button below the rear
climate control display, or if equipped,
press and release the AUTO button on
the Rear Comfort And Convenience Display
touchscreen to control the rear passenger area’s
temperature by automatically adjusting distribution and
amount of airflow. Performing this function will cause
the system to switch between manual mode and
automatic modes
ð
page 69.
REAR TEMPERATURE CONTROL
Push the Up or Down buttons near the rear climate
control display, or if equipped, press the Up or Down
arrow buttons on the Rear Comfort And Convenience
Display touchscreen to control the rear passenger’s
temperature.
NOTE:
If equipped with a Four-Zone ATC system, the left and
right sides of the rear passenger zones can be adjusted
separately.
Push the Up arrow hard button, or press and
release, or slide the temperature bar on the
touchscreen towards the red arrow button
on the touchscreen for warmer temperature
settings.
Push the Down arrow hard button, or
press and release, or slide the temperature
bar on the touchscreen towards the blue
arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler
temperature settings.
REAR BLOWER CONTROL
Blower Control is used to regulate the
amount of air forced through the Climate
Control system. There are several blower
speeds available. The speeds can be
selected using the blower control buttons near the rear
climate control display, or if equipped, on the Rear
Comfort And Convenience Display touchscreen.
Use the blower button with the down arrow, or small
blower icon on the touchscreen to reduce the blower
setting. Use the blower button with the up arrow, or the
large blower icon on the touchscreen to increase the
blower setting.
NOTE:
Blower speed can also be selected by pressing the
numbered blower speed on the touchscreen bar area
between the blower icons.
REAR MODE CONTROL
Pushing the Mode button below the rear
climate control display, located on the rear
of the center console, will cycle through the
three rear mode control options for airflow
distribution. These options are: Face, Face/Feet, and
Feet.
Mode Control From The Rear Comfort And Convenience
Display
If equipped with the Rear Comfort And Convenience
display, two airflow distribution modes can be selected
on/off from the display by individually by pressing the
icons on the touchscreen for up to three combinations
of airflow. The icons on the screen will illuminate when
selected, and turn off when deselected.
The two airflow modes are:
Face (panel outlets)
Feet (floor outlets)
NOTE:
If Auto is selected, these icons will no longer be
available and the current mode selection will be
overwritten.
REAR CLIMATE LOCK
When the rear climate controls are locked
from the front climate controls, “Unlock
Rear” will illuminate on the rear climate
screen. No adjustments to the rear climate
system can be made from the rear climate controls
while the system is locked.
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
When the controls are then unlocked from the front
climate controls, the text on the rear screen will
update to “Lock Rear”, and no longer be illuminated.
Temperature, blower speed, and mode settings can
now be made from the rear climate controls.
REAR CLIMATE CONTROL OFF
To turn the rear climate controls off, push
the OFF button below the rear climate
control display, or if equipped, press and
release the OFF button on the Rear Comfort
And Convenience Display touchscreen, near the blower
buttons.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL (ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the front climate control
display, and the word “AUTO” will illuminate along
with two temperatures for the driver and front
passenger. The system will then automatically
regulate the amount of airflow.
2. Adjust the temperature you would like the
system to maintain, by adjusting the driver,
passenger, and rear temperatures. Once the
desired temperature is displayed, the system will
achieve, and automatically maintain, that comfort
level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level,
it is not necessary to change the settings. You
will experience the greatest efficiency by simply
allowing the system to function automatically.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to move the temperature settings.
The system automatically adjusts the temperature,
mode, and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as
possible.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic
mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain
on low until the engine warms up. The fan will engage
immediately if the Defrost mode is selected, or by
changing the front blower setting.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual
override features. The AUTO symbol in the front climate
control display will no longer be illuminated when the
system is being used in the manual mode.
NOTE:
The system will not automatically sense the presence of
fog, mist or ice on the windshield. Defrost mode must
be manually selected to clear the windshield and side
glass.
CLIMATE VOICE RECOGNITION
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep
everyone comfortable while you keep moving ahead (If
vehicle is equipped with climate control).
Push the VR/Phone button . After the beep, say one
of the following commands:
● “Se
t the driver temperature to 70 degrees”
● “Set the passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
Did You Know: Voice Command for Climate may only be
used to adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle.
Voice Command will not work to adjust the heated
seats or steering wheel if equipped.
OPERATING
TIPS
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Climate Control system
through an intake grille, located in the right side
trim panel behind the third row seats. The heater
outlets are located in the right side trim panel, just
behind the rear doors. Do not block or place objects
directly in front of the inlet grille or heater outlets.
The electrical system could overload causing damage
to the blower motor.
Refer to the chart at the end of this section
for suggested control settings for various weather
conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with
a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper
corrosion protection and to protect against engine
overheating. OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is
recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster
performance, make sure the engine cooling system
is functioning properly and the proper amount, type,
and concentration of coolant is used. Use of the
Air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not
recommended, because it may cause window fogging.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
2
Vacation/Storage
For information on maintaining the Climate Contr
ol
system when the vehicle is being stored for an
extended period of time, see
ð
page 347.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy,
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select
Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower
speed. Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C
for long periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of
the windshield, is free of obstructions, such as leaves.
Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow,
and if they enter the air distribution box, they could plug
the water drains. In Winter months, make sure the air
intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The Climate Control system filters out dust and pollen
from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to service
your cabin air filter, and to have it replaced when
needed.
Stop/Start System — If Equipped
While in an Autostop, the Climate Control system may
automatically adjust airflow to maintain cabin comfort.
Customer settings will be maintained upon return to an
engine running condition.
Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped
The Windshield Wiper De-Icer is a heating element
located at the base of the windshield.
It operates automatically once the following conditions
are met:
● Activation By Front Defrost
The Windshield Wiper De-Icer activates automatically
during a cold weather manual start with full defrost,
and when the ambient temperature is below 33°F
(0.6°C).
● Activation By Rear Defrost
The Windshield Wiper De-Icer activates automatically
when the Rear Defrost is operating and the ambient
temperature is below 33°F (0.6°C).
● Activation By Remote Start Operation
When Remote Start is activated and the outside
ambient temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C)
the Windshield Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting
Remote Start will resume its previous operation. If
the Windshield Wiper De-Icer was active, the timer
and operation will continue.
Operating Tips Chart
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
Hot Weather And Vehicle
Int
erior Is Very Ho
t
Set the mode control to
(Panel Mode),
(A/C) on, and blower on
high. Roll down the win-
dows f
or a minute to
flush out the hot air. Ad-
just the controls as need-
ed to achieve comfort.
Warm Weather Turn
(A/C) on and set
the mode control to
(Panel Mode).
Cool Sunny Operate in (Bi-Level
Mode).
Cool & Humid Conditions Set the mode control to
(Mix Mode) and turn
(A/C) on to keep win-
dows clear.
Cold Weather
Set the mode control to
(Floor Mode). If wind-
shield f
ogging star
ts t
o
occur
, move the control
to
(Mix Mode).
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a T
ri-Pane Panoramic
Sunroof, cabin heat generated by sunlight can be
reduced by closing the first and second row power
sunshade, as well as the third row manual sunshade.
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger
side of the instrument panel.
Glove Compartment Release Handle
To open the glove com
partment, pull the release
handle.
The glove compartment also has a lock cylinder
that can be locked/unlocked with the emergency key
(located inside the key fob)
ð
page 18.
NOTE:
When valet parking your vehicle, remove the emergency
key from the key fob, as it will open the safe.
Front Center Console
The front center console contains both an upper and a
lo
wer storage area.
To open the lower storage compartment, push the
release button and lift up.
Lower Storage Compartment Release Button
To open the upper storage compar
tment, pull the
sliding tab backwards to slide the door open.
Upper Storage Compartment Sliding Tab
Sunglasses Bin Door
At the front of the console a compar
tment is provided
for the storage of a pair of sunglasses. The storage
compartment access is a “push/push” design. Push
the chrome pad on the door to open. Push the chrome
pad on the door to close.
From the fully closed position, push the chrome pad on
the door once to fully open the sunglasses bin.
From the fully open position, raise the door back up
3/4 of the way and release to achieve the conversation
mirror position.
NOTE:
From the conversation mirror position, do not pull the
door fully open because it will damage the door. The
door must be put back in the closed position before
fully opening it.
Sunglasses Bin Door
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
2
Rear Full Center Console — If Equipped
The rear full center console contains both an upper and
a low
er storage area.
Rear Center Console
1 — Rear Comfort And Convenience Display
2 — Console Cupholders
3 — Upper Storage Compartment
4 — USB Ports
To open the upper storage compartment, pull the
sliding tab rearward t
o slide the compartment door
open.
Upper Storage Sliding Tab
To open the lower st
orage compartment, pull the
release handle and lift upward.
Lower Storage Release Handle
CAUTION!
Remove any items stored in the console cupholders
or de
vices with cor
ds r
outing thr
ough upper storage
(Continued)
CAUTION!
area. Damage may occur to upper console lid and
device cables when upper storage compartment is
lifted forward.
Phone Storage — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be eq
uipped with two pockets, located
at the front edge of the media bin, that can hold mobile
phones.
Phone Holder Location
CENTER CONSOLE COOLER — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be eq
uipped with a console cooler
located in the front center console.
72 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Center Console Cooler Button
Press the cooler button once to turn on the cooler. The
LED will illuminate.
Press the butt
on a second time to turn the cooler off.
The LED will turn off.
CENTER CONSOLE SAFE — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
safe to store your valuables. The safe
is located inside of the front center
console.
There is a keypad on the safe that
consists of six buttons. The first five
buttons have numbers you can select
to create the lock code, while the sixth button is the
Door Open button.
Scan me
Center Console Safe
1 — Emergency Override Location
2 — Keypad
The safe can be used as locked or unlocked storage.
The color of the keypad indicates the lock mode of the
safe:
● White: Unlocked
● Red: Locked
● Pink: Lock code programming mode
To open the safe while it is in the unlocked
mode, simply press the Door Open button
on the keypad.
You can program a lock code by performing
the following procedure:
1. Press and hold the Door Open button for two
seconds. The keypad will flash pink, and then turn
solid pink.
2. Using the keypad, enter a 6-digit code. The keypad
will flash red, and then turn solid red.
3. Close the lid of the safe, and the safe will lock.
To open the locked safe, use the keypad to enter the
previously programmed 6-digit code, and then press the
Door Open button. After pressing the Door Open button,
the keypad turns white briefly to open the safe door.
Open Center Console Safe
The keypad will then turn red again, and return to the
lock
ed mode when the safe lid is closed.
NOTE:
The keypad will flash red if an incorrect lock code is
entered. If the incorrect code is entered ten times in a
row, the user will be locked out from further attempts
for approximately 30 minutes.
To revert the safe back to the unlocked mode:
1. Enter the programmed 6-digit code.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
2
2. Press and hold the Door Open button for two
seconds. The keypad will flash red and change to
pink.
3. Enter the 6-digit code and press the Door Open
button. The keypad will flash white.
Once this procedure is completed, the safe will no
longer lock when the lid is closed.
Lock Code Override
If you forget the 6-digit code, there is a way to override
the code, using the emergency key stored inside your
key fob:
1. Remove the emergency key from the key fob
ð
page 18.
2. Use the emergency key to open the safe door.
3. Press and hold the reset button, located under the
lid, for two seconds.
Reset Button Location
The safe will return to the unlock
ed mode.
NOTE:
When v
alet parking y
our vehicle, remove the emergency
key from the key fob, as it will open the safe.
SUN SCREENS — IF EQUIPPED
Sun screens are available for the second row seating
windows. The screens store in the sill trim panels, and
the tops of the windows are equipped with hooks that
the sun screens attach to when pulled up.
Gently pull up on the tab to raise the sun screen.
Continue pulling the sun screen until the tab is near
the top of the window.
Once the screen is completely to the top of the window,
extend the top bar of the sun screen over the two hooks
attached to the top of the window.
Sun Screen Extended
T
o lo
w
er the sun screen, gently lif
t the tab upward to
disengage the hooks, and feed the screen back into the
base sill.
USB/AUX CONTR
OL
This feature allo
ws an external USB device to be
plugged into one of the USB ports, located in the center
stack of the instrument panel.
Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB port will
activate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay® features, if
equipped. Android Auto™ and Apple CarPlay® can also
be activated wirelessly. For further information, refer to
“Android Auto™” or “Apple CarPlay®” in the Uconnect
Radio Instruction Manual.
NOTE:
Two devices can be plugged in at the same time, and
both ports will provide charging capabilities. Only one
port can transfer data to the system at a time.
For example, if a device is plugged into the Type A USB
port and another device is plugged into the Type C USB
port, a message will appear and allow you to select
which device to use.
The following scenarios are listed as follows when a
non-phone device is plugged into the smaller and larger
USB ports, and when a phone device is plugged into the
smaller and larger USB ports:
● “A new device is now connected. Previous
connection was lost.”
● “(Phone Name) now connected. Previous connection
was lost.”
● “Another device is in use through the same USB port.
Please disconnect the first device to use the second
device.”
Plugging in a phone or another USB device may cause
the connection to a previous device to be lost.
74 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Connecting AUX Or The External USB
Device
Use a connection cable to connect an ext
ernal USB
device to the vehicle’s USB port, or use an auxiliary
cable to connect a device to the vehicle’s AUX port.
These ports are located below the climate controls.
Front Media Hub USB/AUX Ports
1 — USB C Port
2 — USB A Port
3 — AUX Port
4 — HDMI Port (If Equipped)
To the right of the front media hub is an HDMI port
used for the Passenger Display f
eature
ð
page 210.
For vehicles not equipped with the Passenger Display
feature, the front media hub configuration will appear
different.
Front Media Hub USB/AUX
Ports — Without Passenger Displa
y
1 — USB C Port
2 — USB A Port
3 — AUX Port
Once a device is connected to the USB port, it will
begin charging and is ready for use with the system.
Type C and T
ype A charge-only USB ports can be used
at the same time but cannot be used simultaneously
while playing media. When both Type C and Type A
charge-only USB ports are in use they will be charged at
a reduced rate.
If equipped, your vehicle may have additional charge-
only USB ports in the center compartment.
Center Compartment USB Charge-Only Ports
1 — USB C Port
2 — USB A Port
NOTE:
If the device’s battery com
pletely discharges, it may
not communicate with the Uconnect system until
a minimum charge is attained. Leaving the device
connected to the USB port may charge it to the required
level.
Using This Feature
By using a USB cable to connect an external device:
● The device can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system, and provides the artist, track title, and
album information on the radio display.
NOTE:
Depending on track configuration, track information
may not be present on the radio display.
● The device can be controlled using the radio buttons
to play, and browse the contents of the device.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
2
● The audio device battery charges when plugged int
o
the USB port.
By using an auxiliary cable to connect an external
device:
● The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s
sound system. The Uconnect system will not display
information related to the artist, track title, and
album information.
NOTE:
When using the AUX port, the external device cannot be
controlled using the radio buttons. The device will not
charge.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect Radio
Instruction Manual.
Second And Third Row USB Ports — If
Equipped
If equipped, the second row USB ports can be used to
charge a device.
Rear Center Console USB Ports
1 — Type C Mini USB Ports (Charge Only)
2 — Type A Standard USB Ports (Charge Only)
If equipped, in the third rows, a set of two USB ports
can be used to charge a device. These ports are charge
only.
Third Row USB Ports
1 — Type C USB Port (Charge Only)
2 — Type A USB Port (Charge Only)
Third Row USB Ports
1 — Type A USB Port
2 — Type C USB Port
NOTE:
Charge unsupported devices with the charge only USB
ports. If an unsupported device is plugged into a Media
USB port, a message will display on the touchscreen
that the device is not supported by the system.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power
outlets that can be used to power cellular phones,
small electronics and other low powered electrical
accessories. The power outlets are labeled with either
a “key” or a “battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet
is powered. Power outlets labeled with a key symbol are
powered when the ignition switch is in the ON position,
while the outlets labeled with a battery symbol are
connected directly to the battery and powered at all
times.
NOTE:
● All accessories connected to the battery powered
outlets should be removed or turned off when the
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
discharge.
● Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 W (13
Amp) at 12 Volt. If the 160 W (13 Amp) power rating
is exceeded the fuse protecting the system needs to
be replaced.
● Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets
as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage
not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
76 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The front power outlet is located inside the storage area
on the center stack of the instrument panel, below the
climate controls.
Front Power Outlet
In addition to the front pow
er outlet, there is also a
power outlet located on the rear of the front center
console.
Front Center Console Power Outlet
The rear cargo power outlet is locat
ed in the right rear
cargo area.
Rear Cargo Power Outlet
NOTE:
The rear cargo power outle
t can be changed to battery
powered at all times by switching the fuse in the rear
power distribution center (PDC) from fuse location F44A
to F44B
ð
page 310.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
● Only de
vices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inser
ted into any 12 Volt outlet.
● Do not touch with wet hands.
● Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
● If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
● Man
y accessories that can be plugged in draw
power fr
om the vehicle's battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle's battery
will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
● Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these
intermittently and with greater caution.
● After the use of high power draw accessories,
or long periods of the vehicle not being started
(with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must
be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle's battery.
POWER INVERTER
There is a 115 V
olt, 150 W inverter outlet located on
the back of the center console to convert DC current
to AC current. This outlet can power cellular phones,
electronics and other low power devices requiring
power up to 150 W. Certain video game consoles
exceed this power limit, as will most power tools.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
2
Power Inverter
The power inv
erter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 W is exceeded,
the power inverter automatically shuts down. Once
the electrical device has been removed from the
outlet the inverter should automatically reset. To avoid
overloading the circuit, check the power ratings on
electrical devices prior to using the inverter.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
● Do no
t insert any objects int
o the receptacles.
● Do not touch with wet hands.
● Close the lid when not in use.
● If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
WIRELESS CHARGING PAD
— IF EQUIPPED
Wireless Charging Pad
Your vehicle may be eq
uipped with a 15W 3A Qi
®
wireless charging pad located below the center stack,
within the storage compartment. This charging pad is
designed to wirelessly charge your Qi
®
enabled mobile
phone. Qi
®
is a standard that allows wireless charging
of your mobile phone.
Your mobile phone must be designed for Qi
®
wireless
charging. If the phone is not equipped with Qi
®
wireless
charging functionality, an aftermarket sleeve or a
specialized back plate can be purchased from your
mobile phone provider or a local electronics retailer.
Please see your phone’s Owner’s Manual for further
information.
The wireless charging pad is equipped with an anti-slip
mat to hold your mobile phone in place, and an LED
indicator light.
Place the device inside the prepared area delimited in
the mat as shown in the image. Incorrect positioning
will prevent the phone from charging.
LED Indicator Status:
● No Light: Charging pad is idle or sear
ching for a
device. De
vice may not be compatible with the Qi
®
standard.
● Blue Light: Device is detected and is charging.
● Red Light/Flashing: Internal error, or foreign object is
detected.
● Green Light: Device has completed battery charging
(if device is equipped to transmit this information).
Important Notes Regarding This Vehicle’s Wireless
Charging Pad:
● The presence of the Near-Field Communication
(NFC) function active on a smartphone could signal
malfunction anomalies.
● The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position in order
for the phone to charge.
● To avoid interference with the key fob search, the
wireless charging pad will stop charging when any
door or liftgate is opened, even if the engine is
running.
● Be sure to place the mobile device correctly (display
facing upward, and phone not covering the LED) on
the wireless charging pad.
● If the phone moves on the pad causing the red light
to illuminate, the phone will have to be picked up
and placed back on the charging pad to resume
charging.
● Wireless charging is not as fast as when the phone
is connected to a wired charger.
78 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
● The phone’s protectiv
e case must be removed when
placed on the wireless charging pad.
● iPhone
®
12 (including iPod
®
) is equipped with
software to protect the device from overheating.
When the software is active, the rate of charge is
slowed down to protect the device.
● Phones must always be placed on the wireless
charging pad within the outline shown on the pad
so that its charging parts connect with the charging
coils of the system. Movement of the phone during
charging may prevent or slow the rate of charge.
● Having multiple applications open on the phone
while charging will reduce the charging efficiency,
and may even shut down an application that is
actively running (i.e. Apple CarPlay
®
). This may also
cause the phone to overheat.
● Wireless chargers may implement certain methods
to prevent the phone from overheating during
charging such as slowing down the rate of charge.
In certain instances, the device may shut down for
a brief period of time (when the device reaches a
certain temperature). If this happens, it does not
mean there is a fault with the wireless charging pad.
This may just be a protective measure to prevent
damage to the phone.
● The use of multiple wireless functions at the same
time (wireless charging, Apple CarPlay
®
, Android
Auto
™
) could cause the device to overheat, resulting
in limitation of the functions or it turning off. In
this case, it is recommended to connect the system
using the USB port.
● Do not place the key fob or any other type of metal/
magnetized object inside the mobile phone housing
or near the wireless charging pad.
● With a compatible device placed on the charging
pad, and the ignition is cycled to the OFF position,
a reminder message may appear on the instrument
cluster display to warn the driver.
CAUTION!
The key fob should not be placed on the charging
pad or within 6 inches (15 cm) of it. Doing so can
cause excessiv
e heat buildup and damage to the fob.
Placing the fob in close proximity of the charging pad
blocks the fob from being detected by the vehicle and
prevents the vehicle from starting.
WINDOWS
POWER WINDOW
CONTROLS
The power window controls, located on the driver's door
trim panel, operate the window movement for all four
power windows.
There is a single switch on the front passenger door
and rear passenger doors which operates the windows
for only that door.
Driver’s Door Power Window Switches
NOTE:
● The power windo
w switches remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition has been placed in the
OFF position. Opening a vehicle front door will cancel
this feature.
● The window controls will operate only when the
vehicle’s ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and
do not let children play with po
wer windows. Do
not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the
ON/RUN position. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the windows
while operating the power window switches. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
2
Automatic Window Features
Both the driver and front passenger windo
ws, and if
equipped, both rear windows, may have Auto-Down and
Auto-Up operations.
Auto-Down Feature
For windows equipped with the AUTO feature, push the
window switch down to the second detent, release, and
the window will go down automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the Auto-Down operation, pull up or push down on the
switch briefly.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
For windows equipped with the AUTO feature, lift the
window switch up to the second detent, and release;
the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto-Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch
briefly and release it when you want the window to stop.
If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back down.
Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again
to close the window.
NOTE:
Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the
auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-closure.
If this happens, pull the switch lightly and hold to close
the window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to
clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from
the window path before closing.
Reset Auto-Up
Should the Auto-Up f
eature stop working, the window
may need to be reset. To reset Auto-Up:
Front Doors
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up
for an additional two seconds after the window is
closed.
Rear Doors
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up
for an additional two seconds after the window is
closed.
2. Release the window switch, and within five
seconds, pull the window switch up again for an
additional two seconds.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver's door trim
panel allows you to disable the window controls on the
rear passenger doors. To disable the window controls,
push and release the window lockout button (the
indicator light on the button will turn on). To enable the
window controls, push and release the window lockout
button again (the indicator light on the button will turn
off).
Power Window Lockout Switch
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the per
ception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal
occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting
occurs with the rear windows open, open the front
and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting.
If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the
sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
RADIO SIGNAL DEVICES ON WINDSHIELD —
IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with premium tint
infrared reflective glass (IRR). In the necessity of
80 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
mounting devices such as transponders, garage door
openers, radar detectors, or any other device that
sends out a radio signal, please refer to the allocated
area on the windshield. There is a small box located
near the passenger side of the mirror cover. The
location is identifiable by a slight discoloration in the
glass due to the removal of the IRR coating.
Metalized windshield coatings available on the Grand
Wagoneer can potentially disrupt radio frequency
identification (RFID) transmission/reception depending
on signal location or additional interference, regardless
of the provided deletion zone. In the event that any
RFID or signal interruption between a vehicle mounted
device (e.g. toll transponder) does not function properly,
you may need to consult with your toll transponder
company and may have to use an alternate device such
as a license plate attached toll transponder.
Radio Signal Device Mounting Location
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
TRI-PANE POWER SUNROOF
The power sunroof switches are located on the
overhead console between the courtesy/reading lights.
Power Sunroof Switches
1 — Opening/Closing Sunroof
2 — Venting Sunroof
3 — Opening/Closing Sunshade
WARNING!
● Never leave children unattended in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked v
ehicle. Never
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. Do not
leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in
the ON/RUN position. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped by
(Continued)
WARNING!
the power sunroof while operating the power
sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
● In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are also properly secured.
● Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Opening And Closing The Sunroof
The sunroof has two programmed aut
omatic stops for
the sunroof open position: a comfort stop position and
a full open position. The comfort stop position will
minimize wind buffeting in the interior.
Express Open/Close
To open the sunroof, push OPEN on the sunroof
switch and release it within one-half second. The
sunroof will open to the comfort stop position and
stop automatically. Push and release OPEN again to
continue to the full open position.
To close the sunroof, push CLOSE on the sunroof switch
and release it within one-half second. The sunroof will
close automatically from any position.
During Express Open or Express Close operation, any
other actuation of the sunroof switch will stop the
sunroof.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81
2
Manual Open/Close
To open the sunroof, push and hold OPEN on the
sunroof switch. The sunroof will open to the comfort
stop position, then automatically stop. Release the
switch then push and hold again to continue to the full
open position.
To close the sunroof, push and hold CLOSE on the
sunroof switch.
Any release of the switch during open or close
operation will stop the sunroof movement in a partially
open position.
Express Venting The Sunroof
To vent the sunroof, push TILT on the vent switch and
release within one half second. The sunroof will open
to the vent position regardless of its initial position.
During Express Vent operation, any other actuation of
the switch will stop the sunroof.
NOTE:
If the sunshade is in the closed position when
Express/Manual Open or Vent operation is initiated,
the sunshade will automatically open to the half open
position prior to the sunroof opening.
Opening And Closing The Power
Sunshade
The sunshade has two programmed open positions:
half open and full open positions. When operating the
sunshade from the closed position, the sunshade will
always stop at the half open position regardless of
express or manual open operation. The switch must be
pushed again to continue on to full open position.
If the sunroof is open or vented, the sunshade cannot
be closed beyond the half open position. Pushing
the sunshade close switch when the sunroof is open/
vented and the sunshade is at half open position
will first automatically close the sunroof prior to the
sunshade closing.
Express Open/Close
To open the sunshade, push OPEN on the sunshade
switch and release it within one-half second, the
sunshade will open to the half open position and
stop automatically. Push and release OPEN again
to continue to open the sunshade to the full open
position.
To close the sunshade, push CLOSE on the sunshade
switch and release it within one-half second.
During Express Open or Express Close operation, any
other actuation of the sunroof switches will stop the
sunshade in a partially open position.
Manual Open/Close
To open the sunshade, push and hold OPEN on the
sunshade switch, the sunshade will open to the half
open position and stop automatically. Push and hold
OPEN again to continue to open the sunshade to the
full open position.
To close the sunshade, push and hold CLOSE on the
sunshade switch.
Releasing the switch while the sunshade is in motion
will stop the sunshade in a partially open position.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening
of the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an
obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected,
the sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the
obstruction if this occurs.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in
Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and
the sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.
Ignition Off Operation — If Equipped
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
approximately 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature.
NOTE:
If equipped with this setting, the Ignition Off timing is
programmable through the Uconnect system
ð
page
186.
Third Row Sunroof
The sunroof over the third row seating has a single
fixed glass pane with a manual sunshade. To open
the sunshade, pull the handle toward the front of the
vehicle. To close the sunshade, pull the handle toward
the rear of the vehicle.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to
clean the glass panel. Periodically check for and clear
out any debris that may have collected in the tracks.
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HOOD
OPENING THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the release lever located underneath the
driver’s side of the instrument panel.
Hood Release
2. Reach under the hood from outside the v
ehicle,
move the safety latch to the left and lift the hood.
Safety Latch Location
NOTE:
● Vehicle must be at a stop and the gear selector must
be in PARK.
● While lifting the hood, use both hands.
● Before lifting the hood, check that the wiper arms
are not in motion and not in the lifted position.
CLOSING THE HOOD
In one continuous motion, pull down on the front edge
of the hood with moderate force until the angle is below
the crossover point (where the gas props are no longer
resisting) and let the hood continue to fall closed from
its own inertia.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
v
ehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in mo
tion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
LIFTGATE
TO UNLOCK/OPEN
THE LIFTGATE
The power liftgate may be opened by pushing the
liftgate button on the key fob, pushing the liftgate
button in the cargo area, or by pushing the electronic
liftgate release handle
ð
page 27.
Push the liftgate button on the key fob twice within five
seconds to open the power liftgate. Once the liftgate is
open, pushing the button twice within five seconds a
second time will close the lif
tgate.
Liftgate Entry
1 — Passive Entry Lock Button
2 — Electronic Liftgate Release Handle
NOTE:
If all doors are programmed to unlock on f
irst press
within Uconnect Settings
ð
page 186, all doors will
unlock when you push the electronic liftgate release.
If only the driver’s door is programmed, only the
liftgate will unlock when you push the electronic liftgate
release.
NOTE:
● Use the power door lock switch on either front door
trim panel or the key fob to lock and unlock the
liftgate.
● The driver's door lock cylinder will not lock and
unlock the liftgate.
● The vehicle must be in PARK to utilize the liftgate
open/close button.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83
2
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
NOTE:
The liftgate can also be opened manually by pushing
the electronic liftgate release handle and pulling
upward in one fluid motion.
TO LOCK/CLOSE THE LIFTGATE
There are several different ways to close the liftgate:
● Manually (grab the liftgate closing handle and pull
downward)
● Key fob
● Hands-free (if equipped)
● Liftgate close button in the cargo area
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of
the liftgate, pushing the Passive Entry button, located
to the left of the electronic liftgate release handle, will
lock the vehicle only.
If the liftgate is fully open, the liftgate can be closed
by pushing the liftgate close button located in the
cargo area on the left rear trim panel, near the liftgate
opening. If the liftgate is in motion, pushing the liftgate
close button a second time will reverse the liftgate
operation.
Liftgate Close Button
ADJUSTABLE
POWER LIFTGATE HEIGHT
The maximum height that the liftgate will open can be
adjusted and saved so that the liftgate will only open to
the desired height. To set a desired height, proceed as
follows:
1. Open the liftgate fully, then manually pull down on
the liftgate to the desired height.
2. Push and hold the liftgate close button, located on
the left side trim panel inside the cargo area, for
three seconds. An audible chime will be heard to
let you know the height has been saved.
To reset the saved height setting to a new setting,
proceed as follows:
1. Open the liftgate, then manually push the liftgate
upward to its full open position.
2. Manually pull the liftgate down to the new desired
height and hold the liftgate close button for three
seconds until the audible chime is heard.
Power Liftgate Malfunction Procedure:
1
. In the ev
ent of a power malfunction to the liftgate,
the liftgate can be released by accessing the
service release feature in the latch. This can be
done using a 3 mm diameter screwdriver.
Liftgate Service Release
2. From inside the gat
e, an eyelet can be seen. Place
the screwdriver in the eyelet.
3. Rotate the screwdriver handle to actuate the lever
and release the latch.
4. If liftgate is left open for an extended period of
time, the liftgate may need to be closed manually
to reset power liftgate functionality.
84 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HANDS-FREE LIFTGATE
Hands-Free Liftgate Activation Zone
To open or close the liftgate using hands-free
activ
ation, use a straight in and out kicking motion
under the vehicle activation zone in the general
location between the park sensors. The activation zone
is about 1 ft (0.3 m) on each side from the centerline
of the vehicle. A sweeping motion under the activation
zone can also be used for hands-free activation to open
or close the liftgate.
NOTE:
The activation zone is the same for vehicles equipped
with or without a trailer tow package.
Valid Kicking Motion
When a valid kicking motion is comple
ted, the liftgate
will chime, the hazard lights will flash and the liftgate
will open after approximately one second, or close after
approximately three seconds. These settings can be
enabled or disabled through Uconnect Settings
ð
page 186.
NOTE:
● Opening or closing the Hands-Free Liftgate requires
a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of
the liftgate handle. If a valid Passive Entry key fob is
not within 5 ft (1.5 m), the liftgate will not respond to
any kicks, and will perform inhibit chimes to inform
the user about the missing key fob.
● The distance from the rear fascia/bumper to the
foot shall be no more than 8 inches (20 cm) to be
recognized as a valid kick.
● The Hands-Free Liftgate feature may be turned on or
off through the Uconnect system
ð
page 186.
● The Hands-F
ree Liftgate f
eature should be turned off
during jacking, tire changing, manual car wash, and
vehicle service.
● The Hands-Free Liftgate feature can be activated
by any metallic object making a similar in-and-out
motion under the rear fascia/bumper, such as
cleaning using a metal broom.
● The Hands-Free Liftgate will only operate when the
transmission is in PARK.
● If anything obstructs the Hands-Free Liftgate while it
is opening or closing, the liftgate will automatically
reverse to the closed/open position, provided it
meets sufficient resistance.
● The Hands-Free Liftgate will not open with the key
fob in the cupholder or anywhere inside the vehicle.
● There are pinch sensors attached to the side of
the liftgate opening. Light pressure anywhere along
these strips will cause the liftgate to return to the
open position.
● If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions
within the same cycle, the system will automatically
stop. If this occurs, the liftgate must be operated
manually.
● The power liftgate will release, but not power open,
in temperatures below −12°F (−24°C). Be sure to
remove any buildup of snow or ice from the liftgate
before opening the liftgate.
● If the liftgate is left open for an extended period
of time (approximately one hour), the liftgate may
need to be closed manually to reset power liftgate
functionality.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85
2
WARNING!
● Driving with the lif
tgate open can allow poisonous
e
xhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
● If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
NOTE:
Allow the power syst
em to open the liftgate. Manually
pushing or pulling the liftgate may activate the
liftgate obstacle detection feature and stop the power
operation or reverse its direction.
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgat
e travel path
is clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
before driving away.
CARGO AREA FEA
TURES
Cargo Storage
The load floor is designed for a maximum load of 300
lb (136 kg), and should be uniformly distributed over
the load floor.
Additional storage can be found under the storage lid.
To access the lower storage, lift the handle and raise
the storage lid.
Lift Load Floor Handle
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks
The cargo tie-downs, locat
ed on the cargo area sides,
should be used to safely secure loads when the vehicle
is moving. The cargo tie downs are designed for a
maximum load of 300 lb (136 kg) per tie-down.
Tie-Down Hooks
WARNING!
● Cargo tie-do
wns are not safe anchor
s for a child
seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident, a
tie-down could pull loose and allow the child seat
to come loose. A child could be badly injured. Use
only the anchors provided for child seat tethers.
● To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The
rear cargo space is intended for load carrying
purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit
in seats and use seat belts.
The weight and position of cargo and passengers
can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal
injury, follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle:
● Do not carry loads that exceed the load limits
described on the label attached to the left door
or left door center pillar.
● Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as
possible.
● Place as much cargo as possible in front of the
rear axle. Too much weight or improperly placed
weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the
vehicle to sway.
● Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top
of the seatback. This could impair visibility or
become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop
or accident.
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Foldable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped
The purpose of this cover is for priv
acy, not to secure
loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or protect
passengers from loose cargo.
Foldable Cargo Area Cover
To cover the cargo area:
1.
Remove the folded cover from the storage pouch,
and unfold using a twisting motion.
2. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the
slots on each side of the pillar trim.
Step 2
3. Hook the straps to the inside post of the rear head
restraint on each side.
Step 3
NOTE:
The liftgate may be opened with the cargo co
ver in
place.
To store the foldable cargo area cover, reverse the
installation steps and replace the cover into its storage
pouch.
Folding The Cargo Cover
1 — Remove Cover From Vehicle
2 — Twist Cover
3 — Push Twisted Cover Inward
4 — Place Folded Cover In Pouch
WARNING!
In a collision, a loose cargo cover in the vehicle could
cause injur
y. It could fly around in a sudden stop
and strik
e someone in the vehicle. Do not store the
cargo cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger
compartment. Remove the cover from the vehicle
when taken from its mounting. Do not store it in the
vehicle.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87
2
Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If
Equipped
The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to secure
loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or protect
passengers from loose cargo.
1. Grab the cover at the center handle and pull over
the cargo area.
2. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the
slots in the pillar trim cover.
3. The liftgate may be opened with the cargo cover in
place.
Rear Cargo Cover
WARNING!
In a collision, a loose cargo cover in the vehicle could
cause injur
y. It could fly around in a sudden stop
and strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store the
cargo cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger
compartment. Remove the cover from the vehicle
when taken from its mounting. Do not store it in the
vehicle.
Cargo Net — If Equipped
The rear cargo area may be equipped with a cargo net
to keep items secure while driving.
To attach the cargo net, the clips must be hooked
through the loops on both sides of the cargo area.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and side rails are designed to carry
weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The
load must not exceed 150 lb (68 kg), and should be
uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
The crossbars on your vehicle are delivered stowed in
the rear cargo bin. Crossbars should always be used
whenever cargo is placed on the roof rack. Check the
straps frequently to be sure that the load remains
securely attached.
The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo
inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does
not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
INSTALLING THE CROSSBARS
WARNING!
In a collision, loose crossbars in the vehicle could
cause injury. They could fly around in a sudden stop
and strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store the
crossbars on the cargo floor or in the passenger
compartment. Remove the crossbars from the vehicle
when taken from their mounting. Do not store them
in the vehicle.
There are two crossbars equipped with your vehicle.
They are located in the rear cargo bin, stored in foam
blocks.
There is also a packet of fastener screws and a Torx
wrench provided in the foam blocks. You can find the
packet of fastener screws in the left foam block and the
Torx wrench in the right foam block.
Stowed Crossbars
1 — Fastener Screws
2 — Torx Wrench
There are three positions that the crossbars can be
installed in. There are also tie-down loops next to each
crossbar location on both sides of the roof.
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To cover the cargo area:
Crossbar Locations
1 — Position 1
2 — Position 2
3 — Position 3
NOTE:
The crossbars should only be used in positions 1 and 2
or positions 1 and 3. They are no
t designed to be used
in positions 2 and 3.
Crossbar and Tie Down Loop Locations
1 — Crossbar Installation Location
2 — Tie-Down Loop Locations
Crossbar Directional Arrow
NOTE:
There are arrows on t
op of the crossbars that indicate
the direction that they should be installed. The arrows
should point forward toward the front of the vehicle.
To install the crossbars, refer to the following
procedure:
1. Remove the crossbars from the foam blocks.
2. Swivel the outboard stanchion on the crossbar
and rotate it 180 degrees around the bolt to the
open position. Open the outboard stanchion on the
opposite end of the crossbar as well.
Step 2
Open Outboard Stanchion (Underside Shown)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 89
2
3. Using the provided Torx wrench, loosen the Torx
bolts on both ends of the crossbar.
Step 3
4. Using the provided wrench and f
asteners, bolt the
fasteners to the side rail.
Torque Wrench Indicator
NOTE:
An indicator on the wrench will show when the
f
astener is tightened to the indicated torque
specification. The slanted line will line up with the
arrow when torquing.
Step 4
5. Tighten down the T
orx head bolts on the inboard
stanchion.
Step 5
NOTE:
It is important that the scre
ws are left loose until
both sides of the crossbar are secured to the rail.
6. Repeat steps 2-5 for the second crossbar in the
desired position.
Installed Crossbars
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving your
v
ehicle. Anything impr
operly secured to the roof rack,
crossbars, or the roof itself can fly off the vehicle,
particularly at high speeds, resulting in collisions,
personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof
rack cautions when carrying anything on your roof or
roof rack.
CAUTION!
● To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, DO
NOT carry an
y loads on the roof rack without the
crossbars installed. The load should be secured
and placed on top of the crossbars, not directly
on the roof. If it is necessary to place the load on
the roof, place a blanket or other protective layer
between the load and the roof surface.
(Continued)
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
● T
o avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do
not exceed the maximum r
oof rack load capacity
of 150 lb (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads
as evenly as possible and appropriately secure the
load and any protective layer placed between the
load and the roof surface.
● Load should always be secured to crossbars first,
with tie down loops used as additional securing
points if needed. Tie loops are intended as
supplementary tie down points only. Do not use
ratcheting mechanisms with the tie loops. Check
the straps and thumb wheels frequently to be sure
that the load remains securely attached.
● Long loads that extend over the windshield, such
as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large
frontal area should be secured to both the front
and rear of the vehicle.
● Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners
carefully when carrying large or heavy loads on
the roof rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes
or nearby truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift
to a load. This is especially true on large flat loads
and may result in damage to the cargo or your
vehicle.
REMOVING THE CROSSBARS
To remove the crossbars, refer to the following
procedure:
1. Using the provided Torx wrench, loosen the Torx
head bolts on the stanchion. Do this on both ends
of the crossbar.
Step 1
2. Using the provided wrench, remov
e the bolts that
secure the crossbar to the roof rail. Repeat this on
the other end of the crossbar.
Bolt Location
3. Depress the swing key, and swivel the outboard
stanchion 180 degrees back to the stowed
position.
Depress The Swing Key
Step 3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 91
2
crossbars on the cargo floor or in the passenger
compartment. Remove the crossbars from the vehicle
when taken from their mounting. Do not store them
in the vehicle.
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
4. Repeat steps 1-3 for the second crossbar.
5. Place the crossbars back into the foam blocks in
the rear cargo storage bin.
WARNING!
In a collision, loose crossbars in the vehicle could
cause injur
y. They could fly around in a sudden stop
and strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store the
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Holding the OK button on the Instrument Cluster Display controls located on the steering wheel will allow you to change your display from Digital to Analog.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 93
3
INS
TRUMENT C
LUSTER
DESCRIPTIONS
1. Speedometer
● Indicates vehicle speed.
2. Temperature Gauge
● The temperature gauge shows engine coolant
temperature. Any reading within the normal
range indicates that the engine cooling system
is operating satisfactorily.
● The pointer will likely indicate a higher
temperature when driving in hot weather, up
Scan me
mountain grades, or when towing a trailer. It
should not be allowed to exceed the upper
limits of the normal operating range.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. It is recommended to call an authorized
dealer for service if your vehicle overheats
ð
page 306.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage y
our vehicle. If the temperature gauge
reads “H” pull ov
er and stop the vehicle. Idle the
vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range. If
the pointer remains on the “H”, turn the engine
(Continued)
CAUTION!
off immediately and call an authorized dealer for
service.
3. Tachometer
● Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per
minute (RPM x 1000).
4. Fuel Gauge
● The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel
tank when the Keyless Push Button Ignition is in
the ON/RUN position.
● The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel
door is located.
NOTE:
The Instrument Cluster Warning Indicators will
illuminate briefly for a bulb check when the ignition is
first cycled.
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Holding the OK button on the Instrument Cluster
Display controls locat
ed on the steering wheel will allow
you to change your display from Digital to Analog.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Speedometer
● Indicates vehicle speed.
2. Temperature Gauge
● The temperature gauge shows engine coolant
temperature. Any reading within the normal
range indicates that the engine cooling system
is operating satisfactorily.
● The pointer will likely indicate a higher
temperature when driving in hot weather, up
mountain grades, or when towing a trailer. It
should not be allowed to exceed the upper
limits of the normal operating range.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 95
3
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous.
You or others could be badly burned by
steam or boiling coolant. It is recommended
to call an authorized dealer for service if your
vehicle overheats
ð
page 306.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system
could damage your vehicle. If the
tem
perature gauge reads “H” pull over and
stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the
air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the
pointer remains on the “H”, turn the engine
off immediately and call an authorized dealer
for service.
3. Tachometer
● Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per
minut
e (RPM x 1000).
4. Fuel Gauge
● The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel
tank when the Keyless Push Button Ignition is in
the ON/RUN position.
● The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel
door is located.
NOTE:
The Instrument Cluster Warning Indicators will
illuminate briefly for a bulb check when the ignition is
first cycled.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Depending on your vehicles trim level, features and
options may vary.
Your vehicle is equipped with an instrument cluster
display, which offers useful information to the driver.
With the ignition in the OFF mode, opening/closing
of a door will activate the display for viewing, and
display the total miles, or kilometers, in the odometer.
Your instrument cluster display is designed to display
important information about your vehicle’s systems
and features. Using a driver interactive display located
on the instrument panel, your instrument cluster
display can show how systems are working and give
you warnings when they are not. The steering wheel
mounted controls allow you to scroll through the
main menus and submenus. You can access the
specific information you want and make selections and
adjustments.
LOCATION AND CONTROLS
Instrument Cluster Display/Controls Location
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen
2 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mount
ed on the steering
wheel:
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INS
TRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
1 — Up Arrow Button
2 — OK Button
3 — Menu Button
4 — Left Arrow Button
5 — Down Arrow Button
6 — Right Arrow Button
1. Up Arrow Button
Push and release the up arrow button to scroll
upward through the main menu.
2. OK
Button
Push the OK button to access/select the
information screens or submenu screens of a main
menu item. Push and hold the OK button for one
second to reset displayed/selected features that
can be reset.
3. MENU Button
Push the MENU button to access/select the
information screens or submenu screens of the
Home Screen display. Push and hold the OK button
to enter edit mode.
4. Lef
t Arrow Button
Push the left arrow button to return to the main
menu from an info screen or submenu item.
5. Down Arrow Button
Push and release the down arrow button to
scroll downw
ard through the main menu.
6. Right Arrow Button
Push and release the right
arrow button
t
o access the inf
ormation screens or submenu
screens of a main menu it
em.
Displa
y Options
Holding OK will also allow you to change your display to
Digital or Analog.
● Digital theme will be the default theme
● Menu screen times out after 10 seconds. Press OK
to reactivate
● Speedometer must always be present
● Relevant warning notifications and other pop-up info
will still be displayed in the main screen area (in this
case the speed moves to the top)
Custom Tile Configuration
To customize the instrument cluster further, you are
able to select up to five tiles to display information
based on your needs.
● Press the MENU button for the Home Screen display
Menu Button
● Navigate Left or Right
to highlight desired tile
● Press OK to select the tile and navigate to the
selected submenu and press OK again to add your
selection to your tile view
● The main menu options of the home screen are
Driver Info, Vehicle Info, Navigation — If Equipped,
Audio, and Off Road
Customizable Tile Layout
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 97
3
You can customize your Instrument Cluster Display with
up to five tiles that may consist of the following:
NOTE:
These options may vary based on your vehicle trim
level.
● Navigation
○ Map (Route Set / Route Not Set)
○ Trip A / Trip B
● Vehicle Info
○ Coolant Temp
○ Trans Temp
○ Oil Temp
○ Oil Pressure
○ Battery Voltage
○ Oil Life
○ Tire Pressure
○ Fuel Economy
● Driver Info – If Equipped
○ Posted Speed Limit Sign
○ Driver Assist
● Audio
○ Audio Info
● Off Road – If Equipped
○ Selec-Terrain / Air Suspension Status
○ St
eering Angle
○ Pitch
○ Roll
● Trailer Tow – If Equipped
○ Trailer Trip
○ Trailer Brake
○ Trailer Tire Pressure
ENGINE OIL LIFE RESET
Oil Level
The 3.0L engine does not have a traditional “dipstick”
and there is no need to manually check the oil level
ð
page 297.
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an
engine oil change indicator system.
The “Oil Change Required” message
will display in the instrument cluster
display for five seconds after a single
chime has sounded, to indicate the
Scan me
system (after performing the scheduled maintenance),
refer to the following procedure.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition
Use the steering wheel instrument cluster display
controls for the following procedure(s):
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the ignition
in the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Push and release the down arrow button
to scroll downward through the main menu to
“Vehicle Info”.
3. Push and release the right arrow button to
access the “Oil Life” screen.
4. Push and hold the OK button to rese
t oil life. If
conditions are met, the gauge and numeric display
will update to show 100%. If conditions are not
met a pop-up message of “To reset oil life engine
must be off with ignition in run” will be displayed
(for five seconds), and the user will remain at the
Oil Life screen.
5. Push and release the up
or down arrow
button to exit the submenu screen.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminat
es when you start the
vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If
necessary, repeat this procedure.
Secondary Method Of Resetting Engine Oil Life
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the ignition
to the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
98 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT P
ANEL
next scheduled oil change interval. The engine
oil change indicator system is duty cycle based,
which means the engine oil change interval may
fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving style
and environmental conditions.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position. To
turn off the message temporarily, push and release the
OK or arrow buttons. To reset the oil change indicator
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three
times within 10 seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to
the OFF position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you start the
vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If
necessary, repeat this procedure.
DISPLAY AND MESSAGES
The instrument cluster display is located in the center
portion of the cluster and consist of multiple sections:
● Main Screen — The inner ring of the display will
illuminate in black under normal conditions, yellow
for noncritical warnings and red for critical warnings
● Submenu Dots — Whenever there are submenus
available, the position within the submenus is shown
here
● Reconfigurable Telltales/Information
● Gear Selector Status (PRND)
● Driver Interactive Display (Compass, Temp, Range to
Empty, Trip A, Trip B, Average Fuel Economy, Current
Fuel Economy and Time)
The instrument cluster display will normally display the
main menu or the screens of a selected feature of the
main menu. The main display area also displays pop-up
messages and warning or information messages. These
pop-up messages fall into several categories:
● Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for
five seconds and then returns to the previous
screen. Most of the messages of this type are then
stored (as long as the condition that activated it
remains active) and can be reviewed from the
“Messages” main menu item. Examples of this
message type are “Right Front Turn Signal Lamp
Out” and “Low Tire Pressure”.
● Unstored Messages
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until
the condition that activated the message is cleared.
Examples of this message type are “Turn Signal
On” (if a turn signal is left on) and “Lights On” (if
driver leaves the vehicle with the lights on).
● Unstored Messages Until RUN
These messages deal primarily with the Remote
Start feature. This message type is displayed until
the ignition is in the RUN state. Examples of this
message type are “Remote Start Canceled - Door
Ajar” and “Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to
Start”.
● Five Second Unstored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type
of message takes control of the main display
area for five seconds and then returns to the
previous screen. An example of this message type
is “Automatic High Beams On”.
Messages include the following, but not limited to:
NOTE:
Certain messages may require dealer service.
Front Seat Belts
U
nbuckled
Oil Change Due ACC Override
Driver Seat Belt
Unbuckled
Fuel Low Cruise Set To
XXX mph or
km/h
Passenger Seat
Belt Unbuckled
Service Anti-
lock Brake Sys-
tem
Service Shifter
Traction Control
Off
Service Elec-
tronic Throttle
Control
Tire Pressure
Screen With
Low Tire(s)
Washer Fluid
Low
Service Power
Steering
Service Tire
Pressure Sys-
tem
Oil Pressure
Low
Cruise Off Park Brake En-
gaged
Oil Level Low –
If Equipped
Cruise Ready Brake Fluid Low
Engine Temper-
ature Hot
Lights On Right Front Turn
Signal Light Out
Right Rear Turn
Signal Light Out
Left Front Turn
Signal Light Out
Left Rear Turn
Signal Light Out
Ignition or Ac-
cessory On
Vehicle Not In
Park
Remote Start
Active Push
Start Button
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 99
3
Remote Start
Canceled Fuel
Low
Remote Start
Canceled Hood
Open
Remote Start
Canceled Lift-
gate Open
Remote Start
Canceled Door
Open
Remote Start
Canceled Time
Expired
Remote Start
Disabled Start
To Reset
Service Air Bag
System
Service Air Bag
Warning Light
Door Open
Doors Open Hood Open Vehicle Speed
Too High To
Shift to D
Liftgate Open Shift Not Al-
lowed
Vehicle Speed is
Too High to Shift
to R
Vehicle Speed is
Too High to Shift
to P
Service Trans-
mission
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DISPLAY MENU ITEMS
The instrument cluster display can be used to view the
main menu items for several features. Use the up
and down arrow buttons to scroll through the driver
interactive display menu options until the desired menu
is reached.
NOTE:
Depending on the v
ehicle’s options, feature settings
may vary.
Main Menu
DRIVER INF
O
Push and release the up
or down arrow
button until the Driver Info icon/title is highlighted
in the instrument cluster display. Push the left or
right
arrow button to scroll through the information
submenus.
Speedome
t
er
Push and release the OK butt
on t
o toggle units (mph or
km/h) of the speedometer. Hold the OK button to toggle
between Analog and Digital speedometer.
Night Vision — If Equipped
Arrow buttons and submenu indicators
disappear after five seconds of menu
navigation inactivity. Pedestrian/Animal
icons will be displayed in the top left
location
ð
page 163.
Driver Assist — If Equipped
The Driver Assist screen indicates the current status
of ACC, Active Lane Management and Active Driving
Assist/Assist+/Pilot
ð
page 234.
VEHICLE INFO
Push and release the up
or down arrow button
until the Vehicle Info icon/title is highlighted in
the instrument cluster displa
y. Push the left
or
right arrow button to scroll through the information
submenus.
Fuel Economy
● Average F
uel Economy
● Current Fuel Economy
● Range To Empty
● Press the OK button to reset the average fuel
economy
NOTE:
The Range feature is not able to be reset through the
instrument cluster display controls.
Gauge Summary
● Coolant Temperature — If Equipped
Displays the current temperature of the coolant.
● Transmission Temperature
Displays the actual transmission temperature.
● Oil Temperature
Displays the actual oil temperature.
● Oil Pressure
Displays the actual oil pressure.
● Battery Voltage
Displays the current voltage level of the battery.
Oil Life
● Displays the current oil life of the vehicle.
Oil Level — If Equipped
● Displays the current oil level of the vehicle
ð
page
100 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
297.
● If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle icon is
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of
the icon.
● If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate Tire
To XX” is displayed with the vehicle icon and the
tire pressure values in each corner of the icon with
the pressure value of the low tire are displayed in a
different color than the other tire pressure value.
● If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Service
Tire Pressure System” is displayed.
Tire Pressure is an information only function, and
cannot be reset
ð
page 239.
Stop/Start Status — If Equipped
● Display current status of Stop/Start system.
TRIP
Push and release the up
or down arrow button
until the Trip menu title is displayed in the instrument
cluster display. Toggle the left
or right arrow button
t
o select Trip A or Trip B. The Trip information will display
the following:
● Distance – Shows the total distance (mi or km)
traveled for Trip A or Trip B since the last reset.
● Average Fuel Economy – Shows the average fuel
economy (MPG or L/100 km or km/L) of Trip A or
Trip B since the last reset.
● Elapsed Time – Shows the total elapsed time of
travel since Trip A or Trip B has been reset.
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
NA
VIG
A
TION — IF EQUIPPED
Push and release the lef
t
or right arrow button
until the Navigation display icon/title is highlighted in
the instrument cluster display.
● “Hold OK to Start Route” will display when no active
route is set.
● “Hold OK to Cancel Route” will display when an
active route is set.
OFF ROAD
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Off Road Menu icon/title is highlighted.
Push the left or right arrow button to scroll the
submenus.
● Terrain Status
○ Selec-Terrain Status
○ Air Suspension Status
● Vehicle Dynamics
○ Wheel Ar
ticulation
○ Transfer Case Status
○ Steering Angle
● Pitch And Roll
○ Vehicle Pitch
○ Vehicle Roll
TRAILER TOW — IF EQUIPPED
Push and release the up
or down arrow button
until the Trailer Tow Menu icon/title is highlighted in the
instrument clust
er display. Push and release the lef
t
or right arrow button to select Trailer Trip or Trailer
Brake.
Trailer Trip will display the f
ollowing:
● Distance
NOTE:
Press and hold the OK button to reset all the
information.
Trailer Brake will display the following:
● Output
● Type
● Gain
AUDIO
Push and release the up
or down arrow button
until the Audio Menu icon/title is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display
. This menu will display the
audio source information, including the Song name,
Artist name, and audio source with an accompanying
graphic.
MESSAGES
Push and release the up
or down arrow button
until the Messages Menu item is highlighted. This
feature shows the number of st
ored warning messages.
Pushing the left
or right arrow button will allow you
to see what the stored messages are.
When no messages are present, main menu icon will
be a closed envelope.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 101
3
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
SETTINGS
NOTE:
If current theme is set to Digital, tachomet
er will not
display while in the Settings menu.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with Head Up Display (HUD),
feature settings are available at any vehicle speed
ð
page 102.
Screen Setup
Push and release the up
or down arrow button
until the Settings Menu icon/title is highlighted in
the instrument cluster display
. Push and release the
OK button to enter the submenus and follow the
prompts on the screen as needed. The Settings feature
allows you to change what information is displayed
in the instrument cluster as well as the location that
information is displayed.
Upper Left or Upper Right
None Fuel Economy
Average
Compass
Outside Tem
p Trip A Distance Time
Range To Empty
(RTE)
Trip B Distance Fuel Economy
Current
Trailer Trip
Current Gear
● On
● Off
Odometer
● Show
● Hide
F
avorit
e Menus
Driver info Stored Messag-
es
Audio (Show/
Hide)
Trip Info (Show/
Hide)
Vehicle Info Trailer Tow
(Show/Hide)
Off Road
(Show/Hide)
Na
vigation
(Show/Hide)
Settings
HUD
NOTE:
Menus with (show/hide) can push the OK button to
choose whether t
o show or hide this menu on the
instrument cluster display.
Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default Settings)
● Restore
● Cancel
HEAD UP DISPLA
Y (HUD) — IF EQUIPPED
NO
TE:
The HUD feature Settings are available at any vehicle
speed. Some information like speed limit or Driver
Assist will not appear on the HUD unless your vehicle
is equipped Traffic Sign Assist or Driver Assist systems.
Push and release the up
or down arrow button
until the Settings Menu icon/title is highlighted in
the instrument cluster display
. Push and release the
left
right arrow button until the HUD Menu icon/
title is highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Push and release the OK
button to enter HUD. Use the
up
or down arrow button to select a setting, then
push and release the OK button to adjust the setting.
● ON/OFF
Scan me
102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
HUD ON/OFF
When “Display On” is selected, the HUD will display
on the windshield. When it is not select
ed, nothing
will display on the windshield.
● Content and Layout
○ Simple: Speed, Speed Limit
○ Standard: Speed, Speed Limit, Navigation
Standard Mode
When “Standard” mode is selected, the HUD
image is split into thirds with the speed limit
indicator shown to the left, vehicle speed in the
center, and turn-by-turn navigation to the right.
○ Advanced: Speed, Speed Limit, Navigation, Driver
Assist (ACC/Cruise, Active Lane Management,
Active Driving Assist), Gear (only available in Sport
mode)
Advanced Mode
When “Advanced” mode is selected, the
HUD displays the vehicle speed, turn-by-turn
navigation, speed limit, driver assist function(s),
and current gear.
○ Custom 1: Speed, Speed Limit
○ Custom 2: Speed, Speed Limit, Navigation
○ Custom 3: Speed, Speed Limit, Navigation, Driver
Assist (ACC/Cruise, Active Lane Management,
Active Driving Assist)
○ Custom 4: Speed, Speed Limit, Navigation, Driver
Assist (ACC/Cruise, Active Lane Management,
Active Driving Assist), Gear (only available in Sport
mode)
● Display Height
● Brightness
NO
TE:
● The HUD basic settings (Brightness, Display Height
and Non Custom layouts), are controlled through the
Settings Screen in the Instrument Cluster
ð
page
96.
● If current theme is set to Digital, tachometer will not
display while in the Settings menu.
BATTERY SAVER ON/BATTERY SA
VER MODE
MESSAGE — ELECTRICAL LOAD REDUCTION
ACTIONS (IF EQUIPPED)
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery
Sensor (IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the
electrical system and status of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure,
or the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating,
electrical load reduction actions will take place to
extend the driving time and distance of the vehicle.
This is done by reducing power to or turning off non-
essential electrical loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is
running. It will display a message if there is a risk of
battery depletion to the point where the vehicle may
stall due to lack of electrical supply, or will not restart
after the current drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message “Battery
Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will appear in the
instrument cluster.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 103
3
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low
state of charge and continues to lose electrical charge
at a rate that the charging system cannot sustain.
NOTE:
● The charging system is independent from load
reduction. The charging system performs a
diagnostic on the charging system continuously.
● If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may
indicate a problem with the charging system
ð
page 105.
The following are electrical loads that may be switched
off (if equipped), and vehicle functions which can be
affected by load reduction:
● Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
● Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
● HVAC System
● 115 Volt AC Power Inverter System
● Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of
the following conditions:
● The charging system cannot deliver enough
electrical power to the vehicle system because the
electrical loads are larger than the capability of
the charging system. The charging system is still
functioning properly.
● Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g.
HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights,
overloaded power outlets +12 Volt, 115 Volt AC, USB
ports) during certain driving conditions (city driving,
towing, frequent stopping, etc.).
● Installing options lik
e additional lights, upfitter
electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms and
similar de
vices.
● Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long
parking periods).
● The vehicle was parked for an extended period of
time (weeks, months).
● The battery was recently replaced and was not
charged completely.
● The battery was discharged by an electrical load left
on when the vehicle was parked.
● The battery was used for an extended period with
the engine not running to supply radio, lights,
chargers, +12 Volt portable appliances like vacuum
cleaners, game consoles and similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction action
message is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery
Saver Mode”)
During a trip:
● Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
○ Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)
○ Check what may be plugged in to power outlets
+12 Volt, 115 Volt AC, USB ports
○ Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
○ Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
● Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed
(additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories,
audio systems, alarms) and review specifications if
an
y (load and Ignition Off Draw currents).
● Evaluat
e the latest driving cycles (distance, driving
time and parking time).
● The vehicle should have service performed if the
message is still present during consecutive trips,
and if the evaluation and driving pattern of the
vehicle did not help to identify the cause.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the
instrument panel together with a dedicated message
and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These
indications are indicative and precautionary and as
such must not be considered as exhaustive and/or
alternative to the information contained in the Owner’s
Manual, which you are advised to read carefully in all
cases. Always refer to the information in this chapter in
the event of a failure indication. All active telltales will
display first if applicable. The system check menu may
appear different based upon equipment options and
current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and
may not appear.
RED WARNING LIGHTS
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
a fault with the air bag, and will turn on
for four to eight seconds as a bulb check
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position. This light will illuminate with a single chime
when a fault with the air bag has been detected, it will
104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light is either not
on during startup, stays on, or turns on while driving,
have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake
functions, including brake fluid level and
parking brake application. If the brake light
turns on it may indicate that the parking
brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or
that there is a problem with the Anti-Lock Brake System
reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has
been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark
on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible
brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem
with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-
Lock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on
until the condition has been corrected. If the problem
is related to the brake booster, the ABS pump will run
when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation
may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking
capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the
hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake
system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which
will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master
cylinder has dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering
maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The
vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked
by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to
the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for
approximately two seconds. The light should then turn
off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault
is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the
light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is applied.
It does not show the degree of brake application.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
battery is no
t charging properly. If it stays
on while the engine is running, there may
be a malfunction with the charging system.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the electrical
system or a related component.
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is
ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
Drowsy Driver Detected Warning Light —
If Equipped
The Drowsy Driver Detected (DDD) system,
monitors certain vehicle movement and
driver interactions to identify patterns
suggesting drowsiness. If detected, the
system sends the driver an auditory and visual signal
to take precaution. A pop-up will display continuously
until the driver presses the OK button to clear.
Once the pop-up message is cleared, it is stored until
the condition is no longer true
ð
page 227.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 105
3
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault
Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when there's a
fault with the EPS system
ð
page
130.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose
a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
a pr
oblem with the ETC system. If a problem
is detected while the vehicle is running, the
light will either stay on or flash depending
on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition when
the vehicle is safely and completely stopped and
the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The
light should turn off. If the light remains on with the
vehicle running, your vehicle will usually be drivable;
however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon
as possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake
pedals are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
running, immediate service is required and you may
experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough
idle, or engine stall and your vehicle may require
towing. The light will come on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position and remain on briefly
as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during
starting, have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Light
This warning light warns of an overheated
engine condition. If the engine coolant
temperature is too high, this indicator will
illuminate and a single chime will sound. If
the temperature reaches the upper limit, a continuous
chime will sound for four minutes or until the engine is
able to cool; whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C) system
is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL (N) and idle the vehicle. If the temperature
reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service
ð
page 285.
Hood Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
hood is left open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
Liftgate Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
liftgate is open.
NO
TE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
Night Vision Animal Detected Warning
Light — If Equipped
The Night Vision Animal Warning Light
will illuminate in red when an animal is
detected directly in the vehicle’s path, near
the headlights, and a collision is possible.
If enabled, a chime will sound and a video pop-up may
display when a detection occurs.
Night Vision Pedestrian Detected
Warning Light — If Equipped
The Night Vision Pedestrian Warning Light
will illuminate in red when a pedestrian is
detected directly in the vehicle’s path, near
the headlights, and a collision is possible.
If enabled, a chime will sound and a video pop-up may
display when a detection occurs.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on
while driving, stop the vehicle, shut off the
engine as soon as possible, and contact an
106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
authorized dealer. A chime will sound when this light
turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the
engine.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
the engine oil temperature is high. If the
light turns on while driving, safely pull over
and stop the vehicle (keep engine running).
If the temperature does not return to normal after a few
minutes, turn off the engine and call for service.
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the driver
or passenger seat belt is unbuckled. When
the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN
position and if the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will turn
on. When driving, if the driver or front passenger seat
belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will
sound
ð
page 243.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
— If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to warn of
a high transmission fluid temperature. This
may occur with strenuous usage such as
trailer towing. If this light turns on, stop the
vehicle and run the engine at idle or slightly faster,
with the transmission in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), until
the light turns off. Once the light turns off, you may
continue to drive normally.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when
the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is
illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil
over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission
Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually
cause severe transmission damage or transmission
failure.
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If
Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate f
or
approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle
security system is arming, and then will
flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
This warning light monitors the ABS. The
light will turn on when the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for
as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving,
then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not
functioning and service is required as soon as possible.
However, the conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning Light is
not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position, have the brake system
inspected by an authorized dealer.
Air Suspension Fault Warning Light
This light will illuminate when there is a fault
detected in the air suspension system.
Drowsy Driver Detected System Fault
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
Drowsy Driver Detected (DDD) system is
not operating correctly and requires service.
Please see an authorized dealer.
Electric Park Brake Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
the Electric Park Brake is not functioning
properly and service is required. Contact an
authorized dealer.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 107
3
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light
This warning light will indicate when the
ESC system is A
ctive. The ESC Indicator
Light in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position, and when ESC is activated. It should go out
with the engine running. If the ESC Indicator Light
comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system.
If this warning light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h),
see an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have
the problem diagnosed and corrected.
● The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indicator
Light come on momentarily each time the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position.
● The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive.
● This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC
event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light
This warning light indicates the ESC is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN,
the ESC system will be on, even if it was
turned off previously.
Service Active Lane Management
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
A
ctive Lane Management system is not
operating and requires service. Please see
an authorized dealer.
Active Lane Management Warning Light
— If Equipped
The Active Lane Management Warning Light
will be solid yellow when the vehicle is
approaching a lane marker. The warning
light will flash when the vehicle is crossing
the lane marker
ð
page 159.
Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2
gal (7.5 L), this light will turn on and a chime
will sound. The light will remain on until fuel
is added.
Fuel Cutoff Failure Warning Light — If
Equipped
This light will illuminate if there is a fuel
cutoff failure. If this light illuminates, take
it to an authorized dealer and have them
inspect it.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
windshield washer fluid is low
ð
page
299.
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicat
or
Warning Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard
Diagnostic System called OBD II
that monitors engine and automatic
transmission control systems. This warning light will
illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position
before engine start. If the bulb does not come on when
turning the ignition switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have
the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several typical driving styles. In most
situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not
require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert
serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss
of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The
vehicle should be serviced by an authorized dealer as
soon as possible if this occurs.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
previously, can reach higher temperatures than in
(Continued)
108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
normal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if
you drive slowly or park over flammable substances
such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This
could result in death or serious injury to the driver,
occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
Night Vision Animal Detected Warning
Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the Night
Vision Warning Syst
em has detected an
animal approaching in the vehicle’s path.
Night Vision Pedestrian Detected
Warning Light — If Equipped
This indicator light alerts the driver that
the Night Vision System has detected a
pedestrian approaching in the vehicle’s
path.
Oil Level Sensor Fault Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to indicat
e
a fault with the engine oil level sensor.
Contact an authorized dealer for service.
Service 4WD Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to signal a
fault with the 4WD system. If the light stays
on or comes on during driving, it means that
the 4WD system is not functioning properly
and that service is required. We recommend you drive
to the nearest service center and have the vehicle
serviced immediately.
Service Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Warning Light
This light will turn on when the ACC is not
operating and needs service
ð
page 134.
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Or Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB)
Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
a fault in the FCW or PEB System. Contact
an authorized dealer for service
ð
page
237.
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the Stop/Start syst
em is not functioning
properly and service is required. Contact an
authorized dealer for service.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a
message is displayed to indicate that
the tire pressure is lower than the
recommended value and/or that slow
pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal tire
duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned
previously, the display will show the indications
corresponding to each tire.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires
as handling may be compromised. Stop the v
ehicle,
avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture
occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire
repair kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the v
ehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the
size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 109
3
pressure label, you should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low
tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility
to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system
is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction
indicator is combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the
telltale will flash for approximately one minute and
then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as
long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able
to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,
including the installation of replacement or alternate
tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement
or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly
ð
page 239.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established f
or the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants
may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an
aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you
take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
Towing Hook Breakdown Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light illuminates when there is a failure
with the to
w hook. Contact an authorized
dealer for service.
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle
is in the 4WD Low mode. The front and
rear driveshafts are mechanically locked
together forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. Low range provides a greater
gear reduction ratio to provide increased torque at the
wheels
ð
page 125.
Air Suspension Active Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This light will illuminate when the air
suspension system is actively adjusting the
ride height
ð
page 127.
Air Suspension Aerodynamic Height
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the
air suspension system is set to the
Aerodynamic setting
ð
page 127.
Air Suspension Entry/Exit Indicator Light
— If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the vehicle is
manually or automatically lowered from ride
height position downward for easy entry and
exit of the vehicle
ð
page 127.
Air Suspension Off-Road 1 Indicator Light
— If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the air
suspension system is set to the Off-Road 1
setting
ð
page 127.
110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Air Suspension Off-Road 2 Indicator Light
— If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the air
suspension system is set t
o the Off-Road 2
setting
ð
page 127.
Auto HOLD! Fault Indicator Light — If
Equipped
The Auto HOLD! Fault Indicator light will
illuminate if a fault is detected. The fault will
be indicated by a yellow ‘HOLD!’ indicator
light that will stay on as long as the fault
condition exists.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Or
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) Off
Indicator Light
This indicator light illuminates to indicate
that FCW or PEB is off
ð
page 237.
Maximum Payload Exceeded Indicator
Light
This light indicates that the maximum
payload may have been exceeded or load
leveling cannot be achieved at its current
ride height.
NEUTRAL Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the 4WD
power transf
er case is in the NEUTRAL
mode and the front and rear driveshafts are
disengaged from the powertrain.
TOW/HAUL Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when
TOW/HAUL mode is selected.
GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
Target Indicator Light — If Equipped
This will display when the ACC is set and the
vehicle in front is detected
ð
page 134.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
No Target Detected Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This will display when the ACC is set and the
vehicle in front is not detected
ð
page
134.
Auto HOLD Indicator Light — If Equipped
Auto HOLD keeps your vehicle at a complete
stop without you having to keep your
foot on the brake pedal. Once engaged a
green “HOLD” indicator will appear in the
Instrument Cluster Display.
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
cruise control is se
t to the desired speed
ð
page 134.
Front Fog Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the
front fog lights are on
ð
page 55.
Active Lane Management Indicator Light
— If Equipped
The Active Lane Management indicator light
illuminates solid green when both lane
markings have been detected and the
system is “armed” and ready to provide
visual and torque warnings if an unintentional lane
departure occurs
ð
page 159.
Night Vision Active Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the Night
Vision Warning System status is Active
ð
page 163.
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the
parking lights or headlights are turned on
ð
page 55.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 111
3
Sport Mode Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Sport mode is
active.
Stop/Start A
ctive Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the
Stop/Start function is in “Autostop” mode
ð
page 131.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is
activated, the turn signal indicator will
flash independently and the corresponding
exterior turn signal lamps will flash. Turn
signals can be activated when the multifunction lever is
moved down (left) or up (right).
NOTE:
● A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
● Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when ACC has been
turned on, but is not set
ð
page 134.
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the
cruise control is ready, but no
t set
ð
page
132.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light
— If Equipped
This indicator shows when the HDC feature
is turned on. The light will be on solid when
HDC is armed. HDC can only be armed
when the transfer case is in the 4WD Low
position and the vehicle speed is less than 30 mph (48
km/h). If these conditions are not met while attempting
to use the HDC feature, the HDC indicator light will flash
on/off.
Active Lane Management Indicator Light
— If Equipped
When the Active Lane Management system
is ON, but not armed, the Active Lane
Management indicator light illuminates
solid white. This occurs when only left, right,
or neither lane line has been detected. If a single
lane line is detected, the system is ready to provide
only visual warnings if an unintentional lane departure
occurs on the detected lane line
ð
page 159.
Rear Seat Unoccupied Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light indicates when the rear passenger
seats are unoccupied, and will illuminate in
the upper right portion of the instrument
cluster display, momentarily replacing the configurable
corner information.
Selec-Speed Control Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This light will turn on when Selec-Speed
Control is activated.
To activate Selec-Speed Control, ensure the
vehicle is in 4WD Low and push the button
on the Instrument Panel.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is not in 4WD Low, “To Enter Selec-Speed
Shift to 4WD Low” will appear in the instrument cluster
display.
BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate
that the high beam headlights are on.
With the low beams activated, push the
multifunction lever forward (toward the front
of the vehicle) to turn on the high beams. Pull the
multifunction lever rearward (toward the rear of the
vehicle) to turn off the high beams. If the high beams
are off, pull the lever toward you for a temporary high
beam on, “flash to pass” scenario.
112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
GRAY INDICATOR LIGHTS
Night Vision Suppressed Indicator Light
— If Equipped
This light alerts the driv
er that the Night
Vision Warning System status is Suppressed
ð
page 163.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine
emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II
system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other
information to assist your service technician in making
repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be driveable
and not need towing, see an authorized dealer for
service as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
● Pr
olonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system.
It could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any
emissions tests can be performed.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
● If the MIL is flashing while the v
ehicle is running,
severe catalytic conv
erter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (
OBD II)
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle is required to have OBD II and a
connection port to allow access to information related
to the performance of your emissions controls.
Authorized service technicians may need to access this
information to assist with the diagnosis and service of
your vehicle and emissions system
ð
page 186.
WARNING!
● ONL
Y an authorized service technician should
connect equipment to the OBD II connection port
in or
der to read the VIN, diagnose, or service your
vehicle.
● If unauthorized equipment is connected to the
OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior
tracking device, it may:
○ Be possible that vehicle systems, including
safety related systems, could be impaired or
a loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
○ Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including
personal information.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement
to pass an inspection of your vehicle's emissions
control system. Failure to pass could prevent vehicle
registration.
For states that require an Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies
the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is
functioning and is not on when the engine is
running, and that the OBD II system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD
II system may not be ready if your vehicle was
recently serviced, recently had a depleted battery or
a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be
determined not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may
fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check
if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the
following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the
ON position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal
bulb check.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 113
3
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things
will happen:
● The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and
then return to being fully illuminated until you
turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This
means that your vehicle's OBD II system is not
ready and you should not proceed to the I/M
station.
● The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off
position or start the engine. This means that
your vehicle's OBD II system is ready and you
can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see
an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle
was recently serviced or had a battery failure or
replacement, you may need to do nothing more than
drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for
your OBD II system to update. A recheck with the
previously mentioned test routine may then indicate
that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can
fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
114 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and
if present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their
seat belts.
WARNING!
● Bef
ore exiting a vehicle, always come to
a complete st
op, then shift the automatic
transmission into PARK and apply the parking
brake.
● Always make sure the keyless ignition node is in
the OFF position, key fob is removed from the
vehicle and vehicle is locked.
● Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in
a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
● Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in the ON/RUN position. A
(Continued)
WARNING!
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
● Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL (N) or PARK
(P) position bef
ore you can start the engine. Apply the
brakes before shifting into any driving gear.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
following precautions are not observ
ed:
● Do not shift from REVERSE (R), PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
● Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
● Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
● Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ — IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operat
e the ignition
switch with the push of a button, as long as the Remote
Start/Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ key fob is in the passenger
compartment.
NORMAL STARTING
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE START/STOP
Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK (P).
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior
to the engine starting, push the ENGINE START/
STOP button again.
To Turn Off The Engine Using The ENGINE START/STOP
Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and
release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition will return to the OFF position.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE
START/STOP button must be held for two seconds
or three short pushes in a row with the vehicle
STARTING AND OPERATING 115
4
speed above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine
will shut off. The ignition will remain in the
ON/RUN position until the gear selector is in PARK
and the button is pushed twice to the OFF position.
4. If the gear selector is not in PARK and the
ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once with
the vehicle speed above 5 mph (8 km/h), the
instrument cluster will display a “Vehicle Not In
Park” message and the engine will remain running.
Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position, or it
could roll.
NOTE:
If the gear selector is not in PARK, and the ENGINE
START/STOP button is pushed once with the vehicle
speed below 5 mph (8 km/h), the engine will shut off
and the ignition will remain in the ON/RUN position.
If vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), the
vehicle may AutoPark
ð
page 116.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With Driver’s
Foot Off The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL
Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to
an ignition switch. It has two positions: OFF, and
RUN. To change the ignition positions without starting
the vehicle and use the accessories, follow these
directions:
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF position.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second
time to return the ignition to the OFF position.
NOTE:
Only press one pedal at a time while driving the vehicle.
Torque performance of the vehicle could be reduced if
both pedals are pressed at the same time. If pressure
is detected on both pedals simultaneously, a warning
message will display in the instrument cluster
ð
page 93.
AUTOPARK
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist with
placing the vehicle in PARK (P) should the situations
on the following pages occur. It is a back-up system and
should not be relied upon as the primary method by
which the driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will engage are
outlined on the following pages.
WARNING!
● Driv
er inattention could lead to failure to place the
vehicle in PARK. ALW
AYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that
your vehicle is in PARK by verifying that a solid
(not blinking) “P” is indicated in the instrument
cluster display and on the gear selector. If the "P"
indicator is blinking, your vehicle is not in PARK.
As an added precaution, always apply the parking
brake when exiting the vehicle.
● AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not
designed to replace the need to shift your vehicle
into PARK. It is a back-up system and should not
be relied upon as the primary method by which the
driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns off the
engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are
met:
● Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed transmission
● Vehicle is not in PARK
● Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
● Ignition is switched from RUN to OFF
NOTE:
For Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ equipped vehicles, the
engine will turn off and the ignition switch will change
to ON/RUN position. After 30 minutes the ignition
switches to OFF automatically, unless the driver turns
the ignition switch OFF.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits
the vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle may
AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are
met:
● Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed transmission
● Vehicle is not in PARK
● Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
● Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
● Driver’s door is ajar
● Brake pedal is not pressed
The message “AutoPark Engaged Shift To P Then Shift
To Gear” will display in the instrument cluster.
116 S
TARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be displayed
in the instrument cluster. In these cases, the gear
selector must be returned to “P” to select desired gear.
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the vehicle
may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage ONLY when vehicle speed is 1.2
mph (1.9 km/h) or less.
The message “Vehicle Speed Is Too High To Shift To
P” will be displayed in the instrument cluster if vehicle
speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h).
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), the
transmission will default to NEUTRAL until the vehicle
speed drops below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h). A vehicle
left in the NEUTRAL position can roll. As an added
precaution, always apply the parking brake when
exiting the vehicle.
4WD LOW — If Equipped
AutoPark will be disabled when operating the vehicle in
4WD LOW.
The message “AutoPark Disabled” will be displayed in
the instrument cluster.
Additional customer warnings will be given when both
of these conditions are met:
● Vehicle is not in PARK
● Driver’s door is ajar
The message “AutoPark Not Engaged” will be displayed
in the instrument cluster. A warning chime will continue
until you shift the vehicle into PARK or the driver’s door
is closed.
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is
in PARK by looking for the "P" in the instrument
cluster display and on the gear selector. As an added
precaution, always apply the parking brake when exiting
the vehicle.
EXTENDED PARK STARTING
NOTE:
Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle has
not been started or driven for at least 30 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the
battery to ensure a full battery charge during the
crank cycle.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds, wait
10 to 15 seconds to allow the starter to cool, then
repeat the Extended Park Starting procedure.
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts,
allow the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes,
then repeat the Extended Park Starting procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank
continuously for more than 10 seconds at a time.
Wait 10 t
o 15 seconds before trying again.
IF ENGINE FAILS TO START
If the engine fails t
o start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” procedure and has not experienced
an extended park condition as defined previously, it
may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all the
way to the floor and hold it there while the engine
is cranking. This should clear any excess fuel in case
the engine is flooded. The starter motor will engage
automatically, run for 10 seconds, and then disengage.
Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal and the
brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
“Normal Starting” procedure.
WARNING!
● Ne
ver pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an att
empt to
start the vehicle. This could result in flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
● Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle
to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission cannot be started this
way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic
converter and once the engine has started, ignite
and damage the converter and vehicle.
● If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a
booster battery or the battery in another vehicle.
This type of start can be dangerous if done
improperly
ð
page 283.
STARTING AND OPERATING 117
4
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously
crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time.
Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
COLD WEATHER OPERATION (
BELOW –
22°F OR −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use
of an externally powered electric engine block heater
(available from an authorized dealer) is recommended.
AFTER STARTING
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
TURBOCHARGER “COOL DOWN” — 3.0L
ENGINE ONLY
The 3.0L engine is equipped with an after-run pump
to cool the turbocharger after the engine is shut off.
Depending on the type of driving and the amount of
cargo, the pump will run for up to 20 minutes after the
engine has been shut off to circulate coolant through
the turbocharger. Although the pump is rubber-mounted
for quiet operation, it is normal to hear it running during
this time.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to
a standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heat
er must be plugged in at least
one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the
engine.
The engine block heater cord is coiled and strapped
right behind the engine air cleaner filter assembly from
the manufacturer.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
An initial break-in period is recommended for the
powertrain (engine, transmission, axle, etc.) in your
vehicle. Adhering to the following guidelines will
contribute to improved longevity, fuel economy, and
performance.
Drive moderately during the first 100 miles (160 km).
After that, for the first 500 miles (800 km), avoid long
periods at constant speed. Varying speed, engine RPM,
and throttle position is desirable.
Avoid high performance, severe off-road, and towing for
the first 500 miles (800 km).
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (km) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in
and not interpreted as a problem. For engines not
equipped with an oil level sensor, please check your
oil level frequently during the break-in period. Add
manufacturer-approved oil as required
ð
page 354.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result. ONLY USE OILS
THAT ARE API APPRO
VED
ð
page 354.
PARKING BRAKE
ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB)
Your vehicle is equipped with an EPB that off
ers simple
operation, and some additional features that make the
parking brake more convenient and useful.
The parking brake is primarily intended to prevent the
vehicle from rolling while parked. Before leaving the
vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is applied.
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
You can engage the parking brake in two ways:
● Manually, by applying the EPB switch.
● Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake
feature in the customer programmable features
section of the Uconnect settings.
The EPB switch is located on the instrument panel to
the left of the steering wheel (below the headlamp
switch).
118 STARTING AND OPERATING
Electric Park Brake Switch
To apply the parking brake manually, pull up on the
switch momentarily
. You may hear a sound from the
back of the vehicle while the parking brake engages.
Once the parking brake is fully engaged, the Brake
Warning Light in the instrument cluster and an indicator
on the switch will illuminate. If your foot is on the brake
pedal while you apply the parking brake, you may notice
a small amount of brake pedal movement. The parking
brake can be applied even when the ignition switch
is OFF but the Brake Warning Light will not illuminate,
however, it can only be released when the ignition is in
the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
The EPB Warning Light will illuminate if the EPB switch
is held for longer than 20 seconds in either the
released or applied position. The light will extinguish
upon releasing the switch.
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the
parking brake will automatically engage whenever the
transmission is placed in PARK. If your foot is on the
brake pedal, you may notice a small amount of brake
pedal mo
vement while the parking brake is engaging.
The par
king brake will release automatically when the
ignition is ON, the transmission is in DRIVE or REVERSE,
the driver’s seat belt is buckled, and an attempt is
made to drive away.
To release the parking brake manually, the ignition
switch must be in the ON/RUN position. Put your foot
on the brake pedal, then push the EPB switch down
momentarily. You may hear a sound from the back
of the vehicle while the parking brake disengages.
You may also notice a small amount of movement
in the brake pedal. Once the parking brake is fully
disengaged, the Brake Warning Light in the instrument
cluster and the LED indicator on the switch will
extinguish.
NOTE:
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade
and away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply
the parking brake before placing the gear selector in
PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking
mechanism may make it difficult to move the gear
selector out of PARK.
WARNING!
● Ne
ver use the PARK position as a substitute
for the parking brake. Alw
ays apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● When e
xiting the vehicle, always turn the ignition
off, secure the key f
ob, and lock your vehicle.
● Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children
to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for
a number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the gear selector.
● Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter
‘n Go™ in the ON/RUN position. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
● Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to a brake
failure and a collision.
● Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on
with the parking brake released, a brake system
malfunction is indicat
ed. Have the brake system
serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
STARTING AND OPERATING 119
4
If exceptional circumstances should make it necessary
to engage the parking brake while the vehicle is in
motion, maintain upward pressure on the EPB switch
for as long as engagement is desired. The Brake
Warning Light will illuminate, and a continuous chime
will sound. The rear stop lamps will also be illuminated
automatically while the vehicle remains in motion.
To disengage the parking brake while the vehicle is in
motion, release the switch. If the vehicle is brought to
a complete stop using the parking brake, when the
vehicle reaches approximately 3 mph (5 km/h), the
parking brake will remain engaged.
WARNING!
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake engaged,
or repeated use of the parking brake to slow the
vehicle, may cause serious damage to the brake
system. Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the EPB
system, a yellow EPB Warning Light will illuminate.
This may be accompanied by the Brake Warning Light
flashing. In this event, urgent service of the EPB system
is required. Do not rely on the parking brake to hold the
vehicle stationary.
Auto Park Brake
The EPB can be programmed to be applied
automatically whenever the vehicle is at a standstill and
the transmission is placed in PARK. Auto Park Brake is
enabled and disabled by customer selection through
the customer programmable features section of the
Uconnect Settings
ð
page 201.
Any single Auto Park Brake application can be bypassed
by pushing the EPB switch to the release position while
the transmission is placed in PARK.
SafeHold
SafeHold is a safety feature of the EPB system that will
engage the parking brake automatically if the vehicle is
left unsecured while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
The parking brake will automatically engage if all of the
following conditions are met:
● The vehicle is at a standstill.
● There is no attempt to press the brake pedal or
accelerator pedal.
● The seat belt is unbuckled.
● The driver’s door is open.
SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by pushing
the EPB switch while the driver’s door is open. Once
manually bypassed, SafeHold will be enabled again
once the vehicle reaches 12 mph (20 km/h) or the
ignition is turned to the OFF position and back to ON
again.
Auto Hold — If Equipped
Auto Hold is a comfort feature that allows the driver
to remove their foot from the brake pedal once the
vehicle has come to a stop. The vehicle must be
held at a standstill for a predetermined amount of
time by hydraulic braking. The EPB will then engage
and continue to hold the vehicle at a stop until the
driver applies the accelerator pedal. Auto Hold can be
activated or deactivated by pushing the AUTO HOLD
butt
on located on the switch bank.
AUTO HOLD Switch
The following conditions must be met for A
uto Hold to
activate:
● Driver’s door is closed
● Driver's seat belt is fastened
● Vehicle is at a standstill
● Forward gear is selected
● ACC is not engaged
● EPB is not applied
● ParkSense Active Park Assist System auto parking
maneuver is not activated
Brake Maintenance Mode
We recommend having your brakes serviced by an
authorized dealer. You should only make repairs for
which you have the knowledge and the right equipment.
120 S
TARTING AND OPERATING
You should only enter Brake Maintenance mode during
brake service.
When servicing your rear brakes, it may be necessary
for you or your technician to push the rear piston
into the rear caliper bore. With the EPB system, this
can only be done after retracting the EPB actuator.
Fortunately, actuator retraction can be done easily by
entering the Brake Maintenance mode through the
Uconnect Settings in your vehicle. This menu-based
system will guide you through the steps necessary to
retract the EPB actuator in order to perform rear brake
service.
Maintenance mode has requirements that must be met
in order to be activated:
● The vehicle must be at a standstill.
● The parking brake must be unapplied.
● The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
While in Maintenance mode, the EPB Warning Light will
flash continuously while the ignition is ON.
When brake service work is complete, the following
steps must be followed to reset the parking brake
system to normal operation:
● Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.
● Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
● Apply the EPB switch.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting
out of PARK.
WARNING!
● Ne
ver use the PARK (P) position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Alwa
ys apply the parking brake
fully when exiting the vehicle to guard against
vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
● Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
transmission gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission
is in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
● The transmission may not engage PARK if the
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to
a complete stop before shifting to PARK, and
verify that the transmission gear position indicator
solidly indicates PARK without blinking. Ensure
that the vehicle is completely stopped, and the
PARK position is properly indicated, before exiting
the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● It is danger
ous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
(N) if the engine speed is higher than idle speed.
If y
our foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and
hit someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
● Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF position,
the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement.
● When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
● Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children
to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for
a number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the transmission gear selector.
● Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ON/RUN position. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 121
4
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
following precautions are not observed:
● Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE (R) only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
● Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE (D) when the engine is above idle speed.
● Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition P
ark Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK (P)
before the ignition can be turned to the OFF position.
This helps the driver avoid inadvertently leaving the
vehicle without placing the transmission in PARK. This
system also locks the transmission in PARK whenever
the ignition is in the OFF position.
NOTE:
The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when the
ignition is in the ON/RUN position (even though the
engine will be off). Ensure that the transmission is in
PARK, and the ignition is OFF (not in ON/RUN position)
before exiting the vehicle.
BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK
(BTSI) SYSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI system that holds
the transmission gear selector in PARK unless the
brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of
PARK, the engine must be running and the brake
pedal must be pressed. The brake pedal must also be
pressed to shift fr
om NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE
when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.
8-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The transmission is controlled using a rotary electronic
gear selector located on the center console. The
transmission gear range (PRND) is displayed both
above the gear selector and in the instrument cluster.
To select a gear range, simply rotate the gear
selector. You must press the brake pedal to shift
the transmission out of PARK (or NEUTRAL, when
the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds).
To shift past multiple gear ranges at once (such as
PARK to DRIVE), simply rotate the gear selector to the
appropriate detent. Select the DRIVE range for normal
driving.
NOTE:
In the event of a mismatch between the gear selector
position and the actual transmission gear (for example,
driver selects PARK while driving), the position indicator
will blink continuously until the selector is returned
to the proper position, or the requested shift can be
completed.
The electronically controlled transmission adapts its
shift schedule based on driver inputs, along with
environmental and road conditions. The transmission
electronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the first few
shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This
is a normal condition, and precision shifts will develop
within a few hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when
the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is
stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal
when shifting between these gears.
The transmission gear selector has only PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, and DRIVE positions. Manual
downshifts can be made using the Electronic Range
Select (ERS) shift control. Pushing the GEAR “-”/GEAR
“+” switches (on the steering wheel) while in the DRIVE
position will select the highest available transmission
gear, and will display that gear limit in the instrument
cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc. Some models will display both
the selected gear limit, and the actual current gear,
while in ERS mode.
Transmission Gear Selector
Gear Ranges
Do no
t press the accelerator pedal when shifting fr
om
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) into another gear range.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow
the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is
especially important when the engine is cold.
122 S
TARTING AND OPERATING
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking
the transmission. The engine can be start
ed in this
range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle
is in motion. Apply the parking brake when exiting the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
before shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on
a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
● Apply the parking brake.
● Shift the transmission into PARK.
● Turn the ignition OFF.
● Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
NOTE:
On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the transfer
case is in a drive position.
CAUTION!
● Before moving the transmission gear selector out
of PARK, you must start the engine, and also press
the brak
e pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear
selector could result.
● DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK
or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have properly engaged the transmission into the
PARK position:
● Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P), and is
not blinking.
● With the brake pedal released, verify that the gear
selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running. Apply the
parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK (P)
if you must exit the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition t
o coast do
wn a hill. These are unsaf
e
practices that limit y
our response t
o changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
se
v
ere transmission damage.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
For Recreational Towing see
ð
page 179.
For Towing A Disabled Vehicle see
ð
page 287.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and
highway driving. It pro
vides the smoothest upshifts
and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The
transmission automatically upshifts through all forward
gears.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such
as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading
conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head
winds, or while towing a heavy trailer), use the
Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control to select
a lower gear
ð
page 124. Under these conditions,
using a lower gear will improve performance and extend
transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and
heat build-up.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature
improves warm-up time of the engine and transmission
to achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of
the torque converter clutch is inhibited until the
transmission fluid is warm. Normal operation will
resume once the transmission temperature has risen
to a suitable level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that
STARTING AND OPERATING 123
4
could result in transmission damage, Transmission
Limp Home mode is activated. In this mode, the
transmission may operate only in certain gears, or may
not shift at all. Vehicle performance may be severely
degraded and the engine may stall. In some situations,
the transmission may not re-engage if the engine is
turned off and restarted. The Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) may be illuminated. A message in the
instrument cluster will inform the driver of the more
serious conditions, and indicate what actions may be
necessary.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing
the following steps:
NOTE:
In cases where the instrument cluster message
indicates the transmission may not re-engage after
engine shutdown, perform this procedure only in a
desired location (preferably, at an authorized dealer).
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK (P), if possible. If
not, shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N).
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine
turns off.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is
no longer detected, the transmission will return to
normal operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend
that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. An authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to assess the condition of your
transmission.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
The ERS shift control allows the driver to limit the
highest available gear when the transmission is in
DRIVE and ERS mode is not active. For example, if you
set the transmission gear limit to FOURTH gear, the
transmission will not shift above FOURTH gear (except
to prevent engine overspeed), but will shift through the
lower gears normally.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any
vehicle speed. When the transmission gear selector is
in DRIVE, the transmission will operate automatically,
shifting between all available gears. Tapping the “-”
button (on the steering wheel) will activate ERS mode,
display the current gear in the instrument cluster, and
set that gear as the top available gear. Once in ERS
mode, tapping the “-” or “+” button will change the top
available gear.
Electronic Range Select (ERS)
1 — Shift Up “+”
2 — Shift Down “–”
To exit ERS mode, simply push and hold the “+”
button until the gear limit display disappears from the
instrument clust
er.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slipper
y surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the v
ehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
When to Use TOW/HAUL Mode
Select TOW/HAUL mode when driving in conditions
such as: driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying
a heavy load, etc. This mode will improve performance
and reduce the potential for transmission overheating
or failure due to excessive shifting.
124 STARTING AND OPERATING
TOW/HAUL Switch
The TOW/HAUL Indicator Light will illuminat
e in the
instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL mode
has been activated. Pushing the switch a second time
restores normal operation. Normal operation is always
the default at engine start-up. If TOW/HAUL mode is
desired, the switch must be pushed each time the
engine is started.
WARNING!
Do not use the “TOW/HAUL” feature when driving
in icy or slipper
y conditions. The increased engine
braking can cause the rear wheels to slide, and
the vehicle to swing ar
ound with the possible loss
of vehicle control, which may cause an accident
possibly resulting in personal injury or death.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
QUADRA-TRAC I OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS/
PRECAUTIONS — IF EQUIPPED
The Quadra-Trac I is a single-speed (HI range only)
transfer case, which provides convenient full-time four-
wheel drive. No driver interaction is required. The
Brake Traction Control (BTC) System, which combines
standard ABS and Traction Control, provides resistance
to any wheel that is slipping to allow additional torque
transfer to wheels with traction.
NOTE:
The Quadra-Trac I system is not appropriate for
conditions where 4WD LOW range is recommended
ð
page 183.
QUADRA-TRAC II OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS/
PRECAUTIONS — IF EQUIPPED
The Quadra-Trac II transfer case is fully automatic in
the normal driving 4WD HI mode. The Quadra-Trac II
transfer case provides three positions:
● 4WD HI
● N (Neutral)
● 4WD LOW
When additional traction is required, the 4WD LOW
position can be used for increased torque at the
wheels. Driving in the 4WD LOW position on dry, hard-
surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and
damage to driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine
speed is appr
oximately three times that of the 4WD
HI position at a given road speed. Take care not to
overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40
km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type, and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference will adversely affect shifting and
cause damage to the transfer case.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
N (Neutral) position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case N (Neutral) position
disengages both the front and rear drive shafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even
if the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is not in the
vehicle.
SHIFT POSITIONS
For additional information on the appropriate use of
each f
our-wheel drive system mode position, see the
following information:
4WD HI
This range is the default operating mode for daily use.
STARTING AND OPERATING 125
4
N (NEUTRAL)
This range disengages the driveline from the
power
train. It is used for towing your vehicle behind
another vehicle
ð
page 179.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
N (Neutral) position without fir
st fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case N (Neutral) position
disengages both the front and rear drive shafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even
if the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is not in the
vehicle.
4WD LOW
This range is for low speed four-wheel driv
e. It provides
an additional gear reduction which allows for increased
torque to be delivered to both the front and rear
wheels while providing maximum pulling power for
loose, slippery road surfaces. Do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
SHIFTING PROCEDURES
4WD HI To 4WD LOW
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h),
the ignition switch in the ON position or the engine
running, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (N), and
push and hold the 4WD LOW button once on the
transfer case switch until the 4WD LOW indicator light
begins to flash in the instrument cluster. The 4WD LOW
light will remain on solid when the shift is complete.
4WD LOW Button
NOTE:
If shift conditions/interlocks are not me
t a message will
show on the instrument cluster display with instructions
required to complete the shift
ð
page 96.
4WD LOW To 4WD HI
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h),
the ignition switch in the ON position or the engine
running, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (N), and
push the 4WD LOW button once on the transfer case
switch until the 4WD LOW indicator light begins to flash
in the instrument cluster. The 4WD LOW light will go out
when the shift is complete.
NOTE:
● If shift conditions/interlocks are not met a message
will show on the instrument cluster display with
instructions required to complete the shift
ð
page
96.
● Shif
ting into or out of 4WD LOW is possible with
the vehicle complet
ely stopped; however, difficulty
may occur due to the mating clutch teeth not being
properly aligned. Several attempts may be required
for clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to
occur. The preferred method is with the vehicle
rolling 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h). If the vehicle is
moving faster than 3 mph (5 km/h), the transfer
case will not allow the shift.
QUADRA-DRIVE II SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Quadra-Drive II System features two torque transfer
couplings. The couplings include an Electronic Limited-
Slip Differential (ELSD) rear axle and the Quadra-Trac
II transfer case. The ELSD axle is fully automatic and
requires no driver input to operate. Under normal
driving conditions, the unit functions as a standard
axle, balancing torque evenly between left and right
wheels. With a traction difference between left and
right wheels, the coupling will sense a speed difference.
As one wheel begins to spin faster than the other,
torque will automatically transfer from the wheel that
has less traction, to the wheel that has traction.
While the transfer case and axle coupling differ in
design, their operation is similar. Follow the Quadra-
Trac II transfer case shifting information, preceding this
section, for shifting this system.
SELEC-TERRAIN — IF EQUIPPED
SELEC-TERRAIN MODE SELECTION
Selec-Terrain combines the capabilities of the vehicle
control systems, along with driver input, to provide the
126 STARTING AND OPERATING
best performance for all terrains. Tap the toggle up or
down to cycle through the positions.
Selec-Terrain
1 — Selec-Terrain Positions
2 — Selec-Terrain Toggle
Selec-Terrain consists of the following positions:
● ROCK (if equipped) – Off-r
oad calibration is only
available in 4WD LOW. The vehicle is raised (if
equipped with Air Suspension) for improved ground
clearance. Traction-based tuning with improved
steerability for use on high traction off-road surfaces.
Use for low speed obstacles such as large rocks,
deep ruts, etc. If equipped with air suspension, the
vehicle level will change to Off-Road 2 (OR2). If
the Selec-Terrain switch is in ROCK mode, and the
transfer case is switched from 4WD LOW to 4WD HI,
the Selec-Terrain system will return to AUTO.
● SAND/MUD (if equipped) – Off-road calibration for
use on low traction surfaces such as mud or sand.
Driveline is maximized for traction. Some binding
may be felt on less forgiving surfaces. The electronic
brake controls are set to limit traction control
management of throttle and wheel spin. If equipped
with air suspension, the lev
el will change to Off-Road
1 (OR1).
● SNOW – Tuning set for additional stability in
inclement weather. Use on and off road on loose
traction surfaces such as snow. When in SNOW
mode (depending on certain operating conditions),
the transmission may use SECOND gear (rather
than FIRST gear) during launches, to minimize wheel
slippage. If equipped with air suspension, the default
ride height for SNOW is Normal Ride Height (NRH).
● AUTO – Fully automatic full-time four-wheel drive
operation can be used on and off road. Balances
traction with seamless steering feel to provide
improved handling and acceleration over two-wheel
drive vehicles. If equipped with air suspension, the
level will change to Normal Ride Height (NRH).
● SPORT – This mode alters the transmission's
automatic shift schedule for sportier driving. Upshift
speeds are increased to make full use of available
engine power. Steering efforts are modified for
sporty driving. If equipped with air suspension, the
level will change to Aero Height.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY MESSAGES
When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will
appear in the instrument cluster
ð
page 96.
QUADRA-LIFT — IF EQUIPPED
DESCRIPTION
The Quadra-Lif
t Air Suspension system provides full-
time load leveling capability along with the benefit
of vehicle height adjustment by a toggle switch. The
vehicle will automatically raise and lower the ride
height to adapt to the appropriate driving conditions. At
higher speeds, the vehicle will lower to an aerodynamic
ride height and when operating in off-road modes
(if equipped), the vehicle will raise the ride height
accordingly. The buttons near the terrain switch in the
center console area can be used to set preferred ride
height to match the appropriate conditions.
STARTING AND OPERATING 127
4
Quadra-Lift Switch
1 — Off-Road 2 Indicator Light (Customer Selectable,
4x4 only)
2 — Off-Road 1 Indicator Light (Customer Selectable,
4x4 only)
3 — Normal Ride Height Indicator Light (Customer
Selectable)
4 — Aero Height Indicator Light (Customer Selectable)
5 — Entry/Exit Height Indicator Light (Customer
Selectable)
6 — Toggle Switch
● Normal Ride Height (NRH) – This is the standard
position of the suspension and is meant for normal
driving.
● Off-Road 1 (OR1) (Raises the v
ehicle approximately
1.2 inches [30 mm]) – This is the primary position
for all off-road driving until OR2 is needed. A
smoother and more comfortable ride will result.
Push the toggle switch forward once from the NRH
position while the vehicle speed is below 38 mph
(61 km/h). When in the OR1 + Sand Mode position,
height will be maintained if speed is below 59 mph
(95 km/h) and then it will lower to NRH. When in
the OR1 position only, if the vehicle speed remains
between 40 m
ph (64 km/h) and 50 mph (80 km/h)
for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed
exceeds 50 mph (80 km/h), the vehicle will be
automatically lowered to NRH
ð
page 183. OR1
is unavailable on 4x2 air suspension vehicles.
● Off-Road 2 (OR2) (Raises the vehicle approximately
2.0 inches [51 mm]) – This position is intended
for off-roading use only where maximum ground
clearance is required. To enter OR2, push the toggle
switch forward twice from the NRH position or once
from the OR1 position while vehicle speed is below
20 mph (32 km/h). While in OR2, if the vehicle
speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) the vehicle height
will be automatically lowered to OR1
ð
page 183.
OR2 is unavailable on 4x2 air suspension vehicles.
● Aero Height (Lowers the vehicle approximately -0.6
inches [-15 mm]) – This position provides improved
aerodynamics by lowering the vehicle. The vehicle
will automatically enter Aero Height when the vehicle
speed remains between 62 mph (100 km/h) and
66 mph (106 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or
if the vehicle speed exceeds 66 mph (106 km/h).
The vehicle will return to Default Ride Height from
Aero Height if the vehicle speed remains between
30 mph (48 km/h) and 35 mph (56 km/h) for
greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed falls
below 30 mph (48 km/h). The vehicle will enter Aero
Height, regardless of vehicle speed if the vehicle is in
“SPORT” mode.
● Entry/Exit Height (Lowers the vehicle approximately
-1.6 inches [-40 mm]) – This position lowers the
vehicle for easier passenger entry and exit as well
as lowering the rear of the vehicle for easier loading
and unloading of cargo. To enter Entry/Exit Height,
push the toggle switch down twice from NRH while
the vehicle speed is below 6 mph (10 km/h). To exit
Entry/Exit Height, push the UP button once while in
Entry/Exit Height or drive the vehicle over 4 mph (6
km/h).
NOTE:
Automatic lowering of the vehicle into Entry/Exit
Height can be enabled through the Uconnect
Touchscreen Radio. If this feature is enabled, the
vehicle will only lower if the gear selector is in PARK,
the terrain switch is in AUTO, the transfer case is in
AUTO and the vehicle level is either in Normal or Aero
Height. The vehicle will not automatically lower if the
air suspension level is in OR2 or OR1. When towing,
the automatic Entry/Exit feature may be disabled
through the Uconnect Touchscreen Radio to prevent
vehicle and trailer movement when gear selector is
moved to PARK.
The Selec-Terrain system will automatically change the
vehicle to the proper height based on the position of
the Selec-Terrain switch. The height can be changed
from the default Selec-Terrain setting by normal use of
the air suspension buttons
ð
page 126.
The system requires that the engine be running for all
changes. When lowering the vehicle all of the doors,
including the liftgate, must be closed. If a door is
opened at any time while the vehicle is lowering the
change will not be completed until the open door(s)
is/are closed.
The Quadra-Lift Air Suspension system uses a lifting
and lowering pattern which keeps the headlights from
incorrectly shining into oncoming traffic. When raising
128 STARTING AND OPERATING
the vehicle, the rear of the vehicle will move up first and
then the front. When lowering the vehicle, the front will
move down first and then the rear.
After the engine is turned off, it may be noticed that the
air suspension system operates briefly; this is normal.
The system is correcting the position of the vehicle to
ensure a proper appearance.
To assist with changing a spare tire, the Quadra-Lift
Air Suspension system has a feature which allows the
automatic leveling to be disabled
ð
page 186.
Default Ride Height:
● Select Aero Height or Normal Ride Height as the
default for all vehicle speeds and operation. This is
the selected height that the suspension will level for
speed changes (e.g. raising from Entry/Exit Height at
speed, lowering from Off Road Height at speed, etc.).
● Default ride height can be changed by manually
adjusting the Quadra-Lift switch to Normal Ride
Height or Aero Ride Height and stay in the selected
height for 2.5 seconds. It will be stored as the
default ride height and the height will be maintained
until a new default ride height is selected.
NOTE:
If equipped with a Uconnect Touchscreen Radio, all
enabling/disabling of air suspension features must be
done through the radio
ð
page 186.
WARNING!
The air suspension system uses a high pressure
volume of air to operate the system. T
o avoid
(Continued)
WARNING!
personal injury or damage to the system, see an
authorized dealer for service.
AIR SUSPENSION MODES
The Air Suspension system has multiple modes to
prot
ect the system in unique situations:
Tire/Jack Mode
To assist with changing a spare tire, the air suspension
system has a feature which allows the automatic
leveling to be disabled
ð
page 186. Tire/Jack
mode is used for connecting a trailer with a weight-
distributing hitch
ð
page 171.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with the engine
running.
Auto Entry/Exit Mode
To assist with entering and exiting the vehicle, the air
suspension system has a feature which automatically
lowers the vehicle to Entry/Exit Height
ð
page 186.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with the engine
running. When towing, the automatic Entry/Exit feature
may be disabled through the Uconnect Touchscreen
Radio to prevent vehicle and trailer movement when
the gear selector is moved to PARK.
Transport Mode
To assist with flatbed towing, the air suspension system
has a feature which will put the vehicle into Entry/Exit
Height and disable the automatic load leveling system
ð
page 186.
NOTE:
This mode is intended t
o be enabled with engine
running.
Suspension Display Messages Mode
The “Suspension Display Messages” setting allows you
to only display suspension warnings instead of all
suspension messages (i.e., “Normal Height Achieved”)
ð
page 186.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with the engine
running.
Wheel Alignment Mode
Before performing a wheel alignment this mode must
be enabled which will move the vehicle to Normal
Ride Height and disable the air suspension during the
alignment
ð
page 186.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with the engine
running.
If equipped with a Uconnect Touchscreen Radio, all
enabling/disabling of air suspension features must be
done through the radio
ð
page 186.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY MESSAGES
When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will
appear in the instrument cluster
ð
page 96.
STARTING AND OPERATING 129
4
OPERATION
The indicator lights 1 through 5 will illuminate t
o show
the current position of the vehicle. Flashing indicator
lights will show a position which the system is working
to achieve. When raising, if multiple indicator lights
are flashing while raising, the highest flashing indicator
light is the position the system is working to achieve.
When lowering, if multiple indicators are flashing while
lowering the lowest solid indicator light is the position
the system is working to achieve.
Toggle up once moves the suspension one position
higher from the current position, assuming all
conditions are met (i.e., engine running, speed below
threshold, etc.). Toggle up can be pushed multiple
times. Each toggle up will raise the requested level by
one position up to a maximum position of OR2 or the
highest position allowed based on current conditions
(i.e., vehicle speed, etc.).
Toggle down once moves the suspension one position
lower from the current level, assuming all conditions
are met (i.e., engine running, doors closed, speed
below threshold, etc.). Toggle down can be pushed
multiple times. Each toggle down will lower the
requested level by one position down to a minimum
of Park mode or the lowest position allowed based on
current conditions (i.e., vehicle speed, etc.)
Automatic height changes will occur based on vehicle
speed and the current vehicle height. The indicator
lights and instrument cluster display messages will
operate the same for automatic changes and user
requested changes.
● Off-Road 2 (OR2) – Indicator lights 1 through 5 will
be illuminated.
● Off-Road 1 (OR1) – Indicator lights 2 through 5 will
be illuminated.
● Normal Ride Height (NRH) – Indicator lights 3
through 5 will be illuminat
ed.
● Aero Height – Indicator lights 4 and 5 will be
illuminated.
● Entry/Exit Height – Indicator light 5 will be
illuminated.
● Transport Mode – No indicator lights will be
illuminated. Driving or deselecting the mode in the
Uconnect system will disable Transport mode.
● Tire/Jack Mode – Indicator lights 1 and 5 will be
illuminated. Driving or deselecting the mode in the
Uconnect system will disable Tire/Jack mode.
● Wheel Alignment Mode – Indicator lights 4 and 5
will be illuminated. Driving or deselecting the mode
in the Uconnect system will disable Wheel Alignment
mode.
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L AND 6.4L
ONLY — IF EQUIPPED
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting
off four of the engine's eight cylinders during light load
and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no
driver inputs or additional driving skills required.
NOTE:
This system may take some time to return to full
functionality after a battery disconnect.
POWER STEERING
The electric po
wer steering system is designed t
o
provide increased vehicle response and ease of
maneuverability in tight spaces. The power steering
system adapts to different driving conditions. If the
electric power steering system experiences a fault that
prevents it from providing assist, you will still have the
ability to steer the vehicle manually.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose
a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
NOTE:
Alternate electric power steering efforts can be selected
through the Uconnect System
ð
page 186.
If the Electric Power Steering warning icon
is displayed and the “SERVICE POWER
STEERING” or the “POWER STEERING
ASSIST OFF – SERVICE SYSTEM” message
is displayed within the instrument cluster display,
this indicates the vehicle needs to be taken to an
authorized dealer for service
ð
page 104.
NOTE:
● Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle.
Under these conditions there will be a substantial
increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds
and during parking maneuvers.
● If the condition persists, see an authorized dealer for
service.
130 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the Steering icon is displayed and the “POWER
STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP” message is displayed
on the instrument cluster screen, they indicate that
extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred which
caused an over temperature condition in the electric
power steering system. Once driving conditions are
safe, pull over and let the vehicle idle for a few
moments until the icon and message turn off.
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Stop/Start function is developed to reduce
fuel consumption. The system will stop the engine
automatically during a vehicle stop if the required
conditions are met. Releasing the brake pedal or
pressing the accelerator pedal will automatically restart
the engine
ð
page 131.
This vehicle has been upgraded with a heavy-duty
starter, enhanced battery, and other upgraded engine
parts, to handle the additional engine starts.
AUTOSTOP MODE
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every normal
customer engine start. At that time, the system will
go into STOP/START READY and if all other conditions
are met, can go into a STOP/START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE
Autostop mode.
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following Must
Occur:
● The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A
“STOP/START READY” message will be displayed in
the instrument cluster display within the Stop/Start
section
ð
page 96.
● The vehicle must be completely stopped.
● The gear selector must be in a forw
ard gear and the
brake pedal pressed.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will move
to the zero position, and the Stop/Start telltale will
illuminate indicating you are in Autostop. Customer
settings will be maintained upon return to an engine-
running condition.
POSSIBLE REASONS THE ENGINE DOES NOT
AUTOSTOP
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many
safety and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled.
Detailed information about the operation of the Stop/
Start system may be viewed in the instrument cluster
display Stop/Start Screen. In the following situations,
the engine will not stop:
● Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
● Driver’s door is not closed.
● Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
● Battery charge is low.
● The vehicle is on a steep grade.
● Cabin heating or cooling is in process and
an acceptable cabin temperature has not been
achieved.
● HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower
speed.
● HVAC is set to MAX A/C.
● Engine has no
t reached normal operating
temperature.
● The transmission is not in a forward gear.
● Hood is open.
● Vehicle is in 4WD LOW.
● Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pressure.
● Accelerator pedal input.
● Engine temperature is too high.
● 5 mph (8 km/h) threshold has not been achieved
from previous Autostop.
● Steering angle is beyond threshold.
● A Stop/Start system error occurs.
● Stop/Start OFF switch is pushed.
● Vehicle is in high altitude.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several
times without the Stop/Start system going into a STOP/
START READY state under more extreme conditions of
the items previously listed.
TO START THE ENGINE WHILE IN AUTOSTOP
MODE
While in a forward gear, the engine will start when
the brake pedal is released or the throttle pedal is
pressed. The transmission will automatically re-engage
upon engine restart.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start
Automatically While In Autostop Mode:
● The transmission selector is moved out of DRIVE.
STARTING AND OPERATING 131
4
● To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
● HVAC is set t
o full defrost mode.
● HVAC system temperature or fan speed is manually
adjusted.
● Battery voltage drops too low.
● Stop/Start OFF switch is pushed.
● A Stop/Start system error occurs.
● 4WD LOW is selected.
● Steering angle is beyond threshold.
TO MANUALLY TURN OFF THE STOP/START
SYSTEM
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will illuminate.
The “STOP/START OFF” message will appear in the
instrument cluster display and the Autostop mode will
be disabled
ð
page 96.
Stop/Start OFF Switch
NOTE:
The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to the ON
mode every time the ignition is turned OFF and back
ON.
TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE STOP/START
SYSTEM
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the switch
bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start system,
the system will not shut down the engine. A "SERVICE
STOP/START SYSTEM" message and a yellow Stop/Start
telltale will appear in the instrument cluster display
ð
page 96.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message
appears in the instrument cluster display, have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cruise Control
system, or the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system:
● Cruise Control will keep your vehicle at a constant
preset speed.
● Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) will adjust the vehicle
speed up to the preset speed to maintain a distance
with the vehicle ahead.
NOTE:
In vehicles NOT equipped with the Active Driving Assist
(ADA) system:
● Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be used without ACC
enabled, and functions as normal cruise control.
● If ACC is not enabled, Fixed Speed Cruise Control will
not detect vehicles directly ahead of you. Always be
aware of the feature selected.
● Only one Cruise Control feature can operate at a
time. For example, if Fixed Speed Cruise Control is
enabled, Adaptive Cruise Control will be unavailable,
and vice versa.
CRUISE CONTROL
When engaged, the Cruise Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 20 mph
(32 km/h).
The Cruise Control buttons are located on the right side
of the steering wheel.
132 S
TARTING AND OPERATING
Cruise Control Buttons
1 — SET (+)/Accel
2 — CANC/Cancel
3 — On/Off
4 — RES/Resume
5 — SET (-)/Decel
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system
canno
t maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too f
ast for the conditions, and you could lose
control and have an accident. Do not use Cruise
Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding,
icy, snow-covered or slippery.
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise
Control. “CRUISE CONTROL READY” will appear in the
instrument cluster display to indicate the Cruise Control
is on. To turn the system off, push the on/off button a
second time. “CRUISE CONTROL OFF” will appear in the
instrument cluster display to indicate the Cruise Control
is off. The system should be turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Cruise Control system on when not in use
is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system
or cause it to go faster than you want. You could
lose control and have an accident. Always ensure the
system is OFF when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Cruise Control on. When the vehicle has
reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or SET
(-) button and release. R
elease the accelerator and
the vehicle will operate at the selected speed. Once
a speed has been set, a message “Cruise Control Set
To MPH (KM/H)” will appear indicating what speed was
set. A cruise indicator light, along with set speed, will
also appear and stay on in the instrument cluster when
the speed is set.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
When the Cruise Control is set, you can increase speed
by pushing the SET (+) button, or decrease speed by
pushing the SET (-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
● Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will result
in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap
of the button results in an adjustment of 1 mph.
● If the button is continually pushed, the set speed
will continue to adjust in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The new set speed is reflected in
the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
● Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will result
in a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap
of the button results in an adjustment of 1 km/h.
● If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The new set speed is reflected in
the instrument cluster display.
To Accelerate For Passing
While the Cruise Control is set, press the accelerator
to pass as you would normally. When the pedal is
released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
USING CRUISE CONTROL ON HILLS
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
The Cruise Control system maintains speed up and
down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is
normal. On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may
occur so it may be preferable to drive without Cruise
Control.
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system
canno
t maintain a constant speed. Y
our v
ehicle could
go t
oo f
ast for the conditions, and you could lose
control and have an accident. Do not use Cruise
Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding,
icy, snow-covered or slippery.
STARTING AND OPERATING 133
4
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
and release. R
esume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC button,
or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will
deactivate the Cruise Control system without erasing
the set speed from memory.
The following conditions will also deactivate the Cruise
Control without erasing the set speed from memory:
● Vehicle parking brake is applied
● Stability event occurs
● Gear selector is moved out of DRIVE
● Engine overspeed occurs
Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition in
the OFF position, will also erase the set speed from
memory.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
convenience provided by Cruise Control while traveling
on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.
The Cruise Control function performs differently
ð
page 132.
ACC will allow you to keep Cruise Control engaged in
light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
need to reset your Cruise Control. ACC utilizes a radar
sensor and a forward facing camera designed to detect
a v
ehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
● If the ACC sensor de
tects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed
the original set speed) automatically to maintain a
preset following distance, while matching the speed
of the vehicle ahead.
● Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications
to the vehicle will affect the performance of
the Adaptive Cruise Control and Forward Collision
Warning system.
● In vehicles NOT equipped with the Active Driving
Assist system, Fixed Speed Cruise Control (ACC not
enabled) will not detect vehicles directly ahead of
you. Always be aware of the feature selected
ð
page 360.
WARNING!
● Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute f
or active driver
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility
to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather
conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
ahead and, most importantly, brake operation to
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all
road conditions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe control of
your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● The A
CC system:
○ Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming
vehicles, and stationar
y objects (e.g., a stopped
vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
○ Cannot take street, traffic, and weather
conditions into account, and may be limited
upon adverse sight distance conditions.
○ Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
○ Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop
and hold the vehicle in the stop position for
approximately 10 minutes when following a
vehicle ahead. If the vehicle ahead does not
start moving within 10 minutes, the parking
brake will be activated, and the ACC system will
be canceled.
● You should not utilize the ACC system:
○ When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow,
sleet, heavy traffic, and complex driving
situations (i.e., in highway construction zones).
○ When entering a turn lane or highway off-ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or
downhill slopes.
○ When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
○ When circumstances do not allow safe driving
at a constant speed.
134 STARTING AND OPERATING
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The buttons on the right side of the steering wheel
operate the ACC syst
em.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1 — Distance Increase Button
2 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
3 — CANC/Cancel
4 — Distance Decrease Button
5 — SET (+)/Accel
6 — Fixed Speed Cruise Control On/Off (If Equipped)
7 — RES/Resume
8 — SET (-)/Decel
Driving Assist Menu
The instrument cluster display will show the current
system settings for Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), Active
Lane Management (ALM), and the Active Driving Assist
(ADA) system. The information it displays depends on
ACC, ALM, and ADA system statuses.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
once and the following will appear in the instrument
cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off”.
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting
has not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button is pushed, the
display will read “ACC SET”.
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the
instrument cluster display.
The ACC screen may display once again if any of the
following ACC activity occurs:
● System Cancel
● Driver Override
● System Off
● ACC Proximity Warning
● ACC Unavailable Warning
The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC display
activity.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
The minimum se
t speed for the ACC system is 20 m
ph
(32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready state,
the instrument cluster display will read “ACC Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster display
will read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following conditions:
● When in 4WD Low
● When the brakes are applied
● When the parking brake is applied
● When the automatic transmission is in PARK,
REVERSE or NEUTRAL
● When the brakes are overheated
● When the driver’s door is open at low speeds
● When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at low
speeds
● When there is a stationary vehicle in front of your
vehicle in close proximity
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
on/off button. The ACC menu in the instrument cluster
displays “ACC Ready.”
To turn the system off, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again. At this time,
the system will turn off and the instrument cluster
displays “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
STARTING AND OPERATING 135
4
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have a collision. Always
leave the system off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET (+) button or the SET (-) button and release. The
instrument cluster displa
y will show the set speed.
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control (if equipped) can be used
without ACC enabled. To change between the different
modes, push the ACC on/off button which turns the
ACC and the Fixed Speed Cruise Control off. Pushing
the Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button will result
in turning on (changing to) Fixed Speed Cruise Control
mode.
WARNING!
In Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode, the system will
not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the pro
ximity
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since
neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
selected.
If ACC is set when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph
(32 km/h), the set speed will default to 20 mph (32
km/h).
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control cannot be set below 20
mph (32 km/h).
If either system is set when the vehicle speed is above
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be the current
speed of the vehicle.
NOTE:
● Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal can
cause the vehicle to continue to accelerate beyond
the set speed. If this occurs, the message “Driver
Override” will display in the instrument cluster
display.
● If you continue to accelerate beyond the set speed
while ACC is enabled, the system will not be
controlling the distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed will only be
determined by the position of the accelerator pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the ACC or Fixed Speed
Cruise Control systems:
● The brake pedal is applied
● The CANC (cancel) button is pushed
● The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) activates
● The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
position
● The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control
System (ESC/TCS) activates
● The v
ehicle parking brake is applied
● The braking temperature ex
ceeds normal range
(overheated)
The following conditions will only cancel the ACC
system:
● Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds
● Driver door is opened at low speeds
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
memory if:
● The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is
pushed
● The Fixed Speed Cruise Control (if equipped) on/off
button is pushed
● The ignition is placed in the OFF position
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory, push the RES
(resume) button and remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. The instrument cluster display will
show the last set speed.
Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph (32
km/h) when only Fixed Speed Cruise Control is being
used.
Resume can be used at any speed above 0 mph (0
km/h) when ACC is active.
136 S
TARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
● While in ACC mode, when the vehicle comes to a
complete stop longer than two seconds, the driver
will either have to push the RES (resume) button
or press the accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC
system.
● ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary
vehicle in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
that is too high or t
oo low for prevailing traffic and
road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure
to follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
After se
tting a speed, you can increase the set speed
by pushing the SET (+) button, or decrease speed by
pushing the SET (-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
● Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will result
in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap
of the button results in an adjustment of 1 mph.
● If the button is continually pushed, the set speed
will continue to adjust in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The new set speed is reflected in
the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
● Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will result
in a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap
of the button results in an adjustment of 1 km/h.
● If the button is continually pushed, the se
t speed will
continue to adjust in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The new set speed is reflected in
the instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
When you override and push the SET (+) button or SET
(-) button, the new set speed will be the current speed
of the vehicle.
When ACC Is Active
● When you use the SET (-) button to decelerate, if
the engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
will automatically slow the vehicle.
● The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a full stop
when following the vehicle in front. If your vehicle
follows the vehicle in front to a standstill, after two
seconds the driver will either have to push the RES
(resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to
reengage the ACC to the existing set speed.
● The ACC system maintains set speed when driving
uphill and downhill. However, a slight speed
change on moderate hills is normal. In addition,
downshifting may occur while climbing uphill or
descending downhill. This is normal operation and
necessary to maintain set speed. When driving
uphill and downhill, the ACC system will cancel
if the braking temperature exceeds normal range
(overheated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specif
ied following distance for A
CC can be set
by varying the distance setting between four bars
(longest), three bars (long), two bars (medium) and
one bar (short). Using this distance setting and the
vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the distance to
the vehicle ahead. This distance setting appears in the
instrument cluster display.
Distance Settings
1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars)
2 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars)
3 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars)
4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar)
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance
Increase button and release. Each time the button
is pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar
(longer).
T
o decrease the distance setting, push the Distance
Decrease button and release. Each time the button
is pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar
(shorter).
STARTING AND OPERATING 137
4
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain
the set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in
the same lane, the instrument cluster display will show
the ACC Set With Target Detected Indicator Light, and
the system will adjust the vehicle speed automatically
to maintain the distance setting, regardless of the set
speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
● The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the
set speed.
● The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
the sensor.
● The distance setting is changed.
● The system disengages
ð
page 135.
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited;
however, the driver can always apply the brakes
manually, if necessary.
NOTE:
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC
system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to
maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
“BRAKE!” will flash in the instrument cluster display
and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its
maximum braking capacity.
NOTE:
The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster display
is a warning for the driver to take action and does not
necessarily mean that the Forward Collision Warning
system is applying the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with A
daptive Cruise Control (ACC)
engaged and f
ollowing a vehicle, the system will provide
an additional acceleration up to the ACC set speed
to assist with passing the vehicle. This additional
acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the left
turn signal and will only be active when passing on the
left side.
ACC Operation At Stop
If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill
while following a vehicle ahead, your vehicle will
resume motion, without any driver interaction, if the
vehicle ahead starts moving within two seconds of your
vehicle coming to a standstill.
If the vehicle in front does not start moving within
two seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the
driver will either have to push the RES (resume) button,
or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to
the existing set speed.
NOTE:
● If your vehicle is at a standstill for longer than two
seconds, the system will hold brake pressure for up
to 10 minutes. If no driver action is taken after the
10 minutes, the Electric Park Brake will be applied
and the ACC system will cancel.
● While ACC is holding your vehicle at a standstill (or
the vehicle is traveling below 3 mph (5 km/h), and
the driver seat belt is unbuckled or the driver door is
opened, the Electric Park Brake will be applied and
the ACC system will cancel.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or
objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow
these warnings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“WIPE FRONT RADAR SENSOR IN FRONT OF
VEHICLE” W
ARNING
The “ACC Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning will display and a chime will sound when
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such
as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also
become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such
as mud, dirt or ice. In these cases, the instrument
cluster display will display this message and the system
will deactivate.
This message can sometimes be displayed while driving
in highly reflective areas (i.e. ice and snow, or tunnels
with reflective tiles). The ACC system will recover after
the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions,
when the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in
its path this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE:
If the “ACC Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning is active, Fixed Speed Cruise Control is still
available.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal
138 STARTING AND OPERATING
of an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of
the vehicle behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is
important to note the following maintenance items:
● Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to
damage the sensor lens.
● Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing
so could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure
and require a sensor realignment.
● If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged
due to a collision, see your authorized dealer for
service.
● Do not attach or install any accessories near
the sensor, including transparent material or
aftermarket grilles. Doing so could cause an ACC
system failure or malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
● If the “ACC Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on
every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other
obstructions, have the radar sensor realigned at an
authorized dealer.
● Installing a snowplow, front-end protector, an
aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not
recommended. Doing so may block the sensor and
inhibit ACC operation.
“CLEAN FRONT WINDSHIELD” WARNING
The “
ACC Limited Functionality Clean F
ront Windshield”
warning will display, and a chime will sound when
conditions temporarily limit system performance. This
most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as
in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system may
also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions,
such as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and fog on
the inside of glass. In these cases, the instrument
cluster display will read “ACC Limited Functionality
Clean Front Windshield” and the system will have
degraded performance.
This message can sometimes be displayed while driving
in adverse weather conditions. The ACC system will
recover after the vehicle has left these areas. Under
rare conditions, when the camera is not tracking
any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may
temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the windshield and the camera located on
the back side of the inside rearview mirror. They may
require cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited functionality
is no longer present, the system will return to full
functionality.
NOTE:
If the “ACC Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than
once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
other obstructions, have the windshield and forward
facing camera inspected at an authorized dealer.
SERVICE ACC WARNING
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster
display reads “ACC Unavailable Service Required” or
“Cruise Unavailable Service Required”, there may be
an internal system fault or a temporary malfunction
that limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is
still drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be
temporarily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating
ACC again later, following an ignition cycle. If the
problem persists, see an authorized dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or
unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may
need to intervene. The following are examples of these
types of situations:
TOWING A TRAILER
ACC while towing a trailer is recommended only with an
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller. Aftermarket trailer
brake controllers will not activate the trailer brakes
when ACC is braking.
OFFSET DRIVING
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that
is offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle
merging in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may
move in and out of the line of travel, which can cause
your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
STARTING AND OPERATING 139
4
Offset Driving Condition Example
TURNS AND BENDS
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the
system ma
y increase or decrease the vehicle speed
for stability, with no vehicle ahead detected. Once the
vehicle is out of the curve, the system will resume your
original set speed. This is a part of normal ACC system
functionality.
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
USING ACC ON HILLS
ACC performance may be limited when driving on hills.
ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane depending
on the speed, vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the
steepness of the hill.
ACC Hill Example
LANE CHANGING
ACC may not det
ect a vehicle until it is completely in
the lane in which you are traveling. In the following
lane changing example, ACC has not yet detected the
vehicle changing lanes and it may not detect the vehicle
until it's too late for the ACC system to take action.
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in
the lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the
lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to
apply the brakes if necessary.
Lane Changing Example
NARROW VEHICLES
Some narrow v
ehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until
they have moved fully into the lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
Narrow Vehicle Example
140 STARTING AND OPERATING
STATIONARY OBJECTS AND VEHICLES
ACC does not react to stationary objects or v
ehicles.
For example, ACC will not react in situations where
the vehicle you are following exits your lane and the
vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. It will consider
this stopped vehicle a stationary object as it did not
previously detect movement from it. Always be attentive
and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
The T
raffic Sign Assist (TSA) system uses a camera
mounted on the windshield, as well as map data
when the vehicle is equipped with Navigation, to detect
recognizable road signs such as:
● Speed limits
● School zones
● No passing zones
NOTE:
● The TSA syst
em will automatically display the
det
ected road sign using the unit of measurement
(mph or km/h) selected within Uconnect Settings, or
within the instrument cluster display.
● If no speed limit signs are detected, the system will
revert to the speed limit signs that are stored in the
Navigation system.
● The system always checks the traffic signs indicating
the current speed limit. The system is able to
recognize and display up to two different road signs
in the instrument cluster display. These road signs
can be found on the Driver Assist page.
ACTIVATION/DEACTIVATION
The TSA System can be enabled/disabled within the
Uconnect system through the Safety/Driver Assistance
menu. System ON is signaled by road signs shown on
the instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
Even if the system is OFF, the speed limit sign will
be displayed when the driver selects it in the HOME
screen.
TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST MODES
TSA has three selectable modes of operation that are
available through the Uconnect system
ð
page 186.
Visual
When Visual is selected, the system will alert the
driver when the current speed of the vehicle exceeds
the detected speed limit by showing a graphic in the
instrument cluster display.
Visual + Chime
When Visual + Chime is selected, the system will
alert the driver when the current speed of the vehicle
exceeds the detected speed limit by showing a graphic
in the instrument cluster display and by sounding an
audible alert. The audible alert will last for 10 seconds,
and the visual alert will remain on as long as the
vehicle is exceeding the speed limit.
TSA Off
When the TSA system is turned off, the system will not
show any traffic signs (unless selected in the HOME
screen, which will show detected speed limit signs), and
no alerts will be issued to the driver.
INDICATIONS ON THE DISPLAY
Detected traffic signs are shown in the instrument
cluster display, and can display any combination of
signs at one time (e.g. speed limit, speed limit and
supplemental info, and “Do Not Pass” signs) depending
on what information is available.
When a newly detected speed limit is higher than the
current speed limit, the display will update along with
an up arrow.
When a newly detected speed limit is lower than the
current speed limit, the display will update along with a
down arrow.
NOTE:
Up or down arrows will be displayed for up to five
seconds.
STARTING AND OPERATING 141
4
Traffic Signs Recognized
1 — Current Speed Limit With Supplemental
Inf
ormation (School Zone)
2 — Next Speed Limit Detect
ed
3 — No Passing Zone Detected
Supplemental Information
Supplemental information may be displayed, along
with a ne
wly detected speed limit, indicating special
circumstances of which the driver should be aware.
Available supplemental information includes:
● School
● Construction
● Rain
● Snow
● Fog
NOTE:
Supplemental information will not be displayed when
the vehicle is ONLY equipped with GPS.
Speed Limit Exceeded
When the v
ehicle’s speed exceeds the display
ed speed
limit by 3 mph (5 km/h), the speed limit sign on the
instrument cluster display will show a red outline to
alert the driver.
CAUTION!
● F
unctionality may be limited or the system may not
work if the sensor is obstructed.
● The syst
em may have limited operation or not
work at all in weather conditions such as heavy
rain, hail, and thick fog. Strong light contrasts can
influence the recognition capability of the sensor.
● The area surrounding the sensor must not be
covered with stickers or any other object.
● Do not tamper or perform any operations in the
area of the windshield glass directly surrounding
the sensor.
● Clean foreign matters such as bird droppings,
insects, snow or ice on the windshield. Use
specific detergents and clean cloths to avoid
scratching the windshield.
ACTIVE DRIVING ASSIST SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
OPERATION
The Active Driving Assist (ADA) system is combined with
the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system, and centers
the vehicle in the driving lane while traveling at speeds
up to 90 mph (145 km/h).
For ACC system operating instructions and system
limitations, see
ð
page 134.
NOTE:
● The driver should always obey traffic laws and speed
limits. Never drive above applicable speed limit
restrictions.
● The driver can override ADA at any time by braking,
accelerating, or steering the vehicle.
Just like ACC, ADA will maintain a set speed as long as
the set distance between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front is maintained. ADA will also keep your vehicle
centered between the lane lines, and monitor for other
vehicles in adjacent lanes by utilizing the Blind Spot
Monitoring sensors.
ADA uses sensors within the steering wheel to measure
driver attentiveness. ADA requires the driver’s hands
on the steering wheel at all times. The system will
generally aim to keep the vehicle centered in the lane,
but when the driver turns the steering wheel (e.g. to
move farther away from a large vehicle in an adjacent
lane) the system will reduce its control and enter "co-
steering" mode. While in co-steering mode, the system
will provide reduced assistance and allow the driver to
control the path of the vehicle. Once the driver stops
providing input to the steering wheel, the system will
require a few seconds to fully resume lane centering
assistance, especially during curves.
142 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
The Active Driving Assist (ADA) system is a
convenience system. It is not a substitute for
active driver involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive of road traffic, weather
conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
ahead, position in the lane compared to other
vehicles, and brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road conditions.
Your complete attention is always required while
driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision and death or serious personal injury.
You should turn off the Active Driving Assist system:
● When driving in complex driving situations (e.g.
urban environments, construction zones, etc.),
adverse weather or low visibility conditions (e.g.
rain, snow, fog, sleet, dust), or adverse road
conditions (e.g. heavy traffic, worn or missing lane
markings, etc.).
● When entering a highway off-ramp, when driving
on roads that are icy, snow covered, or slippery.
● When driving during difficult or uncertain
conditions.
TURNING ACTIVE DRIVING ASSIST ON OR
O
FF
Active Driving Assist On/Off Button
To enable the Active Driving Assist system, pr
oceed as
follows:
1. Push the Active Driving Assist on/off button
located on the right side of the steering wheel.
The steering wheel image will display white in
the instrument cluster display until the system is
engaged. If ACC was previously disabled, pushing
this button will activate BOTH ACC and Active
Driving Assist systems.
2. If ACC was engaged before pushing the ADA on/off
button, ACC will remain active and ADA will also
become engaged (once all other conditions are
met).
3. If ACC was not active before pushing the ADA
on/off button, push the SET (+) button or the SET
(-) button and release when the desired driving
speed is shown in the instrument cluster display.
4. If desired, adjust the ACC distance setting
b
y pushing the Distance Increase or Distance
Decrease buttons.
When all system conditions are met as described in
“Syst
em Engagement Conditions” in the next section,
the system will engage and the steering wheel image in
the display will change to green.
Active Driving Assist
Engaged (Steering Wheel Green)
NOTE:
Along with the color change of the steering wheel
image, the “glow” ef
fect of the instrument cluster
display will also change to green when ADA is engaged.
System Engagement Conditions
The following conditions must be met before the system
will engage:
● Active Driving Assist system is enabled
● Driver seat belt is buckled
● Driver is not pressing the brake pedal
STARTING AND OPERATING 143
4
● Driver door is open
● Vehicle is at allowable ride height
● Syst
em detects visible lane markings
● Vehicle is traveling below 90 mph (145 km/h)
● Vehicle is centered in lane
● Turn signal is not activated
● Vehicle is not in a tight curve
● Trailer is not connected
● Driver has hands on steering wheel
NOTE:
For the system to detect the driver’s hands on the
steering wheel, the wheel must be gripped on the
outside. Gripping the inside areas of the steering wheel
will not satisfy the hands-on condition to engage the
system.
System Deactivation
The system will be deactivated in any of the following
situations:
● If the syst
em has detected driver inattentiveness,
and has gone through all escalation warnings
● If lane markings are no longer detected
● If the brake pedal is pressed or ACC system is
deactivated
● If a turn signal is used (unless a target is in the blind
spot zone on the same side the turn signal is being
applied)
● If the driver applies enough input to the steering
wheel
● If the driver’s seat belt is released
● If the vehicle speed exceeds 90 mph (145 km/h)
● If the Active Driving Assist on/off button is pushed
again (ADA will turn off)
● If the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system
becomes active and is providing warnings/braking
NOTE:
● ADA will not enable if the system detects a trailer is
connected to the vehicle.
● Pushing the Active Driving Assist on/off button will
turn the system off. All other deactivation conditions
will place the system back into the “enabled” state
with the steering wheel indicator displayed in white
until all engagement conditions are met again.
● When the system is deactivated, the system
status indicator lights will turn off, Active Lane
Management will return to its previous state, and
ACC will disable.
INDICA
TIONS ON THE DISPLAY
The A
ctive Driving Assist system status can always be
viewed in the instrument cluster display, and status
changes are shown by changes in color of the system’s
indicator lights.
As the system detects driver inattentiveness as
previously described
ð
page 142, the system status
indicator lights will change from green, to yellow, to red,
while the steering wheel icon on the display moves up
the screen to the center. The following indicators will
change in color as warnings to the driver escalate:
● Active Driving Assist Indicator (steering wheel icon in
the instrument cluster display)
● Glow effect of the instrument cluster display
If driver’s hands are not returned to the steering wheel,
the system will deactivate.
Active Driving Assist Indicators Are Off
● ADA is not turned on/enabled by the driver.
Active Driving Assist Indicators Are White
● ADA is turned on/enabled by the driver, but
the system is not actively providing steering and
providing speed control for to the vehicle.
Active Driving Assist Indicators Are Green
● The system detects driver is attentive and is actively
steering and providing speed control for the vehicle.
144 S
TARTING AND OPERATING
Do Not Grip Inside Of Steering Wheel
● Driver inattentiveness has been detected, warning
the driver to place hands on the steering wheel.
● Driver inattentiveness is still being detected, or
driver take-over is being requested, warning the
driver to place hands on the steering wheel. This
warning is also issued when the system has
detected a tight curve and is warning the driver to
take control
NOTE:
The driver MUST place hands on the steering wheel
and take control of the vehicle when the system is
deactivated.
Active Driving Assist Cancelled Message
SYSTEM STATUS
Along with changes in the system’s indicator lights
(green, yellow, and red), the system can also issue a
steering wheel vibration to accompany these warnings.
The vibration warning (if enabled) will occur if the
vehicle crosses a lane marker, for example, when
driving on a tight curve. This feature can be turned on
or off within the Uconnect system
ð
page 186.
SYSTEM OPERATION/LIMITATIONS
WARNING!
Active Driving Assist is an SAE Level 2 Driver Assist
feature, requiring driver attention at all times. T
o
prevent serious injury or death:
● Always remember that the Active Driving Assist
system is a convenience system that cannot
accurately detect all situations. Complete attention
is always required while driving, even when using
the Active Driving Assist system.
● Always remain alert and be ready to take control
of the vehicle in the event that the Active Driving
Assist system deactivates, or otherwise lacks full
functionality as described further before and after
this statement.
● Always keep your eyes on the road and hands on
the steering wheel when the Active Driving Assist
system is activated.
● Do not use a hand-held device when the Active
Driving Assist system is engaged.
● Maintain a safe distance from other vehicles
and pay attention to traffic conditions. The Active
Driving Assist system will not steer to avoid safety
hazards, constructions zones, objects, or road
impediments. You need to take control to steer
and brake the vehicle in such situations, and when
(Continued)
WARNING!
merging into traffic, exiting the highway, making
a turn for crossing traffic, or stopping for traffic
control devices.
● Do not place any objects on the steering wheel
(e.g. steering wheel covers) which could interfere
with the hand detection sensors.
The Active Driving Assist system DOES NOT:
● Warn or prev
ent collisions with other vehicles
● Steer your vehicle around stopped vehicles,
slower vehicles, construction zones or equipment,
pedestrians, or animals
● Respond to traffic lights or stop signs
● Merge onto highways or exit off ramps
● Change lanes or turn
● React to cross traffic
NOTE:
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a core component of
ADA. For ACC system limitations
ð
page 134.
The Active Driving Assist system may have limited
or reduced functionality when one of the following
conditions occur:
● The vehicle’s radar sensors and/or forward facing
camera is damaged, covered, misaligned, or
obstructed (e.g. by mud, ice, snow, etc.)
● If the suspension alignment is not correct, if the
vehicle is modified (e.g. lifting or lowering the
suspension, installing different sized wheels or tires)
STARTING AND OPERATING 145
4
Active Driving Assist Indicators Are Yellow
Active Driving Assist Indicators Are Red
● Driving near highway toll booths
NOTE:
If damage to the windshield occurs, have the
windshield replaced by an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between the
rear and the front fascia/bumper and a detected
obstacle when backing up or moving forward (e.g.
during a parking maneuver). The vehicle brakes may
be automatically applied and released when performing
a reverse parking maneuver if the system detects a
possible collision with an obstacle.
NOTE:
● The driver can disable the automatic braking
function by turning ParkSense off via the ParkSense
switch. The driver can also override automatic
braking by changing the gear or by pressing the gas
pedal over 90% of its capacity during the braking
event.
● Automatic brakes are not available if the vehicle is in
4WD Low.
● Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a
faulted condition detected with the ParkSense Park
Assist system or the Braking System Module.
● The automatic braking function may only be applied
if the vehicle deceleration is not enough to avoid
colliding with a detected obstacle.
● The aut
omatic braking function may not be applied
fast enough for obstacles that move toward the rear
of the vehicle from the left and/or right sides.
● The automatic braking function can be enabled/
disabled from the Customer Programmable Features
section of the Uconnect system.
● ParkSense will retain its last known configuration
state for the automatic braking function through
ignition cycles.
The automatic braking function is intended to assist
the driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected
obstacles when backing up in REVERSE gear.
NOTE:
● The system is designed to assist the driver and not
to substitute the driver.
● The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle's
acceleration and braking and is responsible for the
vehicle's movements.
For limitations of this system and recommendations,
see
ð
page 151.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition
is changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector
is in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled at
one of these gear selector positions, the system will
remain active until the vehicle speed is increased
to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. The
system will become active again if the vehicle speed is
decreased to less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
A display warning will appear in the instrument cluster
display if the vehicle is in REVERSE and the speed
exceeds 7 mph (11 km/h).
PARKSENSE SENSORS
The four ParkSense sensors located in the rear fascia/
bumper, and the six ParkSense sensors located in the
front fascia/bumper, monitor the area in front and
behind the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of
view. The front sensors detect obstacles from
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 47 inches (120
cm) from the front fascia/bumper. The rear sensors can
detect obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm)
up to 79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper.
These distances depend on the location, type and
orientation of the obstacle in the horizontal direction.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is equipped with ParkSense Active Park
Assist, there will be six ParkSense sensors located in
the rear fascia/bumper.
PARKSENSE DISPLAY
The warning display will turn on indicating the system
status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the
vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle has been detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in the left and/or right front or rear regions
based on the object’s distance and location relative to
the vehicle.
If an object is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single arc in the left and/
or right rear region and the system will produce a tone.
As the vehicle moves closer to the object, the display
will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and
the tone will change from a single 1/2 second tone to
slow, to fast, to continuous.
146 STARTING AND OPERATING
Front/Rear/Side ParkSense Arcs
1 — No Tone/Solid Arc 7 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
2 — No Tone/Flashing Arc 8 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 9 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
4 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 10 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
5 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 11 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arcs
6 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 12 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arcs
STARTING AND OPERATING 147
4
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the instrument cluster display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart
shows the warning alert
operation when the system is
detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR
Rear Distance (in-
ches/cm)
Greater than 79 in-
ches (200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than 12 in-
ches (30 cm)
Audible Alert Chime None Single 1/2 Second
Tone
Slow Slow Fast Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs-Center None 10th Solid 9th Solid 8th Solid 7th Flashing 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Radio Volume Re-
duced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT
Front Distance (in-
ches/cm)
Greater than 47 inches
(120 cm)
47-39 inches (120-100
cm)
39-25 inches (100-65 cm) 25-12 inches (65-30 cm) Less than 12 inches (30
cm)
Audible Alert Chime None None None Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs-Center None 1st Solid 2nd Flashing 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Radio Volume Reduced No No No Yes Yes
148 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on,
when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible
alert (chime) after approximately three seconds when
an obstacle has been detected, and the vehicle is
stationary.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Front and rear chime volume settings can be selected
from the Uconnect system
ð
page 186.
The chime volume settings include low, medium, and
high.
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
through ignition cycles.
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the
instrument cluster display
ð
page 96. It provides
visual warnings to indicate the distance between the
rear fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper and
the detected obstacle.
ENABLING AND DISABLING PARKSENSE
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled
with the ParkSense switch located on the
switch panel on the forward part of the
center console, in front of the gear selector.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to enable the
system, the instrument cluster will display the system
state.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable
the system, the instrument cluster will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately two
seconds. When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE
and the system is disabled, the instrument cluster
display will display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for
as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
NOTE:
When ParkSense is disabled and the gear selector is
moved to the DRIVE position, no warning message will
be displayed.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense
is disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch
LED will be off when the system is enabled. If
the ParkSense switch is pushed, and the system
requires service, the ParkSense switch LED will blink
momentarily, and then the LED will be on.
SERVICE THE PARKSENSE PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM
During vehicle start-up, when the ParkSense System
has detected a faulted condition, the instrument
cluster will actuate a single chime, once per ignition
cycle, and it will display a pop-up. The pop-up will
include up to two faults. Possible fault messages
are "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS",
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS", or
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED.” The
pop-up message will display for five seconds.
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and
the system has detected a faulted condition, the
instrument cluster display will display a "PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS", "PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" pop-up message for
five seconds. After five seconds, a vehicle graphic will
be displayed with "UNAVAILABLE" at either the front
or rear sensor location depending on where the fault
is detected. The system will continue to provide arc
alerts for the side that is functioning properly. These
arc alerts will interrupt the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
WIPE REAR SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
WIPE FRONT SENSORS", or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED" messages if an object is detected
within the five second pop-up duration. The vehicle
graphic will remain displayed for as long as the vehicle
is in REVERSE.
If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS"
or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS"
appears in the instrument cluster display make sure
the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/
bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and clear
of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstructions and then
cycle the ignition. If the message continues to appear,
see an authorized dealer.
If the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED"
message appears in the instrument cluster display, see
an authorized dealer.
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do
not scratch or poke the sensors.
STARTING AND OPERATING 149
4
PARKSENSE SYSTEM USA
GE PRECAUTIONS
NOTE:
● Ensure that the front and rear fascias/bumpers are
free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the
ParkSense system operating properly.
● Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations
could affect the performance of ParkSense.
● When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster
will display “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once
you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it
on again, even if you cycle the ignition.
● When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument
cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF” for as long as
the vehicle is in REVERSE.
● ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
● Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must
not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or
debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not
working properly. The ParkSense system might not
detect an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/
bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an
obstacle is behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
● Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense
system off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer
hitches, etc. are placed within 12 inches (30 cm)
of the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can
result in the system misinterpreting a close object
as a sensor problem, causing the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be
displa
yed in the instrument cluster.
● P
arkSense should be disabled when the liftgate is in
the open position. An opened liftgate could provide
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the
vehicle.
WARNING!
● Driv
ers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense. Alwa
ys check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue
to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do
so can result in serious injury or death.
● Before using ParkSense, it is strongly
recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly be disconnected from the vehicle when
the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do
so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or
obstacles because the hitch ball will be much
closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia/bumper
when the vehicle sounds the continuous tone.
Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and
shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle
is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
● P
arkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable
to recognize ever
y obstacle, including small
obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily
detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located
above or below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
● The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that
the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
SIDE DIS
TANCE WARNING
SYS
TEM —
IF
EQUIPPED
The Side Distance Warning system detects the
presence of side obstacles near the vehicle using the
parking sensors located in the front and rear fascias/
bumpers.
Side Distance Warning Display
The Side Distance Warning screen will only be displayed
if this feature is enabled within Uconnect Settings
ð
page 186.
The system warns the driver with an acoustic signal
and, when enabled, with visual indications on the
instrument cluster display.
When the vehicle is in DRIVE, the Side Distance
Warning volume/chime will match the Front ParkSense
volume and chime type.
150 S
TARTING AND OPERATING
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the Side Distance
Warning volume/chime will match the Rear ParkSense
volume and chime type.
WARNING ALERTS
Distance (in-
ches/cm)
Less than 12 in-
ches (30 cm)
12 – 24 inches
(30 – 60 cm)
Arcs-Left 11th Flashing 12th Flashing
Arcs-Right 11th Flashing 12th Flashing
Audible Alert
Chime
Continuous Fast audible
chime as the
objects get
close to the ve-
hicle
Radio Volume
Reduced
Yes Yes
NOTE:
Parksense will reduce the volume of the radio if on
when the system is sounding an audible tone. An
audible tone will only sound if a collision is possible.
Activation/Deactivation
The system can operate only after driving a short
distance and if the vehicle speed is between 0 and 7
mph (0 and 11 km/h). The system can be activated/
deactivated via the Settings menu of the Uconnect
system. If the ParkSense System is deactivated via the
ParkSense hard switch then the Side Distance Warning
system will automatically be deactivated.
Message on the display for Side Distance Warning
feature:
“Wipe Sensors” — This message is displayed in the
case of a failure of the Side Distance Warning system
sensors. Free the bumpers of any obstacles, ensure
that the front and rear fascia/bumper are free of snow,
ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system
operating properly.
“System Not Available” — This message is displayed
if the Side Distance Warning system is not available.
The failed operation of the system might be due to the
insufficient voltage from the battery or other failures on
the electrical system. Contact an authorized dealer as
soon as possible to have the electrical system checked.
ParkSense Usage Precautions
Some conditions may influence the performance of the
Side Distance Warning system:
NOTE:
● Ensure that the front and rear fascia/bumper are
free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the
ParkSense system operating properly.
● Construction equipment, large trucks, and other
vibrations could affect the performance of
ParkSense.
● When you turn ParkSense off, the message to
appear in the instrument cluster display will read
“PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once you turn
ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it on
again, even if you cycle the ignition.
● ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
● Clean the P
arkSense sensors regularly, taking care
no
t to scratch or damage them. The sensors must
not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or
debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not
working properly. The ParkSense system might not
detect an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/
bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an
obstacle is behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
● The presence of a tow hook without a trailer may
interfere with the correct operation of the parking
sensors. Before using the ParkSense system, it is
recommended to remove the removable tow hook
ball assembly and any attachments from the vehicle
when it is not used for towing operations.
WARNING!
● Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense. Alwa
ys check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue
to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do
so can result in serious injury or death.
● Before using ParkSense, it is strongly
recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly be disconnected from the vehicle when
the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do
so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or
obstacles because the hitch ball will be much
closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia/bumper
when the vehicle sounds the continuous tone.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 151
4
WARNING!
Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and
shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle
is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
● P
arkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable
to recognize ever
y obstacle, including small
obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily
detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located
above or below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
● The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that
the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM
— IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Activ
e Park Assist system is intended
to assist the driver during parallel and perpendicular
parking maneuvers. The system works by identifying
a proper parking space, providing audible/visual
instructions, and controlling the steering wheel only,
or the accelerator, gear selector, brakes, and the
steering wheel (if equipped with the Fully Automated
system). Depending on the driver's parking maneuver
selection, the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
capable of maneuvering a vehicle into a parallel or a
perpendicular parking space on either side (i.e., driver
side or passenger side).
Tw
o types of ParkSense Active Park Assist systems are
available:
● Semi-Automatic ParkSense Active Park Assist
● ParkSense Automated Parking system
Semi-Automatic ParkSense Active Park Assist — If
Equipped
The Semi-Automatic system detects parking spaces,
and controls the steering wheel only. The driver
maintains control of the accelerator, gear selector and
brakes.
ParkSense Automated Parking — If Equipped
The Fully Automated system detects parking spaces,
and controls the accelerator, gear selector, brakes, and
steering wheel. In this mode, the system also provides
obstacle detection by providing visual and audible
warnings and automatic braking to avoid a collision.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Fully Automated
system, you can switch between Semi-Automatic and
Fully Automated mode in the Uconnect Settings
ð
page 186.
NOTE:
● The driver is always responsible for controlling the
vehicle, responsible for any surrounding objects, and
must intervene as required.
● The system is designed to assist the driver and not
to substitute the driver.
● During a Semi-
Automatic or Fully A
utomated
maneuver, if the driver touches the steering wheel
after being instructed to remove their hands from
the steering wheel, the system will cancel, and the
driver will be required to manually complete the
parking maneuver.
● The system may not work in all conditions (e.g.
environmental conditions such as heavy rain, snow,
etc., or if searching for a parking space that has
surfaces that will absorb the ultrasonic sensor
waves).
● New vehicles from the dealership must have
at least 30 miles (48 km) accumulated before
the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is fully
calibrated and performs accurately. This is due to
the system’s dynamic vehicle calibration to improve
the performance of the feature. The system will also
continuously perform the dynamic vehicle calibration
to account for differences such as over or under
inflated tires and new tires.
ENABLING AND DISABLING THE PARKSENSE
ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system
can be enabled and disabled with the
ParkSense Active Park Assist switch,
located on the switch panel on the forward
part of the center console, in front of the gear selector.
To enable the ParkSense Active Park Assist system,
push the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch once
(LED turns on). Pushing the switch a second time will
disable the system (LED turns off).
152 STARTING AND OPERATING
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will turn off
automatically for any of the following conditions:
● Parking maneuver is completed
● Vehicle speed is greater than 28 mph (45 km/h)
when searching for a parking space during a Fully
Automated maneuver
● Vehicle speed is greater than 18 mph (30 km/h)
when searching for a parking space during a Semi-
Automatic maneuver
● Vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (7 km/h) during
Semi-Automatic active steering guidance into the
parking space
● Steering wheel is touched during Fully Automated
or Semi-Automatic active steering guidance into the
parking space
● The gas pedal or brake pedal is pressed during Fully
Automated active steering guidance into the parking
space
● ParkSense Front and Rear Park Assist switch is
pushed
● Any of the doors are opened during a Fully
Automated maneuver
● The driver door is opened during a Semi-Automatic
maneuver
● Rear liftgate is opened
● A trailer is connected
● Vehicle is in 4WD Low
● Cruise Control, Adaptive Cruise Control, or Active
Driving Assist systems are engaged
● Electr
onic Stability Control/Anti-Lock Braking System
intervention
The P
arkSense Active Park Assist system allows
a maximum number of shifts between DRIVE and
REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be completed within
the maximum amount of shifts, the system will cancel
and the instrument cluster display will instruct the
driver to complete the maneuver manually.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will only
operate and search for a parking space when the
following conditions are present:
● Gear selector is in DRIVE
● Ignition is in the RUN position
● ParkSense Active Park Assist switch is activated
● All of the doors are closed
● Rear liftgate is closed
● Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h) during
a Semi-Automatic maneuver
● Vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h) during
a Fully Automated maneuver
● The outer surface and the underside of the front and
rear fascias/bumpers are clean and clear of snow,
ice, mud, dirt or other obstructions
NOTE:
● During a Semi-Automatic maneuver, if the vehicle
is driven above approximately 15 mph (25 km/h),
the instrument cluster display will instruct the
driver to slow down. If the vehicle is driven above
approximately 18 mph (30 km/h), the system will
cancel. The driver must then reactivate the system
b
y pushing the ParkSense Activ
e Park Assist switch.
● During a Fully Automated maneuver, if the vehicle
is driven above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h),
the instrument cluster display will instruct the
driver to slow down. If the vehicle is driven above
approximately 28 mph (45 km/h), the system will
cancel. The driver must then reactivate the system
by pushing the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch.
When pushed, the LED on the ParkSense Active Park
Assist switch will blink momentarily. If any of the
previously described conditions are not present, then
the LED will turn off.
If the vehicle is in any other gear than DRIVE, and an
objected is detected in the vehicle’s path, the system
will default to Parallel Park Exit. A prompt will appear in
the Uconnect display, and the driver will need to select
“Yes” or “No” for a Parallel Park Exit maneuver. Any
other conditions will result in a default to a Parallel
Parking maneuver.
PARKSENSE AUTOMATED PARKING — IF
EQUIPPED
Parallel/Perpendicular Parking Space
Assistance Operation
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
enabled, the driver must press “Park” on the Uconnect
display, and the system will begin searching for valid
parallel and perpendicular parking spaces.
STARTING AND OPERATING 153
4
NOTE:
● The driver needs to make sure that the selected
parking space for the maneuver remains free and
clear of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles,
etc.).
● The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected
parking space is suitable for the maneuver and
free/clear of anything that may be overhanging or
protruding into the parking space (e.g., ladders,
tailgates, etc. from surrounding objects/vehicles).
● When searching for a parking space, the driver
should drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending
on the type of maneuver) to other vehicles as
possible.
● While the vehicle is in DRIVE, there will be a full
screen image in the Uconnect display. If the driver
shifts to REVERSE while searching for a parking
space, a camera image will appear in the Uconnect
display with a “Shift To Drive” message.
Both types of valid spaces (parallel and perpendicular)
will be displayed in the Uconnect display as they are
found. The available spaces will update in real time.
When valid parking spaces have been found, the driver
will be prompted to stop the vehicle.
Select A Space
The driver can then select a parking space by pressing
the desired space on the Uconnect display
.
NOTE:
If a space selection is attempted before the vehicle is
stopped, a warning screen will appear in the Uconnect
display with instructions to stop the vehicle to make a
selection.
If the driver selects a perpendicular parking space, the
system will prompt the driver to choose a Forward or
Reverse parking method.
Choose Perpendicular Parking Method
NOTE:
You can press the “Back” button on the display t
o
return to the parking space selection screen and select
a different space.
Once the parallel or perpendicular parking maneuver
selection has been made, a message will appear in the
display with instructions to hold down the brake pedal
and Active Park Assist switch. Both of these conditions
must be met in order to begin the parking maneuver.
The message also instructs the driver to push and hold
the Active Park Assist switch for the entire maneuver.
NOTE:
When the Active Park Assist switch is held down,
the turn signal for the side of the vehicle where
the selected parking space is located will turn on
automatically.
The system will then instruct the driver to remove
hands from the steering wheel and feet from the
pedals. This screen will be shown for a minimum of two
seconds, or until the driver releases the brake pedal.
154 S
TARTING AND OPERATING
When the parking sequence is initiated by the driver
after the previously described conditions are met, the
Uconnect system will display a Top View along with
either a rear camera view (if the vehicle is placed in
REVERSE) or a forward camera view (if the vehicle is
placed in DRIVE).
The Top View will have integrated ParkSense arcs in the
image at the front and rear of the vehicle. The arcs
will change color from yellow to red corresponding the
distance zones to the oncoming object.
The system will then perform the parking maneuver.
Once the maneuver is complete, the vehicle will
automatically shift into PARK.
The system will display a “Complete!” message and
instruct the driver to release the Active Park Assist
switch.
Once the Active Park Assist switch is released, a chime
will sound and the LED on the switch will turn off. After
approximately five seconds, the previous Uconnect
screen will display.
NOTE:
● It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake
and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their
surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle
either when instructed to, or when driver intervention
is required.
● When the system instructs the driver to remove their
hands from the steering wheel, the driver should
check their surroundings and begin to back up
slowly.
● The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle
speed exceeds 28 mph (40 km/h) during active
steering guidance into the parking space. The
syst
em will provide a warning to the driver at 28 mph
(40 km/h) that tells them to slow down. The driver is
then responsible for completing the maneuver if the
system is canceled.
● If the system is canceled during the maneuver for
any reason, the driver must take control of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
● Driv
ers must be careful when performing parallel
or perpendicular parking maneuver
s even when
using the ParkSense Active Park Assist system.
Always check carefully behind and in front of
your vehicle, look behind and in front of you,
and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals,
other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots
before backing up and moving forward. You are
responsible for safety and must continue to pay
attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
● Before using the ParkSense Active Park Assist
system, it is strongly recommended that the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly be disconnected
from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or
damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch
ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia/bumper when the vehicle sounds the
continuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect
the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending
on its size and shape, giving a false indication that
an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
● The P
arkSense Active Park Assist system is only
a parking aid and it is unable to recognize ev
ery
obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not detected at
all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors
will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
● The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
the ParkSense Active Park Assist system in order
to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is
detected. It is recommended that the driver looks
over his/her shoulder when using the ParkSense
Active Park Assist system.
Parallel Park Exit
Enable the ParkSense Active P
ark Assist system by
pressing the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch. To
initiate a parking space exit maneuver, the vehicle must
be stopped, and the driver must press “Exit” on the
Uconnect display.
After the driver chooses a parallel park exit maneuver,
the system will then prompt the driver to choose an exit
method. The exit method options are Forward Left and
Forward Right.
STARTING AND OPERATING 155
4
Choose Exit Method
NOTE:
If an exit method selection is attem
pted before the
vehicle is stopped, the driver will be instructed to stop
the vehicle to make a selection.
After the driver chooses a parallel exit side, a message
appears in the Uconnect display with instructions to
hold the brake pedal and hold down the Active Park
Assist switch. Both of these conditions must be met
before the maneuver can begin.
When the Active Park Assist switch is held down,
the turn signal for the chosen exit side will turn on
automatically.
The system will then instruct the driver to remove
hands from the steering wheel and feet from the
pedals. This screen will be shown for a minimum of two
seconds, or until the driver releases the brake pedal.
When the exit sequence is initiated by the driver
after the previously described conditions are met, the
Uconnect system will display a Top View along with
either a rear camera view (if the vehicle is placed in
REVERSE) or a forward camera view (if the vehicle is
placed in DRIVE), and the e
xit maneuver will begin.
The Top View will ha
ve integrated ParkSense arcs in the
image at the front and rear of the vehicle. The arcs
will change color from yellow to red corresponding the
distance zones to the oncoming object.
The automatic maneuver ends when the vehicle is
clear of the parking space, and the display shows the
message of a completed maneuver. The vehicle will be
in DRIVE and held hydraulically by the brakes until the
driver presses the accelerator pedal. The system gives
vehicle control back to the driver.
Once the driver regains control of the vehicle, a chime
will sound and the LED on the switch will turn off. After
approximately five seconds, the previous Uconnect
screen will display.
Parking Maneuver Paused/Canceled
Certain conditions can pause or cancel a Fully
Automated park or exit maneuver.
The ParkSense Automated Parking system can be
paused due to the driver’s finger being removed from
the Active Park Assist switch and/or an object in the
vehicle’s path during a parking maneuver.
If one or more of these scenarios occur, automatic
braking will bring the vehicle to a stop and hold the
vehicle hydraulically by the brakes.
The driver will be instructed to hold the Active Park
Assist switch to continue the park or exit maneuver. If
the driver does not resume holding the switch down,
the maneuver will cancel.
If the maneuver is paused due to an object in the
vehicle’s path, a message will appear in the Uconnect
display. The maneuver will remain paused until the
object is no longer in the vehicle’s path.
The system can also be paused before the Active Park
Assist switch is held down if the driver shifts into
REVERSE.
The driver will be instructed to shift to DRIVE to
continue the maneuver. If the vehicle is shifted into
DRIVE, the process will continue on to the seek/
maneuver selection phase.
SEMI-AUTOMATIC PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK
ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
Parallel/Perpendicular Parking Space
Assistance Operation
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
enabled, the driver must press “Park” on the Uconnect
display, and the system will begin searching for valid
parallel and perpendicular parking spaces.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a Fully Automated
system, you may have to update your selected setting
in the Uconnect system to switch to a Semi-Automatic
maneuver
ð
page 186.
NOTE:
● The driver needs to make sure that the selected
parking space for the maneuver remains free and
clear of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles,
etc.).
156 STARTING AND OPERATING
● The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected
parking space is suitable for the maneuver and
free/clear of an
ything that may be overhanging or
protruding into the parking space (e.g., ladders,
tailgates, etc. from surrounding objects/vehicles).
● When searching for a parking space, the driver
should drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending
on the type of maneuver) to other vehicles as
possible.
● While the vehicle is in DRIVE, there will be a full
screen image in the Uconnect display. If the driver
shifts to REVERSE while searching for a parking
space, a camera image will appear in the Uconnect
display with a “Shift To Drive” message.
Both types of valid spaces (parallel and perpendicular)
will be displayed in the Uconnect display as they are
found. The available spaces will update in real time.
When valid parking spaces have been found, and the
vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move
forward to position the vehicle for a perpendicular or
parallel parking sequence (depending on the type of
maneuver being performed).
A chime will sound, and the driver will be instructed
to stop the vehicle and to select a space. This can be
done by pressing the desired space on the Uconnect
display.
Select A Space
If the driver selects a perpendicular parking space, the
system will pr
ompt the driver to choose a Forward or
Reverse parking method.
Choose Perpendicular Parking Method
After a parking space has been selected, the driv
er will
be instructed to remove hands from the steering wheel
and shift into REVERSE.
Remove Hands From Wheel And Shift To Reverse
Once active steering begins, a camera image will
appear in the Uconnect display with instructions that
will display f
or the duration of the maneuver.
The system may then instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete before then instructing to check
the vehicle’s surroundings, and move backward.
Move Backward
Several more gear shifts (DRIVE and REVERSE) while
keeping hands of
f of the steering wheel will be
STARTING AND OPERATING 157
4
instructed to the driver while checking the vehicle’s
surroundings before completing the parking maneuver.
When the vehicle is in the parking position, the
maneuver is complete and the driver will be instructed
to check the vehicle's parking position, then shift the
vehicle into PARK. The message “Complete! Check
Parking Position” will be displayed momentarily.
NOTE:
● It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake
and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their
surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle
either when instructed to, or when driver intervention
is required.
● It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake
and accelerator during the Semi-Automatic parking
maneuver.
● When the system instructs the driver to remove their
hands from the steering wheel, the driver should
check their surroundings and begin to back up
slowly.
● The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle
speed exceeds 18 mph (30 km/h) during active
steering guidance into the parking space. The
system will provide a warning to the driver at 15 mph
(25 km/h) that tells them to slow down. The driver is
then responsible for completing the maneuver if the
system is canceled.
● If the system is canceled during the maneuver for
any reason, the driver must take control of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
● Driv
ers must be careful when performing parallel
or perpendicular parking maneuver
s even when
using the ParkSense Active Park Assist system.
Always check carefully behind and in front of
your vehicle, look behind and in front of you,
and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals,
other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots
before backing up and moving forward. You are
responsible for safety and must continue to pay
attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
● Before using the ParkSense Active Park Assist
system, it is strongly recommended that the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly be disconnected
from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or
damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch
ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia/bumper when the vehicle sounds the
continuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect
the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending
on its size and shape, giving a false indication that
an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
● The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is only
a parking aid and it is unable to recognize ev
ery
obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not detected at
all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors
(Continued)
CAUTION!
will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
● The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
the ParkSense Active Park Assist system in order
to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is
detected. It is recommended that the driver looks
over his/her shoulder when using the ParkSense
Active Park Assist system.
Parallel Park Exit
Enable the ParkSense Active P
ark Assist system by
pressing the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch. To
initiate a parking space exit maneuver, the vehicle must
be stopped, and the driver must press “Exit” on the
Uconnect display.
After the driver chooses a parallel park exit maneuver,
the system will then prompt the driver to choose an exit
method. The exit method options are Forward Left and
Forward Right.
Choose Exit Method
158 STARTING AND OPERATING
After an exit maneuver method has been selected,
the driver will be instructed to remove hands from the
steering wheel and shift into REVERSE.
Remove Hands From Wheel And Shift To Reverse
Release the steering wheel and use the brake and
accelerator pedals and gear select
or as instructed,
while the system handles the steering automatically for
exiting the parking space. If the driver touches or holds
the steering wheel (voluntarily or not) during the exit
maneuver, the maneuver will be interrupted.
The Semi-Automatic maneuver ends when the display
shows the message of a completed maneuver. At the
end of the maneuver, the system gives vehicle control
back to the driver.
ACTIVE LANE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM — IF
E
QUIPPED
ACTIVE LANE M
ANAGEMENT OPERATION
The Active Lane Management (ALM) system uses a
forward facing camera to detect lane markings or road
edges and to measure vehicle position within the lane
boundaries. It also uses the Blind Spot Monitoring
(BSM) sensors to detect vehicles in adjacent lanes
while the driver is preparing to change lanes.
The system is operational at speeds above 37 mph (60
km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
When both lane markings are detected, and the vehicle
approaches (or crosses) the lane marking with no turn
signal applied, and the blind spot zone is not occupied,
the ALM system provides warnings to prompt the driver
to remain within the lane boundaries. These warnings
include a visual warning in the instrument cluster along
with steering assist torque (if configured in Uconnect
Settings).
If the driver crosses the lane marking, the system
will either guide the vehicle back to the center of the
lane, provide a vibration in the steering wheel, or both,
depending on radio settings.
When both lane markings are detected, and the driver
uses the turn signal to indicate a lane change, and
a vehicle is detected in the BSM zone on that side
of the vehicle, the ALM system provides a warning in
the form of steering assist and/or steering vibration
(depending on radio settings) to guide the vehicle back
to the center of the lane.
NOTE:
● The system will suppress visual warnings, steering
vibration (if selected in radio settings), and steering
assistance (if selected in radio settings) when the
driver activates the turn signal, the blind spot zone is
clear of vehicles, and a lane change is occurring.
● If the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system detects a
vehicle in the adjacent lane, and the turn signal is
applied in that direction, the BSM LED on the mirror
will flash. If the driver continues to attempt the lane
change, steering wheel torque will be provided to
keep the vehicle within its lane markings.
The driver may manually override the steering assist
warning by applying force to the steering wheel at any
time.
When only a single lane marking is detected and the
driver drifts across the lane marking (no turn signal
applied), the Active Lane Management system provides
a visual warning in the instrument cluster, as well
as a steering assist torque (if configured in Uconnect
Settings), to prompt the driver to remain within the
lane boundaries. If the driver continues to drift out
of the lane, the system provides a flashing visual
warning through the instrument cluster display as well
as a haptic steering wheel vibration (if configured in
Uconnect Settings) when the vehicle crosses the lane
boundary.
NOTE:
When operating conditions have been met, the Active
Lane Management system will monitor if the driver’s
hands are on the steering wheel and provides an
audible and visual warning to the driver if removed.
The system will cancel if the driver does not return their
hands to the wheel.
STARTING AND OPERATING 159
4
TURNING ACTIVE LANE MANAGEMENT ON OR
O
FF
The Active Lane Management button is
located on the switch panel on the forward
part of the center console, in front of the
gear selector.
To turn the system on, push the Active Lane
Management button (LED turns off). A message is
shown in the instrument cluster display.
To turn the system off, push the button again (LED
turns on).
NOTE:
The Active Lane Management system will retain the last
system state on or off from the last ignition cycle when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
ACTIVE LANE MANAGEMENT WARNING
MESSAGE
The Active Lane Management system will indicate the
current lane drift condition through the instrument
cluster display.
When the system is on, the lane lines are gray when
both of the lane boundaries have not been detected.
System On (Gray Lines)
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Det
ected
● When the system is on and only the left lane
marking has been detected, and the system is
ready to provide visual warnings in the instrument
cluster display and a vibration and/or steering assist
warning in the steering wheel if a lane departure
occurs, the left lane line will be green.
● When the system senses the lane line has been
approached (but not crossed), the left lane line will
change to solid yellow and the system will provide
steering assist torque (if programmed in Uconnect
Settings).
● When the system senses the lane line is being
crossed, the left lane line will change to flashing
yellow, and the system will provide haptic steering
wheel vibration (if programmed in Uconnect
Settings).
Lane Crossed (Flashing Yellow Line)
NOTE:
The Active Lane Management system operat
es with
similar behavior for a right lane departure when only
the right lane marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
● When the system is on, the lane lines turn from gray
to green to indicate that both of the lane markings
have been detected. When both lane markings
have been detected, the system is ready to provide
visual warnings in the instrument cluster display and
a vibration and/or steering assist warning in the
steering wheel if a lane departure occurs.
160 STARTING AND OPERATING
Lanes Sensed (Green Lines)
● When the system senses a lane drift situation, the
left lane line turns solid yello
w. At this time, steering
assist warning is applied to the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the lane
the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Drift (Solid Yellow Line)
● When the system senses the lane line is being
crossed, the left lane line changes from solid y
ellow
to flashing yellow (on/off). At this time, vibration is
applied to the steering wheel.
For exam
ple: If approaching the left side of the lane
the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Crossed (Flashing Yellow Line)
NOTE:
● The Active Lane Management system operat
es with
similar behavior for a right lane departure.
● If the turn signal is activated, and the vehicle begins
to depart the lane at the same time the Blind Spot
Monitoring (BSM) system detects another vehicle
in the BSM zones, the system will provide haptic
steering wheel vibration and/or steering assist
torque (if programmed in Uconnect Settings).
CHANGING ACTIVE LANE MANAGEMENT
STATUS
Configurable settings for the Active Lane Management
system are available within the Uconnect system
ð
page 186.
Selectable Warning Types:
● Vibration Only
● Steering Assist Only
● Vibration And Steering Assist
Other configurable settings f
or this system are for
the intensity of the vibration (high/med/low), steering
assist strength (hi/med/low), and the warning zone
sensitivity (early/medium/late).
NOTE:
● The system will not apply vibration and/or steering
assist to the steering wheel whenever a safety
system engages (Anti-Lock Brakes, Traction Control
System, Electronic Stability Control, Forward Collision
Warning, etc.).
● The Blind Spot Monitoring system will be forced on
when the ALM system is enabled.
● The ALM system will be suppressed when the Active
Driving Assist system (if equipped) is engaged.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
Your vehicle is equipped with the ParkView Rear Back
Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image
of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the
gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the Navigation/Multimedia radio display
screen along with a caution note to “Check Entire
Surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five
seconds this note will disappear. The ParkView camera
is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear
license plate.
STARTING AND OPERATING 161
4
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
camera delay turned off, the rear camera mode is
exited and the previous screen appears.
Manual Activation Of The Back Up Camera
1. Press the Vehicle button located on the bottom of
the Uconnect display and then select the Controls
menu.
2. Press the Back Up Camera icon to turn the Rear
View Camera system on.
NOTE:
● The Rear View camera can also be turned on
manually through the Apps menu within the
Uconnect system.
● The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has
programmable modes of operation that may be
selected through the Uconnect system
ð
page
186.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
camera delay turned off, the rear camera mode is
exited and the previous screen appears. When the
vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with camera delay
turned on, the camera image will continue to be
displayed for up to 10 seconds unless the following
conditions occur: the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph
(13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK, the
vehicle’s ignition is placed in the OFF position, or the
touchscreen X button to disable the display of the Rear
View Camera is pressed.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its
projected back up path based on the steering wheel
position. A dashed center line overlay indicates the
center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning
to a hitch/receiver. Different colored zones indicate the
distance to the rear of the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances
for each zone:
Zone
Distance To The Rear Of
The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater (2 m or
greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You
are responsible for the safety of your surroundings
and must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
● T
o avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkVie
w camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
● T
o avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using Par
kView to be able
to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is
recommended that the driver look frequently over
his/her shoulder when using ParkView.
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on
the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with w
ater, and
dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Rear Camera Washer
When the rear window washer is activated by pushing
the windshield wiper/washer lever forward, the rear
Back Up and digital rearview mirror (if equipped)
cameras are also washed. For more information, see
ð
page 62.
ZOOM VIEW
When the Rear View Camera image is
being displayed, and the vehicle speed is
below 8 mph (13 km/h) while in any gear
selector position, Zoom View is available. By
pressing the “magnifying glass” icon in the upper left of
the display screen, the image will zoom in to four times
the standard view. Pressing the icon a second time
will return the view to the standard Back Up Camera
display.
When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is in
REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera delay view
will display the standard Back Up Camera view. If the
162 STARTING AND OPERATING
vehicle is then returned to REVERSE gear from DRIVE,
the Zoom View selection will automatically resume.
Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain the
selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as the vehicle
speed is below 8 mph (13 km/h).
If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available until
the gear selector is placed in DRIVE or REVERSE and
speeds are at or above 8 mph (13 km/h).
NOTE:
● If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE, and
speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph (13 km/h),
Zoom View is unavailable and the icon will appear
gray.
● While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be visible.
VIEWING AT SPEED
When the vehicle is in PARK, NEUTRAL
or DRIVE, the Rear View Camera can be
activated with the Back Up Camera button
in the Controls menu. This feature allows
the customer to monitor the area directly behind the
vehicle (or trailer, if equipped) for up to 10 seconds
while driving. If the vehicle speed remains below 8
mph (13 km/h), the Rear View Camera image will
be displayed continuously until deactivated via the
touchscreen X button.
FAMCAM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The FamCam system consists of an interior monitoring
camera mounted on the headliner that allows the driver
to view cargo/passengers in the rear interior of the
vehicle through the Uconnect screen.
To activate the feature, press the FamCam
button in the Controls tab of the Vehicle
menu. The FamCam feature can also be
accessed from the App Drawer, or the
status bar at the top of the Uconnect display.
The display will show the entire view inside the vehicle
on the left side of the screen, and will show a zoomed-
in view of the selected seat on the right side of the
screen.
FamCam Display Example
(7 Passenger Vehicle Shown)
To change the seat sho
wn in the zoomed-in view,
press a different seat location on the left side of the
display. The zoomed-in view will then show the new seat
location. By default, the second row driver’s side seat
will be displayed in the zoomed-in view.
The display will appear in color in well lit conditions and
will appear black and white in low light conditions.
If the driver shifts into REVERSE or presses the
touchscreen X button, the view will close. Otherwise,
the FamCam view will remain on the display.
NOTE:
When FamCam is turned off, the selected seat in the
zoomed-in view on the right side of the display will be
retained. The next time the feature is activated, the
same seat will be shown in the zoomed-in view.
NIGHT VISION CAMERA SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Night Vision
Camera system which uses an infrared camera to view
the area ahead of the vehicle, beyond the headlights,
to detect people and large animals when it is dark
outside.
The system detects pedestrians or large animals by
measuring the temperature difference between the
object and the surrounding area.
The thermal objects detected by the camera can be
displayed in the instrument cluster display. Scroll to
the Night Vision page in the instrument cluster display
menu
ð
page 100 to display the Night Vision screen.
Warm objects (e.g. animals) will appear lighter on the
display while cold objects (e.g. traffic signs) will appear
darker.
NOTE:
● Night Vision only shows objects of interest that are
warmer or colder than the surroundings.
● Adjust the instrument cluster dimmer control
brightness to make the image appear brighter or
dimmer.
STARTING AND OPERATING 163
4
To exit out of the Night Vision screen, select a different
menu in the instrument cluster display.
A yellow or red border and box highlight will appear
around objects of interest. More than one object of
interest may be highlighted.
Highlight Around Objects Of Interest
The highlighting of the object(s) of interest will update
in real time based upon the current Night Vision
assessment.
The Night Vision system display can be deactiv
ated
under certain conditions. See
ð
page 166 for further
information.
The two categories of Night Vision warnings are
Pedestrian Warnings and Animal Warnings.
Pedestrian Warning Telltale
Animal Warning Telltale
A Pedestrian or Animal Warning is
considered either Level 1 or Level 2. Level
1 warnings are yellow, and Level 2 warnings
are red. The colors are not configurable.
Level 1 Warnings:
● Yellow telltale in the instrument cluster display
● Yellow highlights around the detected pedestrian/
animal
● Occurs when the vehicle is moving at speeds greater
than 8 mph (13 km/h) and the target is in or
approaching the vehicle path
Level 2 Warnings:
● Red telltale in the instrument cluster display
● Red highlights around the detected pedestrian/
animal
● Occurs when the vehicle is moving at speeds greater
than 8 mph (13 km/h) and a collision with the
detected pedestrian/animal is possible
● The pedestrian/animal is directly in the vehicle path,
close to the headlight area
● A video pop-up will display when there is a target
detected and the instrument cluster display is not
showing the Night Vision page
● A chime will sound for a Level 2 Warning detection
event
Only one telltale can be displayed at a time based upon
priority.
The priority order of the warnings from highest to lowest
is:
1. Pedestrian Warning Level 2
2. Animal Warning Level 2
3. Pedestrian Warning Level 1
4. Animal Warning Level 1
Level 2 Warnings may display in the Head Up Display (if
equipped).
NOTE:
If the vehicle is stopped, or slowing down, all Level 2
warnings become Level 1 warnings.
You can enable or disable the warnings within the
Uconnect system
ð
page 186.
If the warnings are off, the telltales, chimes, and
warning messages will all be off. Pedestrians and
animals can still be detected by the system, but there
will be no warnings.
The Night Vision alert status telltale will be
gray when the warnings are suppressed.
The telltale will also turn gray to indicate
that the alerts are suppressed due to
environmental factors (e.g. daylight hours, external
temperature is greater than 86°F (30°C)) or if the gear
selector is in REVERSE. When the Night Vision alerts
are active, the telltale will be green
ð
page 104.
Camera Washers
When the front window washer is activated, the Night
Vision camera will also be washed
ð
page 61.
164 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
● Do no
t jerk the steering wheel in response to a
warning.
● Never att
empt to swerve around animals if doing
so would endanger you or others.
● Do not stare at the image while driving. You could
crash and you or others could be injured.
● The Night Vision system only provides alerts
to objects of interest and cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment. The
warnings are meant to direct your attention to the
detected objects, but the Night Vision system does
not automatically brake the vehicle and may not
provide a warning with enough time to help avoid a
crash.
● Warnings are only provided if a pedestrian or large
animal is detected by the system.
● It is always the driver’s responsibility to be
attentive of road, traffic, and weather conditions,
vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead, and
most importantly, brake operation, to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road conditions.
Your complete attention is always required while
driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.
DETECTION RANGE
The system can detect people 4 ft (1
.25 m) tall or
greater in the upright position. The system can also
detect animals that are four-legged and 3 ft (1 m) tall or
greater in the upright position.
The detection distance for the system is between 26 ft
(8 m) and 328 ft (100 m) from the front of the v
ehicle.
The system may not be able to detect pedestrians or
animals in the following situations:
● Pedestrian/animal is outside of the detection range
● Pedestrian/animal is fully or partially covered
● Pedestrian/animal does not reach the minimum
detection height
NOTE:
Other objects on the road that meet the height/
shape/temperature (e.g. sun exposure) of pedestrians/
animals may be detected and classified as targets.
WARNING!
● Night Vision can only detect pedestrians and
animals located within the range of the infrared
camera.
● Night Vision may no
t detect pedestrians or
animals and highlight them if:
○ They are not in an upright position, for example
if they are sitting or lying down, or if the
pedestrian is riding a bicycle
○ The figure in the display appears incomplete,
for example because the pedestrian or animal
is partially behind a vehicle
○ The pedestrian/animal is not directly ahead in
the coverage area
○ The pedestrian/animal is part of a group
(Continued)
WARNING!
○ The pedestrian is w
earing certain types of
clothing
○ The pedestrian/animal is moving t
oo quickly
through the field of view
○ The sensor is blocked by dirt, rain, snow, or ice
SERVICE THE NIGHT VISION SYSTEM
When ser
vice conditions are present, the following fault
messages may appear in the instrument cluster display
when the vehicle is placed in the ON position.
If "Night Vision Unavailable Sensor Blocked" appears in
the instrument cluster display, make sure the camera
is clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other debris. The
camera is located in the upper fascia/bumper, inside
the driver side grille slot. Clean the camera using a soft
wet cloth or by pressing the Clean Camera button in the
Uconnect system. If the message continues to appear
after cycling the ignition, see an authorized dealer.
If “Night Vision Temporarily Unavailable” or “Night
Vision Unavailable Service Required" appears in the
instrument cluster display after cycling the ignition, see
an authorized dealer.
The camera must be properly aligned to work correctly.
If the camera needs adjustment, see an authorized
dealer. Do not attempt to adjust the camera yourself.
NOTE:
Alignment and performance of the Night Vision may be
affected by aftermarket modifications. Mopar® parts
should be used to get the optimal performance of this
system.
STARTING AND OPERATING 165
4
NIGHT VISION SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
The Night Vision display is deactivated under the
following conditions:
● Vehicle is shifted into REVERSE
● The ignition is not in the ON/RUN position
● The headlights are off and the vehicle speed is
greater than 8 mph (13 km/h)
The Night Vision display warnings are suppressed under
the following conditions:
● Daylight hours
● Temperatures above 86°F (30°C)
The system may not be fully functional in the following
situations:
● On steep hills
● On tight curves of the road
● If the camera/sensor is damaged or blocked by dirt,
snow, ice, or other debris
● In poor visibility conditions such as heavy fog, rain,
snow, or other weather conditions
● If the vehicle has been modified with aftermarket
parts and/or accessories
NOTE:
If any of these conditions are present, the system does
not need service.
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM — IF
E
QUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Surround View
Camera system that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the surroundings and Top View of your vehicle
whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE or
a different view is selected through the touchscreen
buttons. The Top View of the vehicle will show which
doors are open. The image will be displayed on the
touchscreen display along with a caution note “Check
Entire Surroundings” across the top of the screen. After
five seconds, this note will disappear. The Surround
View Camera system is comprised of four sequential
cameras located in the front grille, rear liftgate and side
mirrors.
NOTE:
The Surround View Camera system has programmable
settings that may be selected through the Uconnect
system
ð
page 186.
Press this button on the touchscreen to
enter the Surround View Camera menu in
the Uconnect system.
When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE,
the Rear View or Top View is the default view of the
system.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
camera delay turned on, the camera image will
continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds unless
the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the
vehicle is shifted into PARK or the ignition is placed
in the OFF position. There is a touchscreen X button to
disable the display of the camera image.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
camera delay turned off, the Surround View Camera
mode is exited and the last known screen appears
again.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle, including
the side view mirrors and its projected back up path
based on the steering wheel position.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear
of the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances
for each zone:
Zone
Distance To The Rear Of
The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater (2 m or
greater)
Modes Of Operation
Manual activation of the Surround View Camera is
selected by pressing the Surround View Camera button
located in the Controls menu within the Uconnect
system.
Top View
The Top View will show in the Uconnect system with
Rear View or Front View in a split screen display. There
166 STARTING AND OPERATING
is integrated ParkSense arcs in the image at the front,
rear, and if equipped, the sides of the vehicle. The arcs
will change color from yellow to red corresponding to
the distance zones to the oncoming object.
Surround View Camera View
NOTE:
● Front tires will be in image when the tires are turned.
● Due to wide angle cameras in the mirrors, the image
may appear distorted.
● Top View will show which doors are open.
● Open front doors and/or liftgate will cancel outside
image.
Top View Plus Rear View
This is the default view of the system in
REVERSE and is always paired with the
Top View of the vehicle with optional active
guidelines for the projected path when
enabled.
The Rear Cross Path button will give the
driver a wider angle view of the rear camera
system. The Top View will be disabled when
this is selected.
Top View Plus Front View
The Front View will show you what is
immediately in front of the vehicle and is
always paired with the Top View of the
vehicle.
Front Cross Path View
The Front Cross Path button will give the
driver a wider angle view of the front
camera system. The Top View will be
disabled when this is selected.
Back Up Camera View
The Back Up Camera button will provide a
full screen rear view with Zoom View.
NOTE:
If the Rear View Camera view was selected through the
Surround View Camera menu, exiting out of the Rear
View screen will return to the Surround View Camera
menu. If the Back Up Camera was manually activated
through the Controls menu of the Uconnect system,
exiting out of the display screen will return to the
Controls menu.
Deactivation
The system can be deactivated under the following
conditions:
● The speed of the vehicle is greater than 8 mph (13
km/h).
● The v
ehicle is shifted into PARK.
● The vehicle is in any gear other than REVERSE and
the touchscreen X button is pressed.
● The camera delay system is turned off manually
through Uconnect Settings
ð
page 186.
Camera Washers
When the rear window washer is activated, the rear
Back Up and digital rearview mirror (if equipped)
cameras are also washed
ð
page 62.
When the front window washer is activated, the front
cameras will also be washed
ð
page 61.
NOTE:
● If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up
on the camera lenses, clean the lenses, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the
lenses.
● If a malfunction with the system has occurred, see
an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the Surround View Camera. Always check
carefully behind y
our vehicle, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible
for the safety of your surroundings and must continue
to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
STARTING AND OPERATING 167
4
R
ear Cross Path View
CAUTION!
● T
o avoid vehicle damage, Surround View should
only be used as a parking aid. The Surround View
camera is unable t
o view every obstacle or object
in your drive path.
● To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using Surround View to be able
to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is
recommended that the driver look frequently over
his/her shoulder when using Surround View.
ZOOM VIEW
When the R
ear View Camera image is being displayed,
and the vehicle speed is below 8 mph (13 km/h) while
in any gear selector position, Zoom View is available.
By pressing the “magnifying glass” icon
in
the upper left of the display screen,
the
image will zoom in to two times the
standard view.
Pressing the icon a second time will return
the vie
w t
o the standard Back Up Camera
display.
When Zoom View is selected while the
vehicle is in REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the
camera delay view will display the standard Back
Up Camera view. If the vehicle is then returned to
REVERSE gear from DRIVE, the Zoom View selection will
automatically resume.
Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain the
selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as the vehicle
is below 8 mph (13 km/h).
If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available until
the gear selector is placed in DRIVE or REVERSE and
speeds are at or above 8 mph (13 km/h).
NOTE:
● If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE, and
speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph (13 km/h),
Zoom View is unavailable and the icon will appear
gray.
● While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be visible.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
1. Open the fuel filler door by pushing on the outer
edge of the fuel door near the center to unlatch.
Then use a finger to rotate the door to the full open
position.
Fuel Filler Door
NOTE:
● In certain cold conditions, ice may prev
ent the
fuel door from opening. If this occurs, lightly
push around the perimeter of the fuel door to
break the ice buildup.
● There is no fuel filler cap. Two flapper doors
inside the pipe seal the syst
em.
2. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe – the
nozzle opens and holds the flapper doors while
refueling.
NOTE:
Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches
allowing the flapper doors to open.
Fuel Filler
3. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
4. W
ait five seconds before removing the fuel nozzle
to allow fuel to drain from nozzle.
5. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
Engage the fuel door latch by pushing on the outer
edge near the center.
NOTE:
For further information on fuel requirements see
ð
page 351.
168 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
● Ne
ver have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
● Nev
er add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the Malfunction
Indicator Light to turn on.
● A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could
be burned. Always place fuel containers on the
ground while filling.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off”
the fuel tank af
ter filling.
VEHICLE LOADING
GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT
RATING (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do
not exceed the GVWR.
PAYLOAD
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable
weight a vehicle can carry, including the weight of the
driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
GR
OSS AXLE WEIGHT
R
A
TING
(GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the
front and rear axles. The load must be distributed in
the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not
exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in
the system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles, or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for
increased durability, do not necessarily increase the
vehicle's GVWR or GAWR.
TIRE SIZE
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label
represents the actual tire size on your vehicle.
Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of
this tire size.
RIM SIZE
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
INFLATION PRESSURE
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle
for all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
CURB WEIGHT
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total
weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle
fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with no occupants
or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb
weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle
on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo
are added.
LOADING
The actual t
otal weight and the weight of the front
and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be
determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready
for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a
commercial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not
been exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of
the vehicle should then be determined separately to
be sure that the load is properly distributed over the
front and rear axles. Weighing the vehicle may show
that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has
been exceeded but the total load is within the specified
GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from front to rear
or rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight
limitations are met. Store the heavier items down low
and be sure that the weight is distributed equally. Stow
all loose items securely before driving.
NOTE:
● Improper weight distributions can have an adverse
effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles
and the way the brakes operate.
● Air suspension vehicle may limit off-road heights
if loaded beyond recommended values for vehicle
GVWR and GAWR.
STARTING AND OPERATING 169
4
WARNING!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Overloading can shorten the life of your
vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably
do with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty coverage, follow the requirements and
recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles
used for trailer towing.
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do
not exceed the GVWR
ð
page 169.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of
all cargo, consumables and eq
uipment (permanent or
temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its "loaded and
ready for operation" condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
WARNING!
If the gross trailer weight is 5,000 lb (2,267 kg) or
more, it is recommended to use a weight-distributing
hitch to ensure stable handling of your vehicle. If you
use a standard weight-carrying hitch, you could lose
control of your vehicle and cause a collision.
Gross Combination Weight Rating
(GCWR)
The GCWR is the total allowable w
eight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and
rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear
axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either
front or rear GAWR
ð
page 169.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
(Continued)
WARNING!
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downwar
d force exerted on the hitch ball
by the trailer. You must consider this as part of the load
on your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by
the maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
The TSC can be a mechanical telescoping link that
can be installed between the hitch receiver and the
trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction
associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any
unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic TSC recognizes a swaying
trailer and automatically applies individual wheel
brakes and/or reduces engine power to attempt to
eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball
or some other connecting point of the vehicle. These
kinds of hitches are used to tow small and medium
sized trailers.
170 STARTING AND OPERATING
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A Weight-Distributing Hitch system works b
y applying
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically
used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight
to the tow vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s).
When used in accordance with the manufacturer's
directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering
more consistent steering and brake control thereby
enhancing towing safety. The addition of a friction/
hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by
traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to
tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway control
and a weight-distributing (load equalizing) hitch are
recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and
may be required depending on vehicle and trailer
configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
● An im
properly adjusted Weight-Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
per
formance, and could result in a collision.
● Weight-Distributing Hitch systems may not be
compatible with surge brake couplers. Consult
with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or
a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for
additional information.
RECOMMENDED DISTRIBUTION HITCH
ADJUSTMENT — QUADRA-LIFT AIR
SUSPENSION EQUIPPED VEHICLES
1
. Verify that the vehicle is at the Normal Ride Height.
NOTE:
The vehicle must remain in the RUN position with
all doors closed while attaching a trailer for pr
oper
leveling of the air suspension system.
2. Position the vehicle on a level surface in
preparation to connect to the trailer (do not
connect the trailer).
3. For vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift air
suspension, use the touchscreen radio settings
to enable Tire/Jack mode. Tire/Jack mode will be
canceled and the procedure must be restarted
if the vehicle is driven at speeds above 5 mph
(8 km/h). When towing, the automatic Entry/Exit
feature may be disabled through the Uconnect
Touchscreen Radio to prevent vehicle and trailer
movement when gear selector is moved to PARK.
4. Measure the height from the top of the front wheel
opening on the fender to the ground; this is height
H1.
Measuring Height (H)
5. Attach the loaded trailer to the vehicle without the
w
eight distribution bars connected.
6. Measure the height from the top of the front wheel
opening on the f
ender to the ground; this is height
H2.
7.
Install and adjust the tension in the weight-
distributing bars per the manufacturers’
recommendations so that the height of the front
fender is approximately (H2-H1)/2+H1 (about 1/2
the difference between H2 and H1 above Normal
Ride Height [H1]).
8. Use the touchscreen radio settings and switch off
Tire/Jack mode. Make sure the vehicle returns to
Normal Ride Height. Perform a visual inspection of
the trailer and weight-distributing hitch to confirm
the manufacturers’ recommendations have been
met.
9. The vehicle can now be driven.
Measurement Example Example Height (mm)
H1 925
H2 946
H2-H1 21
(H2-H1)/2 10.5
(H2-H1)/2 + H1 935.5
NOTE:
For all towing conditions, we recommend towing with
TOW/HAUL mode engaged (if equipped).
RECOMMENDED DISTRIBUTION HITCH
ADJUSTMENT — NON-AIR SUSPENSION
EQUIPPED VEHICLES
1. Verify that the vehicle is at the normal ride height.
STARTING AND OPERATING 171
4
2. Position the vehicle on a level surface in
preparation to connect to the trailer (do not
connect the trailer).
3. Measure the height from the top of the front wheel
opening on the fender to the ground; this is height
H1.
Measuring Height (H)
4. Attach the loaded trailer to the vehicle without the
weight distribution bars connected.
5. Ensure the trailer is properly secured to the hitch,
including the saf
e
ty chains, lighting, and trailer
brake controls.
6.
Cautiously drive the vehicle and trailer at 20-25
mph (30-40 km/h) for approximately 3 miles (5
km) to re-level the suspension.
7. Park the vehicle and trailer on a level surface.
8. Measure the height from the top of the front wheel
opening on the fender to the ground; this is height
H2.
9. Install and adjust the tension in the weight-
distributing bars per the manufacturers’
recommendations so that the height of the front
fender is approximately (H2-H1)/2+H1 (about 1/2
the difference between H2 and H1 above normal
ride height [H1]).
10. Perform a visual inspection of the trailer
and weight-distributing hitch to confirm the
manufacturers’ recommendations have been met.
11. The vehicle can now be driven.
Measurement Example Example Height (mm)
H1 925
H2 946
H2-H1 21
(H2-H1)/2 10.5
(H2-H1)/2 + H1 935.5
NOTE:
For all towing conditions, we recommend towing with
TOW/HAUL mode engaged (if equipped).
TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION
The following chart provides the industry standard
for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch
class can tow and should be used to assist you in
selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended
towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lb (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lb (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 6,000 lb (2,722 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lb (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
172 STARTING AND OPERATING
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)
Model Engine Wheel Base (in) Axle Ratio GCWR Frontal Area Max GTW Max TW
Wagoneer 4x2 3.0L SO 130 3.55
12,300 lb (5,579
kg)
40 sq ft (3.72 sq
m)
5,990 lb (2,717 kg) 599 lb (272 kg)
Wagoneer 4x4 3.0L SO 130 3.55
12,300 lb (5,579
kg)
40 sq ft (3.72 sq
m)
5,750 lb (2,608 kg) 575 lb (261 kg)
Wagoneer 4x2 3.0L SO 130 3.92
16,500 lb (7,484
kg)
60 sq ft (5.57 sq
m)
10,000 lb (4,536
kg)
1,000 lb (454 kg)
Wagoneer 4x4
(Max Tow)
3.0L SO 130 3.92
16,500 lb (7,484
kg)
55 sq ft (5.11 sq
m)
10,000 lb (4,536
kg)
1,000 lb (454 kg)
Grand Wagoneer
4x4
3.0L HO 130 3.92
12,300 lb (5,579
kg)
40 sq ft (3.72 sq
m)
5,400 lb (2,449 kg) 540 lb (245 kg)
Grand Wagoneer
4x4 (Max Tow)
3.0L HO 130 3.92
16,500 lb (7,484
kg)
55 sq ft (5.11 sq
m)
9,650 lb (4,377 kg) 965 lb (437 kg)
4x2 Series 3 5.7L 123 3.21
13,700 lb (6,214
kg)
40 sq ft (3.72 sq
m)
7,400 lb (3,356 kg) 740 lb (335 kg)
4x2 Series 3 5.7L 123 3.92
15,000 lb (6,803
kg)
60 sq ft (5.57 sq
m)
10,000 lb (4,536
kg)
1,000 lb (454 kg)
4x2 Series 2 5.7L 123 3.21
15,000 lb (6,803
kg)
55 sq ft (5.11 sq
m)
8,790 lb (3,987 kg) 879 lb (398 kg)
STARTING AND OPERATING 173
4
Model Engine Wheel Base (in) Axle Ratio GCWR Frontal Area Max GTW Max TW
4x2 Series 2 5.7L 123 3.92
16,600 lb (7,529
kg)
60 sq ft (5.57 sq
m)
10,000 lb (4,536
kg)
1,000 lb (454 kg)
4x4 Series 1 5.7L 123 3.21
13,700 lb (6,214
kg)
40 sq ft (3.72 sq
m)
7,180 lb (3,256 kg) 718 lb (325 kg)
4x4 Series 1 5.7L 123 3.92
15,000 lb (6,803
kg)
55 sq ft (5.11 sq
m)
8,480 lb (3,846 kg) 848 lb (386 kg)
4x4 Series 2 5.7L 123 3.21
13,700 lb (6,214
kg)
40 sq ft (3.72 sq
m)
7,170 lb (3,252 kg) 717 lb (325 kg)
4x4 Series 2 5.7L 123 3.92
16,600 lb (7,529
kg)
60 sq ft (5.57 sq
m)
10,000 lb (4,536
kg)
1,000 lb (454 kg)
4x4 Series 3 5.7L 123 3.21
13,700 lb (6,214
kg)
40 sq ft (3.72 sq
m)
7,170 lb (3,252 kg) 717 lb (325 kg)
4x4 Series 3 5.7L 123 3.92
15,000 lb (6,803
kg)
55 sq ft (5.11 sq
m)
8,470 lb (3,841 kg) 847 lb (384 kg)
Wagoneer 4x2 3.0L SO 123 3.55
12,300 lb (5,579
kg)
40 sq ft (3.72 sq
m)
6,130 lb (2,781 kg) 613 lb (278 kg)
Wagoneer 4x4 3.0L SO 123 3.55
12,300 lb (5,579
kg)
40 sq ft (3.72 sq
m)
5,980 lb (2,713 kg) 598 lb (271 kg)
Wagoneer 4x2 &
4x4 (Max Tow)
3.0L SO 123 3.92
16,500 lb (7,484
kg)
60 sq ft (5.57 sq
m)
10,000 lb (4,536
kg)
1,000 lb (454 kg)
Grand Wagoneer
4x4
6.4L 123 3.92
15,000 lb (6,803
kg)
55 sq ft (5.11 sq
m)
8,370 lb (3,797 kg) 837 lb (380 kg)
Grand Wagoneer
4x4 (Max Tow)
6.4L 123 3.92
16,600 lb (7,529
kg)
55 sq ft (5.11 sq
m)
9,930 lb (4,504 kg) 993 lb (450 kg)
174 STARTING AND OPERATING
Model Engine Wheel Base (in) Axle Ratio GCWR Frontal Area Max GTW Max TW
Grand Wagoneer
4x4
3.0L HO 123 3.92
12,300 lb (5,579
kg)
40 sq ft (3.72 sq
m)
5,620 lb (2,563 kg) 562 lb (255 kg)
Grand Wagoneer
4x4 (Max Tow)
3.0L HO 123 3.92
16,500 lb (7,484
kg)
55 sq ft (5.11 sq
m)
9,880 lb (4,482 kg) 988 lb (448 kg)
TRAILER HITCH RECEIVER COVER R
EMOVAL —
IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a trailer hitch
receiver cover, this must be removed to access the
trailer hitch receiver. This cover is located at the bottom
center of the rear fascia/bumper.
1. Turn the three locking retainers located at the
bottom of the hitch receiver cover a quarter turn
counterclockwise and pull bottom of the hitch
receiver cover outward (towards you).
2. Pull the bottom of the cover outward (towards you)
then downwards to disengage the tabs located at
the top of the hitch receiver cover to remove.
Hitch Receiver Cover
1 — Hitch Receiver Cover
2 — Locking Retainers
To reinstall the cover after towing repeat the procedure
in reverse order
.
NOTE:
Be sure to engage all tabs and fully seat the hitch
receiver cover in the fascia/bumper prior to installation
of the quarter turn fasteners.
TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Weight Distribution
WARNING!
Always load a trailer with 60% of the weight in the
fr
ont of the trailer. This places 10% of the GT
W on
the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the
wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer
to sway severely side to side which will cause loss
of control of the vehicle and trailer. Failure to load
trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer
collisions.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
STARTING AND OPERATING 175
4
● The tongue weight of the trailer.
● The weight of any other type of cargo or eq
uipment
put in or on your vehicle.
● The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the trailer
adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options
must be considered as part of the total load
on your vehicle. Refer to the Tire And Loading
Information Placard for the maximum combined weight
of occupants and cargo for your vehicle.
TOWING REQUIREMENTS
To promote proper break-in of the new vehicle
drivetrain components, the following guidelines are
recommended.
CAUTION!
● Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle or o
ther parts could be damaged.
● Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that
a trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80
km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle. This
helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle
wear in at the heavier loads.
Perform the maintenance listed in the Scheduled
Servicing
ð
page 291. When towing a trailer, never
exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
● Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
● When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or
damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission,
steering, suspension, chassis structure or tires.
● Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
● Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission
in PARK (P). For four-wheel drive vehicles, make
sure the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL (N).
Always, block or "chock" the trailer wheels.
● GCWR must not be exceeded.
● Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
(Continued)
WARNING!
○ G
VWR
○ GTW
○ GA
WR
○ Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized
Towing Requirements — Tires
● Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
● Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when
towing while using a full-size spare tire.
● Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
● Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
● Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer.
● Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity
will not increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR
limits.
● For further information
ð
page 331.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
● Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the
trailer. This could cause inadequate braking and
possible personal injury.
● An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
176 S
TARTING AND OPERATING
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped
with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an
electronic brake controller is not required.
● Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lb (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess
of 2,000 lb (907 kg).
WARNING!
● Do no
t connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload y
our brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have an
accident.
● Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing, you should allow for
additional space between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result
in an accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lb (453 kg)
loaded, it should ha
ve its own brakes and they should
be of adeq
uate capacity. Failure to do this could lead
to accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
effort, and longer stopping distances.
Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM) —
If Equipped
Your vehicle may ha
ve an ITBM for Electric and Electric
Over Hydraulic (EOH) trailer brakes. The controller is
located below the instrument panel on the right side of
the steering column.
NOTE:
This module has been designed and verified with
electric trailer brakes and EOH systems. Some previous
EOH syst
ems may not be compatible with ITBM.
Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM)
1 — GAIN Adjustment Button
2 — GAIN Adjustment Button
3 — Manual Brake Control Lever
Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light
This light indicates the trailer electrical connection
status.
If no electrical connection is detected after the ignition
is turned on, pushing the GAIN adjustment button or
sliding the manual brake control lever will display the
GAIN setting for 10 seconds and the Trailer Brake
Status Indicator Light will not be displayed.
If a fault is detected in the trailer wiring or the ITBM, the
Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light will flash.
GAIN Adjustment Buttons (+/-)
Pushing these buttons will adjust the brake control
power output to the trailer brakes in 0.5 increments.
The GAIN setting can be increased to a maximum of 10
or decreased to a minimum of 0 (no trailer braking).
GAIN
The GAIN setting is used to set the trailer brake
control for the specific towing condition and should
be changed as towing conditions change. Changes to
towing conditions include trailer load, vehicle load, road
conditions and weather.
Adjusting GAIN
NOTE:
This should only be performed in a traffic free
environment at speeds of approximately 20–25 mph
(30–40 km/h).
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good working
condition, functioning normally and properly
adjusted. See a trailer dealer if necessary.
STARTING AND OPERATING 177
4
The user interface consists of the following:
Manual Brake Control Lever
Slide the manual brake control lever to the left
to activate power to the trailer's electric brakes
independent of the tow vehicle's brakes. If the manual
brake control lever is activated while the brake is also
applied, the greater of the two inputs determines the
power sent to the trailer brakes.
The trailer and the vehicle's brake lamps will come on
when either vehicle braking or manual trailer brakes
are applied.
3. When a trailer with electric/EOH brakes is plugged
in, the trailer connected message should appear in
the instrument cluster display (if the connection is
not recognized by the ITBM, braking functions will
not be available), the GAIN setting will illuminate
and the correct type of trailer must be selected
from the instrument cluster display options.
4. Push the UP or DOWN button on the steering
wheel until “TRAILER TOW” appears on the screen.
5. Push the RIGHT arrow on the steering wheel to
enter “TRAILER TOW”.
6. Push the UP or DOWN buttons until the “Trailer
Brake Type” appears on the screen.
7. Push the RIGHT arrow and then push the UP or
DOWN buttons until the proper Trailer Brake Type
appears on the screen.
8. In a traffic-free environment, tow the trailer on a
dry, level surface at a speed of 20–25 mph (30–
40 km/h) and squeeze the manual brake control
lever completely.
9. If the trailer wheels lockup (indicated by squealing
tires), reduce the GAIN setting; if the trailer wheels
turn freely, increase the GAIN setting.
Display Messages
The trailer brake control interacts with the instrument
cluster display. Display messages, along with a single
chime, will be displayed when a malfunction is
determined in the trailer connection, trailer brake
control, or on the trailer
ð
page 96.
WARNING!
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the
ITBM system may result in reduced or complete
loss of trailer braking. There may be an increase in
stopping distance or trailer instability which could
result in personal injury.
CAUTION!
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the
ITBM system may result in reduced or complete
loss of trailer braking. There may be an increase in
stopping distance or trailer instability which could
result in damage to your vehicle, trailer, or other
property.
NOTE:
● An aftermarket controller may be available for use
with trailers with air or EOH trailer brake systems.
To determine the type of brakes on your trailer and
the availability of controllers, check with your trailer
manufacturer or dealer.
● Removal of the ITBM will cause errors and it
may cause damage to the electrical system and
electronic modules of the vehicle. See an authorized
dealer if an aftermarket module is to be installed.
Towing R
equirements — Trailer Lights
And Wiring
Whenever pulling a trailer, regar
dless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required
for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer
harness and connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the
vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer
connector. Refer to the following illustrations.
NOTE:
● Disconnect the trailer wiring connector from the
vehicle (or any other device plugged into the
vehicle's electrical connectors) before launching a
boat into water.
● Be sure to reconnect once clear from water area.
178 S
TARTING AND OPERATING
Repeat steps 8 and 9 until the GAIN setting is at a
point just below trailer wheel lockup. If towing a heavier
trailer, trailer wheel lockup may not be attainable even
with the maximum GAIN setting of 10.
2. Hook up the trailer and make the
electrical connections according to the trailer
manufacturer's instructions.
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Ground
2 — Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Backup Lamps
2 — Running Lamps
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Ground
5 — Battery
6 — Right Stop/Turn
7 — Electric Brakes
TOWING TIPS
Before t
owing, practice turning, stopping, and backing
up the trailer in an area located away from heavy
traffic. If equipped with Quadra-Lift air suspension, the
automatic Entry/Exit feature may be disabled through
the Uconnect Touchscreen Radio to prevent vehicle and
trailer movement when gear selector is moved to PARK.
Automatic Transmission
Select the DRIVE (D) range when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strat
egy to avoid
frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent
shifting does occur while in DRIVE, you can use the
Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control to manually
select a lower gear.
NOTE:
Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle under
heavy loading conditions, will improve performance and
extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat build-up. This action will also provide better
engine braking.
Cruise Control — If Equipped
● Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
● When using the Cruise Control, if you experience
speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h),
disengage until you can get back to cruising speed.
● Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with light loads
to maximize fuel efficiency.
STARTING AND OPERATING 179
4
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground Two-Wheel Drive Models
Four-Wheel Drive Models With-
out 4WD LOW Range
Four-Wheel Drive Models With
4WD LOW Range
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
See Instructions
● Transmission in PARK
● Transfer case in N (Neutral)
● Tow in forward direction
Dolly Tow
Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK OK
NOTE:
● When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable
state and provincial laws. Contact state and
provincial Highway Safety offices for additional
details.
● Vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift must be placed
in Transport mode before tying them down (from the
body) on a trailer or flatbed truck
ð
page 127. If
the vehicle cannot be placed in Transport mode (for
example, engine will not run), tie-downs should be
fastened over the tires using specific straps (not to
the body). Failure to follow these instructions may
cause fault codes to be set and/or cause loss of
proper tie-down tension.
RECREATIONAL TOWING — TWO-WHEEL
DRIVE MODELS
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain
will result.
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is
allow
ed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the ground.
This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle
trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle,
following the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
NOTE:
If vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift air
suspension, ensure the vehicle is set to Normal
Ride Height.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Apply the Electric Park Brake. Shift the
transmission into PARK.
4. Turn the ignition OFF.
5. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly,
following the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for
towing, to secure the front wheels in the straight
position.
CAUTION!
Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will cause
severe transmission damage. Damage from improper
(Continued)
180 STARTING AND OPERATING
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME)
CAUTION!
towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
RECREATIONAL TOWING — QU
ADRA-TRAC
I (SINGLE-SPEED TRANSFER CASE) FOUR-
WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
Recreational towing is not allowed. These models do
not have a N (Neutral) position in the transfer case.
NOTE:
This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle trailer
provided all four wheels are OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the previous
requirements can cause severe transmission and/or
transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing
is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
RECREATIONAL TOWING — QU
ADRA–TRAC
II/QUADRA–DRIVE II FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE
MODELS
The transfer case must be shifted into N (Neutral) and
the transmission must be in PARK (P) for recreational
towing. The N (Neutral) selection button is located by
the selector switch.
CAUTION!
● DO NO
T dolly tow any four-wheel drive vehicle.
Towing with only one set of wheels on the ground
(front or rear) will cause severe transmission
and/or transfer case damage. Tow with all four
wheels either ON the ground, or OFF the ground
(using a vehicle trailer).
● Tow only in a forward direction. Towing this vehicle
backwards can cause severe damage to the
transfer case.
● The transmission must be in PARK for recreational
towing.
● Before recreational towing, perform the procedure
outlined under “Shifting into N (Neutral)” to be
certain that the transfer case is fully in N (Neutral).
Otherwise, internal damage will result.
● Towing this vehicle in violation of the previous
requirements can cause severe transmission
and/or transfer case damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
● Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar
on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be
damaged.
Shifting Into N (Neutral)
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
(Continued)
WARNING!
N (Neutral) position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case N (Neutral) position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even
if the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is not in the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain
that the transfer case is fully in N (Neutral) before
recreational towing to prevent damage to internal
parts.
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing:
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on level
ground, with the engine running.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
4. If vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift air
suspension, ensure the vehicle is set to Normal
Ride Height.
NOTE:
● Steps 1 through 4 are requirements that must
be met before pushing the N (Neutral) button,
and must continue to be met until the shift has
been completed. If any of these requirements
are not met before pushing the N (Neutral)
button or are no longer met during the shift,
STARTING AND OPERATING 181
4
then the N (Neutral) indicator light will flash
continuously until all requirements are met or
until the N (Neutral) button is released.
● The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position
for a shift to take place and for the position
indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition is
not in the ON/RUN position, the shift will not
take place and no position indicator lights will
be on or flashing.
● A flashing N (Neutral) Indicator Light indicates
that shift requirements have not been met.
● If the vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift air
suspension, the engine should be started and
left running for a minimum of 60 seconds (with
all the doors closed) at least once every 24
hours. This process allows the air suspension to
adjust the vehicle’s ride height to compensate
for temperature effects.
● Engaging/disengaging of the Electric Park
Brake requires the ignition to be in the ON/RUN
position.
5. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push and
hold the recessed transfer case N (Neutral) button
(located by the selector switch) for five seconds.
The light behind the N symbol will begin to blink
red, indicating shift in progress. The light will
stop blinking (stay on solid) when the shift to N
(Neutral) is complete. A “4WD Neutral Warning
Vehicle May Move Even in Park” message will
appear in the instrument cluster.
N (Neutral) Button
6. After the shif
t is completed and the N (Neutral)
light stays on, release the N (Neutral) button.
7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE or DRIVE.
8. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and
ensure that there is no vehicle movement.
9. Press and hold the brake pedal. Shift the
transmission back into NEUTRAL.
10. Apply the Electric Park Brake.
11. With the transmission and transfer case in N
(Neutral), push and hold the ENGINE START/STOP
button until the engine turns off. Ensure vehicle is
in RUN position with the engine off.
12. Place the transmission gear selector in PARK.
Release the brake pedal.
13. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a
suitable tow bar.
14. Release the Electric Park Brake. Ensure vehicle is
in RUN position with the engine off.
15. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button twice
(without pressing the brak
e pedal), to turn the
ignition to the of
f position.
Shifting Out Of N (Neutral)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage:
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it
connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Apply the Electric Park Brake.
3. Start the engine.
NOTE:
● Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that
must be met before pushing the N (Neutral)
button, and must continue to be met until
the shift has been completed. If any of these
requirements are not met before pushing the N
(Neutral) button or are no longer met during the
shift, the N (Neutral) Indicator Light will flash
continuously until all requirements are met or
until the N (Neutral) button is released.
● The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position
for a shift to take place and for the position
indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition is
not in the ON/RUN position, the shift will not
take place and no position indicator lights will
be on or flashing.
● A flashing N (Neutral) Indicator Light indicates
that shift requirements have not been met.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
182 S
TARTING AND OPERATING
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push and
hold the recessed transfer case N (Neutral) button
(located by the selector switch) for two seconds.
N (Neutral) Button
7. When the N (Neutral) Indicator Light turns of
f,
release the N (Neutral) button. After the N
(Neutral) button has been released, the transfer
case will shift to the position indicated by the
selector switch.
8. Shift the transmission into PARK. Turn the engine
off.
9. Release the brake pedal.
10. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
11. Start the engine.
12. Press and hold the brake pedal.
13. Release the Electric Park Brake.
14. Shift the transmission into REVERSE or DRIVE,
release the brake pedal, and check that the
vehicle operates normally.
DRIVING TIPS
ON-RO
AD DRIVING TIPS
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a
narrower track to make them capable of performing in
a wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design
characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than
conventional passenger cars.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a
better view of the road, allowing you to anticipate
problems. They are not designed for cornering at the
same speeds as conventional passenger cars any more
than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform
satisfactorily in off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns or
abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this type,
failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in
loss of control or vehicle rollover.
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Quadra-Lift — If Equipped
When off-roading, it is recommended that the lowest
useable vehicle height that will clear the current
obstacle or terrain be selected. The vehicle height
should then be raised as required by the changes in
terrain.
The Selec-Terrain switch will automatically change the
vehicle to the optimized height based on the Selec-
Terrain switch position. The vehicle height can be
changed from the default height for each Selec-Terrain
mode by normal use of the air suspension switches
ð
page 125.
When To Use 4WD LOW — If Equipped
When off-road driving, shift t
o 4WD LOW for additional
traction. This range should be limited to extreme
situations such as deep snow, mud, or sand where
additional low speed pulling power is needed. Vehicle
speeds in excess of 25 mph (40 km/h) should be
avoided when in 4WD LOW.
WARNING!
Do not drive in 4WD LOW on dry pavement; driveline
damage may result. 4WD LOW locks front and rear
drivelines together and does not allow for differential
action between the front to rear driveshafts. Driving
in 4WD LOW on pavement will cause driveline
binding; use only on wet or slippery surfaces.
Driving Through Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
w
ater, there are a number of precautions that must be
considered before entering the water.
NOTE:
Your vehicle is capable of water fording in up to
20 inches (51 cm) of water, while crossing small
rivers or streams. To maintain optimal performance
of your vehicle's heating and ventilation system it is
recommended to switch the system into recirculation
mode during water fording.
CAUTION!
When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph (8
km/h). Always check wat
er depth before entering as
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 183
4
CAUTION!
a precaution, and check all fluids afterward. Driving
through water may cause damage that may not be
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. If you must
drive through water, try to determine the depth and the
bottom condition (and location of any obstacles) prior
to entering. Proceed with caution and maintain a steady
controlled speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in deep
water to minimize wave effects.
Flowing Water
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm run-
off), avoid crossing until the water level recedes and/or
the flow rate is reduced. If you must cross flowing water
avoid depths in excess of 9 inches (23 cm). The flowing
water can erode the streambed, causing your vehicle to
sink into deeper water. Determine exit point(s) that are
downstream of your entry point to allow for drifting.
Standing Water
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 24 inches
(60 cm), and reduce speed appropriately to minimize
wave effects. Maximum speed is 5 mph (8 km/h).
Maintenance
After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle
fluids and lubricants (engine oil, transmission oil, axle,
transfer case) to ensure the fluids have not been
contaminated. Contaminated fluid (milky, foamy in
appearance) should be flushed/changed as soon as
possible to prevent component damage.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or f
or additional
control at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a
low gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW if
necessary
ð
page 125. Only shift into a lower gear to
maintain forward motion. Over-revving the engine can
spin the wheels and traction will be lost.
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads,
because engine braking may cause skidding and loss
of control.
Hill Climbing
NOTE:
Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the
conditions at the crest and/or on the other side.
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission to a
lower gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW. Use
FIRST gear and 4WD LOW for very steep hills.
If you stall or begin to lose forward motion while
climbing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to
a stop and immediately apply the brakes. Restart the
engine, and shift into REVERSE (R). Back slowly down
the hill, allowing the compression braking of the engine
to help regulate your speed. If the brakes are required
to control vehicle speed, apply them lightly and avoid
locking or skidding the tires.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls, you lose forward motion, or
cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade,
never attempt to turn around. To do so may result in
(Continued)
WARNING!
tipping and rolling the vehicle. Always back carefully
straight down a hill in REVERSE gear. Never back
down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the brake.
Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill. Always
drive straight up or down.
If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest
of a hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain forward
motion by turning the front wheels slowly. This may
provide a fresh “bite” into the surface and will usually
provide traction to complete the climb.
Traction Downhill
When descending mountains or hills, use Hill Descent
Control or Selec-Speed Control to avoid repeated heavy
braking.
If not equipped with Hill Descent Control or Selec-Speed
Control use the following procedure:
Shift the transmission into a low gear, and the transfer
case into 4WD LOW range. Let the vehicle go slowly
down the hill with all four wheels turning against engine
compression drag. This will permit you to control the
vehicle speed and direction.
When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking
can cause brake fade with loss of braking control.
Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the
transmission whenever possible.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle
than does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it
184 STARTING AND OPERATING
is always a good idea to check for damage. That way
you can get any problems taken care of right away and
have your vehicle ready when you need it.
● Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension,
and exhaust system for damage.
● Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
required.
● Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly
on the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and
suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque
to the values specified in the Service Manual.
● Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
things could be a fire hazard. They might hide
damage to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals,
and propeller shafts.
● After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan,
brake rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes
inspected and cleaned as soon as possible.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may
cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking.
You might not have full braking power when you
need it to prevent a collision. If you have been
operating your vehicle in dirty conditions, get your
brakes checked and cleaned as necessary.
● If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels
for impacted material. Impacted material can cause
a wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will
correct the situation.
STARTING AND OPERATING 185
4
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect 5/5 NAV
With 10.1-inch Display or Uconnect 5 NAV With 12-inch
Display system, refer to your Uconnect Radio Instruction
Manual.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes
only and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Depending on applicability, your vehicle may be able to
send or receive information from a wired or wireless
network. This information allows systems and features
in your vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized
and unlawful access to vehicle systems and
wireless communications. Vehicle software technology
continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC, working
with its suppliers, evaluates and takes appropriate
steps as needed. As always, if you experience unusual
behavior, contact an authorized dealer immediately,
ð
page 357, or refer to your Uconnect Radio
Instruction Manual for additional contact information.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software)
is installed.
WARNING!
● ONL
Y insert trusted media devices/components
into your v
ehicle. Media of unknown origin
could possibly contain malicious software, and
if installed in your vehicle, it may increase the
possibility for vehicle systems to be breached.
● As always, if you experience unusual
vehicle behavior, contact an authorized dealer
immediately.
NOTE:
To help further impr
ove user experience, features,
stability, etc., and minimize the potential risk of
a security breach, vehicle owners should routinely
check www.driveuconnect.com (US Residents) or
www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents) to learn
about available Uconnect software updates.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons
on the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate
located on the center of the instrument panel. These
buttons allow you to access and change the customer
programmable features. Many features can vary by
vehicle.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or
beside the Uconnect syst
em in the center of the
instrument panel. In addition, there is a SCROLL/
ENTER contr
ol knob located on the right side. Turn
the control knob to scroll through menus and change
settings. Push the center of the control knob one or
more times to select or change a setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have SCREEN OFF and
MUTE buttons on the faceplate.
Push the SCREEN OFF button on the faceplate to turn
off the Uconnect screen. Push the button again or tap
the screen to turn the screen on.
Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a Menu or
certain option on the Uconnect system.
Push and hold the Power button on the radio’s
faceplate for a minimum of 15 seconds to reset the
radio.
186 MULTIMEDIA
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES
Uconnect 5 NAV With 12-inch Display
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
Press the Vehicle button, then press the Settings
tab on the top of the touchscreen. In this menu,
the Uconnect system allows you to access all of the
available programmable features.
NOTE:
● Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.
● Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings
may vary.
● Press the Open/Close button on the Front Comfor
t
And Convenience Display to access the fold-out
screen.
When making a selection, press the button on the
touchscreen to enter the desired menu. Once in the
desired menu, press and release the preferred setting
option until a check mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Once the
setting is complete, press the Vehicle button to exit to
the screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on
the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or
down through the available settings.
Display
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of the touchscreen. The
available settings are:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and Instrument Cluster
Display. The available languages are English, Italiano, Français, and Español.
Display Mode This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the system set
it automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system automatically adjust the display
brightness. The “Manual” setting will allow the user to adjust the brightness of the
display.
MULTIMEDIA 187
5
Setting Name Description
Display Brightness With Headlights ON This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To access
this setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the
brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To access
this setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the
brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
Theme Mode This setting will allow you to adjust the brightness of your theme. Setting options
are “Light”, “Dark” and “Auto”. Select to show themes in Light or Dark mode. “Auto”
changes the theme with the headlights.
Units This setting will allow you to change the units. The available options are “Speed” (MPH
or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km), “Current Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100
km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), and “Temperature” (°C or °F) units of
measurement independently.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Show Main Category Bar Labels This setting will allow you to turn the bottom main category bar labels on or off.
Control Screen Timeout This setting allows you to set the Control Screen to turn off automatically after five
seconds or stay open until manually closed.
Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will display Navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the Instrument
Cluster Display.
Message Pop-Ups Displayed with Button Press This setting will turn message notifications on or off.
Ready To Drive Pop-ups This setting will enable the Ready To Drive pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster Display.
188 MULTIMEDIA
Entertainment Screens
When the Entertainment Screens button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s Entertainment system.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Passenger Screen Permissions This setting will enable or disable Passenger Screen Permissions. The options within
this setting are “Navigation”, “Device Manager”, and “Uconnect Theater” all with “On”
and “Off” options.
Rear Seat Screen Permissions This setting will enable or disable your Rear Seat Screen Permissions. “On” and “Off”
options are found within “Navigation”.
My Profile
When the My Profile button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s profiles.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and Instrument Cluster
Display. The available languages are English, Italiano, Français, and Español.
Display Mode
This setting will adjust the display for the radio to “Auto” or “Manual”. “Manual” allows
for more customization with the radio display.
Display Brightness Headlights On
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To access
this setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the
brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
MULTIMEDIA 189
5
Setting Name Description
Display Brightness Headlights Off
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To access
this setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the
brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
Theme Mode This setting will allow you to adjust the brightness of your theme. Setting options
are “Light”, “Dark” and “Auto”. Select to show themes in Light or Dark mode. “Auto”
changes the theme with the headlights.
Units This setting will allow you to change the units. The available options are “Speed” (MPH
or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km), “Current Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100
km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), and “Temperature” (°C or °F) units of
measurement independently.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Show Main Category Bar Labels This setting will allow the main category bar labels to be shown on or off.
Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will display Navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the Instrument
Cluster Display.
Message Pop-ups Displayed with Button Press This setting will turn message notifications on or off.
System Text Size
This setting will allow you to change the text on the radio to “Standard”, “Large”, or
“Taller”.
Time Format
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must
be Off for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the time to a
12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format.
Voice Options
This setting will allow you to change the voice options for the radio to “Male” or
“Female”.
190 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
Wake Up Word This setting will allow you to set the system’s “Wake Up” word. An available option is
“Hey Uconnect”.
Voice Barge-in
This setting will allow Voice Barge-in to be turned on or off. For more information about
Voice Barge-in, refer to your Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual.
Show Command List This setting will allow the Command List to be shown on or off.
Ambient Color Personalization This setting will redirect to a new menu that will allow you to change the ambient
lighting color in the cabin.
Radio Off Delay This setting will keep the radio on for the selected amount of time after vehicle shut
off. The available options are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Radio Off with Door This setting will keep the radio on when a door is opened or until the Radio Off Delay
time is reached. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Key Off Power Delay This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is turned off.
When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The available settings are “0
sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
App Drawer Favoriting Pop-ups This setting will allow you to favorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and “Off” options.
App Drawer Unfavoritings Pop-ups This setting will allow you to unfavorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and Off” options.
New Text Message Pop-ups
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for new text messages. Setting
options are “On” and “Off”.
Missed Calls Message
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for missed calls. Setting options
are “On” and “Off”.
Navigation Pop-ups
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for Navigation. Setting options
are “On” and “Off”.
MULTIMEDIA 191
5
Setting Name Description
Navigation Settings This setting will redirect to the list of Navigation settings. Refer to your Uconnect Radio
Instruction Manual for further information.
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Heated Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort system and heated seats or heated
steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is started. The “Off”
setting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only
activate the comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will
activate the comfort systems whenever the vehicle is started.
Audio Settings This setting will open the submenu containing the audio settings
ð
page 205.
TomTom Traffic And Travel Services This setting will turn TomTom Traffic And Travel Services (if equipped) on or off. An
active subscription is required for this f
eature to work.
Reset App Drawer to Default Order This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
Restore Settings to Default This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory defaults.
More Profile Options This setting will give access to more profile options.
Safety & Driving Assistance
When the Safety & Driving Assistance button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s safety settings. These options will differ
depending on the features equipped on the vehicle. The se
ttings may display in list form or within subfolders on the screen. To access a subfolder, select the desired folder; the
available options related to that feature will then display on the screen.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
192 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
Forward Collision Warning — Located In Automatic Emergency Braking Submenu This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system on or off. The “Off”
setting will deactivate the FCW system. The “Warning Only” setting will provide only an
audible chime when a collision is detected. The “Warning + Active Braking” setting will
provide an audible chime and apply some brake pressure when a collision is detected.
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity — Located In Automatic Emergency Braking Sub-
menu
This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warning alert
sounds. The “Medium” setting will have the FCW system signal when an object is in
view, and the possibility of a collision is detected. The “Near” setting will have the FCW
system signal when the object is closer to the vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the
FCW system signal when an object is at a far distance from the vehicle.
Pedestrian Emergency Braking — Located In Automatic Emergency Braking Submenu This setting will turn the Pedestrian Emergency Braking system on or off. This setting
is located in “Automatic Emergency Braking”.
Active Driving Assist Steering Wheel Vibration This setting will turn the Active Driving Assist Steering Wheel Vibration on or off.
Active Lane Management
This setting will alert the driver by vibrating the steering wheel and/or moving the
steering wheel, when a lane departure is detected. The available options within Active
Lane Management are Lane Management “Vibration Only”, “Steering Assist Only”, and
“Vibration + Steering Assist”; Lane Warning “Early”, “Medium”, and “Late”; Vibration
Strength “Low”, “Medium” and “High”; and Steering Assist Strength “Low”, “Medium”
and “High”.
Traffic Sign Assist This setting will turn Traffic Sign Assist on or off.
Traffic Sign Assist Warning This setting will allow you to set the warning type related to the traffic sign. The
available options are “Off”, “Visual”, and “Visual + Chime”.
Night Vision Video Warning This setting will turn the Night Vision Video Warning and green/gray cluster indicator
light on or off.
ParkSense This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is detected
and can provide both an audible chime and a visual display.
MULTIMEDIA 193
5
Setting Name Description
Front ParkSense Volume This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The available settings
are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Volume This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The available settings
are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Active ParkSense Mode This setting will adjust the level of vehicle control when the Active ParkSense Mode is
active. The available settings are “Full Auto” and “Steering Only”
Active ParkSense Proximity Chime This setting will turn the Active ParkSense Proximity Chime on or off.
Side Distance Warning This setting will adjust the warning for side distance. The available options are “Off”,
“Sound Only”, and “Sound & Display”.
Drowsy Driver Alert This setting will monitor the driver’s driving habits and warn you of any changes,
indicating that the driver may be drowsy. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
Blind Spot Alert This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is detected in the
vehicle’s blind spot. The “Off” setting will turn off Blind Spot Alert. The “Lights” setting
will activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the outside mirrors. The “Lights & Chime”
setting will activate the lights on the outside mirrors and an audible chime.
Electric Power Steering Default This setting will change the Electric Power Steering mode. The available options are
“Comfort” for a lower effort steering experience, “Normal” for the standard effort
steering experience, and “Sport” for a higher effort steering experience.
Power Side Step This setting will activate the Power Side Step. The “Auto” setting will lower the step
when the door is opened and retract it once the door is closed. The “Off” setting will
deactivate the feature.
Hill Start Assist This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off.
Tire Fill Assist This setting will turn Tire Fill Assist on or off.
194 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
New Speed Zone Indication This setting will allow you to set if the system will warn you that the speed limit has
changed in an area. The available options are “Off”, “Visual”, and “Visual + Chime”.
Rear ParkSense Braking Assist This setting will turn the Rear ParkSense Braking Assist on or off.
Clock
When the Clock button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Sync Time With GPS This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The system will
control the time via the GPS location.
Set Time This setting will allow you to set the hours and minutes. Sync Time With GPS must be
off for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the hours or minutes.
The “-” setting will decrease the hours or minutes.
Time Format This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must
be off for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the time to a
12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format.
Set Date This setting will allow you to set the day, month and year. Using “+” or “-”, you can
scroll through the available days, months, and years.
Show Time and Date During Screen Off This setting will allow you to show the time and date while the screen is off. Available
options are “On” and “Off”.
MULTIMEDIA 195
5
Setting Name Description
Set Time Hours This setting will allow you to set the hours. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this
setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the hours. The “-” setting will
decrease the hours.
Set Time Minutes This setting will allow you to set the minutes. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this
setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the minutes. The “-” setting will
decrease the minutes.
Show Time in Status Bar This setting will place the time in the radio’s status bar.
Phone/Bluetooth®
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external audio device or
smartphone. The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Device Manager This setting will open the Device Manager main screen.
Do Not Disturb All This setting will open the Do Not Disturb All Settings menu. The available options are
“On” and “Off”.
Enable Two Active Phones This setting will enable or disable two active phones within the vehicle. The setting
options are “On” and “Off”.
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Do Not Disturb This setting will open the Do Not Disturb settings menu. The settings are “Auto Reply”
(both, text, call), “Auto Reply Message” (custom, default), and “Custom Auto Reply
Message” (create message).
196 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
Phone Repetition This setting will turn the Phone Repetition function on or off.
Voice
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Primary Voice Assistant This setting allows you to choose your voice assistant between “Alexa” and “Ucon-
nect”.
Voice Options This setting will allow you to change the system’s voice to either “Male” or “Female”.
Wake Up Word This setting will allow you to set the system’s “Wake Up” word. An available option is
“Hey Uconnect”.
Voice Barge-In This setting allows you to respond to a Voice Response before the statement is
completed by the system. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
Show Command List This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The “Always” setting will
always show the Command List. The “With Help” setting will show the Command List
and provide a brief description of what the command does. The “Never” setting will
turn the Command List off.
Navigation
When the Navigation button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s built-in Navigation system. These settings can change which
icons display on the map, how “time to arrival is calculated”, and route types.
For more information on Navigation and settings, refer to your Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual.
MULTIMEDIA 197
5
Trailer
When the Trailer button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display settings related to trailer towing.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Current Trailer Select from “Trailer 1”, “Trailer 2”, “Trailer 3”, and “Trailer 4”. These trailer designa-
tions can be used to save different trailer settings.
Trailer Name This setting will personalize the trailer name depending on the type of trailer you are
hauling. Select the trailer name from the following list: trailer, boat, car, cargo, dump,
equipment, flatbed, horse, gooseneck, livestock, motorcycle, snowmobile, travel, utili-
ty, and 5th wheel.
Braking This setting will set the system to a specific trailer type. The available options are
“Light Electric”, “Heavy Electric”, “Light Electric Over Hydraulic”, and “Heavy Electric
Over Hydraulic”.
Camera
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Surround View Camera Delay This setting will add a timed delay to the Surround View Camera when shifting out of
REVERSE.
Surround View Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Surround View Camera Guidelines on or off.
198 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
ParkView Backup Camera Delay This setting will add a timed delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when shifting out
of REVERSE.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or off.
Forward Facing Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Forward Facing Camera Guidelines on or off.
Mirrors & Wipers
When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse This setting will tilt the outside side-view mirrors when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position and the transmission gear selector is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors
will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of
REVERSE. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off.
Headlights With Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated. Setting options
are “On” and “Off”.
Auto Folding Side Mirrors This setting will automatically fold and unfold the side-view mirrors when the vehicle is
turned off, the doors are locked, or the key fob button is pushed. The available options
are “On” and “Off”.
MULTIMEDIA 199
5
Lights
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
● When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country of the vehicle
purchase.
● Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Ambient Color Personalization This setting will redirect to a new menu that will allow you to change the ambient
lighting color in the cabin.
Interior Ambient Lighting This setting will allow you to adjust the brightness of the interior ambient lights. The
available options are “Lev
el 1” through “Level 6”.
Headlight Off Delay This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut
off after the vehicle is turned off. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60
sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlight Illumination On Approach This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut
off after the vehicle is unlocked. “Greeting Lights” must be selected and “Headlight
Illumination On Approach” must be selected above 0 seconds for the feature to be
enabled. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlights with Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
Proximity Wake-Up Proximity detection is a system which activates specific interior and exterior lights as
the vehicle is approached with a valid key fob. This feature provides an increased
sense of welcome and security as the user enters the vehicle in the dark. This setting
will turn the Proximity Wake-Up on or off.
NOTE:
For the exterior lighting to be activated, “Headlight Illumination On Approach” must be
set to a value other than zero.
200 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
Greeting Lights When the “Greeting Lights” feature is selected, it enables “Headlight Illumination On
Approach”. When “Headlight Illumination On Approach” is selected, it allows the ad-
justment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the doors are unlocked
with the key fob. “Greeting Lights” must be selected and “Headlight Illumination On
Approach” must be selected above zero seconds for the feature to be enabled. The
available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Auto Dim High Beams This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
Cornering Lights When this setting is selected, if the steering wheel rotation angle is large or the turn
signal indicators are on, a light (incorporated in the fog light) will turn on, on the
relevant side to improve visibility at night.
Flash Lights With Lock This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is
pushed on the key fob on or off. Available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Flash Lights With Suspension Lower This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Suspension
Lowering button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
Brakes
When the Brakes button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the settings related to the vehicle’s Brake system.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto Park Brake This setting will turn the Auto Park Brake on or off.
MULTIMEDIA 201
5
Setting Name Description
Brake Service This setting will allow you to set the brakes for service. When the setting is selected, a
pop-up will display “Yes” and “No” options.
Doors & Locks
When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.
NOTE:
● The Auto Door Locks feature default condition is enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
Auto Door Locks feature can be enabled or disabled by an authorized dealer per written request of the customer. Please see an authorized dealer for service.
● Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto Door Locks This setting will allow you to change if the doors lock automatically when the vehicle
reaches 15 mph (24 km/h).
A
uto Unlock On Exit This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from the inside.
Flash Lights With Lock This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is
pushed on the key fob on or off. Available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Sound Horn With Lock This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob. The
“Off” setting will not sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed. The “1st Press”
setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed once. The “2nd Press”
setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed twice.
Sound Horn With Remote Start This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from the key fob.
Remote Door Unlock, Door Lock/1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key fob are
needed to unlock all the doors. The “Driver Door” setting will only unlock the driver
door on the first push on the Unlock button. The “All Doors” setting will unlock all
doors with only one push of the Unlock button.
202 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
Passive Entry This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless Enter ‘n Go™) on
or off.
Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob This setting will recall preset radio stations and driver seat position that have been
linked to the key fob.
Power Liftgate Alert
This setting will chime an audible alert when the power liftgate is raising or lowering.
Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
Hands-Free Power Liftgate
This setting will use hands-free technology to automatically open or close the power
liftgate. Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
Auto Relock This setting will lock the doors after 30 seconds of the doors remaining unlocked. The
available options are “On” and “Off”.
Seats & Comfort
When Seats & Comfort button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s comfort systems when remote start has been activated or
the vehicle has been started.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Easy Exit Seats This setting will automatically move the driver seat rearward when the engine is shut
off. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Heated Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort systems and heated seats or heated
steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is started. The “Off”
setting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only
activate the comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will
activate the comfort systems whenever the vehicle is started.
MULTIMEDIA 203
5
Setting Name Description
3rd Row Seat Recline Lockout This setting will activate the 3rd Row Seat Recline Lockout. Selectable options are
“Off”, “Lock On Ignition” and “Always Locked”.
Key Off Options
When the Key Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shutoff. These settings will only activate when the ignition is
set to OFF.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Easy Exit Seat This setting adjusts the seats to make exiting the vehicle easier.
Key Off Power Delay This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is turned off.
When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The available settings are “0
sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Headlight Off Delay This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the headlights remain on after the
vehicle has been turned off. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”,
and “90 sec”.
Auto Entry/Exit Suspension This setting will turn the Auto Entry/Exit Suspension system on or off.
Radio Off Delay This setting will keep the radio on for the selected amount of time after vehicle shut
off. The available options are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Radio Off With Door This setting will keep the radio on when a door is opened or until the Radio Off Delay
time is reached. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Windows With Key Fob This setting will allow you to control window function while the vehicle is off. The
available options are “On” and “Off”.
204 MULTIMEDIA
Suspension
When the Suspension button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display settings related to the vehicle’s air suspension.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Sound Horn With Lower This setting will allow you to sound the horn when the Suspension Lowering button is
pushed on the key fob.
Flash Lights With Lower This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Suspension
Lowering button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
Auto Entry/Exit Suspension This setting will turn the Auto Entry/Exit Suspension system on or off.
Display Suspension Messages This setting will display suspension messages in the Instrument Cluster Display. The
“All” setting will display all available messages. The “Warnings Only” setting will only
display warning messages.
Tire Jack Mode This setting will disable the Air Suspension system to assist in changing a spare tire.
Auxiliary Modes This setting will allow you to set the Auxiliary Suspension Mode. The available options
are “Off”, “Transport Mode”, and “Wheel Alignment Mode”. In Transport Mode, the ve-
hicle will not auto level when being transported by another vehicle. In Wheel Alignment
Mode, the vehicle will not auto level when a wheel alignment is being performed.
Audio
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change the audio location within
the vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
MULTIMEDIA 205
5
Setting Name Description
Balance/Fade This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/back and left/
right of the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set audio location.
Equalizer This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the audio.
Speed Adjusted Volume This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher setting, the
volume will increase more as the vehicle speeds up. The available settings are “Off”,
“1”, “2”, and “3”.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
AUX Volume Offset This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through the AUX port.
The available settings are “+” and “-”.
Auto Play This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected device.
Auto-On Radio This setting will automatically turn the radio on when the vehicle is started, if selected.
The available settings are “Off”, “On”, and “Recall Last”. With Recall Last, the system
resumes the previous task before vehicle shut off.
Radio off With Door This setting will keep the radio on when a door is opened or until the “Radio Off Delay”
time is reached. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Volume Adjustment This setting will allow you to set the audio volume levels for each option (Media,
Phone, Navigation, etc.). You can set the volume between 0 and 38.
Media Expander This setting will allow you to turn the Media Expander setting “On” or “Off”.
Notifications
When the Notifications button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Notifications for the system.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
206 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
Notifications Sounds Turn this setting on or off to hear notification sounds throughout your system.
App Drawer Favoriting Pop-ups This setting turns the App Favorited pop-up on or off.
App Drawer Unfavoriting Pop-ups This setting turns the App Unfavorited pop-up on or off.
New Text Message Pop-ups
This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for new text messages from any connect-
ed phone on or off.
Missed Calls Message
This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for missed calls from any connected
phone on or off.
Navigation Pop-ups This setting turns receiving/storing predictive Navigation pop-ups on or off.
Wireless Charger Status Popups This setting turns the Wireless Charger Status pop-up on or off.
Drive Mode Transition Popups This setting turns the Drive Mode Transition pop-up on or off.
SiriusXM® Travel Link Weather Alerts
This setting turns receiving notifications for SiriusXM® Travel Link Weather Alerts on
or off.
SiriusXM® Setup
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays an option related to SiriusXM® satellite radio. These settings can be used to skip
specific radio channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
NOTE:
● A subscription to SiriusXM® satellite radio is required for these settings to be functional.
● Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
SiriusXM® Account, Profile, And Settings This setting will redirect you to the SiriusXM® Settings menu within the SiriusXM®
menu.
MULTIMEDIA 207
5
Setting Name Description
Block Explicit This setting will skip over content labeled as explicit. The available settings are “On”
and “Off”.
Accessibility — If Equipped
After pressing the Accessibility button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Video Button Readback This setting will turn the Video Button Readback feature on or off.
Software Updates
When the Software Updates button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the setting related to updating the Uconnect software.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Software Downloads over Wi-Fi
This setting will allow software updates to happen over Wi-Fi. Selectable options are
“On” and “Off”.
System Information
After pressing the System Information button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
208 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
Version Information
When this feature is selected, a Version Information screen will appear, displaying
information about the version of your radio.
License Information When this feature is selected, a License Information screen will appear, displaying the
licensing information of your radio.
Passenger License Information When this feature is selected, Passenger License Information is displayed.
Reset
When the Reset button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect system back to its default settings. These settings can
clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Restart Radio This setting will reboot the radio.
Reset Apps Drawer To Default Order This setting will return the apps drawer to the default order. The available options are
“Yes” and “Cancel”. The X button can also be pressed to cancel the screen.
Restore Settings to Default This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory defaults.
Clear Personal Data This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all personal data
from the system, including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
Reset Wi-Fi Password For Projection This setting will allow you to reset the vehicle’s Wi-Fi password for smartphone projec-
tion. The available options are “Yes” and “Cancel”. The X button can also be pressed
to cancel the screen.
Reset Performance Values This setting will reset the performance values from your vehicle.
MULTIMEDIA 209
5
Factory Reset This setting will restore the radio to its factory default settings.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound syst
em controls are located on the
rear surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine
o’clock positions.
Steering Wheel Audio Controls
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push button in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the
rocker switch will increase the volume, and pushing the
bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the right-hand control’s center button will make
the radio switch between the various modes available
(AM/FM/SXM or Media, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push button in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which mode you are
in.
The f
ollowing describes the left-hand control operation
in each mode:
RADIO OPERATION
Pushing the top of the switch will seek up f
or the next
available station and pushing the bottom of the switch
will seek down for the next available station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have
programmed in the radio Preset button.
MEDIA MODE
Pushing the top of the switch once goes to the next
track on the selected media (AUX/USB/Bluetooth®).
Pushing the bottom of the switch once goes to the
beginning of the current track, or to the beginning of
the previous track if it is within eight seconds after the
current track begins to play.
PASSENGER SCREEN — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle ma
y be equipped with a Passenger Screen
located above the glove compartment on the passenger
side of the vehicle. From the Passenger Screen, you
will be able to access similar features seen within the
Uconnect radio, such as media functions, Rear Seat
Entertainment with Amazon FireTV Built-in, Navigation,
and device management.
Passenger Screen Location
To begin using the Passenger Screen, push the Power
button in the center stack, or press the Power button
under the Controls tab within the Uconnect system. The
Passenger Screen can be turned off by accessing the
Control screen and pressing the Power Off button.
You must link Bluetooth® headphones to the
Passenger Screen to begin listening to the system’s
audio
ð
page 213.
NOTE:
● The Passenger Screen will need to be turned On
each time the vehicle is started, and the system will
display the Home screen upon boot up.
210 MUL
TIMEDIA
● Passenger Screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may no
t reflect exact software for
your vehicle.
PASSENGER SCREEN PERMISSIONS
Through the Uconnect system, features within the
Passenger Screen can be activated and deactivated
through Passenger Screen Permissions. To access
Permissions, press the Vehicle button in the Menu
Bar and select the Settings tab. Then, press the
Passenger Screen settings menu. Press the On button
for the Passenger Screen Permission setting to activate
permissions.
Passenger Screen Permissions
By default, the Passenger Screen Permissions se
tting is
set to Off, and the driver will need to give permission for
the different features.
When Permissions is turned On, you can individually
select the permissions for the following:
● Navigation
● De
vice Manager
● Driver Media
● Rear Seat Ent
ertainment — If Equipped
Passenger Screen Permissions can also be activated
through the Controls screen, under the Vehicle
button in the Menu Bar. If “Deny Passenger Screen
Permissions” is turned On, the setting will switch itself
to Off.
HOME SCREEN
Passenger Screen Home Screen
1 — Home Screen Button
2 — Notification Button
3 — Controls Button
4 — Feature Cards
When the Passenger Screen is started up and no other
media was running during the last ignition cycle, the
Home screen will display
. Here, you can select from the
features of the Passenger Screen. On the left side of
the screen, you can access “Notifications and syst
em
Controls”.
The Notifications button (the bell) will take you to the
Notification screen, identical to what is seen in the
main radio.
You can cycle between the features by swiping left or
right on the touchscreen. When accessing a feature,
press the Home/Apps button on the left side to access
the feature view and select a different feature.
The available features are:
● Audio
● Video & Images
● HDMI
● Rear Seat Entertainment — If Equipped
● Navigation
● Devices
● Cameras
Controls Screen
From the Controls Screen, you can adjust the daytime/
nighttime brightness of the screen, change headphone
volume, and power off the Passenger Screen.
To change the brightness, adjust the slider up or down,
or press the Up or Down Arrow button located next
to the slider. “Up” will increase brightness; “Down”
will decrease brightness. Daytime and nighttime
brightness levels will vary, and the adjustment
maximum/minimum will differ depending on the time
of day.
MULTIMEDIA 211
5
To change the headphone volume, adjust the slider up
or down, or press the Up or Down Arrow button located
next to the slider. “Up” will increase the volume; “Down”
will decrease the volume.
NOTE:
Headphone volume can also be manually adjusted
from the headphones. Changing the headphone volume
manually will not reflect in the headphone volume
slider on the Passenger Screen.
If the Screen Off button is pressed, the Passenger
Screen will continue to operate, but the screen will go
dark. Tap the screen again to return to the display.
While the screen is off, audio will continue to play from
the Passenger Screen.
The Power Off button will fully shut down the Passenger
Screen. No audio or video will play from it.
Passenger Screen Controls Screen
1 — Screen Off
2 — Brightness
3 — Pair/Unpair Headphones
4 — Headphone Volume
5 — Power Off
6 — Mute
AUDIO AND VIDEO
Passenger Screen Audio Feature
1 — All Sources Tab
2 — Now Playing Tab
3 — Browse Tab
Audio allows you to listen to your favorite radio station,
a connected USB device, or connected media de
vice.
You can directly change the source on the Home screen
by pressing the Source button in the feature. You can
also expand it by pressing the Full Screen View button.
To change the media source, press the Source button
and then press on the desired source. The available
sources are:
● Live Radio (FM, AM, SXM)
● Bluetooth®
● USB 1
● USB 2
● AUX
● AV 1 — If Equipped
● AV 2 — If Equipped
● Rear Screen 1 Listen In — If Equipped
● Rear Screen 2 Listen In — If Equipped
NOTE:
● Audio devices connected via Bluetooth® must be
done through the Device Manager in the radio. For
more information on pairing a device, refer to your
Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual.
● If the driver is listening to “Live Radio”, the option
will not be available in the Passenger Screen. Select
“Now Playing On Radio” to listen to the currently
playing station. If the driver selects a radio station
while the Passenger Screen is playing live radio
content, the feed will end on the Passenger Screen
and control will be given to the Uconnect system.
On the Preset menu, you will be able to listen to
saved radio presets. Press the desired preset to begin
listening.
The Browse tab will let you browse through different
radio stations or audio saved onto a USB or audio
device. Press “Browse” and select from the different
folders. You can scroll up and down to view the options
within those folders. Press on the desired radio station
or audio track to begin playing it.
212 MUL
TIMEDIA
When the USB source is selected, you can choose
a video file to play if saved to a USB device. Press
“Browse” and locate the folder with the video file. Press
the video file name, and it will begin to play on the
Passenger Screen.
NOTE:
Not all video files will be supported from a USB.
Certain video files may require digital rights to view
or play. These may be unavailable for playback on the
Passenger Screen.
Passenger Screen Radio Mode
1 — Source Buttons
2 — Now Playing Tab
3 — Search Button
4 — Radio Presets
5 — Related Button
6 — Seek Down Button
7 — Direct Tune Button
8 — Seek Up Button
9 — Replay Button
REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT WITH AMAZON
F
IRE TV BUILT-IN — IF EQUIPPED
Rear Seat Entertainment will let you control and
listen in to the content being played on the rear
entertainment screens. You can view the contents of
the rear screens, lock the rear screens, change the
source of the rear screens, or turn the rear screens on
or off
ð
page 215.
You can access the Headphone pairing screen for
Passenger Display by pressing the Headphone button
of the right side of the screen.
HDMI PROJECTING
HDMI lets you connect a device to the provided HDMI
port, using an HDMI cable, and project the device
directly to the Passenger Screen. To begin, plug a a
device into the HDMI port. Then, press the HDMI button
on the touchscreen.
HDMI will continue to show the menu bar and
Headphone Paring button.
NOTE:
● The HDMI Card will not automatically launch when a
new device is connected. The HDMI Card will show
a device connected, and the Card will need to be
pressed.
● If the user disconnects a device from the HDMI port
while the HDMI Card is in full screen, the system will
close HDMI and reload the Home screen.
DEVICE MANAGER
Device Manager
1 — Device Settings
2 — Phone Connection
3 — Media Connection
4 — Apple CarPlay®/Android Auto™ Connection
5 — Add Device
6 — Manage Headphones
7 — Do Not Disturb
8 — Two Active Phones
MULTIMEDIA 213
5
Device Manager provides an easy place to view all
the devices connected to the Uconnect system and
lets you pair the Driver’s smartphone to the Uconnect
system. You will also pair Bluetooth® headphones to
the Passenger Screen from this screen.
For more information on pairing your smartphone, refer
1. If viewing Device Manager in full screen, press
the Add Device button. If viewing Device Manager
on the Home screen, press “Pair Bluetooth®
headphones”.
2. From the pop-up, press “Search For Headphones”.
The system will begin searching for the Bluetooth®
signal of your headphones.
3. Select the name of your headphones from the list
of possible devices. The system will connected to
the headphones.
NOTE:
The Passenger Screen will connect to previously
paired Bluetooth® headphones after Passenger Screen
activation.
Removing Bluetooth® Headphones
1. From the Controls screen, press the Manage
Headphones button.
2. Press the Settings button (gear icon) next to the
set of headphones you wish to remove.
3. Press “Delete Device”; the Bluetooth®
headphones will be removed from the system.
When a new route is selected from the Passenger
Screen, a confirmation will be sent to the driver. The
driver will be able to confirm or deny the route.
To launch the app, begin playing audio and follow these
steps:
1. Press the Apps button.
2. Press the McIntosh app.
McIntosh
The McIntosh app will allow you to perform the following
when listening to music:
NOTE:
The Seek feature will not work while using Bluetooth®.
Skip Backward Press to skip backward.
Press and hold to fast re-
wind.
Play/Pause Press to play/pause the
track.
Skip Forward Press to skip forward.
Press and hold to fast for-
ward.
214 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
Using Navigation on the Passenger Screen will not
affect the Navigation screen in the Uconnect system.
The Driver can continue to use Navigation while the
Passenger Screen can “suggest” new routes or stops.
CAMERA
Camera will display the equipped vehicle camera feed.
When selected, press the desired Camera button. The
feed from that camera will display in the center of the
touchscreen. Press the X button or Back Arrow button
to return to the Home screen.
NOTE:
The Passenger Screen will lose access to a camera if
the driver chooses to view it on the Uconnect system
or if a condition would activate the camera on the
Uconnect system (the rearview camera being activated
when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE).
3RD PARTY APPS — IF EQUIPPED
If equipped, your vehicle may contain some 3rd party
apps, which will further enhance your Uconnect system.
McIntosh
McIntosh is a 3rd party app that can enhance your
Uconnect system’s media player. For the app to be
effective, there must be audio playback in the Uconnect
media player. McIntosh can control the playback of
audio as well as display the output level decibel meters.
NAVIGATION
Navigation allows you to assist the driver in searching
for destinations using Uconnect’s built-in Navigation
system. For information on the full functionality of
Navigation, refer to your Uconnect Radio Instruction
Manual.
To pair a set of Bluetooth® Headphones:
Repeat Press to repeat track.
Press again to repeat
playlist. Press again to
turn off (works only with
a USB device).
Change Channel Down Press to change channel
down. Press and hold
to seek channel down.
While using AM/FM,
pressing the channel
down will change the fre-
quency by 0.1. Pressing
and holding in AM/FM
will seek channels.
Change Channel Up Press to change channel
up. Press and hold to
seek channel up. While
using AM/FM, pressing
the channel up will
change the frequency by
0.1. Pressing and holding
in AM/FM will seek chan-
nels.
Menu Press to access McIntosh
settings.
About Press to learn more
about McIntosh.
Audio Press to open the au-
dio settings page of the
Uconnect media player.
NOTE:
To change the source within the app, press the source
name. Pressing this will open a menu with all available
sources. To change the audio source outside of the
app, press the Media button, and then press the
Sources button.
To exit the app, press any of the buttons on the bottom
menu bar.
Day/Night Mode
Press the Menu button in the upper left-hand corner to
access McIntosh settings. Tap on a mode to set it as
the default, or tap “Auto Mode” to enable your screen to
automatically switch between Day and Night Modes.
Theater Mode
Press the Menu button in the upper left-hand corner to
access McIntosh settings. Under Theater Mode, select
“On” to bring forward the McIntosh Meters. This will
enlarge the meters for a more prominent view.
NOTE:
Theater Mode will engage after 10 seconds without
input from the user.
For more information on McIntosh, the McIntosh
app and its functionality, please visit https://
www.mcintoshlabs.com.
REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT (RSE) WITH
AMAZON FIRE TV BUILT-IN — IF
EQUIPPED
OVERVIEW
Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in is
designed to give your family years of enjoyment.
Fire TV lets passengers enjoy a wide variety of
content from popular apps (subscriptions may be
required). Stream videos, play games, listen to music,
get information, and watch downloaded programs all
while on the road. Two Voice Remotes with Alexa
are included with the system. Press the Microphone
button on the Voice Remote with Alexa to easily find,
launch, and control content. Check sports scores, play
music, control smart home devices, or see your live
camera feeds (compatible smart home device required
and sold separately). In addition to streaming and
downloaded content, changing the input in Fire TV also
enables you to:
● Mirror what’s on your phone or tablet to Fire TV via
Miracast capable devices
● Plug and play a variety of standard video games or
devices into the HDMI port
● Listen to audio over wired or wireless headphones
(not included, customer will have to provide their
own or play audio through in-cabin speakers with
Listen In feature in front seat.)
MULTIMEDIA 215
5
● Plug and play a variety of devices into the fr
ont seat
Video USB port; USB ports located under the rear
screens are charge only
● Watch content individually on each rear display or
mirror across both displays to watch together
NOTE:
The vehicle must be in an active and usable cellular
range and properly equipped with a Uconnect 5
NAV system and Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire
TV package. Streaming requires a Wi-Fi connection
and registered Amazon account to run Fire TV in
the vehicle. Streaming service subscriptions are not
included. Services and features are subject to change
or withdrawal at any time, may not be available in
all areas and languages, and may require separate
subscriptions.
Please review this Owner's Manual to become familiar
with RSE features and operation.
GETTING STARTED
Rear Screen Entertainment for Uconnect 5/5 NAV
1 — Rear Seat Entertainment (Rear Touchscreen)
2 — Headphone Jack
3 — USB C Charging Port
4 — HDMI Port
5 — Uconnect System (Front Touchscreen)
There are four different ways to operate the features of
Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in:
● Voice Remote with Alexa
● Front radio screen
● Passenger screen (if equipped)
● Individual rear touchscreens for Rear Seat
Entertainment with Fire TV built-in touch on each
rear screen
For information on the front media hub USB/AUX ports,
ð
page 74.
ACCESSING REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT WITH
FIRE TV BUILT-IN FROM THE FRONT RADIO
SCREEN
You can access your Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire
TV built-in system by following these steps:
Option 1
1. Press the Media button.
2. Press the Rear Seat button icon.
Option 2
1. Press the Apps button on the bottom of the
touchscreen.
2. Press the Uconnect Theater button on the
t
ouchscreen. You may need to navigate to different
pages in the Apps drawer to find the Uconnect
Theater button.
ACCESSING REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT WITH
FIRE TV BUILT-IN FROM THE REAR SCREENS
You can also access your Rear Seat Entertainment with
Fire TV built-in by choosing one of the following options:
Option 1
● The system will automatically turn on when the
vehicle is started. Pushing the power button on the
Voice Remote with Alexa will turn the system back on
if it was manually shut off. If the screen is inactive
and goes to a screen saver, the system can be
woken up by either tapping the screen or pushing
any button on the Voice Remote with Alexa.
Option 2
● Swiping on either of the rear touchscreens.
216 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
When using the rear screens, the system will launch
with Fire TV.
ACCESSING REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT WITH
FIRE TV BUILT-IN FROM THE PASSENGER
SCREEN — IF EQUIPPED
You can also access Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire
TV built-in content from the Passenger Screen.
1. Access the Home screen for the Passenger Screen.
2. Swipe right on the Home screen and select Fire TV
Rear Seat Entertainment Controls.
Connecting to a Network
During the start-up process, the system will need to be
connected to a network to function. Multiple network
sources can be options for the system.
Some options for a network connection are:
● Wi-Fi Hotspot using a capable smartphone (if
activated, it will show as a possible network for the
system on the screen).
● Outside connection like a home Wi-Fi network.
● In-vehicle Wi-Fi.
NOTE:
When a network is connected to the system for the first
time, an over-the-air-software update will take place
using the Wi-Fi connection. It is recommended that an
unlimited Wi-Fi connection, if available, be used during
this update. After this first-time update, updates will
only occur when one is available.
Account Sign-in
The next step will be the option to sign in to your
Amazon account.
There are two options to sign into the system:
● I already have an Amazon account: Sign in with an
already existing Amazon account
● I am new to Amazon: Create a new Amazon Account
Parental Controls
Another feature that will appear during this first time
set up is parental controls.
MULTIMEDIA 217
5
When the parental controls page appears, it will
giv
e the options “Enable Parental Controls” and “No
Parental Controls”. If “Enable Parental Controls” is
selected, follow the on-screen steps to set up parental
controls for the system.
ALEXA VOICE CONTROL
A feature with Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV
built-in that enhances your experience is Alexa. It is
simple to get started using this feature. Push the
Microphone button at the top of the Voice Remote with
Alexa to activate Alexa and get started.
LISTEN VIA VEHICLE SPEAKERS
A feature within Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV
built-in is the front radio Listen feature. On the front
radio Home screen for Fire TV, select the Listen button
in the top right corner on either card for Screen 1 or 2.
This will allow you to have either rear screen play audio
through all the speakers in the vehicle.
QUICK MENU
Accessing the quick menu will give you more options for
Fire TV.
To access the quick menu, tap the screen and it will
appear. The quick menu is also accessible by pushing
the Gear/Settings button on the Voice Remote with
Alexa.
If “I am new to Amazon” is selected, follow the on-
screen steps to set up an Amazon account with the
system.
FIRST TIME STARTING UP (USING THE REAR
SCREENS)
Boot-up Screen
When turning on the system for the first time from
the rear screens, a boot-up screen will appear on the
system displaying the Fire TV logo.
During this boot-up sequence, language options will be
available for the system.
Voice Remote with Alexa Pairing
After the boot-up sequence is complete, the system will
then give the option to pair a Voice Remote with Alexa
(two are included with the system).
Follow the on-screen instructions for how to pair a Voice
Remote with Alexa to the system. Two Voice Remotes
with Alexa are included to be paired with each rear
screen.
A Voice Remote with Alexa can be paired to each rear
screen. It will function with the rear screen it was paired
with. The pairing steps will need to be done for each
rear screen.
NOTE:
If the Voice Remote with Alexa pairing fails, on-screen
instructions will appear for trying to pair again.
Follow these steps:
● Back — This will let you go back a page.
● Home — This will take you to the Home screen.
● Gear/Settings — This will let you access certain
settings in the system. For more setting options,
select “Settings” within the on-screen Gear/Settings
menu.
● Vehicle — This will bring up the Vehicle menu. From
here you can adjust rear climate controls and the Are
We There Yet? app.
PARENTAL CONTROLS (USING THE REAR
SCREENS)
If parental controls were no
t set during the first time
start up of the system, they can be set by following
these steps:
1. Push the Gear/Settings button on the Voice
Remote with Alexa or tap the screen to access
Settings in the “quick menu”.
2. Select the Gear/Settings icon on the screen.
3. Select “Settings” on the screen.
4. While in Settings, select “Preferences”.
5. Select “Parental Controls”; from here you can turn
Parental Controls on or off and set up a PIN for the
controls using the Voice Remote with Alexa.
VOICE REMO
TE WITH ALEXA PAIRING (U
SING
THE REAR SCREENS)
If the Voice Remote with Alexa needs to be paired
again or a new remote is being paired, follow these
procedures:
1. Install batteries into the remote.
2. Tap the screen and Select the Gear/Settings icon
on the screen.
3. Select “Settings” on the screen.
4. In Settings, select “Controllers & Bluetooth®
Devices”.
5. From this menu, select “Add New Remote”.
6. Follow the on-screen steps for Voice Remote with
Alexa pairing.
MEDIA SOURCES INPUT (USING THE F
RONT
RADIO AND REAR SCREENS)
Front Radio Screen
Rear Screens
To select inputs on the rear screen, scroll down on
the Fire TV Home screen and select your desired input
under “Input”.
Inputs can also be selected from the Brand tab in the
top menu. While in this tab, scroll down to “Inputs” for
selection options.
NOTE:
The Brand tab naming in the top menu will depend on
the naming of the vehicle’s brand.
218 MULTIMEDIA
A long press on the Home button can also re-
pair a Voice Remote with Alexa that has become
disconnected.
NOTE:
Your vehicle is included with two Voice Remotes with
Alexa. A Voice Remote with Alexa can be paired to each
rear screen. It will function with the rear screen it was
paired with. The pairing steps will need to be done for
each rear screen.
● Power — This will power the screen off.
● On-Screen Remote — This will bring up the on-screen
remote to use with the system.
Some options of the quick menu are:
VOICE REMOTE WITH ALEXA
Voice Remote with Alexa
1. Power Button — Turns the screen for the selected
channel on or off.
2. 5-way Navigation Control — This control has
options by pressing the Circle button Up, Down,
Left, or Right to navigate on-screen for selections
and pushing the center button to confirm
selections.
3. Back — Push to exit out of menus or return to the
previous screen.
4. Home — Push to return to the Fire TV Home
screen.
5. Seek Backward/Rewind Button — Push and hold
to fast rewind through the current audio track or
video chapter. Push once to revert back to the
previous track.
6. Volume — Push the - button to decrease the
volume and + button to increase the volume.
7. Channel Guide — Push to access the channel
guide for the system.
8. Mute — Mutes headphone audio.
9. Prime Video — Push to launch Prime Video app.
10. App 1 — Push to navigate to App 1.
11. Microphone Button — Push to activate Alexa.
12. Menu — Push to access the Fire TV menu.
13. Seek Forward Button — Push and hold to fast
forward through the current audio track or video
chapter. Push once to skip to the next track.
14. Play/Pause Button ‖ — Begin/resume or pause
disc play.
15. Channel +/- — Push the up or down arrow
button on the Channel button to browse channels
available in Fire TV.
16. Recent — Push to access recently viewed content
on Fire TV.
17. Gear/Settings — Push to bring up setting options
for Fire TV.
18. App 2 — Push to launch App 2.
19. Vehicle Button — Push to activate the Vehicle
menu.
REPLACING THE VOICE REMOTE WITH ALEXA
BATTERIES
Each Voice Remote with Alexa requires two AAA
batteries for operation.
To replace the batteries:
1. Locate the battery compartment on the back of
the Voice Remote with Alexa, then slide the battery
cover downward.
2. Remove the old batteries and follow battery
recycling procedures for your area.
3. Install new batteries, making sure to orient them
according to the polarity diagram shown inside the
battery compartment.
4. Slide the battery compartment cover back on.
MULTIMEDIA 219
5
REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT WITH FIRE TV
BUILT-IN STREAMING (USING THE FRONT
RADIO AND REAR SCREENS)
Access Using Launch Source
To access Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in
from the front radio, press the Media tab located on
the bottom menu bar. Then select the Rear Seat option
located on the top menu bar. Select “Launch Source”,
and then under “Inputs” select “Fire TV Home”.
● Fire TV — Selecting “Fire TV” will show streaming
options for categories and to select apps. This option
will be selectable on the left slider menu in “Browse
Media”. While in “Browse Media” under Fire TV, it
will display recent activity under “Recent”. This will
display recent videos viewed from Fire TV and recent
downloads as well.
● USB Video — Under “USB Videos”, videos will appear
that are options with a USB device connected to
Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in.
● USB Music — Under “USB Music”, music will appear
that are options with a USB device connected to
Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in.
Access Using the Voice Remote with Alexa and Rear
Screens
Rear passengers will be able to access some options
for streaming by pressing the “Prime Video”, “App 1”,
or “App 2” button on the Voice Remote with Alexa.
Selecting one of those buttons on the Voice Remote
with Alexa will take you to the home page for that
respective streaming service. Turning on either of the
rear screens will launch Fire TV. By default, the rear
screens will always launch in Fire TV. More streaming
options can be selected on the Fire TV home page.
Fire TV
Fire T
V is your source for online streaming with Rear
Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in.
NOTE:
A data source needs to be connected to the system
for streaming to be accessible. This can be set up
when Fire TV is turned on for the first time on the rear
screens. Some options can be an in-vehicle 4G Wi-Fi
hot spot, capable Wi-Fi hot spot from a mobile device,
or Wi-Fi from an outside source like a home or a garage.
To access Fire TV on the front screen, select “Launch
Source” on the front touchscreen and Rear Seat
screens, and then “Fire TV Home” under “Inputs”.
The menu bar for Fire TV will have the options for
“Home”, “Find”, “Library”, “Brand”, and “Live”.
Below the menu bar will be streaming options linked to
your Prime account like “Prime Video”.
The front radio screen offers some options:
● Power — This will turn Fire TV on or off.
● Screen 1 and Screen 2 Toggle — This toggles
between the Rear Screens (for use with front radio
screen only).
● Collapse — While viewing on the front radio screen,
this will collapse the screen to dashboard view.
● Source Drawer — This will open the “Source Drawer”
and the source logo will be displayed on the icon.
● Browse Media — This will open the “Browse Media”
pop-up.
● Back — This will let you go back the previous page.
● Fire T
V Home — This will take you back to the Fire TV
home page.
● Menu — This will open the Fire TV menu.
● Remote icon — This will display the on-screen
remote.
NOTE:
Front radio screen mirroring and watching can only be
done when the vehicle is in PARK. The vehicle must
be in an active and usable cellular range and properly
equipped with a Uconnect 5 NAV system and Rear Seat
Entertainment with Fire TV package. For streaming, a
Wi-Fi connection and registered Amazon account are
required to run Fire TV in the vehicle. Streaming service
subscriptions are not included. Services and features
are subject to change or withdrawal at any time, may
not be available in all areas and languages, and may
require separate subscriptions.
FIRE TV APPS/GAMES (USING THE
REAR
SCREENS)
Apps and games can be accessed using Rear Seat
Entertainment with Fire TV built-in.
To access Apps on the rear screen, turn on the system
and select “Find” in the top menu. On the Find page,
select “Appstore”. Within the App Store
®
you can
purchase apps and games. From here you can also
select from all the apps and games that have been
purchased.
USING THE VIDEO USB PORT
Plug in a USB drive or mass storage device and play
your favorite music or movies.
220 MULTIMEDIA
Selecting “Browse
Media” on the front radio screen
will give access to different media within Rear Seat
Entertainment with Fire TV built-in.
These options will be in the top menu of “Browse
Media” and include:
Access Using Browse Media
On the rear screen you can browse the content of the
USB device by going to the USB source in the inputs.
Use the search feature to find your media faster.
PLAY VIDEO GAMES
Connect the video game console to either of the HDMI
ports located behind either of the first row seats.
Headphone Jack/HDMI/USB
1 — Headphone Jack (Headphone Output Only)
2 — USB Port (Charge Only)
3 — HDMI Port
NOTE:
Certain high-end video games may exceed the power
limit of the vehicle's Power Inverter
ð
page 77.
HEADPHONES OPERATION
Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in does not
come equipped with headphones. Customers will need
to provide their own wireless headphones that can be
paired with the system using Bluetooth®. Customers
can also use their own wired headphones and plug
them into a Headphone Jack located under one of the
rear screens.
Wireless Headphones Pairing
To pair wireless headphones with Rear Seat
Entertainment with Fire TV built-in using the rear
screens, follow these steps:
1. Push the Gear/Settings button on the Voice
Remote with Alexa or tap the screen.
2. Select the Gear/Settings icon on the screen.
3. Select “Settings” on the screen.
4. While in Settings, select “Controllers & Bluetooth®
Devices”.
5. Select “Other Bluetooth® Devices” and follow the
on-screen steps for pairing.
While multiple headphones can be paired, only one will
output audio at a time.
REAR CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Rear Climate Controls can also be controlled using
Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in
ð
page
62.
Rear Climate Controls can be accessed by using the
Vehicle menu. Tap on either rear screen and select
the Vehicle icon or press the Vehicle button on the
Voice Remote with Alexa. Then select the Rear Climate
Controls option.
Options within Rear Climate Controls are:
Icon Description
ON
Climate Control ON Button
Press and release this button to turn the Rear Climate Contr
ols on.
OFF
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Rear Climate Controls off.
MULTIMEDIA 221
5
Icon Description
SYNC SYNC Button
Pressing this button will sync both sides of the Rear Climate Controls.
AUTO Button
Automatically controls the rear interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Toggling this function will cause the system to switch
between Manual mode and Automatic mode.
Rear Passenger Temperature Up and Down Buttons
Provides the rear passengers with independent temperature control. Press the button on the touchscreen to increase or decrease the temperature. The
temperature will get warmer as you move up toward the red arrow and colder as you move down toward the blue arrow.
Headliner
Mode
Headliner Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to
one side will shut off the airflow.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets.
NOTE:
In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
222 MULTIMEDIA
Icon Description
1,2,3, etc.
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the Climate system. There are seven blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will
cause Automatic mode to switch to Manual operation.
LEGAL & COMPLIANCE
To access Legal and Com
pliance information about
Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in from the
rear screens, follow these steps:
1. Push the Gear/Settings button on the Voice
Remote with Alexa or tap the screen.
2. Select the Gear/Settings icon on the screen.
3. Select “Settings” on the screen.
4. While in the Settings menu, select “My Fire TV”
and then “Legal & Compliance”.
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with Off-Road Pages,
which provides the vehicle status information while
operating on off-road conditions. It supplies information
relating to the vehicle ride height, the status of the
transfer case, the pitch and roll of the vehicle, and the
active Selec-Terrain Mode.
To access Off-Road Pages, press the Off Road button
on the touchscreen from the Vehicle menu, and then
press “Launch Off-Road”.
Off-Road Pages has the following selectable pages:
● Vehicle Dynamics
● Accessory Gauges
● Pitch & R
oll
● Selec-Terrain — If Equipped
● Suspension — If Equipped
NOTE:
With a Connected Services subscription, you can record
your Off-Road data and send it directly to the mobile
app. Press the Record button to begin.
OFF-ROAD PAGES STATUS BAR
The Off-Road Pages Status Bar is located along the
bottom of Off-Road Pages and is present on each
of the selectable page options. It provides continually
updating information for the following items:
● Current Transfer Case Status
● Current Selec-Terrain mode
● Current Latitude/Longitude
● Current Altitude of the vehicle
● Status of Hill Descent
● Hill Descent Control or Selec-Speed Control Selected
Speed in mph (km/h).
Status Bar
1 — Transfer Case Status
2 — Current Latitude/Longitude
3 — Current Altitude
4 — Hill Descent Control
VEHICLE DYNAMICS
The Vehicle Dynamics page displays information
concerning the v
ehicle’s drivetrain.
The following information is displayed:
● Steering angle in degrees
MULTIMEDIA 223
5
● Status of Transfer Case
● Status of the Rear Axle Lock
er — If Equipped
Vehicle Dynamics Menu
1 — Vehicle Dynamics
2 — Steering Angle
3 — Transfer Case
4 — Rear Axle Status
ACCESSORY GAUGES
The A
ccessory Gauges page displays the current status
of the vehicle’s Coolant Temperature, Oil Temperature,
Oil Pressure, Transmission Temperature, and Battery
Voltage.
Accessory Gauges Menu
1 — Coolant Temperature
2 — Oil Temperature
3 — Oil Pressure
4 — Transmission Temperature
5 — Battery Voltage
PITCH & ROLL
The Pitch & Roll page displays the v
ehicle’s current
pitch (angle up and down) and roll (angle side to
side) in degrees. The Pitch & Roll gauges provide a
visualization of the current vehicle angle.
Pitch & Roll Menu
1 — Current Pitch
2 — Current Roll
SELEC-TERRAIN — IF EQUIPPED
The Selec-Terrain page displays the current Selec-
T
errain Mode through a high resolution image.
Adjusting the Selec-Terrain Mode will alter the image on
the screen. The vehicle must be in the ON/RUN position
to display Selec-Terrain information.
The selectable modes are as follows:
● Rock — Vehicle Must Be In 4WD Low
● Sand/Mud
● Snow
● Auto — Default
● Sport
224 MUL
TIMEDIA
NOTE:
The Off-Road Pages Status Bar will also display the
current Selec-Terrain Mode.
SUSPENSION — IF EQUIPPED
The Suspension page displays information concerning
the vehicle’s suspension.
The following information is displayed:
● Wheel Articulation
● Current Ride Height Status
○ Off-Road 2
○ Off-Road 1
○ Normal
○ Aero
○ Entry/Exit
NOTE:
The wheel articulation will be represented by a yellow
color in the Wheel Articulation. If Ride Height is
adjusted, the Ride Height indicator on the screen
will switch to the appropriate height and the Wheel
Articulation will show the movement and change in
height.
Suspension Menu
1 — Wheel Articulation
2 — Current Ride Height
REGULATORY AND SAFETY I
NFORMATION
US/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio
is far below the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure
limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in
such a manner that the radio is 8 inches (20 cm) or
further from the human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and
recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the
scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless
radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy
emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy
emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones.
However, the use of wireless radios may be restricted
in some situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are
encouraged to ask for authorization before turning on
the wireless radio
ð
page 360.
MULTIMEDIA 225
5
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on
in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance
from your radio. This condition may be lessened or
eliminated by repositioning the mobile phone within
the vehicle. This condition is not harmful to the
radio. If your radio performance does not satisfactorily
improve from repositioning the mobile phone, it is
recommended that the volume be turned down or off
during mobile phone operation when not using the
Uconnect system.
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and
brake performance under most braking conditions.
The system automatically prevents wheel lock and
enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the
ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started
and driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
The ABS is activated during braking when the system
detects one or more wheels are beginning to lock. Road
conditions such as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad
tracks, loose debris, or panic stops may increase the
likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following normal
characteristics when the ABS activates:
● ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may
continue to hear for a short time after the stop).
● Brake pedal pulsations.
● A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the
stop.
The ABS is designed to function with the Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modification may
result in degraded ABS performance.
WARNING!
● The ABS contains sophisticat
ed electronic
equipment that may be susceptible t
o interference
caused by improperly installed or high output
radio transmitting equipment. This interference
can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking
capability. Installation of such equipment should
be performed by qualified professionals.
● Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press
firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow
down or stop.
● The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that
afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and
tires or the traction afforded.
● The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
● The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and ma
y stay on
for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes on while
driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and that service is
required. However, the conventional brake system will
continue to operate normally if the ABS Warning Light is
on.
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system should
be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits
of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS Warning Light does not
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
REAR SEAT REMINDER ALERT (RSRA)
RSRA alerts of the possible presence of an object,
passenger, or pet in the rear seats through a visual
and auditory notification. When the system is activated,
it displays the message “Check Rear Seat” on the
instrument cluster display and sounds an auditory
alert upon the driver placing the ignition in the OFF
position to exit the vehicle. The system will activate
automatically if a rear door is opened within 10 minutes
of the ignition being placed in the ON/RUN position.
RSRA should be used as a reminder to check the rear
seats, it does not directly detect objects, passengers, or
226 SAFETY
pets and is only activated when the previous conditions
are met.
To enable or disable RSRA, see
ð
page 186.
WARNING!
● Bef
ore exiting a vehicle, always come to
a complet
e stop, then shift the automatic
transmission into PARK and apply the parking
brake.
● Always make sure the keyless ignition node is in
the OFF position, key fob is removed from the
vehicle and vehicle is locked.
● Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in
a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
● Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
DROWSY DRIVER DETECTION (DDD) — IF
EQUIPPED
DDD det
ects when the driver is feeling fatigued and
warns the driver to pull over and take a break.
To Activate/Deactivate
DDD can be activated and deactivated through the
Uconnect system by selecting the following in order:
1. “Safety & Driving Assistance”
2. “Drowsy Driv
er Detection”
WARNING!
The DDD system is an aid for driving and does not
relieve the driver of the responsibility of driving the
vehicle. If you experience fatigue while driving, pull
over safely for a break without waiting for the DDD
to intervene. Only return to the road when you are
in the right physical and mental condition to prevent
endangering yourself and other drivers.
System Intervention
Using feedback obtained from the driver’s st
eering
patterns, any buttons/switches that are pressed, and
from the front camera, the system implements two
operating logics:
● The first operating logic takes the driving style into
account, observing the road and detecting to what
extent the driver can continue driving with few lane
crossing events.
● The second operating logic measures the time spent
behind the wheel with the vehicle speed above 40
mph (60 km/h) and below 100 mph (160 km/h).
If the driving style indicates that the driver is unable
to follow the road trajectory and respect the horizontal
lane markings while within the operating speed range
of the system, a pop-up will display on the instrument
cluster display to suggest that the driver should stop for
a break. An audible signal will also sound.
If the driver accepts the suggestion provided by the
system by pushing the “OK” button on the left side of
the steering wheel, the message will disappear from
the display.
If the driver does no
t acknowledge the warning it will be
displayed for 60 seconds and then disappear.
NOTE:
In the event of a DDD system failure, a dedicated
message will appear in the instrument cluster display.
DDD Warning Message
ELECTRONIC BRAKE
CONTROL (EBC)
SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced EBC system.
This system includes the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),
Brake Assist System (BAS), Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD), Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM), Hill Start Assist (HSA),
Intersection Collision Assist (ICA), and Traction Control
System (TCS). These systems work together to enhance
both vehicle stability and control in various driving
conditions.
SAFETY 227
6
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Dynamic
Steering Torque (DST), Rain Brake Support (RBS),
Ready Alert Braking (RAB), and Trailer Sway Control
(TSC).
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by
sensing the rate and amount of brake application and
then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can
help reduce braking distances. The BAS complements
the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes
very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To
receive the benefit of the system, you must apply
continuous braking pressure during the stopping
sequence (do not “pump” the brakes). Do not reduce
brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer
desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
v
ehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded
by prevailing road conditions. BAS cannot prevent
collisions, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces,
or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user's
safety or the safety of others.
Brake System Warning Light
The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on when
the ignition is placed in the ON/R
UN mode and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or comes
on while driving, it indicates that the brake system is
not functioning properly and that immediate service is
required. If the Brake System Warning Light does not
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
EBD manages the distribution of the braking torque
between the front and rear axles by limiting braking
pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent
overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability,
and to prevent the rear axle from entering ABS before
the front axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
ERM anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the
rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s
speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift,
it then applies the appropriate brake and may also
reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel
lift will occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of
wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving
maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift due to other
factors, such as road conditions, leaving the roadway,
or striking objects or other vehicles.
NOTE:
ERM is disabled any time the ESC is in “Full Off”
mode (if eq
uipped). See
ð
page 228 for a complete
explanation of the available ESC modes.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road
conditions and driving conditions, influence the
chance that wheel lift or rollov
er may occur. ERM
cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially
those that involve leaving the roadway or striking
objects or other vehicles. The capabilities of an
ERM-equipped vehicle must never be exploited
in a reckless or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
ESC enhances directional control and stability of the
vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects
f
or oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist
in counteracting these conditions. Engine power may
also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the
desired path.
● Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
● Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the
vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it
to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual
path does not match the intended path, ESC applies
228 SAFETY
the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light located
in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as
the ESC system becomes active. The ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when the
Traction Control System (TCS) is active. If the ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash
during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and
apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your
speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
WARNING!
● Electr
onic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on
the v
ehicle, nor can it increase the traction
afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot
prevent accidents, including those resulting from
excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot
prevent accidents resulting from loss of vehicle
control due to inappropriate driver input for the
conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of
an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited
in a reckless or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
● Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
maintain your vehicle, may change the handling
characteristics of your vehicle, and may negatively
affect the performance of the ESC system.
Changes to the steering system, suspension,
(Continued)
WARNING!
braking system, tire type and size or wheel size
may adversely affect ESC performance. Improperly
inflated and unevenly worn tires may also degrade
ESC performance. Any vehicle modification or
poor vehicle maintenance that reduces the
effectiveness of the ESC system can increase the
risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death.
ESC Operating Modes
Depending upon model and mode of operation, the ESC
system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode f
or the ESC.
Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will
be in this mode. This mode should be used for most
driving conditions. Alternate ESC modes should only
be used for specific reasons as noted in the following
paragraphs.
Partial Off
This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
This mode may modify TCS and ESC thresholds for
activation, which allows for more wheel spin than
normally allowed.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the
ESC OFF button and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will
illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push
the ESC OFF button and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will
turn off.
NOTE:
For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes, the push
and release of the button will t
oggle the ESC modes.
Multiple attempts may be required to return to "ESC On"
mode.
WARNING!
● When in “P
artial Off” mode, the TCS functionality
of ESC, e
xcept for the limited slip feature
described in the TCS section, has been disabled
and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will be
illuminated. When in “Partial Off” mode, the
engine power reduction feature of TCS is disabled,
and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the
ESC system is reduced.
● Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when the
ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light in the instrument clust
er will come on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode. It should go out with the engine
running. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light comes on continuously with the engine running,
a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If
this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and
the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers)
at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an
authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
SAFETY 229
6
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light starts
to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and
the ESC system becomes active. The ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is
active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be
sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the
customer has elected to have the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
NOTE:
● The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and
the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily
each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode.
● Each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode, the ESC system will be on even if it was
turned off previously.
● The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
HDC Has Three States:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate).
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but
activation conditions are not met, or driver
is actively overriding with brake or throttle
application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling
vehicle speed).
Enabling HDC
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but the
following conditions must also be met to enable HDC:
● The driveline is in 4WD Low.
● The vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
● The parking brake is released.
● The driver door is closed.
Activating HDC
Once HDC is enabled it will activate automatically if
driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude. The set
speed for HDC is selectable by the driver, and can
be adjusted by using the gear shift +/-. The following
summarizes the HDC set speeds:
HDC Target Set Speeds
● P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but will not
activate.
● R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
● N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
● D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
● 1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
● 2nd = 1
.2 mph (2 km/h)
● 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
● 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
● 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
● 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
● 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
● 8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
● 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
NOTE:
During HDC the +/- shifter input is used for HDC
target speed selection, but will not affect the gear
chosen by the transmission. When actively controlling
HDC the transmission will shift appropriately for the
driver-selected set speed and corresponding driving
conditions.
Driver Override
The driver may override HDC activation with throttle or
brake application at any time.
Deactivating HDC
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any of
the following conditions occur:
● The driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle or
brake application.
● The vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but
remains below 40 mph (64 km/h).
● The vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient
magnitude, is on level ground, or is on an uphill
grade.
230 SAFET
Y
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
HDC is intended for low speed off-road
driving while in 4WD Low. HDC maintains
vehicle speed while descending hills during
various driving situations. HDC controls
vehicle speed by actively controlling the
brakes.
● The vehicle is shifted to PARK.
Disabling HDC
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the
following conditions occur:
● The driver pushes the HDC switch.
● The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low.
● The parking brake is applied.
● The driver door opens.
● The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph (32 km/h)
for greater than 70 seconds.
● The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (64 km/h)
(HDC exits immediately).
● HDC detects excessive brake temperature.
Feedback To The Driver
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the HDC
switch has an LED icon, which offers feedback to the
driver about the state HDC is in.
● The cluster icon and switch light will illuminate and
remain on solid when HDC is enabled or activated.
This is the normal operating condition for HDC.
● The cluster icon and switch light will flash for several
seconds, then extinguish when the driver pushes the
HDC switch but enable conditions are not met.
● The cluster icon and switch light will flash for several
seconds, then extinguish when HDC disables due to
excess speed.
● The cluster icon and switch light will flash when HDC
deactivates due to overheated brakes. The flashing
will stop and HDC will activate again once the brak
es
ha
ve cooled sufficiently
.
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling
vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver must
remain attentive to the driving conditions and is
responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
HSA is designed to mitigate roll back from a com
plete
stop while on an incline. If the driver releases the brake
while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to hold
the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver
does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the
system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will
roll down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA
to activate:
● The feature must be enabled.
● The vehicle must be stopped.
● The parking brake must be off.
● The driver door must be closed.
● The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
● The gear selection must match vehicle uphill
direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear;
vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE (R) gear).
● HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
gears. The system will not activate if the
transmission is in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other
vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly
brake operation to ensure safe operation of the
vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete
attention is always required while driving to maintain
safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision or serious personal
injury.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
the current setting, pr
oceed as follows:
● If disabling HSA using your instrument cluster
display, see
ð
page 96 for further information.
● If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, see
ð
page 186 for further information.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back
while towing a trailer.
SAFETY 231
6
WARNING!
● If y
ou use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes ma
y be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there may
not be enough brake pressure to hold both the
vehicle and the trailer on a hill when the brake
pedal is released. In order to avoid rolling down
an incline while resuming acceleration, manually
activate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle
brake pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal.
● HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting your vehicle. Also,
be certain to place the transmission in PARK.
● Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision or serious personal injury.
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
RBS may impro
ve braking performance in wet
conditions. It will periodically apply a small amount of
brake pressure to remove any water buildup on the
front brake rotors. It functions when the windshield
wipers are in LO or HI speed. When RBS is active, there
is no notification to the driver and no driver interaction
is required.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
RAB may reduce the time required to reach full braking
during emergency braking situations. It anticipates
when an emergency braking situation may occur
by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by
the driver. The Electronic Brake Controller (EBC) will
prepare the brake system for a panic stop.
Selec-Speed Control (SSC) — If Equipped
Selec-Speed Contr
ol (SSC) is intended
for of
f-road driving in 4WD Low only.
SSC maintains vehicle speed by actively
controlling engine torque and brakes.
SSC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate)
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but
activation conditions are not met, or driver
is actively overriding with brake or throttle
application)
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling
vehicle speed)
Enabling SSC
SSC is enabled by pushing the SSC switch, but the
following conditions must also be met to enable SSC:
● The driveline is in 4WD Low.
● The vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
● The parking brake is released.
● The driver door is closed.
● The driver is not applying throttle.
Activating SSC
Once SSC is enabled it will activate automatically once
the following conditions are met:
● Driver releases throttle.
● Driver releases brake.
● Transmission is in any selection other than PARK.
● Vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h).
The set speed for SSC is selectable b
y the driver, and
can be adjusted by using the gear shift +/-. Additionally,
the SSC set speed may be reduced when climbing a
grade and the level of set speed reduction depends on
the magnitude of grade. The following summarizes the
SSC set speeds:
SSC Target Set Speeds
● 1st = .6 mph (1 km/h)
● 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
● 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
● 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
● 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
● 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
● 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
● 8th = 5 mph (8 km/h)
● 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
● REVERSE = .6 mph (1 km/h)
● NEUTRAL = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
● PARK = SSC remains enabled but not active
NOTE:
● During SSC the +/- shifter input is used for
SSC target speed selection but will not affect
the gear chosen by the transmission. While
actively controlling SSC the transmission will shift
appropriately for the driver-selected set speed and
corresponding driving conditions.
232 SAFET
Y
● SSC performance is influenced by the Selec-Terrain
mode. This difference may be notable to the
driver and may be perceived as a varying level of
aggressiveness.
Driver Override:
The driver may override SSC activation with throttle or
brake application at any time.
Deactivating SSC
SSC will be deactivated but remain available if any of
the following conditions occur:
● Driver overrides SSC set speed with throttle or brake
application
● Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but
remains below 40 mph (64 km/h)
● Vehicle is shifted to PARK
Disabling SSC
SSC will deactivate and be disabled if any of the
following conditions occur:
● The driver pushes the SSC switch.
● The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low.
● The parking brake is applied.
● The driver door opens.
● The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph (32 km/h)
for greater than 70 seconds.
● The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (64 km/h)
(SSC exits immediately).
The instrument cluster has an SSC icon and the SSC
switch has an LED which of
fers feedback to the driver
about the state SSC is in.
● The cluster icon and switch light will illuminate and
remain on solid when SSC is enabled or activated.
This is the normal operating condition for SSC.
● The cluster icon and switch light will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when the driver pushes the
SSC switch but enable conditions are not met.
● The cluster icon and switch light will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when SSC disables due to
excess speed.
● The cluster icon and switch light will flash then
extinguish when SSC deactivates due to overheated
brakes.
WARNING!
SSC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling
v
ehicle speed when driving in off-road conditions. The
driver must remain attentive to the driving conditions
and is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle
speed.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each
of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the
TCS may apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s)
and/or reduce engine power to provide enhanced
acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake
Limited Differential (BLD) functions similarly to a limited
slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a
driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning
faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of
the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine power to
be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may
remain enabled even if the TCS and Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) are in reduced modes.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an
excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
actions to attempt to stop the sway. TSC will become
active automatically once an excessively swaying trailer
is recognized.
NOTE:
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always use
caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer
tongue weight recommendations page 170.
When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light will flash, the engine power
may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being
applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the
trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC
system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down,
stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the
trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
SAFETY 233
6
Feedback To The Driver:
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM)
BSM system uses two radar sensors, located inside
the rear fascia/bumper, to detect highway licensable
vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that
enter the blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of
the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning Light will
momentarily illuminat
e in both outside rearview mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational.
The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in
any forward gear.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
in width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m).
The zone length starts at the side of the vehicle, near
the B-pillar, and extends approximately 10 ft (3 m)
beyond the rear fascia/bumper of the vehicle. The BSM
system monitors the detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle when the vehicle speed is 7 mph (11 km/h)
or higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these
areas. BSM will aler
t earlier on faster-appr
oaching
vehicles – up to 33 mph (54 km/h) difference.
NOTE:
The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually verify
the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and
trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or
other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in
random false detections on the trailer, and false chimes
when the turn signal is used
ð
page 186.
The BSM system can become blocked if snow, ice,
mud, or other road contaminations accumulate on
the rear fascia/bumper where the radar sensors are
located. The system may also detect blockage if the
vehicle is operated in areas with extremely low radar
returns such as a desert or parallel to a large elevation
drop. If blockage is detected, a “Blind Spot Temporarily
Unavailable, Sensor Blocked” message will display in
the cluster, both mirror lights will illuminate, and BSM
and RCP alerts will not occur. This is normal operation.
The system will automatically recover and resume
function when the condition clears or when an ignition
cycle occurs. To minimize system blockage, do not
block the area of the rear fascia/bumper where the
radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper
stickers, bicycle racks, etc.), and keep it clear of road
contaminations.
Sensor Location (Left Side Shown)
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
de
tection zones by illuminating the BSM Warning Light
located in the outside mirrors. In addition, when the
turn signal is activated during the alert on the side
of the vehicle corresponding to the alert, an audible
(chime) alert can be heard. During this audible (chime)
alert, the radio volume will be reduced
ð
page 236.
BSM Warning Light
234 SAFETY
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from
three different entry points (Side, Rear, Front) while
driving to see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system
will issue an alert during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
Entering From The R
ear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on
either side and enter the rear detection zone with a
relative speed of less than 33 mph (54 km/h). Fast
approaching vehicles will receive an earlier alert based
on relative speed.
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking Traf
fic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed
of less than 13 mph (24 km/h) the warning light will be
illuminated. If the difference in speed between the two
vehicles is greater than 13 mph (24 km/h), the warning
light will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system is designed not to issue an aler
t
on stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls,
foliage, berms, etc. However, occasionally the system
may alert on such objects. This is normal operation and
your vehicle does not require service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
adjacent lanes.
Opposing Traffic
SAFETY 235
6
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid
to help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The
BSM system is not designed to detect pedestrians,
bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
RCP is intended to aid the driv
er when backing out of
parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles
may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously out of
the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is
exposed. The RCP system will then have a clear view of
the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected,
alert the driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear de
tection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side
of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately
5 m
ph (8 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of
appr
oximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking
lot situations.
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be
obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path (RCP) Detection is not a back up
aid system. It is intended to be used to help a
driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot
situation. Drivers must be careful when backing up,
even when using RCP. Always check carefully behind
your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
Blind Spot Modes
Three selectable modes of operation are available in
the Uconnect system
ð
page 1
86.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
the system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode,
the system will respond with both visual and audible
alerts when a detect
ed object is present. Whenever an
audible alert is requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a detected
object. If the turn signal is then activated, and it
corresponds to an alert present on that side of
the vehicle, an audible chime will also be sounded.
Whenever a turn signal and detected object are present
on the same side at the same time, both the visual and
audible alerts will be issued. In addition to the audible
alert the radio (if on) will also be muted.
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond
with both visual and audible alerts when a detected
object is present. Whenever an audible alert is
requested, the radio is also muted. Turn/hazard signal
status is ignored; the RCP state always requests the
chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off, there will be no
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating mode
when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is
started, the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used.
236 SAFETY
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING
(FCW)
WITH MITIGATION
FCW with Mitigation system provides the driver
with audible warnings, visual warnings (within the
instrument cluster display), and may apply a brake jerk
to warn the driver when it detects a potential frontal
collision. The warnings and limited braking are intended
to provide the driver with enough time to react, avoid or
mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward looking
sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller
(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision.
When the system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning.
If the driver does not take action based upon these
progressive warnings, then the system will provide a
limited level of active braking to help slow the vehicle
and mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver
reacts to the warnings by braking and the system
determines that the driver intends to avoid the collision
by braking but has not applied sufficient brake force,
the system will compensate and provide additional
brake force as required.
If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event
begins at a speed below 39 mph (62 km/h), the
system may provide the maximum or partial braking to
mitigate the potential forward collision. If the Forward
Collision Warning with Mitigation event stops the
vehicle completely, the system will hold the vehicle at a
standstill for two seconds and then release the brakes.
FCW Message
When the system determines a collision with the
v
ehicle in front of you is no longer probable, the
warning message will be deactivated.
NOTE:
● The minimum speed for FCW activation is 3 mph (5
km/h).
● The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other
than vehicles, such as guardrails or sign posts based
on the course prediction. This is expected and is a
part of normal FCW activation and functionality.
● It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent
such misuse of the system, after four Active Braking
events within an ignition cycle, the Active Braking
portion of FCW will be deactivated until the next
ignition cycle.
● The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If
the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should
be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to
the surroundings. If the vehicle enters 4WD Low, the
FCW system will be automatically deactivated.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect
every type of potential collision. The driver has the
responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow this
warning could lead to serious injury or death.
FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status are
programmable thr
ough the Uconnect system
ð
page
186.
The default sensitivity of FCW is the “Medium” setting
and the system status is “Warning & Braking”. This
allows the system to warn the driver of a possible
collision with the vehicle in front using audible/visual
warnings and it applies autonomous braking.
Changing the FCW status to the “Far” setting allows
the system to warn the driver of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front using an audible/visual warning
when the latter is at a farther distance than “Medium”
setting. This provides the most reaction time to avoid a
possible collision.
NOTE:
The “Far” setting may result in a greater number of FCW
possible collision warnings experienced.
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting allows
the system to warn the driver of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front when the distance between the
vehicle in the front is much closer. This setting provides
less reaction time than the “Far” and “Medium”
SAFETY 237
6
settings, which allows for a more dynamic driving
experience.
NOTE:
The “Near” setting may result in a lesser number of
FCW possible collision warnings experienced.
NOTE:
● Changing the FCW status to “Only Warning” prevents
the system from providing limited active braking,
or additional brake support if the driver is not
braking adequately in the event of a potential
frontal collision, but maintains the audible and visual
warnings.
● Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the
system from providing autonomous braking, or
additional brake support if the driver is not braking
adequately in the event of a potential frontal
collision.
● The system will retain the last setting selected by the
driver after ignition shut down.
● FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in
the path of the vehicle, stationary objects that are
far away, oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with
the same or higher rate of speed.
● FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
screens.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster displays “ACC/FCW Limited
Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” momentarily, there may be a
condition that limits FCW functionality. Although the
vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, the
activ
e braking may not be fully available. Once the
condition that limited the system performance is no
longer present, the system will return to its full
performance state. If the problem persists, see an
authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster
displays:
● ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
● Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
conditions, have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB)
PEB is a subsystem of the Forward Collision Warning
(FCW) system which provides the driver with audible
warnings and visual warnings, in the instrument cluster
display. It may apply limited automatic braking when it
detects a potential frontal collision with a pedestrian/
cyclist.
PEB Message
If a PEB event begins at a speed below 39 m
ph (62
km/h), the system may provide maximum braking to
mitigate the potential collision with a pedestrian/cyclist.
If the PEB event stops the vehicle completely, the
system will hold the vehicle at a standstill for two
seconds and then release the brakes. When the system
determines a collision with the pedestrian/cyclist in
front of you is no longer probable, the warning message
will be deactivated.
The minimum speed for PEB activation is 3 mph (5
km/h).
WARNING!
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) is not intended
t
o avoid a collision on its o
wn, nor can PEB detect
every type of potential collision with a pedestrian/
cyclist. The driver has the responsibility to avoid a
collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and
steering. Failure to follow this warning could lead to
serious injury or death.
238 SAFETY
Turning PEB On Or Off
NOTE:
The default status of PEB is “On.” This allows the
system to warn you of a possible frontal collision with
the pedestrian/cyclist.
The PEB button is located in the Uconnect display in the
control settings
ð
page 186.
To turn the PEB system off, push the Pedestrian
Emergency Braking button once.
To turn the PEB system back on, push the Pedestrian
Emergency Braking button again.
Changing the PEB status to “Off” deactivates the
system, so no warning or active braking will be
available in case of a possible frontal collision with the
pedestrian/cyclist.
NOTE:
The PEB system will retain the last setting selected
by the driver after ignition shut down. The system will
not reset to the default setting when the vehicle is
restarted.
Intersection Collision Assist (ICA) — If
Equipped
ICA uses three front radar sensors located in the front
fascia/bumper, to detect oncoming vehicles from the
front or side when driving through an intersection.
When the system determines that a collision is
probable when turning across oncoming traffic, the
system will attempt to mitigate a possible collision by
decelerating the vehicle. When the system determines
that a collision with a crossing vehicle is probable, the
system may apply additional braking to supplement the
driver braking input to attempt to mitigate a possible
collision. The system will also provide audible warnings
and visual warnings (shown in the instrument cluster).
If the driver determines acceleration is needed to avoid
a collision, when the accelerator is pressed ICA will
cancel.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS)
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
based on the vehicle recommended cold tire pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means
that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire
pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always
be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three-hour period. The tire
pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven —
this is normal and there should be no adjustment for
this increased pressure.
For information on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s
tires, see
ð
page 331.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning
threshold for any reason, including low temperature
effects, or natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and
will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or
above recommended cold tire pressure. Once the low
tire pressure warning has been illuminated, the tire
pressure must be increased to the recommended cold
tire pressure in order for the TPMS Warning Light to be
turned off.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to
be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above
the recommended cold placard pressure in order to
turn the TPMS Warning Light off.
The system will automatically update and the TPMS
Warning Light will extinguish once the updated tire
pressures have been received. The vehicle may need
to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24
km/h) to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle has a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of
33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193
kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease
the tire pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa).
This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn
on the TPMS Warning Light. Driving the vehicle may
cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi
(193 kPa), but the TPMS Warning Light will still be on.
In this situation, the TPMS Warning Light will turn off
only after the tires have been inflated to the vehicle’s
recommended cold tire pressure value.
CAUTION!
● The TPMS has been optimized f
or the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warnings ha
ve been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
(Continued)
SAFETY 239
6
CAUTION!
operation or sensor damage may result when
using replacement equipment that is not of the
same size, type, and/or style. The TPMS sensor
is not designed for use on aftermarket wheels
and may contribute to a poor overall system
performance or sensor damage. Customers
are encouraged to use Original Equipment
Manufacturer (OEM) wheels to ensure proper
TPMS feature operation.
● Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor
to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket
tire sealant it is recommended that you take your
vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
● After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System sensor.
NOTE:
● The TPMS is no
t int
ended t
o replace normal tire care
and maint
enance, or t
o pr
ovide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
● The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure
gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
● Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
● The TPMS is no
t a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driv
er’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire
gauge, even if underinflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS Warning
Light.
● Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire
pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire
pressure in the tire.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) uses
wireless technology with wheel rim-mounted electronic
sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors,
mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem,
transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) consists of
the following components:
● Receiver module
● Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors
● Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages,
which display in the instrument cluster, and a
graphic displaying tire pressures
● TPMS Warning Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low
Pressure Warnings
The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate
in the instrument cluster, and an audible
chime will be activated, when one or more
of the four active road tire pressures are
low. In addition, the instrument cluster will display an
"Inflate to XX" message and a graphic display of the
pressure value(s) with the low tire(s) in a different color
ð
page 96.
NOTE:
Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI,
BAR, or kPa.
240 SAFETY
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Display
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to regularly check the
tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain the
proper pressure.
Low Tire Pressure Monitoring System Display
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four
active r
oad tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible,
and inflate the low tire(s) that is in a different color on
the graphic display to the vehicle’s recommended cold
tire pressure displayed in the “Inflate to XX” message.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to
be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above
the recommended cold placard pressure in order to
turn the TPMS Warning Light off.
The system will automatically update, the graphic
display of the pressure value(s) will return to its original
color and the TPMS Warning Light will extinguish once
the updated tire pressure(s) have been received. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
Service TPMS Warning
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
will flash on and off for 75 seconds, and remain on
solid when a system fault is detected. The system
fault will also sound a chime. The instrument cluster
displa
y will display a “SERVICE TPM SY
STEM” message
for a minimum of five seconds. This message is then
followed by a graphic display, with “--“ in place of
the pressure value(s), indicating which Tire Pressure
Monitoring System sensor(s) is not being received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light will no longer flash, the "SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM" message will not be present, and a pressure
value will be displayed instead of dashes. A system
fault can occur by any of the following:
● Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPMS sensors.
● Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
● Using tire chains on the vehicle.
● Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
NOTE:
There is no Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensor in
the spare tire. The TPMS will not be able to monitor the
tire pressure. If you install the spare tire in place of a
road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure
warning limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will
remain on, a chime will sound, and the instrument
cluster display will still display a pressure value in the
different color graphic display and an “Inflate to XX”
message will be displayed. After driving the vehicle for
up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
addition, the instrument clust
er display will display a
“SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for five seconds and
then display dashes (--) in place of the pressure value.
For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid, and the instrument cluster display
will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for five
seconds and then display dashes (--) in place of the
pressure value. Once you repair or replace the original
road tire, and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the
spare tire, the TPMS will update automatically.
In addition, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light will turn off and the graphic in the
instrument cluster display will display a new pressure
value instead of dashes (--), as long as no tire pressure
is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the
four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven
for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order
for the TPMS to receive this information.
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) can
be deactivated if replacing all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with wheel and tire assemblies
that do not have TPMS sensors, such as when installing
winter wheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped
with Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors. Then,
drive the vehicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24
km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS Warning Light
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain
on. The instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE
SAFETY 241
6
TPM SYSTEM” message and then display dashes (--) in
place of the pressure values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS will
no longer chime or display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message in the instrument cluster but dashes (--) will
remain in place of the pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPMS
sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the
TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then turn off. The instrument cluster will display
the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message and then display
pressure values in place of the dashes. On the next
ignition cycle the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will
no longer be displayed as long as no system fault
exists.
Tire Fill Alert
This feature notifies the user when the placard tire
pressure is attained while inflating or deflating the tire.
The customer may choose to disable or enable the Tire
Fill Alert feature in the apps menu of the Uconnect
system.
NOTE:
● The Tire Fill Alert system will only support inflating or
deflating one tire at a time. The user is required to
wait until the hazard lights STOP flashing or 26-30
seconds after the desired pressure is achieved in
one wheel before switching to another.
● The Tire Fill Alert feature cannot be entered if an
existing TPMS fault is set to “active” or if the system
is in deactivation mode (if equipped).
The system will be activated when the system detects
an increase in tire pressure while filling the tire.
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode with the
transmission in PARK.
NOTE:
It is not required to have the engine running to enter
Tire Fill Alert mode.
The hazard lights will come on to confirm the vehicle
is in Tire Fill Alert mode. If the hazard lights do not
come on while inflating the tire, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System sensor may be in an inoperative
position, preventing the TPMS sensor signal from being
received. In this case, the vehicle may need to be
moved slightly forward or backward.
When Tire Fill Alert mode is entered, the tire pressure
display screen will be displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Operation:
● The horn will chirp once to let the user know when
to stop filling the tire, when it reaches recommended
pressure.
● The horn will chirp three times if the tire is overfilled
and will continue to chirp every five seconds if the
user continues to inflate the tire.
● The horn will chirp once again when enough air is let
out to reach proper inflation level.
● The horn will also chirp three times if the tire is then
underinflated and will continue to chirp every five
seconds if the user continues to deflate the tire.
Selectable Tire Fill Alert (STFA) — If
Eq
uipped
The Selectable Tire Fill Alert (STF
A) system is an
optional feature that is included as part of the normal
Tire Fill Alert system. The system is designed to allow
you to select a pressure to inflate or deflate the
vehicle's front and rear axle tires to, and to provide
feedback while inflating or deflating the vehicle's tires.
In the Selectable Tire Fill Alert application, which is
located in the apps menu of the Uconnect system, you
will be able to select a pressure setting for both the
front and rear axle tire pressures by scrolling through a
pressure range from greater than or equal to 15 psi to
XX psi in 1 psi increments for each axle setting.
XX = the vehicle's cold placard pressure values for the
front and rear axles as shown on the vehicle placard
pressure label.
You may also store pressure values chosen for each
axle in the Uconnect system application as preset
pressure values. Up to two sets of preset pressure
values can be stored in the Uconnect system for the
front and rear axle. Once you select the tire pressures
for the front and rear axles that you want to inflate or
deflate to, you can begin inflating or deflating one tire
at a time.
NOTE:
The STFA system will only support inflating or deflating
one tire at a time. The user is required to wait until
the hazard lights STOP flashing or 26-30 seconds after
the desired pressure is achieved in one wheel, before
switching to another.
242 SAFETY
The system will be activated when the TPMS receiver
module detects a change in tire pressure. The ignition
must be in the ON/RUN mode, with the transmission
in PARK. The hazard lights will come on to confirm the
vehicle is in Tire Fill Alert mode.
When Tire Fill Alert mode is entered, the tire pressure
screen will be displayed in the instrument cluster. If
the hazard lights do not come on while inflating or
deflating the tire, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
sensor may be in an inoperative position, preventing
the TPMS sensor signal from being received. In this
case, the vehicle may need to be moved slightly forward
or backward.
Horn chirps will indicate STFA status as tires are
inflated/deflated. The horn will chirp under the
following STFA states:
1. The horn will chirp once when the selected
pressure is reached to let you know when to stop
inflating or deflating the tire.
2. The horn will chirp three times if the tire is
overinflated or over-deflated.
3. The horn will chirp once again when enough air
is added or removed to reach proper selected
pressure level.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS FEATURES
● Seat Belt Systems
● Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
● Child Restraints
Some of the saf
ety features described in this section
may be standard equipment on some models, or may
be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure,
ask an authorized dealer.
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize
the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always
ride buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a
rear seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the
vehicle seat belt properly must be secured in
the appropriate child restraint or belt-positioning
booster seat in a rear seating position
ð
page
260.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the front
passenger seat, move the seat as far back as
possible and use the proper child restraint
ð
page 260.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt
behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
pr
operly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the front
air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs,
the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the
space between occupants and the door and
occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to
be modified to accommodate a disabled person,
see
ð
page 357 for customer service contact
information.
WARNING!
● Ne
ver place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injur
y to a child 12 years
or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
● Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
SAFETY 243
6
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS
Buckle up e
ven though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor
driver and could cause a collision that includes you.
This can happen far away from home or on your own
street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and
they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a
collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when
people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce
the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused
by striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor
vehicle should be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder
System (BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts.
The BeltAlert feature is active whenever the ignition
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is
first in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will
signal for a few seconds. If the driver or outboard
front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front
passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the
ignition switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position
the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain
on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled. The
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is
unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front
passenger seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning
sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder
Light and sounding an intermittent chime. Once the
BeltAlert warning sequence has completed, the Seat
Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the seat
belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may
repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts are
buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants to
buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling,
the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat
belts are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not
active when the outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal
or other items are placed on the outboard front
passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained
in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet
carriers that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is
properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an
authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend
deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled
the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on
until the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you
under normal conditions. However, in a collision the
seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the
inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
● R
elying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags w
ork
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
air bags.
(Continued)
244 SAFETY
WARNING!
● In a collision, y
ou and your passengers can suf
fer
much greater injuries if you are not properly
buckled up. You can strike the interior of your
vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others
in your vehicle are buckled up properly.
● It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
● Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
● Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including
the driver, should always wear their seat belts
whether or not an air bag is also provided at their
seating position to minimize the risk of severe
injury or death in the event of a crash.
● Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your
seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe,
too.
● Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into
one another in a collision, hurting one another
badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt
for more than one person, no matter what their
size.
WARNING!
● A lap belt w
orn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt f
orces won’t be
at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
● A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
seat belt is flat against your body, without twists.
If you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle,
take it to an authorized dealer immediately and
have it fixed.
● A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion
could ride too high on your body, possibly causing
internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into
the buckle nearest you.
● A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
● A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the inside
surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing
head and neck injury. A seat belt worn under the
arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as
strong as shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt over
your shoulder so that your strongest bones will
take the force in a collision.
● A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
(Continued)
WARNING!
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
● A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect
the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must
be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or
modify the seat belt system. If your vehicle is
involved in a collision, or if you have questions
regarding seat belt or retractor conditions, take
your vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or
authorized FCA Certified Collision Care Program
facility for inspection.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the v
ehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
SAFETY 245
6
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the
front seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat
(for vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grab the
latch plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the
latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to
allow the seat belt to go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, inser
t the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies
low acr
oss your hips, below your abdomen. To
remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on
the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too
tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A
snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the
seat belt in a collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
and chest with minimal, if an
y slack so that it
is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The
retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder
belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on
the buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract
to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch
plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt to
retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
the latch plat
e, grab and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees t
o create a fold that begins
immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
webbing. The folded webbing must enter the slot
at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears
the folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer
twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger seats, the
top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or
downward to position the seat belt away from your
neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage button to release
the anchorage, and move it up or down to the position
that serves you best.
Adjustable Upper Anchorage
246 SAFETY
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position,
and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the
shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down
to make sure that it is locked in position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the
upward position without pushing or squeezing the
release button. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is
latched, pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage
until it is locked into position.
WARNING!
● W
earing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. Y
ou might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your
seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe,
too.
● Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it
is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The
retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder
belt.
● Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
● Always make all seat belt height adjustments
when the vehicle is stationary.
Third Row Center Seat Belt Operating
Instructions
The third row cent
er seat belts feature a seat belt with
a mini-latch plate and buckle, which allows the seat
belt to detach from the lower anchor when the seat is
folded. The mini-latch plate and regular latch plate can
then be stored out of the way in the headliner for added
convenience to open up utilization of the storage areas
behind the front seats when the seat is not occupied.
1. Remove the mini-latch plate and regular latch
plate from its stowed position in the headliner
slightly behind third row seat.
Mini-Latch Stowage
2. Grab the mini-latch plate and pull the seat belt
ov
er the seat.
Mini-Latch Plate
3. Route the shoulder belt t
o the inside of the right
head restraint.
Routing The Third Row Seat Belt Latch Plate
SAFETY 247
6
4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
mini-latch plate into the mini-buckle until you hear
a “click.”
Connect Mini-Latch To Mini-Buckle
5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up
the webbing as far as necessar
y to allow the seat
belt to go around your lap.
6. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Third Row Center Seat Belt Buckled
7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies
low acr
oss your hips, below your abdomen. To
remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on
the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too
tight, pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces
the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
8. Position the shoulder belt on y
our chest so that it
is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The
retractor will withdraw any slack in the seat belt.
9. To release the seat belt, push the red button on
the buckle.
10. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the mini-
buckle for storage, insert the regular latch plate
into the center slot on the mini-buckle. The
seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed
position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down
the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Insert the mini-latch plate and regular latch plate
into its stowed position.
WARNING!
● If the mini-latch plat
e and mini-buckle are not
properly connected when the seat belt is used
b
y an occupant, the seat belt will not be able to
provide proper restraint and will increase the risk
of injury in a collision.
● When reattaching the mini-latch plate and mini-
buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not
twisted. If the webbing is twisted, follow the
preceding procedure to detach the mini-latch
plate and mini-buckle, untwist the webbing, and
reattach the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle.
Third Row Belt Guides
NOTE:
There are three belt guides located on the top of the
seat backs, one for each seating position in the third
row. They can be used to keep the shoulder belt in a
fixed position for additional comfort, if needed.
Third Row Belt Guides
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even
when the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable
upper shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its
lowest position, an authorized dealer can provide you
with a Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender
should be used only if the existing seat belt is not long
enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not required for
a different occupant, it must be removed.
WARNING!
● ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat
(Continued)
248 SAFETY
WARNING!
belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender
if, when worn, the distance between the front edge
of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
● Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when
the lap belt is not long enough and only use in
the recommended seating positions. Remove and
store the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the e
vent of an
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child
if they are wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen
and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the
shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck.
Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under
the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt syst
em is equipped with
pretensioning devices that are designed to remove
slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices may improve the performance of the
seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt early
in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt
placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the
pretensioners are single use items. A deployed
pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced
immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with
an Energy Management feature that may help further
reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision.
The seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint
system
ð
page 267.
The figure provided illustrates the locking feature for
each seating position.
Seven Passengers (Second Row Captain’s Chairs)
Automatic Locking Retract
or (ALR) Locations
Eight Passengers (Second Row Bench)
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
SAFETY 249
6
WARNING!
● Ne
ver place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years
or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
● Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic
Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow
it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic
Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive
(emergency) locking mode.
WARNING!
● The seat belt assembly must be replaced if
the switchable A
utomatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to the
procedures in the Service Manual.
● Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
● Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or
children who are using booster seats. The locked
mode is only used to install rear-facing or forward-
facing child restraints that have a harness for
restraining the child.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS (SRS)
Some of the saf
ety features described in this section
may be standard equipment on some models, or may
be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure,
ask an authorized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to pro
tect you in
a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting
wiring associated with the electrical Air Bag System
Components. Your vehicle may be equipped with the
following Air Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
● Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
● Air Bag Warning Light
● Steering Wheel and Column
● Instrument Panel
● Knee Impact Bolster
s
● Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
● Seat Belt Buckle Switch
● Supplemental Side Air Bags
● Supplemental Knee Air Bags
● Front and Side Impact Sensors
● Seat Belt Pretensioners
● Seat Track Position Sensors
● Occupant Classification System
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the air bag system whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN
250 SAFETY
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR
and is being used for normal usage, only pull
the seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap
around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate
the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking
sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out
only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a "click”.
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic
Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a
seating position that has a seat belt with this feature.
Children 12 years old and under should always be
properly restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle with a
rear seat.
position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF position, the
air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses
power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in
the instrument panel for approximately four to eight
seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is first
in the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air
Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a
malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air
Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously.
A single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes
on again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a
malfunction is detected that could affect the air bag
system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the
malfunction. While the air bag system is designed to
be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs,
have an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
● The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first in the ON/RUN position.
● The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four
to eight-second interval.
● The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related
gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags ma
y not be ready to inflate for your
protection. Have an authorized dealer service the air
bag system immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning
Light is detect
ed, which could affect the
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will
illuminate on the instrument panel. The Redundant Air
Bag Warning Light will stay on until the fault is cleared.
In addition, a single chime will sound to alert you that
the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light has come on
and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant Air
Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains
on while driving have an authorized dealer service the
vehicle immediately
ð
page 104.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts
for both the driver and front passenger. The front
air bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver front air bag is mounted in the
center of the steering wheel. The passenger front
air bag is mounted in the instrument panel, above
the glove compartment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag
3 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental
P
assenger Knee Air Bag
WARNING!
● Being too close to the steering wheel or
instrument panel during front air bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
● Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years
(Continued)
SAFETY 251
6
WARNING!
or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
● Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Features
The Advanced F
ront Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system
provides output appropriate to the severity and type
of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC), which may receive information from
the front impact sensors (if equipped) or other system
components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during
an impact that requires air bag deployment. A low
energy output is used in less severe collisions. A higher
energy output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of
the Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust
the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based
upon seat position.
This vehicle is equipped with a right front passenger
Occupant Classification System (“OCS”) that is
designed to pr
ovide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
output appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight
input, as determined by the OCS.
WARNING!
● No objects should be placed o
ver or near the air
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel
because an
y such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bag to inflate.
● Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions
are designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
● Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
air bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to pr
ovide additional
protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air
bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury
in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front air bags
will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including some
that may produce substantial vehicle damage — for
example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and
angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location
of im
pact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with
little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves
are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag
should have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all
collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in
position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) detects
a collision requiring the front air bags, it signals the
inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is
generated to inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel separate and
fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full
size. The front air bags fully inflate in less time than it
takes to blink your eyes. The front air bags then quickly
deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front
passenger.
Occupant Classification System (OCS) —
Front Passenger Seat
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is part of a
Federally regulated safety system for this vehicle. It is
designed to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
output appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight, as
determined by the OCS.
252 SAFETY
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists of
the following:
● Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
● Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor
located in the front passenger seat
● Air Bag Warning Light
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located
underneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is
locat
ed beneath the passenger seat cushion foam.
Any weight on the seat will be sensed by the Sensor.
The OCM uses input from the Sensor to determine
the front passenger’s most probable classification. The
OCM communicates this information to the ORC. The
ORC may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag deployment based on occupant
classification. In order for the OCS to operate as
designed, it is important for the front passenger to be
seated properly and properly wearing the seat belt.
The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may reduce the
inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if
the OCS estimates that:
● The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very
light objects on it; or
● The front passenger seat is occupied by a small
passenger, including a child; or
● The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-facing
child restraint; or
● The fr
ont passenger is not properly seated or his or
her weight is taken of
f of the seat for a period of
time.
Front Passenger Seat Oc-
cupant Status
Front Passenger Air Bag
Output
Rear-facing child restraint Reduced-power deploy-
ment
Child, including a child in
a forward-facing child re-
straint or booster seat*
Reduced-power deploy-
ment OR Full-power de-
ployment
Properly seated adult Full-power deployment
OR reduced-power de-
ployment
Unoccupied seat Reduced-power deploy-
ment
* It is possible for a child to be classified as an
adult, allowing a full-power P
assenger Advanced Front
Air Bag deployment. Never allow children to ride in the
front passenger seat and never install a child restraint
system, including a rear-facing child restraint, in the
front passenger seat.
WARNING!
● Ne
ver place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injur
y to a child 12 years
or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● Ne
ver install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear
-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
● Children 12 years or younger should always ride
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear
seat.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most
probable classification. The OCS estimates the seat
ed
weight on the front passenger seat and where
that weight is located. The OCS communicates the
classification status to the ORC. The ORC uses the
classification to determine whether the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag inflation rate should be
adjusted.
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is
important for the front passenger to be seated properly
and properly wearing the seat belt. Properly seated
passengers are:
● Sitting upright
● Facing forward
● Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet
comfortably on or near the floor
● Sitting with their back against the seatback and the
seatback in an upright position
SAFETY 253
6
Seated Properly
Lighter Weight Passenger
s (Including Small Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small
adult, occupies the front passenger seat, the OCS may
reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag. This does not mean that the OCS is
working improperly.
Do not decrease OR increase the front passenger’s
seated weight on the front passenger seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be properly
positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do
so may result in serious injury or death. The OCS
determines the most probable classification of the
occupant that it detects. The OCS will detect the front
passenger’s decreased or increased seated weight,
which may result in an adjusted inflation rate of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in a collision. This
does not mean that the OCS is working improperly.
Decreasing the front passenger’s seated weight on the
front passenger seat may result in a reduced-power
deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
Increasing the front passenger’s seated weight on
the front passenger seat may result in a full-power
deplo
yment of the Passenger Adv
anced Front Air Bag.
Examples of improper front passenger seating include:
● The front passenger’s weight is transferred to
another part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest
or instrument panel).
● The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or
turns to face the rear of the vehicle.
● The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full
upright position.
● The front passenger carries or holds an object while
seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).
● Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat.
● Objects are lodged between the front passenger seat
and center console.
● Accessories that may change the seated weight on
the front passenger seat are attached to the front
passenger seat.
● Anything that may decrease or increase the front
passenger’s seated weight.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most
probable classification. If an occupant in the front
passenger seat is seated improperly, the occupant may
provide an output signal to the OCS that is different
from the occupant’s properly seated weight input, for
example:
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
254 SAFETY
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
WARNING!
● If a child restraint system, child, small teenager
or adult in the front passenger seat is seat
ed
improperly, the occupant may provide an output
signal to the OCS that is different from the
(Continued)
WARNING!
occupant’s properly seated weight input. This may
result in serious injury or death in a collision.
● Always wear your seat belt and sit properly,
with the seatback in an upright position, your
back against the seatback, sitting upright, facing
forward, in the center of the seat, with your feet
comfortably on or near the floor.
● Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks,
boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger
seat. Holding an object may provide an output
signal to the OCS that is different than the
occupant’s properly seated weight input, which
may result in serious injury or death in a collision.
● Placing an object on the floor under the front
passenger seat may prevent the OCS from working
properly, which may result in serious injury or
death in a collision. Do not place any objects on
the floor under the front passenger seat.
The Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument
panel will turn on whenever the OCS is
unable to classify the fr
ont passenger seat
status. A malfunction in the OCS may affect
the operation of the air bag system.
If the Air Bag Warning Light does not come
on, or stays on after you start the vehicle,
or it comes on as you drive, take the
vehicle to an authorized dealer for service
immediately.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS
components that may affect the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag inflation. In order for the OCS to properly
classify the seated weight of a front seat passenger,
the OCS components must function as designed. Do
not make any modifications to the front passenger seat
components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If the seat,
trim cover, or cushion needs service for any reason,
take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only FCA US
LLC approved seat accessories may be used.
The following requirements must be strictly followed:
● Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
● Do not use prior or future model year seat covers
or cushions not designated by FCA US LLC for
the specific model being repaired. Always use the
correct seat cover and cushion specified for the
vehicle.
● Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an
aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
● Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
● At no time should any Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) component or SRS related component
or fastener be modified or replaced with any part
except those which are approved by FCA US LLC.
WARNING!
● U
napproved modifications or service procedures
to the passenger seat assembly, its relat
ed
components, seat cover or cushion may
inadvertently change the air bag deployment in
case of a frontal collision. This could result in
death or serious injury to the front passenger
(Continued)
SAFETY 255
6
WARNING!
if the vehicle is involved in a collision. A
modified vehicle may not comply with required
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS)
and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(CMVSS).
● If it is necessary to modify the air bag system
for persons with disabilities, contact an authorized
dealer.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help pr
otect the knees of
the driver and front passenger, and position the front
occupants for improved interaction with the front air
bags.
WARNING!
● Do no
t drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in an
y way.
● Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Supplemental Driver And Front
Passenger Knee Air Bags
This vehicle is eq
uipped with a Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below
the steering column and a Supplemental Passenger
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below
the glove compartment. The Supplemental Knee Air
Bags provide enhanced protection during a frontal
impact by working together with the seat belts,
pretensioners, and fr
ont air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-
Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are
located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
SABs are marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a
label or on the seat trim on the outboard side of the
seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body
structure.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bag Label
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the
outboard side of the seatback’s trim cov
er. The inflating
SAB deploys through the seat seam into the space
between the occupant and the door. The SAB moves
at a v
ery high speed and with such a high for
ce that it
could injure occupants if they are not seated properly,
or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB
inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of injury
from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
are located above the side windows. The trim covering
the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) Label Location
256 SAFETY
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other
injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants in
certain side impacts, in addition to the injury reduction
potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side
windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge
of the headliner out of the way and covers the
window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to injure
occupants if they are not belted and seated properly,
or if items are positioned in the area where the SABICs
inflate. Children are at an even greater risk of injury
from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side
windows in certain side impact events.
WARNING!
● Do no
t mount equipment, or stack luggage
or other cargo up high enough to block the
deployment of the SABICs. The trim co
vering
above the side windows where the SABIC and its
deployment path are located should remain free
from any obstructions.
● In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not
install any accessory items in your vehicle which
could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws)
for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into
the roof of the vehicle for any reason.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain
side impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
determines whether the deployment of the Side Air
Bags in a particular impact event is appropriate, based
on the severity and type of collision. The side impact
sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate
response to impact events. The system is calibrated
to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of
the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag
occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags
deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the left
Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact deploys the
right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by itself is not
a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should
have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some
side collisions that do not impact the area of the
passenger compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy
during angled or offset frontal collisions where the front
air bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than
it takes to blink your eyes.
WARNING!
● Occupants, including children, who are up against
or v
ery close to Side Air Bags can be seriously
injured or killed. Occupants, including children,
should never lean on or sleep against the door,
side windows, or area where the side air bags
(Continued)
WARNING!
inflate, even if they are in an infant or child
restraint.
● Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
They also help keep you in position, away from an
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection
from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear
their seat belts properly and sit upright with their
backs against the seats. Children must be properly
restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that
is appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
● Side Air Bags need r
oom to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or windo
w. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
● Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely injured
or killed.
● Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead
to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side
Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have Side Air Bags.
SAFETY 257
6
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
● Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
● Air Bag Warning Light
● Steering Wheel and Column
● Instrument Panel
● Knee Impact Bolsters
● Driv
er and Front Passenger Air Bags
● Seat Belt Buckle Switch
● Supplemental Side Air Bags
● Supplemental Knee Air Bags
● Front and Side Impact Sensor
s
● Seat Belt Pretensioners
● Seat Track Position Sensors
● Occupant Classification System
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately
after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags,
any or all of the following may occur:
● The air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occupants
as the air bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions
are similar to friction rope burns or those you might
get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They
are not caused by contact with chemicals. They are
not permanent and normally heal quickly. However,
if you haven’t healed significantly within a few
days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
● As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-
like particles. The particles are a normal by-product
of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used
f
or air bag inflation. These airborne particles may
irritate the skin, e
yes, nose, or throat. If you have
skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water.
For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If
the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these
particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment
manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the
air bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint
Controller System serviced as well.
NOTE:
● Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
● After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication
network remains intact, and the power remains intact,
depending on the nature of the event, the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) will determine whether to
have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform
the following functions:
258 SAFETY
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are designed
to activate in certain rollover events.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether deployment in a particular rollover event
is appropriate, based on the severity and type of
collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good
indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags and seat belt
pretensioners should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will not
deploy in all rollover events. The rollover sensing system
determines if a rollover event may be in progress and
whether deployment is appropriate. In the event the
vehicle experiences a rollover or near rollover event,
and deployment is appropriate, the rollover sensing
system will deploy the side air bags and seat belt
pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side
windows in certain rollover or side impact events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the
internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with electrical Air Bag System Components list
provided:
Rollover Events
● Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped)
● Cut off battery po
wer to the electric motor (if
equipped)
● Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power
● Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long
as the battery has power or for 15 minutes from
the intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response
System
● Unlock the power door locks
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any of
these other functions in response to the Enhanced
Accident Response System:
● Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC
Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
● Cut off battery power to the:
○ Engine
○ Electric Motor (if equipped)
○ Electric power steering
○ Brake booster
○ Electric park brake
○ Automatic transmission gear selector
○ Horn
○ Front wiper
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to place the ignition
to the STOP (OFF) position to avoid draining the
battery. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in
the engine compartment and on the ground near the
engine com
partment and fuel tank before resetting
the syst
em and starting the engine. If there are no
fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle electrical devices
(e.g. headlights) after an accident, reset the system by
following the procedure described here. If you have any
doubt, contact an authorized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System
Reset Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response
System functions after an event, the ignition switch
must be changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to
ignition OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks
in the engine compartment and on the ground near the
engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the
system and starting the engine.
After an accident, if the vehicle will not start after
performing the reset procedure, the vehicle must be
towed to an authorized dealer to be inspected and to
have the Enhanced Accident Response System reset.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
● Modif
ications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. Y
ou could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper passenger side of the instrument panel. Do
(Continued)
WARNING!
not modify the front fascia/bumper, vehicle body
structure, or add aftermarket side steps or running
boards.
● It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone
who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag
system.
● Do not attempt to modify any part of your air
bag system. The air bag may inflate accidentally
or may not function properly if modifications are
made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
for any air bag system service. If your seat,
including your trim cover and cushion, needs to
be serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts),
take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only
manufacturer approved seat accessories may be
used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities, contact an
authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recor
der
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an
air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that
will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data related
to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR
in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
● How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
SAFETY 259
6
● Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
● Ho
w far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
● How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-
trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded
by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no
personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash
location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as
law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment
is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR
is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer,
other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
CHILD RES
TRAINTS
Everyone in y
our vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires
that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This
is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According
to crash statistics, children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured or killed. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can
install it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
● For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call:
1–888–327–4236
● Canadian residents should refer
to Transport Canada’s website for
additional information: https://tc.canada.ca/en/
road-transportation/child-car-seat-safety
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or younger and who have
no
t reached the height or weight limits of their child
restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint,
facing rearward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children Children who are at least two years old or who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their rear-facing
child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness,
facing forward in a rear seat of the vehicle
260 SAFETY
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Larger Children Children who have outgrown their forward-facing child
restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s
seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt,
seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints Children 12 years old or younger, who have outgrown the
height or weight limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear
-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until
they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-
facing child restraint. Two types of child restraints can
be used rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child
seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children from birth until they
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing
or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant
carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
child seat.
WARNING!
● Ne
ver place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury t
o a child 12 years
or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
● Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who hav
e outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing
direction are for children who are over two years old
or who have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height
limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children
should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a
harness for as long as possible, up to the highest
weight or height allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-f
acing limit for the child seat should use a belt-
positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit
properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is
against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning
booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster
seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
● Im
proper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in
a collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manuf
acturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or child
restraint.
● After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle,
do not move the vehicle seat forward or
rearward because it can loosen the child restraint
attachments. Remove the child restraint before
adjusting the vehicle seat position. When the
vehicle seat has been adjusted, reinstall the child
restraint.
(Continued)
SAFETY 261
6
WARNING!
● When y
our child restraint is not in use, secure
it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH
anchorages, or remo
ve it from the vehicle. Do
not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden
stop or accident, it could strike the occupants or
seatbacks and cause serious personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder
belt comfortably
, and whose legs are long enough to
bend over the front of the seat when their back is
against the seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear
seat. Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether the
child can use the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back
of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably o
ver the
front of the vehicle seat while the child is still
sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not the stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole
trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,”
then the child still needs to use a booster seat in
this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt,
check seat belt fit periodically and make sure the seat
belt buckle is latched. A child’s squirming or slouching
can move the belt out of position. If the shoulder belt
contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the
center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to position
the seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder
belt will not protect a child properly, which may result
in serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined Weight of the
Child + Child Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only LATCH – Lower Anchors +
Top Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top Tether An-
chor
Rear-Facing Child Restraint Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg) X X
Rear-Facing Child Restraint More than 65 lb (29.5 kg) X
Forward-Facing Child Re-
straint
Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg)
X X
Forward-Facing Child Re-
straint
More than 65 lb (29.5 kg)
X
262 SAFETY
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint
anchorage system called LA
TCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-
equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets
the seatback and one top tether anchorage located
behind the seating position. These anchorages are
used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without
using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions
ma
y have a top t
ether anchorage but no lower
anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt
must be used with the top tether anchorage to install
the child restraint. Please see the following table for
more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
Seven Passenger (Captain’s Chairs
Second Row) LATCH P
ositions
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Eight Passenger (Second
Row Bench) LATCH P
ositions
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the
child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system t
o
attach the child restraint?
65 lb (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined
weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lb (29.5
kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined weight is more than
65 lb (29.5 kg).
SAFETY 263
6
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used
together to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraint?
No Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH an-
chorage system to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages
if allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your
booster seat owner’s manual for more information.
Can two child restraints be attached using a common
lower LATCH anchorage?
No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child
restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated
LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a
child seat in the center position next to a child seat
using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the
front passenger seat?
Yes The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger
seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows con-
tact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that
are f
ound at the rear of the seat cushion
where it meets the seatback, below the
anchorage symbols on the seatback. They
are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to
install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if
you run your finger along the gap between the seatback
and seat cushion.
Second Row LATCH Positions (Seven Passenger) Second Row LATCH Positions (Eight Passenger)
264 SAFETY
Third Row LATCH Position
(Seven And Eight Passenger)
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind
each rear seating position located on the
back of the seat.
Seven And Eight Passenger Vehicles:
Second Row Upper Tether Anchorage Locations
Seven Passenger Top
Tether Anchorages (Captain's Chairs)
Eight Passenger Top Tether
Strap Mounting (Second Row Bench)
Seven And Eight Passenger Vehicles: Third Row Upper
Tether Anchorage Locations
Tether Anchorages (Third Row Bench)
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on
each side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach
to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the
connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child
restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will also
be equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap will
have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether
anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is
attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
Seven Passenger And Eight Passenger Third Row Seating:
WARNING!
● Do not install a child restraint in the center
position using the LATCH system. This position is
not approved for installing child seats using the
(Continued)
SAFETY 265
6
WARNING!
LATCH attachments. You must use the seat belt
and tether anchor to install a child seat in the
center seating position.
● Never use the same lower anchorage to attach
more than one child restraint. See
ð
page 266
for typical installation instructions.
Eight Passenger Second Row Seating:
If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks
the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard
position, do not use that outboard position. If a child
seat in the center position blocks the outboard LATCH
anchors or seat belt, do not install a child seat in that
outboard position.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach
more than one child restraint. For typical installation
instructions, see
ð
page 266.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not
all child restraint systems will be installed as described
here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the
seat belt, following the instructions provided. See
ð
page 267 to check what type of seat belt each seating
position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on
the tether strap of the child seat so that you can
more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the
vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages
for that seating position. For the second row seats,
and third row left outboard seat, move the seat
back rearward to the fourth locking position from
full upright to attach the seat to the lower LATCH
anchorages.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected
seating position. Adjust the seat back forward to
the most vertical locking position. If the rear seat
can be moved forward and rearward, you may wish
to move it to its rear-most position to make room
for the child seat. You may also move the front
seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it
to the top tether anchorage. See
ð
page 268 for
directions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the seat.
Remove slack in the straps according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4
mm) in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system t
o install a
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not
being used by other occupants or being used to secure
child restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if
they play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt
retractor. Before installing a child restraint using the
LATCH system, buckle the seat belt behind the child
restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the buckled
seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation,
instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route
the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and
then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all
children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys
and that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
● Im
proper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to f
ailure of the
restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or child
restraint.
● Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-
fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses,
or for attaching other items or equipment to the
vehicle.
266 SAFETY
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats b
y lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
● Im
proper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint.
The child could be badly injured or killed.
● Follo
w the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or child
restraint.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking
Re
tractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion
of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it
is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor
can be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of
the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the
webbing retract back into the retract
or. If it is locked,
the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is
pulled back into the retractor
ð
page 268.
Please see the table provided and the following
sections for more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Seven Passenger (Captain’s Chairs Second
Row) Automatic Locking R
etractor (ALR) Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Eight Passenger (Second Row Bench)
Automatic Locking Retract
or (ALR) Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the
child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat
belt to attach a f
orward-facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to
install a forward-facing child restraint, up to the recom-
mended weight limit of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the
front passenger seat?
Yes Contact between the front passenger seat and the child
restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer
also allows contact.
SAFETY 267
6
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt
against the belt path of the child restraint?
No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with
an ALR retractor.
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking Re
tractor
(ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
● Im
proper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint.
The child could be badly injured or killed.
● F
ollow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or child
restraint.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. If the second row seat can be reclined,
you ma
y recline the seat and/or raise the head
restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear
seat can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most
position to make room for the child seat. You may
also move the front seat forward to allow more
room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it thr
ough the belt path of the
child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the
belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear
a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder
part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat
belt webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the
webbing to retract back into the retractor. As the
webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic
Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it
is locked, you should not be able to pull out any
webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step
5.
7. Finally, pull up on an
y excess webbing to tighten
the lap portion around the child restraint while you
push the child restraint rearward and downward
into the vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and
the seating position has a top tether anchorage,
connect the tether strap to the anchorage and
tighten the tether strap. See
ð
page 268 for
directions to attach a te
ther anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4
mm) in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car
seat to any location in front of the car seat, including
the seat frame or a t
ether anchorage. Only attach
the tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the
tether anchorage that is approved for that seating
position, located behind the top of the vehicle seat.
See
ð
page 263 for the location of approved tether
anchorages in your vehicle.
(Continued)
268 SAFETY
WARNING!
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan
to install the child restraint to find the tether
anchorage. If the seat can be moved, you may
need to move the seat forward to provide better
access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
tether anchorage for that seating position, move
the child restraint to another position in the vehicle
if one is available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct
path for the strap between the anchor and
the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped with
adjustable rear head restraints, raise the head
restraint, and where possible, route the tether
strap under the head restraint and between the
two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint
and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint
to the top tether anchorage as shown in the
diagram.
Second Row Bench Seat Top Tether
Strap Mounting (Eight Passenger Seating)
4. Remov
e slack in the tether strap according to the
child restraint manufacturer's instructions.
Second Row Captain’s Chair Top Tether
Strap Mounting (Seven Passenger Seating)
Third Row Seating Top Tether Strap Mounting
WARNING!
● An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead
to increased head motion and possible injur
y to
the child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint
top tether strap.
● If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
SAFETY TIPS
TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA.
SAFETY 269
6
WARNING!
● Do no
t leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather
. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
● It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
● Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
● Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
TRANSPORTING PETS
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your
pe
t. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and
possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic
braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped)
in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by
seat belts.
CONNECTED VEHICLES
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications
cannot be ensured. Third parties may unlawfully
intercept information and private communications
without your consent. For further information, refer to
“Data Collection & Privacy” in your Uconnect Radio
Instruction Manual or “Onboard Diagnostic System
(OBD II) Cybersecurity”
ð
page 113.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be impaired
or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury or death.
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE INSIDE
T
HE VEHICLE
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the system.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you
have questions regarding the seat belt or retractor
conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA
dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision Care
Program facility for inspection.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when
the ignition switch is first placed in the
ON/RUN position. If the light is either not
on during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving,
have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. After the bulb check, this light will
illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the
Air Bag System has been detected. It will stay on until
the fault is removed. If the light comes on intermittently
or remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer
service the vehicle immediately
ð
page 243.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and
place the blower control on high speed. You should
be able to feel the air directed against the windshield.
See an authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
Only use a floor mat that does not interfere with the
operation of the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals.
Only use a floor mat that is securely attached using the
floor mat fasteners so it cannot slip out of position and
interfere with the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or
impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause
y
our floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control.
To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
● ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT
install your floor mat upside down or
turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull
to confirm mat is secured using the floor mat
fasteners on a regular basis.
(Continued)
270 SAFETY
WARNING!
● AL
WAYS REMO
VE THE EXISTING FLOOR
MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before
installing any other floor mat. NEVER
install or stack an additional floor mat
on top of an existing floor mat.
● ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor
mat needs to be replaced, only use a FCA
approved floor mat for the specific make, model,
and year of your vehicle.
● ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
side floor area. To check for interference, with
the vehicle properly parked with the engine off,
fully depress the accelerator, the brake, and the
clutch pedal (if present) to check for interference.
If your floor mat interferes with the operation of
any pedal, or is not secure to the floor, remove the
floor mat from the vehicle and place the floor mat
in your trunk.
● ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
● ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide
into the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle
is moving. Objects can become trapped under
accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and could
cause a loss of vehicle control.
● NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change
the position of the floor mat and may cause
(Continued)
WARNING!
interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals.
● If the vehicle carpet has been removed and re-
installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor
and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to
the vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to
check for interference with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.
● It is recommended to only use mild soap and
water to clean your floor mats. After cleaning,
always check your floor mat has been properly
installed and is secured to your vehicle using the
floor mat fasteners by lightly pulling mat.
PERIODIC SAFET
Y
C
HECKS
YOU
SHOULD
MAKE OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven
wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other
objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the
tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts,
cracks, and bulges. Check the lug nut/bolt torque for
tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper
cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights
and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check
turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the
instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle aft
er overnight parking for
fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel or brake fluid leaks are
suspected, the cause should be located and corrected
immediately.
EXHAUST GAS
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
● Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
● If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
● If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with
the engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set
the blower at high speed.
SAFETY 271
6
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions provided to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
● Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such
as a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with
the engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
● Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected
every time the vehicle is raised. Have any
abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until
repaired, drive with all side windows fully open.
CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS
272 SAFETY
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine
exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the
exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected
inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of
the vehicle is damaged, have an authorized dealer
inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent
body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections
could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger
compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system
each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace as required.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers button is located in the
center console just below the climate control screen.
Hazard Warning Flashers Button
Push the button to turn on the Hazard W
arning
Flashers. When the button is activated, all directional
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Push the button a second time
to turn off the Hazard Warning Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it only when
your vehicle is disabled or signaling a safety hazard
warning for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance,
the Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate
even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With e
xtended use, the Hazard W
arning Flashers may
discharge the battery.
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM— IF EQUIPPED
Assist And SOS Buttons
1 — ASSIST Button
2 — SOS Button
If equipped, the overhead console contains an ASSIST
and SOS button.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
r
oad. ALWA
YS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
(Continued)
WARNING!
assume all risks related to the use of the features
and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features
and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure
to do so may result in an accident involving serious
injury or death.
NOTE:
● Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber
ð
page 360.
● The ASSIST and SOS buttons will only function if you
are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network, which comes as a built-in function.
Other Uconnect services will only be operable if
your Brand Connect service is active and you are
connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST button is used to automatically connect you
to any one of the following support centers:
● Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need
a tow, just push the ASSIST button and you will
be connected to a representative for assistance.
Roadside Assistance will know what vehicle you’re
driving and its location. Additional fees may apply for
roadside assistance.
● Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
vehicle issues.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 273
7
● Uconnect Customer Care – Total suppor
t for Radio,
Connected Services, Phone and NAV issues.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the overhead console.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the SOS Call
system initiates a call to an SOS operator, during
which the LED will blink green. To cancel the SOS
Call connection, push the SOS Call button on the
overhead console or press the cancellation button
on the Device Screen. Termination of the SOS Call
will turn off the green LED light on the overhead
console.
2. The LED light located within the ASSIST and SOS
buttons on the overhead console will turn green
once a connection to an SOS operator has been
made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and an
SOS operator is made, the SOS Call system
may transmit the following important vehicle
information to an SOS operator:
● Indication that the occupant placed an SOS Call
● The vehicle brand
● The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if
additional assistance is needed.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
features and applications in this vehicle. Only
use the features and applications when it is
safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
NOTE:
● Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
● Once a connection is made between the
vehicle’s SOS Call system and the SOS operator,
the SOS operator may be able to open a
voice connection with the vehicle to determine
if additional assistance is needed. Once the
SOS operator opens a voice connection with
the vehicle’s SOS Call system, the operator
should be able to speak with you or other
vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring
in the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call system
will attempt to remain connected with the SOS
operator until the SOS operator terminates the
connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact
appropriate emergency responders and provide
them with important vehicle information and GPS
coordinates.
WARNING!
● If an
yone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g.,
fire or smoke is visible, danger
ous road conditions
or location), do not wait for voice contact from an
Emergency Services Agent. All occupants should
exit the vehicle immediately and move to a safe
location.
● Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
operable network and GPS antennas. You
could prevent operable network and GPS signal
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from
placing an emergency call. An operable network
and GPS signal reception is required for the SOS
Call system to function properly.
● The SOS Call system is embedded into the
vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket
electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical
system. This may prevent your vehicle from
sending a signal to initiate an emergency call.
To avoid interference that can cause the SOS
Call system to fail, never add aftermarket
equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio,
data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical
system or modify the antennas on your vehicle.
IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR
ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN
ACCIDENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND
SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.
● Modifications to any part of the SOS Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you
need it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to help protect you.
274 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call system
capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico may
not answer or respond to SOS system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of
the following may occur at the time the malfunction is
detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
● The overhead console lights located within the
ASSIST and SOS buttons will continuously illuminate
red.
● The Device Screen will display the following message
“Vehicle Device Requires Service. Please Contact An
Authorized Dealer.”
● An in-vehicle audio message will state “Vehicle
Device Requires Service. Please Contact An
Authorized Dealer.”
WARNING!
● Ignoring the overhead console light could mean
y
ou will not have SOS Call services. If the overhead
console light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the SOS Call system immediately.
● The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on
the Air Bag Warning Light on the instrument
panel if a malfunction in any part of the system
is detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is
illuminated, have an authorized dealer service the
Occupant Restraint Control system immediately.
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s contr
ol may prevent or stop the
SOS Call system operation. These include, but are not
limited to, the follo
wing factors:
● The ignition is in the OFF position
● The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact
● The SOS Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash
● The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
disconnected during a vehicle crash
● LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or
Global Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable
or obstructed
● Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator facility
● Operator error by the SOS operator
● LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network congestion
● Weather
● Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. ALWA
YS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the features
and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features
and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure
to do so may result in an accident involving serious
injury or death.
NOTE:
● Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
● Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. Y
ou
could prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS
signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle from
placing an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) network connection and a GPS
signal is required for the SOS Call system to function
properly.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user's
authority to operate the equipment.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Automatic SOS — If Equipped
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safe
ty service that
can immediately connect you with help in the event
that your vehicle’s airbags deploy. Please refer to your
provided radio supplement for complete information.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
● Do no
t attempt to change a tire on the side of the
v
ehicle close t
o mo
ving traffic. Pull far enough off
(Continued)
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 275
7
WARNING!
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
● Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
● Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
● The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used
to lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with an air suspension
syst
em, there is a feature which allows the automatic
leveling to be disabled before changing a tire. This
feature can be activated through the Uconnect system
ð
page 205.
PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING
Before changing a tire or using the jack please disable
the hands free lift gate, This feature can be disabled
through the Uconnect system
ð
page 186.
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or
slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side
of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK (P).
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
6. Block both front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For example,
if changing the driver’s front tire, block the
passenger’s rear wheel.
Wheel Blocked Example
NO
TE:
P
assenger
s should no
t remain in the vehicle when the
vehicle is being raised or lifted.
JA
CK AND TOOLS LOCATION
The scissor-type jack and tire changing tools are
located in the rear cargo area, under the load floor.
1. Lift up on the load floor handle to access the jack
and tool storage.
Load Floor Handle
2. Remov
e the jack storage cover to access the jack
and tools.
Jack And Tools Access Cover
276 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Pull up to remove jack and tools from storage.
Removing Jack And Tools
NOTE:
Depending on vehicle trim lev
el, tools shown may vary.
Jack And Tools Storage
Jacking Tools Description
1 — Tow Hook (If Equipped)
2 — Wheel Lug Wrench
3 — Jack Handle Extension
4 — Fuel Funnel
5 — Jack Handle
6 — Scissor Jack
SPARE TIRE STOWAGE
The spare tire is stow
ed under the rear of the vehicle by
means of a cable winch mechanism. To remove or stow
the spare, use the jack handle/lug wrench connected
to the square socket extension to rotate the “spare tire
drive” nut. The nut is located under a rubber plug at
the center-rear of the cargo floor area, just inside the
liftgate opening.
Spare Tire Location
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
jack wrench e
xtension tool only
. Use of air wrench or
power tool may damage the winch.
SPARE TIRE REMOVAL
Remov
e the spare tire before attempting to jack up the
vehicle. The spare tire is stowed underneath the rear
cargo area on the outside of the vehicle.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 277
7
1. Assemble the jacking tools.
Jacking Tool Assembly
1 — Wheel Lug Wrench
2 — Jack Handle Extension
3 — Jack Handle
2. Locate and remove plug from the storage
compartment floor to e
xpose the winch access
hole.
Winch Nut Plug
3. Fit the jack handle extension o
ver the drive
nut. Use the wheel lug wrench and extension to
completely lower the spare tire. Keep turning the
handle counterclockwise until the winch stops.
Winch Drive Nut Location
Wrench Rotation
4. Slide the tire out from under the vehicle and r
otate
it vertically behind the rear fascia/bumper.
5. Pull the metal retainer toward you to release it.
6. Slide the retainer up the steel extension tube
and winch cable. Rotate the retainer and push it
through the hole in the wheel.
Releasing Winch Retainer
JACKING INS
TRUCTIONS
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
pre
vent personal injur
y or damage to your vehicle:
● Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
● Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
● Apply the parking brake firmly and set the
transmission in PARK.
● Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
● Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
● Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
(Continued)
278 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING!
● Do no
t get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to ge
t under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
● Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
● If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
● To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
back of the wheel facing the ground.
Jack Warning Label
1. Loosen (but do not remo
ve) the wheel lug
nuts, using the lug wrench by turning them
counterclockwise, one turn, while the wheel is still
on the ground.
Loosen Lug Nuts
2. Assemble the jack and tools
ð
page 2
77.
Jack And Tool Assembled
NOTE:
Placement for the front and rear jacking locations
are critical. Keep the jack and tools aligned while
raising the vehicle to prevent tool damage. See the
following images for proper jacking locations.
Jacking Locations
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking
on locations o
ther than those indicated in the
Jacking Instructions for this v
ehicle.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 279
7
3. When changing a front tire, place the scissor jack
under the front chassis lifting point, as indicated
by the triangular lift point symbol shown in the
following image. Do not raise the vehicle until you
are sure the jack is fully engaged.
Front Lifting Point
Front Jacking Location
4. When changing a rear tire, place the scissor jack
under the rear chassis lifting point, as indicated
by the triangular lift point symbol shown in the
following image.
Do not raise the vehicle until you
are sure the jack is fully engaged.
Rear Lifting Point
Rear Jacking Location
5. Raise the vehicle by using the wheel lug wrench
and jack handle to turn the jack screw clockwise.
Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears
the surface and enough clearance is obtained to
install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides
maximum stability.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the
jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle
only enough to remove the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
280 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
7. Position the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle and
install the lug nuts with the cone-shaped end
toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve
stem facing outward. The vehicle could be
damaged if the inflatable spare tire is mounted
incorrectly.
Mounting Spare Tire
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack
, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the
vehicle has been lo
wered. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury.
8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw
counterclockwise, and remove the jack and wheel
blocks.
9. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
each nut has been tightened twice. For correct
lug nut torque
ð
page 350. If in doubt about
the correct tightness, have them checked with a
torque wrench by an authorized dealer or at a
service station.
Tighten Lug Nuts
10. Position the wheel behind the rear fascia/bumper
with the valve stem facing inward. Push the end of
the winch’s cable, spring and steel sleeve through
the front side of the road wheel. Making sure the
back of the wheel is facing the ground when the
wheel is stowed.
Reinstalling Winch Retainer
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 281
7
11. Slide the road wheel on the ground until it is
directly under the winch and between the rear
fascia/bumper and exhaust system heat shields.
Raise the tire by turning the lug wrench on the
winch extension clockwise until it clicks/ratchets
three times to make sure the cable is tight.
Storing Of Road Wheel
NOTE:
Double check to ensure the tire is snug against
the underbody of the vehicle. Damage t
o the winch
cable may result if the vehicle is driven with the
tire loose.
Road Wheel Stowage
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision
or har
d stop could endanger the occupants of
the vehicle. Alw
ays stow the jack parts and
the spare tire in the places provided. Have
the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced
immediately.
12. Lower the jack to the fully closed position.
13. Re
turn the Jack and tools back into the jack
storage bin. Reinstall the jack storage cover by
firmly pushing down until the clips lock into
position.
14. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut torque
with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are
properly seated against the wheel.
15. Have the road wheel and tire repaired as soon as
possible and properly secure the spare tire, jack
and tool kit.
NOTE:
Do not drive with the spare tire installed for more than
50 miles (80 km) at a max speed of 50 m
ph (80 km/h).
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery
in another vehicle, or by using a portable battery
booster pack. Jump starting can be dangerous if done
improperly, so please follow the procedures in this
section carefully.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack, follow the
manufacturer's operating instructions and precautions.
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of
the engine compartment, behind the left headlight
assembly.
282 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Positive (+) Jump Starting Post
NOTE:
The positive (+) batt
ery post may be covered with a
protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the
positive battery post. Do not jump off fuses. Only jump
directly off positive post which has a positive (+) symbol
on or around the post.
See the following steps to prepare for jump starting:
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic
transmission into PARK (P) and turn the ignition
OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery,
park the vehicle within the jumper cables’ reach,
apply the parking brake and make sure the ignition
is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as
this could establish a ground connection and
personal injury could result.
NOTE:
Be sure that the disconnected cable ends do not touch
each other, or either vehicle, until properly connected
for jump starting.
WARNING!
● T
ake care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can star
t anytime
the ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
● Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could make
an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be
seriously injured.
● Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could
result in per
sonal injury or proper
ty damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
NOTE:
Make sure at all times that unused ends of jumper
cables are not contacting each other or either vehicle
while making connections.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to
the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the booster
battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to
the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 283
7
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable to a good engine ground. A “ground”
is an exposed metallic/unpainted part of the
engine, frame or chassis, such as an accessory
bracket or large bolt. The ground must be away
from the battery and the fuel injection system.
Jump Starting Label
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative
(-) post of the discharged batt
ery. The resulting
electrical spar
k could cause the battery to
explode and could result in personal injury.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, le
t the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
CAUTION!
Do not run the booster vehicle engine above
2,000 RPM since it provides no charging benefit,
w
astes fuel, and can damage booster vehicle
engine.
6. Once the engine is started, see the following
disconnecting procedure.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper
cable from the engine ground of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the
booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster
battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the
discharged vehicle.
5. Reinstall the protective cover over the positive (+)
post of the discharged vehicle.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle
have the battery and charging system tested at an
authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
dra
w power from the vehicle’s battery, even when
not in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation, the
vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY
The vehicle is equipped with a refueling funnel for a
capless fuel system, which is located with the jack
and tools
ð
page 276. If emergency refueling is
necessary, use an approved gas can and insert the
refueling funnel into the filler pipe opening.
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel door
from opening. If this occurs, lightly push around the
perimeter of the fuel door to break the ice buildup and
re-release the fuel door by pushing on the rear outer
edge near the center to unlatch. Do not pry on the door.
284 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Refueling Funnel Location
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off”
the fuel tank af
ter filling.
Emergency Gas Can Refueling
Most gas cans will not open the flapper doors. A funnel
is pro
vided to allow emergency refueling with a gas can.
See the following steps for refueling:
1. Retrieve funnel from the rear cargo storage area.
2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as the
fuel nozzle.
Inserting Funnel
3. Ensure funnel is inserted fully t
o hold flapper
doors open.
4. Pour fuel into funnel opening.
5. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior to
putting back in the spare tire storage area.
WARNING!
● Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
● Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the Malfunction
Indicator Light to turn on.
● A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could
be burned. Always place fuel containers on the
ground while filling.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be serviced
by an authorized dealer.
Potential signs of vehicle overheating can be:
● Temperature gauge is at HOT (H)
● Strong smell of coolant
● White smoke coming from engine or exhaust
● Coolant bottle coolant has bubbles present
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or st
eam from your radiat
or. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
If the temperature gauge is moving towards or close to
the HOT (H) position, you can reduce the pot
ential for
overheating by taking the appropriate action.
● On highways — slow down.
● In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
in NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase the engine
idle speed while preventing vehicle motion with the
brakes.
● Turn off the Air Conditioner (A/C). The A/C system
adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning
the A/C off can help remove this heat.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 285
7
● Turn the temperature control to maximum heat, and
the blower contr
ol to high. This allows the heater
core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids
in removing heat from the engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT (H), as
soon as it’s safe, pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle
the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the
pointer remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous
chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
WARNING!
You should be seated in the driver’s seat with your
foot firmly placed on the brak
e pedal to maintain
control of the vehicle before activating the Manual
Park Release. If possible, you should apply the
parking brake. Activating the Manual Park Release
will allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured
or properly connected to a tow vehicle. Activating the
Manual Park Release on an unsecured vehicle could
lead to serious injury or death for those in or around
the vehicle.
To move the vehicle in cases where the transmission
will not shift out of PARK (P) (such as a deple
ted
battery), a Manual Park Release is available.
Follow These Steps To Activate The Manual Park
Release:
1. Apply f
irm pressure to the brake pedal while
seated in the driver’s seat.
2. Apply the Electric Park Brake (EPB), if possible.
Manual Park Release Location
3. Using a flathead screwdriver or similar t
ool,
remove the Manual Park Release access cover,
which is to the lower left of the steering column,
below the EPB switch.
Access Cover
4. To unlock handle, insert a flathead screwdriver or
similar tool into the lock release, rotate a quarter
turn counterclockwise and hold simultaneously
pulling on the tether strap.
Lock Release
5. Pull the tether strap out as f
ar as it will go, then
release it. The transmission should now be in
NEUTRAL (N), allowing the vehicle to be moved.
Tether Strap
6. Release the EPB only when the vehicle is securely
connect
ed to a tow vehicle.
286 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal while
seated in the driver’s seat.
2. Pull the tether strap out again, then release it.
3. Allow the tether to retract with the lever back to its
original position.
4. Verify that the transmission is in PARK (P).
5. Confirm that the tether has retracted fully and
reinstall the access cover. If the access cover
cannot be reinstalled, repeat steps 1 through 4.
Tether Reinstalled
NOTE:
When the lever is lock
ed in the released position,
the tether will remain outside of the trim panel and
the access cover cannot be reinstalled.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around
the fr
ont wheels. Push and hold the lock button on
the gear selector
. Then, shift back and forth between
DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) while gently pressing the
accelerator.
NOTE:
Shifts between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL (N)
for more than two seconds, you must press the brake
pedal to engage DRIVE (D) or REVERSE (R).
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure
that will maintain the rocking motion without spinning
the wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE:
Push the ESC OFF button to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in “Partial OFF” mode,
before rocking the vehicle
ð
page 228. Once the
vehicle has been freed, push the ESC OFF button again
to restore “ESC On” mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause
damage, or even failure, of the axle and tires. A
tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin
your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone
near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
● Racing the engine or spinning the wheels ma
y
lead to transmission ov
erheating and failure.
Allow the engine to idle with the transmission
in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every
five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize
overheating and reduce the risk of transmission
failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck
vehicle.
● When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or
drivetrain damage may result.
● Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the
wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no
transmission shifting occurring).
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for to
wing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service.
If the transmission and drivetrain are operable,
disabled 4x4 vehicles may also be towed as described
on
ð
page 179.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 287
7
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground Rear-Wheel Drive Models Four-Wheel Drive Models
With Single-Speed Transfer
Case
Four-Wheel Drive Models With Two-Speed Transfer
Case
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Detailed Instructions
ð
page 179
● Transmission in PARK
● Transfer case in N (Neutral)
● Tow in forward direction
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD OK BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to
pre
v
ent damage t
o y
our v
ehicle. Use only tow bars and
other equipment designed for this purpose, following
equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety
chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing
device to main structural members of the vehicle, not to
fascia/bumpers or associated brackets. State and local
laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed.
NOTE:
Vehicle’s equipped with air suspension, must have
Tire Jack Mode
ð
page 205 enabled to prevent air
suspension movement during towing.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters,
etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the
ON/RUN mode.
If the vehicle's battery is discharged, instructions on
shifting the automatic transmission out of PARK (P) in
order to move the vehicle
ð
page 286.
CAUTION!
● Do no
t use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
● When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck,
always secure by tire/wheel straps. Do not attach
to front or rear suspension components, body or
frame. Damage to your vehicle will result from
improper towing.
REAR-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
FCA US LLC recommends towing your v
ehicle with all
four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the
transmission is operable, the vehicle may be tow
ed
(with rear wheels off the ground) under the following
conditions:
● The transmission must be in NEUTRAL (N). For
instructions on shifting the transmission to NEUTRAL
(N) when the engine is off
ð
page 286.
● The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48
km/h).
● The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles (48
km).
CAUTION!
● Towing faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther
than 30 miles (48 km) with rear wheels on the
(Continued)
288 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CAUTION!
ground can cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must
be towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than
30 miles (48 km), tow with the rear wheels OFF the
ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on
a flatbed, or with the front wheels raised and the rear
wheels on a towing dolly, or (when using a suitable
steering wheel stabilizer to hold the front wheels in the
straight position) with the rear wheels raised and the
front wheels ON the ground.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
FCA US LLC recommends towing with all wheels OFF
the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle
on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised and
the opposite end on a towing dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transfer
case is operable, vehicles with a two-speed transfer
case may be towed (in the forward direction, with
ALL wheels on the ground), IF the transfer case is in
NEUTRAL (N) and the transmission is in PARK
ð
page
179.
Vehicles equipped with a single-speed transfer case
have no NEUTRAL (N) position, and therefore must be
towed will all four wheels OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
● F
ront or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if
the remaining wheels are on the ground). Internal
damage to the transmission or transf
er case will
occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
towing.
● Towing this vehicle in violation of the approved
requirements can cause severe transmission
and/or transfer case damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
EMER
GENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED
Y
our vehicle ma
y be eq
uipped with front and rear
recovery tow hooks. The front tow hooks will be located
in the lower fascia/bumper. The rear tow hook is
removable and is located within the jack and tools
storage bin under the load floor of the rear cargo area
ð
page 276.
Emergency Front Tow Hooks
NOTE:
For off road recovery, it is recommended to use both of
the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage to
the vehicle.
WARNING!
● Do no
t use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle.
Chains may break, causing serious injury or death.
● Stand clear of v
ehicles when pulling with tow
hooks. Tow straps may become disengaged,
causing serious injury.
The removable rear tow hook is designed to be used
in the receiver hitch as a recovery option. F
or rear tow
hook usage, remove the locking pin, place the rear tow
hook into the receiver hitch in any direction and replace
the locking pin.
Removable Rear Tow Hook
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 289
7
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue
a vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks
for tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could
damage your vehicle.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
This feature is a communication network that takes
effect in the event of an impact. Detailed information
can be found on
ð
page 258.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record
data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s
systems performed under certain crash or near crash-
like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting
a road obstacle. Detailed information can be found on
ð
page 259.
290 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate. This means
that service is required for your vehicle. Operating
conditions such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow,
extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures, and
extended idling will influence when the “Oil Change
Required” message is displayed. Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles
(805 km).
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change or
for engine oil life reset procedure
ð
page 98.
NOTE:
3.0L & 5.7L Engines: Under no circumstances should
oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000
km), or 12 months, whichever comes first. The engine
controller also monitors the number of hours of engine
run time, and will illuminate the oil change indicator
after 350 hours (which is not likely to be exceeded
except for certain fleet customers with extended engine
idling periods).
6.4L Engines: Under no circumstances should oil
change intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km), or
6 months, whichever comes first. The engine controller
also monitors the number of hours of engine run time,
and will illuminate the oil change indicator after 350
hours (which is not likely to be exceeded except for
certain fleet customers with extended engine idling
periods).
● Check engine oil level
● Check windshield washer fluid level
● Check the tire inflation pressures and look for
unusual wear or damage
● Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder and fill as needed.
● Check function of all interior and exterior lights
MAINTENANCE PLAN
Refer t
o the Maintenance Plan for the required
maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System
● Change oil and f
ilter.
● Rotate the tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
● Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
● Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
● Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 291
8
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System
● Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
● Inspect e
xhaust system.
● Deploy power side st
eps and clean linkages with high pressure car wash wand to remove any foreign debris. Apply MOPAR Spray White Lithium Grease to the pivot points.
● Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions. R
eplace engine air cleaner filter, as necessary.
Mileage Or Time Passed (Whichever Comes First)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, and re-
place if necessary.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if
using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or
frequent trailer towing.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. X X X X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid. X X X X X
Additional Maintenance
292 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Mileage Or Time Passed (Whichever Comes First)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace the cabin air filter. To be replaced every 12,000 miles (19,000 km).
Replace spark plugs (3.0L Engine).
1
X X
Replace spark plugs (5.7L Engine).
1
X
Replace spark plugs (6.4L Engine).
1
X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10
y
ears or 150,000 miles (2
40,000 km) whichever
comes first.
X X
Replace accessory drive belt. X
Inspect accessory drive belt tensioner and pulley,
replace if necessary.
X
Change transfer case fluid. X
Replace PCV valve. X
1
The spark plug change interv
al is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 293
8
WARNING!
● Y
ou can be badly injured working on or around a
motor v
ehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform
(Continued)
WARNING!
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
● Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction
(Continued)
WARNING!
and affect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
294 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.0L ENGINE
1 — Intercooler Coolant Pressure Cap 5 — Battery
2 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 6 — Engine Air Cleaner, Filter
3 — Engine Oil Fill Cap 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 8 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 295
8
5.7L ENGINE
1 — Engine Air Cleaner, Filter 6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap
2 — Engine Oil Fill Cap 7 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 9 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
5 — Battery
296 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
6.4L ENGINE
1 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 5 — Battery
2 — Engine Oil Fill Cap 6 — Engine Air Cleaner, Filter
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 8 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
CHECKING OIL LEVEL — 3.0L ENGINES
The 3.0L engine does not have a traditional “dipstick”
and there is no need to manually check the oil level.
If it is desired to check engine oil level, it can be seen
on the instrument cluster display by navigating to the
appropriate screen under “Vehicle Information”. Use
the up or down arrow buttons within the steering
wheel controls to find the “Vehicle Information” menu.
Then use the right or left arrow buttons until you
reach the “Oil Level” submenu.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 297
8
There is a bar on the gauge which shows the oil level.
As long as the oil level is between the minimum and
the maximum it is safe to operate the vehicle. If the
oil level is either too high or too low, a red bar will be
illuminated.
When the engine is in need of more oil, the Oil Level
Warning Light will illuminate. This warning will appear
for five seconds. Within the next 300 miles (500 km)
you should add 1 quart of manufacturer specified
motor oil to the engine
ð
page 354.
Oil Level Critically Low
(Add 2 Quarts)
Oil Level Low (Add 1
Quart)
Oil Level Ok
Oil Level Critically High
This light will reappear every time the engine is started
until a safe level is det
ected. Continuing to operate the
vehicle without adding oil may result in a critically low
oil level and possible engine damage (see “Critically
Low” below).
NOTE:
Use care when filling under hood fluids such as engine
oil, washer fluid, antifreeze, etc. to minimize spillage
onto top of engine. Any excess fluid that is spilled
onto the top of the engine should be removed using
compressed air or an absorbent cloth.
Oil Level Displa
y - How To Refresh
In vehicles equipped with the 3.0L engine, the oil level
is automatically monitored when the vehicle is parked
on a level surface, the oil is warm and the engine has
been off four minutes. To refresh the oil level display
(after a quart of the correct oil has been added), follow
this process:
● Run the engine until the oil temperature is above
120°F (49°C).
● Park the vehicle on relatively level ground.
● Turn the engine off and cycle the ignition back to the
RUN position. Wait four minutes with the engine off,
and the ignition in the RUN position.
● Start the engine and the new oil level will
be available in the Vehicle Information menu
(accessible via the navigation buttons on the
steering wheel).
NOTE:
● If there has not been a notable change in the oil
level since the previous reading, there may not be
any notification or change in the display after the
system has taken another reading.
● The oil level system takes measurements only while
the engine is off, has warm oil, and the vehicle is
parked on reasonably level ground. In order to get
a consistent oil level reading the ignition must be
in the RUN position for four minutes, however the
system may occasionally take readings with the key
OFF during normal usage.
● If y
ou have added a quart of oil and the indicator is
not reading 3/4 or full, please contact an authorized
dealer for service.
WARNING!
Be aware the oil cap may be hot. Please use suitable
gloves. WARNING: risk of burns!
CAUTION!
Do not to add too much oil. Overfilling the oil may
damage the engine.
NOTE:
● After adding oil to the engine, alwa
ys reinstall the
oil cap securely by rotating clockwise until it stops.
Never run the engine without the oil fill cap as this
could cause an oil leak.
● Because the oil level is automatically detected only
when the engine has been off and restarted (after
four minutes), the system cannot immediately detect
a sudden drop in oil level while driving (for example,
if the oil pan starts to leak due to damage during an
off-road event).
CAUTION!
If the “Critically Low or Critically High” Oil Level
W
arning Light is illuminat
ed, the follo
wing st
eps
should be taken:
● Critically Low: add two quarts of manufacturer
specified oil as soon as possible
ð
page 354.
(Continued)
298 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CAUTION!
Continuing to operate the vehicle with “Critically
Low” oil level may damage the engine.
● Critically High: contact an authorized dealer for
service. Continuing to operate the vehicle with
“Critically High” oil level may damage the engine.
Do not use any oils that are not manufacturer
specified and API approved.
Used engine oil and oil filters contain substances
which are harmful to the environment. When oil and
filters are changed contact an authorized dealer and
dispose of in a safe and responsible manner.
CHECKING OIL LEVEL — 5.7L & 6.4L
ENGINES
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time
to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after
a fully warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
There are four possible dipstick types:
● Crosshatched zone.
● Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
● Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low end
of the range and MAX at the high end of the range.
● Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the MIN
and the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE:
Alw
ays maintain the oil lev
el within the crosshatch
markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 qt (1 L) of oil when the reading is at the low
end of the dipstick range will raise the oil level to the
high end of the range marking.
ADDING WASHER FLUID
The instrument cluster display will indicate when the
washer fluid level is low. When the sensor detects a
low fluid level, the Low Washer Fluid Warning Light will
turn on and the "Washer Fluid Low" message will be
displayed.
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer is shared. The fluid reservoir is
located in the engine compartment, be sure to check
the fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze).
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and
wipe clean the wiper blades, this will help blade
performance. To prevent freeze-up of your windshield
washer system in cold weather, select a solution or
mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range
of your climate. This rating information can be found on
most washer fluid containers.
NOTE:
Use care when filling under hood fluids such as engine
oil, washer fluid, antifreeze, etc. to minimize spillage
onto top of engine. Any excess fluid that is spilled
onto the top of the engine should be removed using
compressed air or an absorbent cloth.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around the
washer solution.
MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERY
Y
our vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free
battery. Water will never have to be added, and periodic
maintenance is not required.
WARNING!
● Batt
ery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind y
ou. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not
lean over a battery when attaching clamps. If
acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area
immediately with large amounts of water. Refer to
Jump Starting Procedure
ð
page 283.
● Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not
use a booster battery or any other booster source
with an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow
cable clamps to touch each other.
● Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 299
8
CAUTION!
● It is essential when replacing the cables on the
batt
ery that the positive cable is attached to the
positiv
e post and the negative cable is attached
to the negative post. Battery posts are marked
positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on
the battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on
the terminal posts and free of corrosion.
● If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery.
Do not use a “fast charger” to provide starting
voltage.
PRESSURE WASHING
Cleaning the engine com
par
tment with a high pressure
w
asher is no
t recommended.
CA
UTION!
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all parts
and connections however
, the pressures generated
by these machines is such that complete protection
against water ingress cannot be guaranteed.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service
personnel, special t
ools, and equipment to perform
all service operations in an expert manner. Service
Manuals are available which include detailed service
information for your vehicle. Refer to these Service
Manuals before attempting any pr
ocedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems
may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
ENGINE OIL
Engine Oil Selection
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluids
ð
page 354.
NOTE:
Hemi engines at times can tick right after startup and
then quiet down after approximately 30 seconds. This is
normal and will not harm the engine. This characteristic
can be caused by short drive cycles. For example, if
the vehicle is started then shut off after driving a short
distance. Upon restarting, you may experience a ticking
sound. Other causes could be if the vehicle is unused
for an extended period of time, incorrect oil, extended
oil changes or extended idling. If the engine continues
to tick or if the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) comes
on, see the nearest authorized dealer.
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Approved Engine Oil
These symbols mean that the oil has been certified
by the API. The manufacturer only recommends API
trademark oils.
The API Starburst trademark certifies
0W-20, 0W-30 and 5W-30 engine oils.
The API Donut trademark certifies 0W-40
and 5W-40 engine oil.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage y
our engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Synthetic Engine Oils
Your engine was designed for synthetic engine oils, only
use synthetic API approved engine oils.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the correct
API trademark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
numbers should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the
addition of any additives (other than leak detection
dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by
supplemental additives.
300 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil
and oil filt
ers from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to
the environment. Contact an authorized dealer, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
ENGINE OIL FILTER
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be used for
replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies
considerably. We recommend using a Mopar® Engine
Oil Filter. If Mopar® Engine Oil Filters are unavailable,
only use filters that meet or exceed SAE/USCAR-36
Filter Performance Requirements.
ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER
For the proper maintenance intervals
ð
page 291.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.)
can provide a measure of prot
ection in the case
of engine backfire. Do not remove the air induction
system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal
is necessary for repair or maintenance. Make sure
(Continued)
WARNING!
that no one is near the engine compartment before
starting the vehicle with the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can
result in serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality Mopar® filters
should be used.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. With suitable tool fully loosen fasteners on the
engine air cleaner filter cover.
2. Lift the engine air cleaner filter cover on the
outside edge and push inboard to detach hinge
to access the engine air cleaner filter.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
1 — Fasteners
2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from the
housing assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing if significant dirt or
debris is present before replacing the engine air
cleaner filter.
1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the
housing assembly with the engine air cleaner filter
inspection surface facing downward.
2. Install the engine air cleaner filter cover onto the
housing assembly locating tabs.
3. Tighten the fasteners on the engine air cleaner
filter assembly.
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the engine air cleaner filter
cover lid screws or damage may result.
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be check
ed and serviced by an authorized
dealer at the start of each warm season. This service
should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a
performance test. Drive belt tension should also be
checked at this time.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 301
8
WARNING!
● Use only refrigerants and com
pressor lubricants
approv
ed by the manufacturer for your
air conditioning system. Some unapproved
refrigerants are flammable and can explode,
injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or
lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring
costly repairs. Refer to Warranty Information Book,
for further warranty information.
● The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air
conditioning components. Such damage is no
t
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling — R–
1234yf
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
Hydrofluor
oolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the
Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-
friendly substance with a low global-warming potential.
The manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by an authorized dealer using
recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manuf
acturer approv
ed A/C system PAG
compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Cabin Air Filter Replacement
The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet
behind the glove compartment. Perform the following
procedure to replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all
contents.
2. With the glove compartment door open, remove
the glove compartment tension tether and tether
clip by sliding the clip toward the face of the
glove compartment door. Lift the clip out of glove
compartment door and release into dash panel.
Left Side Of Glove Compartment
1 — Tension Tether
2 — Glove Compartment Door
3. Pull the right hand side of the glove compartment
door towar
d the rear of the vehicle to disengage
the glove compartment door from its hinges.
NOTE:
When disengaging the glove compar
tment door
from its hinges, there will be some resistance.
4. There are glove compartment travel stops on both
sides of the glove compartment door, angle the
glove compartment in order to allow each side
travel stop to release the glove compartment from
the dash panel.
Glove Compartment
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stops
2 — Glove Compartment Door
302 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
5. Pull out on the access door release tab and then
pull down from the top to remove the cabin air
filter access door from the vehicle.
Cabin Air Filter Access Door
1 — Access Door Release Tab
2 — Cabin Air Filter Access Door
6. Push the outside retaining tabs towards the cabin
air filter cov
er to release the cover from the HVAC
housing.
Cabin Air Filter Cover
1 — Cabin Air Filter Cover
2 — Retaining Tabs
7. Remove the cabin air filter by pulling it straight out
of the housing.
Cabin Air Filter
1 — Cabin Air Filter
8. Install the cabin air filter with the arrow on the
filter pointing to
ward the floor. When installing
the filter cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully
engage into the HVAC housing.
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow
to indicate airflo
w direction through the filter.
Failure to properly install the filter will result in
the need to replace it more often.
9. Align the lower tabs on the access panel and then
push the top in to lock it securely back into the
dash panel.
1
0. Angle the door to get the glove compartment travel
stops back inside the dash panel.
11. Reinstall the glove compartment door on the door
hinge.
12. Reattach the glov
e compartment tension tether by
inserting the tether clip in the glove compartment
and sliding the clip away from the face of the glove
compartment door.
NOTE:
Ensure the glove compartment door hinges and
glove compartment travel stops are fully engaged.
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT INSPECTION
WARNING!
● Do no
t attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt
with the vehicle running.
● When wor
king near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any time
regardless of ignition mode. You could be injured
by the moving fan blades.
● You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks
that run across ribbed surface of belt fr
om rib to
rib, are considered normal. These are not a reason
to replace the belt. However, cracks running along a
rib (not across) are not normal. Any belt with cracks
running along a rib must be replaced. Also have the belt
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 303
8
replaced if it has excessive wear, frayed cords or severe
glazing.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Conditions that would require replacement:
● Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated fr
om
belt body)
● Rib or belt wear
● Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)
● Belt slips
● Groove jumping (belt does not maintain correct
position on pulley)
● Belt broken (identify and correct problem before new
belt is installed)
● Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is
heard or felt while drive belt is in operation)
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component
such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully
inspected for damage and proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the use
of special t
ools, we recommend having y
our vehicle
serviced at an authorized dealer.
BODY LUBRICATION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items
as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers,
liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges,
should be lubricated periodically with a lithium-based
grease, such as Mopar® Spray White Lube to ensure
quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts
concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and
grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be
removed. Particular attention should also be given to
hood latching components to ensure proper function.
When performing other underhood services, the hood
latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be
cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Autumn and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar®
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth
and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove
accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always
use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt
or dirt from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact
with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline,
etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these
conditions are present, clean the wiper blades or
replace as necessary.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected
periodically, not just when wiper performance problems
are experienced. This inspection should include the
following points:
● Wear or uneven edges
● Foreign material
● Hardening or cracking
● Deformation or fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the
affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not
attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged.
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the front wiper arm upward to raise the wiper
blade off of the windshield.
2. Push the release button on the arm of the wiper
blade.
304 SER
VICING AND MAINTENANCE
3. Push the wiper blade up and remove it.
Wiper Arm And Blade
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Button
3 — Wiper Arm
4. Install the wiper blade and firmly push the wiper
blade until it snaps into place.
Rear Wiper Blade Remo
val/Installation
1. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position
1 — Wiper Arm
2 — Wiper Blade
2. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm,
grab the bottom end of the wiper blade nearest
to wiper arm with your left hand. With your right
hand, hold the wiper arm as you pull the wiper
blade away from the wiper arm past its stop (far
enough to unsnap the wiper blade pivot from the
receptacle on the end of the wiper arm).
NOTE:
● Resistance will be accompanied by an audible
snap.
● The wiper arm does not stay in the service up
position.
3. Still holding the bottom end of the wiper blade,
move the wiper blade upward and away from the
wiper arm to disengage.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Arm
2 — Wiper Blade
4. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto the
glass.
Installing The Rear Wiper
1. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
2. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the opening on
the end of the wiper arm. Grab the bottom end of
the wiper arm with one hand, and press the wiper
blade flush with the wiper arm until it snaps into
place.
3. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine
exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust
system; or if exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle; or when the underside or rear of the vehicle
is damaged; have an authorized technician inspect the
complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for
broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts.
Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust
fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, have the exhaust system inspected each time
the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil changes.
Replace as required.
WARNING!
● Exhaust gases can injure or kill. The
y contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
(Continued)
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 305
8
WARNING!
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO
ð
page 269.
● A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your
vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can
contact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
● The catalytic con
vert
er requires the use of
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy
the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions
control device and may seriously reduce engine
performance and cause serious damage to the
engine.
● Damage to the catalytic converter can result
if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating
condition. In the event of engine malfunction,
particularly involving engine misfire or other
apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle
serviced promptly. Continued operation of your
vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause
the converter to overheat, resulting in possible
damage to the converter and vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic
con
v
er
t
er will not require maintenance. However, it is
important to keep the engine properly tuned to ensure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE:
Int
entional tam
pering with emissions contr
ol syst
ems
can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs,
stop the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to
cool. Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer's
specifications, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
damage:
● Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmission
is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
● Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or towing
the vehicle.
● Do not idle the engine with any ignition components
disconnected or removed, such as during diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
COOLING SYSTEM
WARNING!
● You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from y
our radiator.
If you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has
had time to cool. Never open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is
hot.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● K
eep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from
the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised.
The f
an starts automatically and may start at any
time, whether the engine is running or not.
● When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
to the OFF position. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the ignition
is in the ON position.
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection e
very
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant is dirty, the system
should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming
to MS.90032) by an authorized dealer. Check the front
of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs,
leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water
from a garden hose vertically down the face of the
condenser.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle
rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the
connection at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator.
Inspect the entire system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE
THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING
SYSTEM IS HOT.
306 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special t
ools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant
is needed to be added to the system please contact an
authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
flush with Organic Additive Technology (OAT) coolant
(conforming to MS.90032).
For the proper maintenance intervals
ð
page 291.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to Engine Fluids And Lubricants
ð
page 354.
NOTE:
● Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine
coolant, may result in engine damage and may
decrease corrosion protection. OAT engine coolant
is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
or any “globally compatible” coolant. If a non-OAT
engine coolant is introduced into the cooling system
in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
● Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant products. Do not use additional rust
inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be
compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may
plug the radiator.
● This vehicle has no
t been designed for use
with propylene glycol-based engine coolant. Use
of propylene glycol-based engine coolant is not
recommended.
● Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant
is needed to be added to the system please contact
an authorized dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that
allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine
coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To
prevent reducing this extended maintenance period,
it is important to use the same engine coolant (OAT
coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of
your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant that
meets the requirements of the manufacturer Material
Standard MS.90032. When adding engine coolant:
● We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT
that meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032.
● Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled water.
Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if
t
emperatures below −34°F (−37°C) are anticipated.
Please contact an authorized dealer for assistance.
● Use only high purity water such as distilled or
deionized water when mixing the water/engine
coolant solution. The use of lower quality water will
reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
NOTE:
● It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle
is operated.
● Use care when filling under hood fluids such as
engine oil, washer fluid, antifreeze, etc. to minimize
spillage onto top of engine. Any excess fluid that is
spilled onto the top of the engine should be removed
using compressed air or an absorbent cloth.
● Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant
is needed to be added to the system, please contact
a local authorized dealer.
● Mixing engine coolant types is not recommended
and can result in cooling system damage. If HOAT
and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, have
an authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 307
8
coolant will return to the radiator from the coolant
expansion bottle/recovery tank (if equipped).
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is
any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing
surfaces.
WARNING!
● Do no
t open a hot engine cooling system. Never
add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine
is over
heated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to
cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure
to build up in the cooling system. To prevent
scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
● Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a
regulat
ed substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by
animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground, clean up any ground spills
immediately. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
emergency assistance immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine off and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicat
ed on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains com
pletely full, so there
is no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure
cap unless checking for engine coolant freeze point
or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of
this. As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked
once a month.
When additional engine coolant is needed to maintain
the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets the
requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard
MS.90032 should be added to the coolant bottle. Do
not overfill.
Cooling System Notes
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is
normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or
high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being
vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows
no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may
be safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
● Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
● Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant needs
to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
● If frequent engine coolant additions are required, the
cooling system should be pressure test
ed for leaks.
● Maintain engine coolant concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion
protection of your engine which contains aluminum
components.
● Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle
overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
● Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
● Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine cooling performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In order to ensure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
For the proper maintenance intervals
ð
page 291.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brak
e pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
308 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master
Cylinder
The fluid level of the mast
er cylinder should be checked
whenever the vehicle is serviced, or immediately if the
Brake System Warning Light is on. If necessary, add
fluid to bring level within the designated marks on
the side of the reservoir of the brake master cylinder.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area
before removing cap. With disc brakes, fluid level can
be expected to fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid
level should be checked when pads are replaced. If
the brake fluid is abnormally low, check the system for
leaks.
WARNING!
● Use only manuf
acturer's recommended brake fluid
ð
page 355. Using the wrong type of brak
e fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
● To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the
master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.
Brake fluid in an open container absorbs moisture
from the air resulting in a lower boiling point.
This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard
or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● Ov
erfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine par
ts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should
be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
● Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could
be damaged, causing partial or complete brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
AUT
OMATIC TRANSMISSION
Special A
dditiv
es
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
any special additives in the transmission. Automatic
Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and
its performance may be impaired by supplemental
additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to
the transmission. Avoid using transmission sealers as
they may adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission
as the chemicals can damage your transmission
components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the f
actory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required; therefore
the transmission has no dipstick. An authorized dealer
can check y
our transmission fluid level using special
ser
vice tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer immediately to
have the transmission fluid level checked. Operating
the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause
severe transmission damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an authorized
dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage
may occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools
to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factor
y will provide satisfactory lubrication for the
life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required.
However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
disassembled for any reason.
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life.
Use only the manufacturer's specified transmission
fluid
ð
page 355. It is important to maintain
the transmission fluid at the correct level using the
recommended fluid.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 309
8
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant should be
used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause
deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or
torque converter shudder.
FRONT/REAR AXLE FL
UID
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be
inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the
fluid level.
Front Axle Fluid Level Check
The front axle oil level needs to be no lower than 1/8
inch (3 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.
The front axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to
22 to 29 ft-lb (30 to 40 N·m).
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the plugs as it could damage them
and cause them to leak.
Rear Axle Fluid Level Check
The rear axle oil level needs to be no lo
wer than 1/8
inch (3 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.
The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to
22 to 29 ft-lb (30 to 40 N·m).
CA
UTION!
Do not overtighten the plugs as it could damage them
and cause them to leak.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid
ð
page 355.
TRANSFER
CASE
Fluid Level Check
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
the exterior surfaces of the transfer case assembly
should be inspected. If oil leakage is suspected inspect
the fluid level.
Adding Fluid
Add fluid at the filler hole, until it runs out of the hole,
when the vehicle is in a level position.
Drain
First remove fill plug, then remove drain plug.
Recommended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs
is 15 to 25 ft-lb (20 to 34 N·m).
CAUTION!
When installing plugs, do not overtighten. You could
damage them and cause them to leak.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid
ð
page 355.
FUSES
General Information
WARNING!
● When replacing a blo
wn fuse, always use an
appr
opriate replacement fuse with the same amp
rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse
with another fuse of higher amp rating. The use
of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload.
If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected. Never replace a blown fuse with metal
wires or any other material. Do not place a fuse
inside a circuit breaker cavity or vice versa. Failure
to use proper fuses may result in serious personal
injury, fire and/or property damage.
● Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services are
switched off and/or disengaged.
(Continued)
310 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
● If the replaced fuse blo
ws again, contact an
authorized dealer.
● If a general pro
tection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, transmission system) or steering
system blows, contact an authorized dealer.
The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive
current.
When a device does not wor
k, you must check the fuse
element inside the blade fuse for a break/melt.
Also, please be aware that using power outlets for
extended periods of time with the engine off may result
in vehicle battery discharge.
Blade Fuses
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse element
3 — Blade Fuse with a bad/not functional fuse
element (blo
wn fuse)
Underhood Fuses
The Power Distribution Cent
er (PDC) is located on the
passenger side of the engine compartment, behind the
headlamp. This center contains cartridge fuses, micro
fuses, relays, and circuit breakers. A description of each
fuse and component may be stamped on the inside
cover, otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is
stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to the
following chart.
CAUTION!
When installing the Power Distribution Center cover,
it is important to ensure the co
ver is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the Power Distribution Center
and possibly result in an electrical system failure.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 311
8
Power Distribution Center
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F01 – – Crank Batt
F02 80 Amp Gray – Elec Pwr Str
312 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F03 500 Amp Gray – Starter
F04 250 Amp Gray – Alternator
F05 80 Amp Gray – Elec Pwr Str
F06 Shunt – Aux Battery *
F07 100 Amp Gray – Rad Fan
F08 – – Spare
F09 80 Amp Gray – IPDC
F10 150 Amp Gray – RPDC
F11 150 Amp Gray – PCR *
F12 – – Spare
F13 40 Amp Green – Starter
F14 – 10 Amp Red GNMM */ VPMS *
F15 – 10 Amp Red ECM *
F16 – 15 Amp Blue Cluster
F17A – 10 Amp Red EPS
F17B – 10 Amp Red ATMM *
F18 – – Spare
F19 30 Amp Pink – BSM #2 Valves *
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 313
8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F20 – – Spare
F21 – – Spare
F22 – – Spare
F23A – 10 Amp Red ECM / PPU * / MGU * / BSM / SLM
F23B – 10 Amp Red AIR SUSPENSION / ELSD-RR / EPS
F24 – 20 Amp Blue XFR Fuel Pump *
F25 – – SPARE
F26 50 Amp Red – BSM Motor #2 *
F27 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defroster
F28 – – Spare
F29 – – Spare
F30 – – Spare
F31 40 Amp Green – BCM Feed #3
F32 – – Spare
F33 30 Amp Pink – PWR Side Steps *
F34 – – Spare
F35 – – Spare
F36 50 Amp Red – BCM Feed #1
314 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F37 30 Amp Pink – DTCM
F38 50 Amp Red – BCM Feed #2
F39 – – Spare
F40 – 5 Amp Tan Batt Snsr
F41 – 20 Amp Yellow CADM MAP *
F42 – – Spare
F43 – 10 Amp Red ECM
F44 – – Spare
F45 – – Spare
F46 – 5 Amp Tan Batt Snsr *
F47 – 10 Amp Red BPCM
F48 – 10 Amp Red CVPAM
F49 – 30 Amp Green Air Suspension Valves
F50 – – Spare
F51 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pmp * / FPCM *
F52 – – Spare
F53 – – Spare
F54 – 20 Amp Yellow Headlamp LT
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 315
8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F55 – – Spare
F56 – – Spare
F57 – – Spare
F58 – – Spare
F59 50 Amp Red – Air Suspension
F60 – – Spare
F61 – – Spare
F62 – – Spare
F63 – 20 Amp Yellow Camera Washer Frt
F64 – – Spare
F65 – 15 Amp Blue ACT Grille Shutter / ACT Air Dam / Coolant Valve LCVM *
F66 – 20 Amp Yellow Horns
F67 – 10 Amp Red DTCM / Switchable Engine Mount / BSM
F68 – 20 Amp Yellow Headlamp RT
F69 – – Spare
F70 – 20 Amp Yellow IGN Coil * / IGN Cap */ Fuel Inj */ ISCM * / Coil On Plug *
F71 – – Spare
F72 – – Spare
316 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F73 – – Spare
F74 – 5 Amp Tan MGU *
F75 30 Amp Pink – Front Wiper
F76 – – Spare
F77 – 20 Amp Yellow TCM SBW
F78 – 20 Amp Yellow Short Runner Valve / ECM
F79 – 15 Amp Blue
Fuel INJ * / Surge Solenoid * / Oil Sensor * / Air Valve * / OBD
Bypass * / O2 Heaters *
F80 20 Amp Blue – ECM
F81 40 Amp Green – BCM Feed #4
F82 – – Spare
F83 – – Spare
F84 – – Spare
F85 – 10 Amp Red PCR *
F86 50 Amp Red – BSM Feed 1
F87 – – Spare
F88 50 Amp Red – BSM Feed 2
F89 – – Spare
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 317
8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F90 – – Spare
F91 – – Spare
F92 20 Amp Blue – Front De-Icer *
F93 25 Amp Clear – Fuel Pmp *
F94 – 10 Amp Red A/C Comp Clutch
F95 – – Spare
F96 – – Spare
F97 – – Spare
F98A – 15 Amp Blue Cooling Fan *
F98B – 15 Amp Blue Pmp Battery Cooling *
F99 – – Spare
F100 – – Spare
F101 – – Spare
F102 25 Amp Clear – Fuel Pmp *
F103 – – Spare
F104 – – Spare
F105A – – Spare
F105B – 15 Amp Blue LTR Coolant Pump *
318 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Interior Power Distribution Center
The Interior Power Distribution Cent
er is located
under the driver’s instrument panel. This center
contains cartridge fuses, micro fuses, relays, and circuit
breakers.
Interior Power Distribution Center Location
NOTE:
Fuses for safety systems must be serviced by an
authorized dealer.
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F01 – – Spare
F02 – – Spare
F03 – 15 Amp Blue MOD Seat Heater Frt (Steering Wheel) *
F04 – 10 Amp Red Night Vision Module / Driver Monitoring Camera (DMC)
F05 – – Spare
F06 – – Spare
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 319
8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F07 – – Spare
F08 – 10 Amp Red
Automatic Gearbox Shifter Module (AGSM) / Steering Column Lock /
HUD
F09 – – Spare
F10 40 Amp Green – HVAC Blower Motor
F11 – – Spare
F12 – 20 Amp Yellow Assy Cigar Lighter
F13 – 10 Amp Red
Assy Mirror Inside Rearview / Sunroof Single - Dual Pane / Port UC1
Dual USB RR / Interior Monitoring Camera
F14 – 10 Amp Red Refrigerator Box / In Vehicle Safe *
F15A – – Spare
F15B – – Spare
F16 – 10 Amp Red MOD ORC
F17 – – Spare
F18 – – Spare
F19 – – Spare
F20 – 10 Amp Red Overhead Console Assy (OHC) W/Sunshade / Intrusion Module
F21 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Electric Brake - Aftermarket
320 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F22 – – Spare
F23 – – Spare
F24 – – Spare
F25 – – Spare
F26 – – Spare
F27 – – Spare
F28 – – Spare
F29 – – Spare
F30 – – Spare
F31 – – Spare
F32 – 10 Amp Red
MOD ICS Switch Bank / SW Bank Upper / SW EPB / Aux Switch Bank
Module (ASBM) / Mod HVAC Cntrl Frt / Humidity Rain Light Sensor
(HRLS)
F33 – 15 Amp Blue
Transfer case SW / SW Bank Lower / Mod ICS Switch Bank Rear /
Climate Control Display / Suspension SW *
F34 – – Spare
F35 – 10 Amp Red IRCAM Heater
F36 – – Spare
F37 – – Spare
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 321
8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F38 – – Spare
F39 – – Spare
F40 – – Spare
F41A – – Spare
F41B – – Spare
F42A – – Spare
F42B – 10 Amp Red MOD HVAC Control Frt
F43A – – Spare
F43B – – Spare
F44 – 15 Amp Blue MOD Cluster CCN / MOD SGW (Cybersecurity)
F45 30 Amp Pink – MOD Inverter 150W
F46 – – Spare
F47A – – Spare
F47B – – Spare
F48A – – Spare
F48B – – Spare
F49 – 7.5 Amp Brown MOD RF HUB / Module Ignition (MD KIN)
F50A – 10 Amp Red Port UCI Dual USB Rear
322 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F50B – 10 Amp Red Port Diagnostics 1 & 2
F51A – – Spare
F51B – – Spare
F52 – – Spare
F53 – 20 Amp Yellow MOD CMCM (Radio)
F54A – – Spare
F54B – – Spare
F55 – – Spare
F56 – – Spare
F57 – – Spare
F58 – – Spare
F59 – – Spare
F60 – – Spare
F61 – – Spare
F62A – – Spare
F62B – – Spare
F63A – 15 Amp Blue
Port UC1 Dual USB Frt / Wireless Charging Pad MOD (WCPM) - High/
Premium Only
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 323
8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F63B – 15 Amp Blue Telematics Box Module (TBM) / Mod-DCSD /Mod FPDM
F64A – 10 Amp Red MOD ORC
F64B – 10 Amp Red Steering Column Control Module (SCCM)
F65 – 5 Amp Tan MOD SGW (Cybersecurity)
F66 – – Spare
CB1 – – Spare
CB2 – – Spare
CB3 – – Spare
CB4 – – Spare
CB5 – – Spare
CB6 – – Spare
324 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Rear Power Distribution Center
The Rear Power Distribution Center is located behind a trim cover of the rear driver’s side quarter panel. This center contains cartridge fuses, micro fuses, relays, and circuit
breakers. The following chart corresponds to the fuses inside.
Rear Power Distribution Center Location
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F05 150 Amp Gray – Underhood Power Distribution Center Battery Feed
F06 – – Spare
F07 – – Spare
F08 – – Spare
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 325
8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F09 – – Spare
F10 – – Spare
F11 – – Spare
F12 – – Spare
F13 30 Amp Pink – Air Compressor (Tire Inflator)
F14 25 Amp Clear – MTR Sunshade Sunroof
F15A – – Spare
F15B – 10 Amp Red Hands Free Liftgate / Rear Window Switches / MOD HVAC Cntrl Rr
F16 – – Spare
F17 – – Spare
F18 25 Amp Clear – Power Liftgate Module
F19A – 10 Amp Red L2+ Driver Alert Lighting Module
F19B – 10 Amp Red Animation Lighting RR-LT
F20A – 15 Amp Blue Central ASAS Decision Module (CADM) - LO
F20B – – Spare
F21A – – Spare
F21B – 10 Amp Red Sunroof - Dual Pane 2nd & 3rd Row Seat SW-Illumination
F22 – – Spare
326 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F23 – 10 Amp Red Rear Seat Entertainment (Driver / Passenger)
F24 – – Spare
F25 30 Amp Pink – Mod Door MUX Passenger
F26 – – Spare
F27 – – Spare
F28 30 Amp Pink – MOD Memory / Power Seat (Passenger Frt)
F29A – 10 Amp Red Animation Lighting RR-RT
F29B – 10 Amp Red Animation Lighting RR-LT
F30 30 Amp Pink – MOD Memory / Power Seat (Driver Frt)
F31 – – Spare
F32 – – Spare
F33 – – Spare
F34 30 Amp Pink – MOD Door MUX Driver
F35 25 Amp Clear – Integrated Trailer Tow Module #2
F36A – 10 Amp Red Intelligent Event Base Lighting Module
F36B – – Spare
F37 25 Amp Clear – Integrated Trailer Tow Module #1
F38 – – Spare
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 327
8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F39 – – Spare
F40 – 30 Amp Green Mod Audio Amplifier #1A
F41 – – Spare
F42A – 10 Amp Red RSE Video USB Console Frt/Port Media Hub FPDM
F42B – – Spare
F43 – – Spare
F44A – 20 Amp Yellow 12 Volt Power Outlet Cargo Area (Ign)
F44B – 20 Amp Yellow 12 Volt Power Outlet Cargo Area (Battery)
F45 – 20 Amp Yellow MOD CRSM (Heated Seat RR RT)
F46 30 Amp Pink – Folding Seat Module 3rd Row Feed #1 *
F47 – – Spare
F48 – – Spare
F49 – – Spare
F50 – 15 Amp Blue
Seat Massage Driver Mod (SSMD) / Seat Massage Passenger Mod
(SSMP) *
F51 – – Spare
F52 – 20 Amp Yellow MOD CRSM (Heat Seat RR LT) *
F53 30 Amp Pink – Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Rear #1 *
328 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F54 – – Spare
F55 30 Amp Pink – Folding Seat Modules 3rd Row Feed #2 *
F56 – – Spare
F57 – 10 Amp Red
Mod HVAC RR / Mod Occupant Classic / CVPAM / Mod Parktronics /
ITCM
F58 – 15 Amp Blue
3rd Row Additional USB charge (Only LT - RT) / Port Pwr USB Console
UBS (CH Only)
F59 – – Spare
F60 25 Amp Clear – RR_HVAC Blower
F61 – – Spare
F62 – 20 Amp Yellow Module Seat Heater Frt (Driver) *
F63 30 Amp Pink – Assy Trailer Tow Receptacle B+
F64 – – Spare
F65 – – Spare
F66 20 Amp Blue – MOD Door MUX Passenger Rear - Smart Motor
F67 – 30 Amp Green MOD Audio Amplifier #1B
F68 – – Spare
F69 – 20 Amp Yellow L2+ Central ASAS Decision Module (CADM) MID *
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 329
8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F70 – 10 Amp Red Video Routing Module (VRM)
F71 – – Spare
F72 – – Spare
F73 – – Spare
F74 – – Spare
F75 – – Spare
F76 – – Spare
F77 – – Spare
F78 – – Spare
F79 – – Spare
F80 – – Spare
F81 – 20 Amp Yellow Module Seat Heater Frt (PASS) *
F82 – 10 Amp Red
Animation Lighting RR / Air Compressor (Tire Inflator) / Animation
Lighting Liftgate Taillamp
F83 – – Spare
F84 – – Spare
F85 – – Spare
F86 – 15 Amp Blue Lumbar Support Driver & Passenger SW *
330 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F87 – – Spare
F88 20 Amp Blue – MOD Door MUX Driver Rear - Smart Motor
CB1 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet RR
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs, Names, And Par
t
Numbers
Your vehicle is equipped with LED lamps. In the event of
a light malfunction, please see an authorized dealer for
LED replacement.
TIRES
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the
following information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification
Numbers, Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire
Pressures, and Tire Loading.
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
NOTE:
● P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on
US design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter
“P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
● European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard
have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning
with the section width. The letter "P" is absent from
this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
● LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on
US design standards. The size designation for LT-
Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 331
8
except for the letters “LT” that are molded into the
sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
LT235/85R16.
● Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure
compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
● High flotation tire sizing is based on US design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter
molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
TIRE SIZING CHART
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P21
5/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standar
ds, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
● Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
● "R" means radial construction, or
● "D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diame
ter in inches (in)
Service Description:
332 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
95 = Load Index
● A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
EXAMPLE:
H = Speed Symbol
● A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
● The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions,
and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
● XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
● LL
= Light load tire or
● C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carr
y at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicat
es the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code,
located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard
side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
● This symbol certifies that the tire is in com
pliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 333
8
EXAMPLE:
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
● 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
● 01 means the year 200
1
● Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the
3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at
least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) af
ter sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of psi (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The
maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original
equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
334 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driv
er’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side
door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to
the recommended pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you im
portant information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the
vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The v
ehicle maximum load on the tire must no
t e
x
ceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle.
You will not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity
if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and
cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire And
Loading Information Placard
ð
page 169.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axles must
not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWR, vehicle loading, and
trailer towing
ð
page 169.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lb” on the Tire And Loading Information Placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 335
8
lbs passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750
(5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there
will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step
4.
NOTE:
● If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The
following table shows examples on how to calculate
total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of
your vehicle with varying seating configurations and
number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate
for the seating and load carry capacity of your
vehicle.
● For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
336 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect v
ehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
● Safety
● Fuel Economy
● Tread Wear
● Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Safety
WARNING!
● Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
(Continued)
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 337
8
WARNING!
● U
nderinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire f
ailure.
● Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
● Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting
in loss of vehicle control.
● Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
● Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift
to the right or left.
● Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both underinflation and overinflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
● Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
● Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
abnormal w
ear patterns and reduced tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the driver's side
door.
At least once a month:
● Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgment when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are under-
inflated.
● Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
alw
ays reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which
could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure
is def
ined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed
the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire
sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide
range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary
with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa)
per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in
mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage,
especially in the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and
the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold
tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21
kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C)
for this outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to
40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal
pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits
or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at
high speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure
is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced
vehicle loading may be required for high-speed vehicle
operation. Refer to an authorized tire dealer or original
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe
operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
338 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires
could cause them to fail. You could have a serious
collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75
mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use
radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them
with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
● The tire has not been driven on when flat.
● The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
● The puncture is no greater than a quarter of an inch
(6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical
size and service description (Load Index and Speed
Symbol). Replace the tire pressure sensor as well as it
is no
t designed to be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of
inflation pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred
to as the Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs
when the tire inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi
(96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flat
mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be
replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
When a Run Flat tire is changed after being driven in
a Run Flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition, please
replace the TPMS sensor as it is not designed to be
reused.
NOTE:
TPMS sensor must be replaced after driving the vehicle
on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the Run Flat
mode.
For more information
ð
page 239.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do
not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h)
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping.
For further information
ð
page 287.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire
damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster
than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original eq
uipment
tires to help you in determining when your tires should
be replaced.
Tire Tread
1 — Tread Wear Indicators
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the
tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the
tread depth becomes 1/1
6 of an inch (1.6 mm). When
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 339
8
the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire
should be replaced.
For further information
ð
page 340.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
● Driving style
● Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across
the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will
reduce tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire
replacement.
● Distance driven
● Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle
scheduled maintenance is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
y
ears, regardless of the remaining tread. F
ailure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
NOTE:
Wheel valve stem must be replaced as w
ell when
installing new tires due to wear and tear in existing
tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Pro
tect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance
of many characteristics. They should be inspected
regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation
pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends
using tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality
and performance when replacement is needed. For
more information
ð
page 339. Refer to the Tire And
Loading Information Placard or the Vehicle Certification
Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load
Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on
the original equipment tire sidewall.
For more information relating to the Load Index and
Speed Symbol of a tire
ð
page 332.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely
affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
● Do no
t use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed
rating other than that specified f
or your vehicle.
Some combinations of unapproved tires and
wheels may change suspension dimensions and
performance characteristics, resulting in changes
to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle.
This can cause unpredictable handling and stress
to steering and suspension components. You
could lose control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel
sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.
● Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
● Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different
size ma
y result in false speedomet
er and odometer
readings.
TIRE TYPES
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction f
or all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction levels may vary
340 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
between different all season tires. All Season tires can
be identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation
on the tire sidewall. Use All Season tires only in sets
of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety
and handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If
Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow
or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires,
be aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C)
or if roads are covered with ice or snow. For more
information, contact an authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation
or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in sev
ere injury or
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use
of snow tires during the Wint
er. Snow tires
can be identified by a mountain/snowflake
symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size
and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires
only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect
the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than
what was originally equipped with your vehicle and
should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75
mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120
km/h) refer to original equipment or an authorized
tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds,
loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states
prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a
spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “In Case
Of Emergency” for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not
take your vehicle thr
ough an automatic car wash with
a compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire
designated for temporary emergency use
ð
page
176.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped
Tire And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle ma
y be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear
axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in
the tire rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has
this option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the
recommended tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use
only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description
on the Tire And Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall
of the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with
the letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and
reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare
tire. Do not install more than one compact spare tire
and wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 341
8
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could
result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporar
y emergency use
only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
collapsible spare by looking at the spare tire description
on the Tire And Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the
tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example: 165/80-17
101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and
reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly
installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using
the electric air pump before lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, since
the wheel is designed specifically for the collapsible
spare tire.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could
result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full-Size Spare — If Equipped
The Full-Size spare is for tem
porary emergency use
only. This tire may look like the originally equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is
not. This spare tire may have limited tread life. When
the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the
temporary use Full-Size spare tire needs to be replaced.
Since it is not the same as your original equipment
tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and
reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on
the limited use spare wheel. This label contains the
driving limitations for this spare. This tire may look like
the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of
your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use
spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the
same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more
than the speed listed on the limited use spare wheel.
Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed
on your Tire And Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall
it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
using mild (neutral Ph) soap and wat
er to maintain
their luster and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with
the same soap solution recommended for the body of
the vehicle and remember to always wash when the
surfaces are not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused
by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium
chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt
ice or control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or
sponge and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not
use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage
the wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them
from corroding and tarnishing.
342 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh
brushes. Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and
automatic car washes may damage the wheel's
protective finish. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash
soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and
equipment to prevent damage to the wheels. Mopar®
Wheel Treatment or Mopar® Chrome Cleaner or their
equivalent is recommended or select a non-abrasive,
non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
(Continued)
CAUTION!
damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage
is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to
remove the water droplets from the brake components.
This activity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors
and prevent vehicle vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Gloss
Clear Coat Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or
polishing com
pounds. They will permanently damage
this finish and such damage is not covered by the
(Continued)
CAUTION!
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY
USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH.
Used on a regular basis; this is all that is required to
maintain this finish.
SNOW TRACTION
DEVICES
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Due to limited clearance, the following
snow traction devices are recommended. Follow these
recommendations to guard against damage:
● Snow traction device must be of proper size for the
tire, as recommended by the snow traction device
manufacturer.
● No other tire sizes are recommended for use with
the snow traction device.
● Please see the following table for recommended tire
size, axle and snow traction device:
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 343
8
Wagoneer
4x2
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device (Maximum Projec-
tion Beyond Tire Profile Or Equivalent)
Series 1
Rear
275/65R18
275/55R20
S Class
Series 2
Series 3
275/55R20
4x4
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device (Maximum Projec-
tion Beyond Tire Profile Or Equivalent)
Series 1
Series 2
Rear
275/65R18
275/55R20
S Class
Series 3 275/55R20
Grand Wagoneer
4x2
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device (Maximum Projec-
tion Beyond Tire Profile Or Equivalent)
Series 1
Rear
275/55R20
S ClassSeries 2
Series 3
344 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
4x4
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device (Maximum Projec-
tion Beyond Tire Profile Or Equivalent)
Series 1
Rear
275/55R20
S ClassSeries 2
Series 3
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S,
Snow) between front and rear axles can cause
unpredictable handling. You could lose control and
have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
● Because of restricted traction device clearance
between tires and other suspension components,
it is important that only traction devices in good
condition are used. Broken devices can cause
serious damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if
noise occurs that could indicate device breakage.
Remove the damaged parts of the device before
further use.
● Install device as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
● Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
(Continued)
CAUTION!
● Driv
e cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
● Do no
t drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement.
● Observe the traction device manufacturer’s
instructions on the method of installation,
operating speed, and conditions for use. Always
use the suggested operating speed of the device
manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48
km/h).
● Do not use traction devices on a compact spare
tire.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your v
ehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, handling,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of
tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile
with aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off-
Road type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help
to maintain mud, snow, and w
et traction levels, and
contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.
For the proper maintenance intervals
ð
page 291.
More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The
reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be
corrected prior to rotation being performed.
NOTE:
The premium Tire Pressure Monitoring System will
automatically locate the pressure values displayed in
the correct vehicle position following a tire rotation.
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”
shown in the following diagram.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 345
8
Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross)
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORT
ATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned
by the tire's manufacturer in each
category is shown on the sidewall of
the tires on your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires
must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these
grades.
TREADWEAR
The T
readwear grade is a com
parativ
e
rating, based on the wear rate
of the tire when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example,
a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half times as well on the
government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
TRACTION GRADES
The Traction grades, from highest
to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.
These grades represent the tire's
ability to stop on wet pavement, as
measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction per
formance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
TEMPERATURE GRADES
The Tem
perature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire's resistance to the generation
of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat, when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to
a level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
346 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of perf
ormance
on the laboratory test wheel, than the
minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in combination, can
cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
STORING THE VEHICLE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than three
weeks, we recommend that you take the following steps
to minimize the drain on your vehicle's battery:
● Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
● Before you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system
is started again.
BODYWORK
PR
OTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC AGENTS
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to
geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make
roads passable in snow and ice and those that are
sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other
seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your
vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle
to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the
vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather and
other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on
paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will
enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the
corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
● Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
● Stone and gravel impact.
● Insects, tree sap and tar.
● Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
● Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
BOD
Y AND UNDERBOD
Y MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and
fog lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone
breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be
followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth.
To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution
followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,
steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the
lenses.
PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Washing
● Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your
vehicle in the shade using Mopar® Car Wash, or a
mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely
with water.
● If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar® Super
Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove.
● Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to
protect your paint finish. Use precautions to not
scratch the paint.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 347
8
● Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
CA
UTION!
● Do no
t use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring po
wder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
● Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8,274
kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and
decals.
Special Care
● If you drive on salted or dusty r
oads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least
once a month.
● It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear
and open.
● If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the
paint, touch them up immediately.
● If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or
similar cause that destroys the paint and protective
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as
possible.
● If you carry special cargo such as chemicals,
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such
materials are well packaged and sealed.
● If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
● Use Mopar® T
ouch Up Paint on scratches as soon
as possible. An authorized dealer has t
ouch up paint
to match the color of your vehicle.
INTERIORS
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed
areas the
y may cause respiratory harm.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasiv
e cleaners. This will weaken the
fabric. Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution
or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the
vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no pr
otection. Inspect the seat
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays,
(Continued)
WARNING!
or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat
belt system. If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or
if you have questions regarding seat belt or retractor
conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA
dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision Care
Program facility for inspection.
PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean t
o clean vinyl upholstery.
CAUTION!
● Direct contact of air freshener
s, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers t
o the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior
may cause permanent damage. Wipe away
immediately.
● Damage caused by these type of products may not
be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken t
o avoid scratching the plastic.
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth. Dry with a soft cloth.
348 SER
VICING AND MAINTENANCE
LEATHER SURFACES
Mopar® To
tal Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
The leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of
dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather
upholstery and should be removed promptly with a
damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with
a soft cloth and Mopar® Total Clean. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to
clean your leather upholstery.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to show
any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer more
so than darker colors. The leather is designed for easy
cleaning, and the manufacturer recommends Mopar®
total care leather cleaner applied on a cloth to clean
the leather seats as needed.
CAUTION!
Do not use alcohol and alcohol-based and/or ketone-
based cleaning products to clean leather upholstery,
as damage to the upholstery may result.
GLASS SURFACES
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular
basis with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive
type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear
window equipped with electric defrosters or windows
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rearview mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 349
8
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The VIN is found on a label located on the left front
corner of the instrument panel pad, visible from outside
of the vehicle through the windshield.
Windshield VIN Label Location
NOTE:
It is illegal to remov
e or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake
systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems lose
normal capability, the remaining system will still
function. However, there will be some loss of overall
braking effectiveness. You may notice increased pedal
travel during application, greater pedal force required
to slow or stop, and potential activation of the Brake
W
arning Light.
In the event po
wer assist is lost for any reason the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required
to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that
required with the power system operating.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on
the vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using
a properly calibrated torque wrench using a six-sided
(hex) deep wall socket.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/Bolt
Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
130 ft-lb (176
N·m)
M14 x 1.50 22 mm
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure that the
sock
et is fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt (do not
insert it half way).
NOTE:
If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them
checked with a torque wrench by an authorized dealer
or service station.
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque
to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly
tightened.
350 TECHNICAL SPECIFICA
TIONS
Torque Patterns
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do no
t tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until the vehicle
has been lo
wered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
While operating on gasoline with the required octane
number, hearing a light knocking sound from the
engine is no
t a cause for concern. However, if the
engine is heard making a heavy knocking sound, see
a dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with an octane
number lower than recommended can cause engine
failure and may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience
these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before
considering service for the vehicle.
3.0L STANDARD OUTPUT ENGINE
Do not use E-85 fle
x fuel or ethanol blends greater than
15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all
emissions requirements, and provide
satisfactory fuel economy and performance,
when using high-quality unleaded regular
gasoline having an octane rating of 87, as specified
by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of 91 or higher octane
premium gasoline will allow these engines to operate
to optimal performance. This increase in performance
is most noticeable in hot weather or under heavy load
conditions such as while towing.
3.0L HIGH OUTPUT ENGINE
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater than
15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all
emission regulations, provide optimal fuel
economy and performance when using
high-quality unleaded premium gasoline
having a posted octane number of 91 as specified by
the (R+M)/2 method. The use of 91 or higher octane
premium gasoline is required in this engine.
5.7L ENGINE
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater than
15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all emission
regulations and provide satisfactory fuel
economy and performance when using
high-quality unleaded gasoline having an
octane range of 87 to 89 as specified by the (R+M)/2
method. The use of 89 octane plus gasoline is
recommended for optimum performance and fuel
economy.
6.4L ENGINE
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater than
15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all
emission regulations, provide optimal fuel
economy and performance when using
high-quality unleaded premium gasoline
having a posted octane number of 91 as specified by
the (R+M)/2 method. The use of 91 or higher octane
premium gasoline is required in these engines.
REFORMULATED GASOLINE
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner-
burning gasoline referred to as “reformulated gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are
specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and
improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended.
Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide
improved performance and durability of engine and fuel
system components.
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper
octane rating, gasolines that contain detergents,
corrosion and stability additives are recommended.
Using gasolines that have these additives will help
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 351
9
improve fuel economy, reduce emissions, and maintain
vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
contains a higher level of detergents to
further aide in minimizing engine and fuel
system deposits. When available, the usage
of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents
should be avoided. Many of these materials intended
for gum and varnish removal may contain active
solvents or similar ingredients. These can harm fuel
system gasket and diaphragm materials.
GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with
oxygenates such as ethanol.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol,
or gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol
(E-15). Use of these blends may result in starting
and drivability problems, damage critical fuel
system components, cause emissions to exceed the
applicable standard, and/or cause the Malfunction
Indicator Light to illuminate. Please observe pump
labels as they should clearly communicate if a fuel
contains greater than 15% ethanol (E-15).
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing
methanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer
and may void or not be covered under New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
DO NOT USE E-85 IN NON-FLEX FUEL
VEHICLES
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with
gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of
gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these
symptoms:
● Operate in a lean mode.
● OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
● Poor engine performance.
● Poor cold start and cold drivability.
● Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
CNG AND LP FUEL SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS
Modifications that allow the engine to run on
Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane (LP)
may result in damage to the engine, emissions, and
fuel system components. Problems that result from
running CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
METHYL
CYCLOPENTADIENYL MANGANESE
TRICARBONYL (MMT) IN
GASOLINE
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that
is blended into some gasolines to increase octane.
Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance
advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane
number without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT
reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system
performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer
recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in
your vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be
indicated on the gasoline pump; therefore, you should
ask the gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains
MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California
reformulated gasoline.
FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
per
formance:
● The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine
performance and damage the emissions control
system.
● An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate
(Continued)
352 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CAUTION!
service. Contact an authorized dealer for service
assistance.
● The use of fuel additives, which are now
being sold as octane enhancers, is not
recommended. Most of these products contain
(Continued)
CAUTION!
high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system
damage or vehicle performance problems
resulting from the use of such fuels or additives
is not the responsibility of the manufacturer and
may void or not be covered under the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
FLUID CAPACITIES
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
Short Wheel Base 26.5 gal 100 L
Long Wheel Base 30.5 gal 115 L
Engine Oil With Filter
3.0L Engine 7.5 qt 7.1 L
5.7L Engine 7 qt 6.6 L
6.4L Engine 7 qt 6.6 L
Cooling System *
3.0L Engine 16.6 qt 15.7 L
3.0L Engine Intercooler 3.2 qt 3.0 L
5.7L Engine 17 qt 16 L
6.4L Engine 18.4 qt 17.4 L
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 353
9
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000
km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) meeting the requirements of the man-
ufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Coolant — Intercooler
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000
km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) meeting the requirements of the man-
ufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil — 3.0L SO Engine
We recommend using Mopar® SAE 0W-20 Full Synthetic Engine Oil, which meets the
requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-6395. Equivalent full syn-
thetic SAE 0W-20 engine oil can be used but must have the API Starburst trademark
with a certification level of API-SP or later
ð
page 300. API-SN+ is also acceptable.
CAUTION!
Usage of earlier API certification levels (such as API-SN or prior) can result in engine
damage and is not covered by the Ne
w Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil — 3.0L HO Engine
We recommend using Mopar® API Certified SAE 0W-40 Full Synthetic Engine Oil,
which meets the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-A0921.
Equivalent full synthetic SAE 0W-40 engine oil can be used but must have the API
Donut trademark with a certification level of API-SP or later
ð
page 300. API-SN+ is
also acceptable.
CAUTION!
Usage of earlier API certification levels (such as API-SN or prior) can result in engine
damage and is not covered by the Ne
w Vehicle Limited Warranty.
354 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Oil — 5.7L Engine
We recommend using Mopar® SAE 0W-20 Full Synthetic Engine Oil which meets
the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-6395. Equivalent full
synthetic SAE 0W-20 engine oil can be used but must have the API Starburst trade-
mark
ð
page 300.
Engine Oil — 6.4L Engine
We recommend using Mopar® API Certified SAE 0W-40 Full Synthetic Engine Oil
which meets the requirements of the manufacturer Mat
erial Standard MS-A0921.
Equivalent full synthetic SAE 0W-40 engine oil can be used but must have the API
Donut trademark
ð
page 300.
Fuel Selection — 3.0L SO Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol.
Fuel Selection — 3.0L HO Engine 91 Octane or Higher (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol (Do Not Use E-85).
Fuel Selection — 5.7L Engine
89 Octane Recommended - 87 Octane Acceptable (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol
(Do not use E-85).
Fuel Selection — 6.4L Engine 91 Octane or Higher (R+M)/2 Me
thod, 0-15% Ethanol (Do Not Use E-85).
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission
Use only Mopar® ZF 8 & 9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may af
fect the function or performance of your trans-
mission.
Transfer Case We recommend using Mopar® Mobile LT.
Axle Differential (Front) We recommend using Mopar® GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85.
Axle Differential (Rear) — With Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD)
We recommend using Mopar® GL-5 Electronic Limited Slip Synthetic Axle Lubricant
SAE 75W-85 with integrated friction modifier.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 355
9
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Axle Differential (Rear) — With Mechanical Limited Slip Differential
We recommend using Mopar® GL-5 Mechanical Limited Slip Synthetic Axle Lubricant
SAE 75W-85 with integrated friction modifier.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend using Mopar® DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703.
356 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT
All work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
PREPARE A LIST
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the
specific work you want done. If you've had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let
the service advisor know.
BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle (additional charges may apply). If you need
a rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements
when you call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are interested
in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our
products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to
an authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best,
and are most concerned that you get prompt and high
quality service. FCA US LLC's authorized dealers have
the facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools,
and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. If for some reason you
are still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or
owner of the authorized dealer. They want to know if
you need assistance. If an authorized dealer is unable
to resolve the concern, you may contact FCA US LLC's
Customer Assistance center.
Any communication to FCA US LLC's customer center
should include the following information:
● Owner's name and address
● Owner's telephone number (home, mobile, and
office)
● Authorized dealer name
● Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
● V
ehicle delivery date and mileage
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Av
ailable 24 hours, 7 days a week.
Call 1-833-667-4825 or visit wagoneer.rsahelp.com
(USA)
Call 1-800-363-4869 or visit fca.roadsideaid.com
(CANADA)
Who is Covered
You are covered by Roadside Assistance services if
you are a purchaser for use of the vehicle. Roadside
Assistance services last for five years or 60,000 miles
on the odometer, whichever occurs first, calculated
from the start date of the Basic Limited Warranty, as
set forth in the Warranty Information book.
1
1. Towing services provided through Cross Country Motor Club,
Inc., 400 River's Edge Drive, Medford, MA 02155, except in AK,
CA, HI, OR, WI, and WY, where services are provided by Cross
Country Motor Club of California, Inc., 275 East Hillcrest Drive,
Suite 165, Thousand Oaks, CA 91360.
What to Do
If your vehicle requires jump start assistance, out of
gas/fuel delivery, tire service, lockout service or towing
as a result of a mechanical breakdown, dial toll-free:
USA: 833-667-4825/Canada: 800-363-4869. Provide
your name, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) required
for covered services, license plate number, and your
location, including the telephone number from which
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 357
10
If you are inconvenienced by a flat tire, we will dispatch
a service provider to use your vehicle’s temporary spare
tire (if equipped) as recommended in your Owner’s
Manual. This is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Out of Gas/Fuel Delivery
Drivers cannot always count on a gas station being
nearby, especially when traveling away from home. We
will dispatch a service provider to deliver a small
amount of fuel (maximum two gallons) to get you
to a nearby station. This service is limited to two
occurrences in a 12-month period.
Battery Jump Assistance
No time is a good time for a depleted battery. With
Roadside Assistance, you do not have to worry about
being stranded. We will dispatch a service provider to
provide you with a battery jump anytime, day or night.
Lockout Service
Whether the keys are locked in your vehicle or frozen
locks are keeping you from getting on your way, help is
just a phone call away. This service is limited to
providing access to the vehicle’s seating area. It does
not cover the cost of replacement keys.
Towing Service
Our towing service gives you peace of mind and
confidence. If your vehicle becomes disabled as a result
of a mechanical breakdown, Roadside Assistance will
dispatch a towing service to transport your vehicle to
the closest authorized Chrysler, Dodge, Jeep®, or Ram
dealer. If you choose to go to another dealer, you will be
responsible for the cost if the extra distance exceeds 50
miles.
FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
WAGONEER CLIENT SERVICES CANADA
P.O. Box 162
1
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: 1-844-472-6301 (844-GRAND01)
MEXICO
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, CDMX
In Mexico City: (800) 505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568
PUERTO RICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE HEARING
OR SPEECH IMPAIRED (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties,
FCA US LLC has installed special Telecommunication
Devices for the Deaf (TDD) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
Flat Tire Service
358 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
you are calling. Briefly describe the nature of the
problem and answer a few simple questions. You will
be given the name of the service provider and an
estimated time of arrival. If you feel you are in an
unsafe situation, please let us know. With your consent,
we will contact local police or safety authorities.
If Unable to Contact Roadside Assistance
If you are unable to contact Roadside Assistance or
unable to provide a valid Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), and you obtain towing services on your own, you
may submit your original receipts from the licensed
towing or service facility, for services rendered within
30 days of the occurrence. Be sure to include your
VIN, odometer mileage at the time of service, and
current mailing address. We will process the claim
based on vehicle and service eligibility. If eligible, we
will reimburse you for the reasonable amount actually
paid, based on the usual and customary charges for
that service in the area where they were provided. FCA
US LLC’s determination relating to reimbursement is
final. Correspondence should be mailed to:
FCA US LLC Customer Assistance
P.O. Box 9145
Medford, MA 02155
Attention Claims Department
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms
or discontinue the Roadside Assistance Program at
any time. The Roadside Assistance program is subject
to restrictions and conditions of use, which are
determined solely by FCA US LLC.
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with FCA
US LLC by dialing 1-800-380-2479.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service
offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users,
dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to
connect with a Bell Relay Service operator.
SERVICE CONTRACT
You may have purchased a service contract for
a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost
of unexpected repairs after FCA US LLC's New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The Mopar® Vehicle
Protection plans are the ONLY vehicle extended
protection plans authorized, endorsed and backed by
FCA US LLC to provide additional protection beyond
your vehicle’s warranty. If you purchased a Mopar®
Vehicle Protection Plan, you will receive Plan Provisions
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within
three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have
any questions about the service contract, call FCA US
LLC’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at
1-800-521-9922.
For Canadian residents, you may have purchased
additional coverage with an extended service contract.
FCA Canada Inc. stands fully behind its service
contracts. Be sure that the one you buy is a genuine
Canada Inc. service contract. We are not responsible
for other companies’ contracts. If you purchased a
contract other than a genuine FCA Canada Inc. service
contract and you have a problem, you will have to
contact the administrator of that contract for resolution.
If you have any questions about the service contract,
call the FCA's Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-844-472-6301 (844-GRAND01) English /
1-844-472-6301 (844-GRAND01) French).
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service contract
you may have purchased from another manufacturer. If
you require service after the FCA US LLC New Vehicle
Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract
documents, and contact the person listed in those
documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools,
and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted
with the ownership experience.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this
vehicle and market. Refer to www.mopar.com/om for
further information.
See the Warranty Information for the terms
and provisions of FCA Canada Inc. warranties
applicable to this vehicle and market. Refer to
www.owners.mopar.ca/en/ for further information.
For French, refer to www.owners.mopar.ca/fr for further
information.
MOPAR® PARTS
Mopar® original equipment parts & accessories and
factory filled fluids are available from an authorized
dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle to
keep it operating at its best and maintain its original
condition.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND
WASHINGT
ON, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying FCA US
LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists
in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, an authorized dealer
or FCA US LLC.
Scan me
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 359
10
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); or go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
IN CANADA
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect,
you should contact the Customer Service Department
immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report
a safety defect to the Canadian government should
contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
Investigations and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP.
ORDERING AND ACCESSING ADDITIONAL
OWNER’S INFORMATION
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components and is written in straightforward
language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These manuals make
it easy to find and fix problems on computer-controlled
vehicle systems and features. They show exactly
how to find and correct problems, using step-by-step
troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven
diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and
equipment.
To order a digital copy of your Service or Diagnostic
Procedure manuals, visit:
www.techauthority.com (US and Canada).
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles.
To access your Owner's Information online, visit
www.mopar.com/om (US) or www.owners.mopar.ca/en/
(Canada).
Or visit:
www.techauthority.com to order physical copies of
Owner’s Manuals (US).
Owner's Manuals, Radio Manuals and Warranty
Information Books can be ordered through Archway at:
● 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP OR ADDRESS
*If you have purchased this vehicle used or have
changed your address, please provide the following
information and mail to:
FCA US LLC
P.O. Box 21–8008
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Make sure to include the following:
● Date of Sale (mm/dd/yy)
● Vehicle Identification Number (17 Character ID
located on top left of the instrument panel)
● Exact Odometer Reading
● First and Last Name
● Phone Number
● Street Address, City, State and Zip Code
● Email Address
*Applies to US residents only.
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Innovation, Science and Economic Development
Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference,
and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development
applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence.
L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions
suivantes:
360 CUS
TOMER ASSISTANCE
1. L'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. L'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le
fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. Es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause
interferencia perjudicial y
2. Este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier
interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su
operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 361
10
INDEX
A
About Your Brakes ...........................................350
Active Driving Assist System ........................... 142
Active Lane Management System ..................159
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise
Control) ....................................................132, 134
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ................30
7
Adding Fuel ...................................................... 168
Additives, Fuel ..................................................351
Adjust
Down ..............................................................38
Forward ..........................................................38
Rearward .......................................................38
Up ...................................................................38
Adjustable Pedals .............................................. 48
Air Bag
Air Bag Operation ....................................... 252
Air Bag Warning Light ........................250, 252
Driver Knee Air Bag .................................... 256
Enhanced A
ccident Response ..........258, 290
Event Data Recorder (EDR) ....................... 290
Front Air Bag ............................................... 252
If Deployment Occurs .................................258
Knee Impact Bolsters .................................256
Maintaining Your Air Bag System .............. 259
Maintenance ...............................................259
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light ............. 251
Side Air Bags ...............................................256
Transporting Pets ........................................270
Air Bag Light ............................................250, 270
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner
Filter) ................................................................ 301
Air Conditioner Maintenance ..........................301
Air Conditioner Refrigerant .................... 301, 302
Air Conditioner System ....................................301
Air Conditioning
Rear ............................................................... 67
Air Conditioning Filter ............................... 70, 301
Air Conditioning System ..............................63,
69
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ....................... 69
Air Filter ............................................................ 301
Air Pressure
Tires .............................................................338
Alarm
Arm The System ..................................... 24, 25
Disarm The System .......................................2
4
Panic ..............................................................18
Rearm The System ....................................... 25
Security Alarm .............................................107
Alarm System
Security Alarm ........................................ 24, 25
Alterations/Modifications
V
ehicle ........................................................... 12
Amazon FireTV ........................................215, 220
Amazon FireTV Built-in .................................... 215
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................ 226
Anti-Lock Warning Light ...................................107
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................... 307, 353
Disposal ...................................................... 308
Apps ..................................................................214
Arming System
Security Alarm ............................................... 24
Assist, Hill Start ............................................... 231
Audio Systems (Radio) .................................... 186
Auto Down Power Windows ...............................80
Auto Hold .................................................111, 120
Automatic Folding Mirrors ................................. 51
Automatic Headlights ........................................ 57
Automatic High Beams ...................................... 57
Automatic Tailgate Release ...............................85
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) .............. 69
Automatic Transmission .........................115, 122
Adding Fluid ................................................ 309
Fluid And Filt
er Change ..............................309
Fluid Change ...............................................309
Fluid Level Check ....................................... 309
Fluid Type ........................................... 309, 355
Special Additives ........................................ 309
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode ...123
AutoPark ...........................................................116
362
11
AUX Port .............................................................. 74
Auxiliary Driving Systems ................................ 234
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) .......... 76
Auxiliary Power Outlet ........................................ 76
Axle Fluid ..........................................................355
B
B-Pillar Location .............................................. 335
Base Instrument Cluster ................................... 94
Battery .....................................................105, 299
Charging System Light ............................... 105
K
eyless Key Fob Replacement .....................18
Battery Saver Feature ........................................59
Belts, Seat ........................................................270
Body Mechanism Lubrication .........................304
Brake Assist System ........................................228
Brake Control System, Electronic ................... 227
Brake Fluid ..............................................309, 355
Brake System ..........................................308, 350
Anti-Lock (ABS) ........................................... 350
Fluid Check ................................................. 309
Master Cylinder .......................................... 309
Parking ........................................................ 118
Warning Light ..............................................105
Brake/Transmission Interlock ........................ 122
Bulb Replacement ...........................................331
Bulbs, Light .......................................................271
C
Camera, Night Vision .......................................163
Camera, Rear ..........................................161, 166
Capacities, Fluid .............................................. 353
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) ..................................................295
Radiator (Coolant Pressure)
...................... 307
Car Washes ......................................................347
Carbon Monoxide Warning ..................... 271, 272
Cargo Area Cover
.........................................86, 87
Cargo Compartment .......................................... 86
Light ...............................................................86
Cargo Light ......................................................... 86
Cargo Net ........................................................... 88
Cargo Tie-Downs ................................................ 86
Cellular Phone ................................................. 225
Center Console Cooler .......................................72
Center Console Safe ..........................................73
Center Console Safe If Equipped ......................73
Chains, Tire ......................................................343
Chart, Tire Sizing ............................................. 332
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator
Light) ................................................................ 113
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ................... 269
Checks, Safety .................................................269
Child Restraint .................................................260
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ............................................. 262
Child Seat Installation ................................268
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .....266
Infant And Child Restraints ........................261
Locating The LATCH Anchorages ...............264
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children ..263
Older Children And Child Restraints ..........261
Seating Positions ........................................262
Child Safety Locks ............................................. 30
Clean Air Gasoline ........................................... 351
Climate Control .................................................. 62
Automatic ...................................................... 63
Cold Weather Operation ..................................118
Compact Spare Tire .........................................341
Contract, Service ............................................. 359
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) .............307
Cooling System ................................................306
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ....................... 307
Coolant Level .............................................. 308
Cooling Capacity .........................................353
Disposal Of Used Coolant .......................... 308
Drain, Flush, And Refill ...............................307
Inspection .......................................... 306, 308
Points To R
emember ..................................308
Pressure Cap .............................................. 307
Radiator Cap ............................................... 307
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .... 307, 353,
354
Corrosion Protection ........................................347
Cruise Control (Speed Control) ....................... 132
Cruise Light ............................................. 111, 112
Customer Assistance .......................................35
7
Customer Programmable Features ................186
Cybersecurity ................................................... 186
363
11
D
Daytime Running Lights .................................... 56
De-Icer, Remote Start ........................................ 24
Defroster, Windshield ......................................270
Deluxe Security Alarm ....................................... 25
Diagnostic System, Onboard .......................... 113
Digital Rearview Mirror ......................................49
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) .........................................297, 299
Disabled Vehicle To
wing ..................................287
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ....................... 308
Door Ajar ................................................. 105, 106
Door Ajar Light ........................................ 105,
106
Door Locks ...................................................26, 29
Child-Protection Door Lock — Rear Doors ... 30
Doors .................................................................. 26
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ....................................... 33
Driving .............................................................. 183
E
Electric Brake Control System ........................ 227
Anti-Lock Brake System ............................. 226
Electronic Roll Mitigation .................. 228, 233
Electric Parking Brake .....................................118
Electric Remote Mirrors .....................................51
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) ......... 76
Electronic Range Select (ERS) ........................124
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ..... 133
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ....................228
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ...... 106
Emergency Braking ......................................... 238
Emergency Gas Can Refueling ....................... 284
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck ...................... 287
Hazard Warning Flasher .............................273
Jacking ........................................................ 275
Jump Starting ............................................. 282
Emission Control System Maintenance ......... 113
Engine ..................................................... 295, 297
Air Cleaner ...................................................301
Block Heater ............................................... 118
Break-In Recommendations ...................... 118
Checking Oil Level ............................. 297, 299
Compartment .................................... 295–297
Compartment Identification ............. 295, 296
Cooling ........................................................ 306
Exhaust Gas Caution ......................... 271, 272
Fails To Start ............................................... 117
Flooded, Starting ........................................ 117
Fuel Requirements ............................ 351, 353
Jump Starting ............................................. 282
Oil ....................................................... 300, 353
Oil Filler Cap ................................................295
Oil Filter ....................................................... 301
Oil Selection ..............................300, 353, 354
Oil Synthetic ................................................300
Starting ........................................................115
Engine Oil Life Reset ..........................................98
Enhanced Accident Response Feature .258, 290
Ethanol .............................................................352
Exhaust Gas Cautions .............................271, 272
Exhaust System .......................................271, 305
Exterior Lights ...................................55, 271, 331
F
FamCam System ..............................................163
Filters
Air Cleaner ...................................................301
Air Conditioning ...........................70, 301, 302
Engine Oil .................................................... 301
Engine Oil Disposal .....................................301
FireTV ............................................................... 220
Flash-To-Pass ......................................................57
Flashers ............................................................273
Hazard Warning .......................................... 273
Turn Signals ........................................112, 271
Flooded Engine Starting ..................................117
Fluid Capacities ............................................... 353
Fluid Leaks ....................................................... 271
Fluid Level Checks
Brake ...........................................................309
Engine Oil ........................................... 297, 299
Fluids And Lubricants ......................................355
F
old-Flat Seats ................................................... 33
Forward Collision Warning .............................. 237
Four Wheel Drive .................................... 125, 126
Operation .................................................... 125
System
........................................................ 125
364
Four Wheel Drive Operation ........................... 125
Four-Way Hazard Flasher ................................ 273
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ...................................287
Front Axle (Differential) ....................................310
Fuel ...................................................................351
Additives ......................................................351
Clean Air ...................................................... 351
Ethanol ........................................................352
Gasoline ...................................................... 351
Materials Added ..........................................351
Methanol .....................................................352
Octane Rating ............................................. 351
Requirements .................................... 351, 353
Specifications ............................................. 354
Tank Capacity ............................................. 353
F
ueling ..............................................................168
Fully Automated ParkSense Active Park
Assist ................................................................153
Fuses ................................................................ 310
G
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) ..................... 52
Gasoline, (Fuel) ................................................351
Gasoline, Clean Air .......................................... 351
Gasoline, Reformulated .................................. 351
Gear Ranges .................................................... 122
Glass Cleaning .................................................349
Glove Compartment Storage .............................71
Gross Axle Weight Rating ................................ 170
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ........................... 170
GVWR ................................................................169
H
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................273
Head Restraints .................................................44
Head Up Display .............................................. 102
Head Up Display (HUD) If Equipped ............... 102
Headlights
Automatic ...................................................... 57
Cleaning ...................................................... 347
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ..........57
Lights On Reminder ......................................58
On With Wipers ............................................. 57
Passing .......................................................... 57
Heads Up Display ............................................ 102
Heated Mirrors ...................................................52
Heated Seats ..................................................... 42
Heated Steering Wheel ......................................31
Heater, Engine Block ....................................... 118
Hill Descent Control .........................................230
Hill Descent Control Indicator .........................230
Hill Start Assist ................................................ 231
Hitches
Trailer Towing .............................................. 172
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) ..................... 52
Hood Prop ...........................................................83
Hood Release .....................................................83
I
Ignition ................................................................21
Key Fob Battery Low Or Dead ...................... 21
Key Fob Not Detected ...................................21
Keyless Ignition ............................................. 21
Keyless Push Button .....................................21
Push Button Ignition ..................................... 21
Switch ............................................................ 21
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ................................... 20
Inside Rearview Mirror ..............................49, 273
Instrument Cluster ...................................... 93,
95
Display ...........................................................96
Menu Items .................................................100
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning .................... 348
Integrated Trailer Brake Control ......................177
Interior And Instrument Lights ..........................59
Interior Appearance Care ................................348
Interior Lights .....................................................59
Interior Monitoring Camera .............................163
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ...................61
Inverter
Power ............................................................. 77
J
Jack Location ................................................... 276
Jack Operation .................................................278
Jacking And Tire Changing Instructions ......... 276
Jacking Instructions .........................................278
365
11
Jump Starting .................................................. 282
K
Key Fob
Arm The System ............................................ 24
Disarm The System .......................................24
Programming Additional Key Fobs ...............20
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless
Entry) .................................................................. 18
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless
Entry) .................................................................. 20
Keyless Enter 'n Go™ ...................................... 115
Passive Entry .................................................27
Passive Entry Programming ......................... 27
Keys .................................................................... 17
Replacement .................................................20
Sentry (Immobilizer) ..................................... 20
KNOW & GO ........................................................10
L
Lane Change Assist ........................................... 59
Lap/Shoulder Belts ......................................... 244
Latches ............................................................. 271
Hood .............................................................. 83
Lead Free Gasoline ..........................................351
Leaks, Fluid ...................................................... 271
Life Of Tires ......................................................340
Liftgate ............................................................... 83
Closing ...........................................................84
Hands-Free ....................................................85
Opening .................................................. 83, 84
Liftgate Windo
w Wiper/Washer ........................62
Light Bulbs ........................................................271
Lights ................................................................ 271
Air Bag ................................................ 250, 270
Ambient ......................................................... 60
Automatic Headlights ................................... 57
Brake Assist Warning ................................. 229
Brake Warning ............................................ 105
Bulb Replacement ......................................331
Cargo ............................................................. 86
Cruise ................................................. 111, 112
Daytime Running .......................................... 56
Dimmer Switch, Headlight .....................55, 59
Electronic Stability Program(ESP)
Indicator ...................................................... 106
Exterior ..................................................55, 271
Fog ................................................................. 58
Hazard Warning Flasher .............................273
Headlights On With Wipers .......................... 57
High Beam/Low Beam Select ......................57
Hill Descent Control Indicator ....................230
Illuminated Entry ...........................................60
Interior ...........................................................59
Lights On Reminder ......................................58
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) .......108
Multicolor Ambient ....................................... 60
Park .......................................................57, 111
Passing .......................................................... 57
Reading ......................................................... 59
Seat Belt Reminder .................................... 107
Security Alarm .............................................107
Service ........................................................ 331
Traction Control .......................................... 229
Turn Signals .......................... 55, 59, 112, 271
Vanity Mirror ..................................................50
Warning Instrument Cluster Descriptions .106
Load Shed Battery Saver Mode ......................103
Load Shed Battery Saver On ...........................103
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction ............ 103
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor ............ 103
Loading Vehicle ............................................... 169
Tires .............................................................335
Locks
Child Protection .............................................30
Manual .......................................................... 26
Power Door .................................................... 27
Lubrication, Body .............................................304
Lug Nuts/Bolts .................................................350
M
Maintenance ......................................................82
Maintenance Free Battery .............................. 299
Maintenance Schedule ................................... 291
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check
Engine) .................................................... 108, 113
Manual
Park Release ...............................................286
Service ........................................................ 360
366
McIntosh .......................................................... 214
Media Hub .......................................................... 74
Memory Feature (Memory Seats) .....................31
Memory Seat ......................................................31
Memory Seats And Radio ..................................31
Methanol ..........................................................352
Mirrors ................................................................ 49
Conversation ................................................. 51
Electric Remote .............................................51
Exterior Folding ............................................. 50
Heated ...........................................................52
Outside .......................................................... 50
Rearview ...............................................49, 273
Tilt In Rev
erse ............................................... 52
Vanity ............................................................. 50
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle ........................................................... 12
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ........................239
Mopar Parts ..................................................... 359
MP3 Control ........................................................74
Multi-Function Control Lever .............................55
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period ...........................118
Night Vision Camera ........................................163
O
Occupant Restraints ........................................243
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ....................... 351
Off-Road Pages ................................................223
Oil Change Indicator .......................................... 98
Reset ............................................................. 98
Oil Filter, Change ..............................................301
Oil Filter, Selection ...........................................301
Oil Pressure Light ............................................ 106
Oil, Engine ........................................................300
Capacity ...................................................... 353
Checking ............................................ 297, 299
Dipstick .............................................. 297, 299
Disposal ...................................................... 301
Filter ............................................................ 301
Filter Disposal .............................................301
Identification Logo ......................................300
Materials Added To .....................................300
Pressure Warning Light ..............................106
Recommendation ..............................300, 353
Synthetic ..................................................... 300
Viscosity ...................................................... 353
Onboard Diagnostic System ........................... 113
Operating Precautions .................................... 113
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual ..........................................360
Outside Rearview Mirrors ..................................50
P
Pages, Off Road ...............................................223
Paint Care .........................................................347
Panic Alarm ........................................................ 18
Parking Brake ..........................................107, 118
ParkSense
Front And Rear ............................................146
ParkSense Active Park Assist ......................... 152
ParkSense System, Rear .................................146
Passenger Screen ............................................210
Passive Entry ......................................................27
Pedals, Adjustable ............................................. 48
Permissions ......................................................210
Pets ...................................................................270
Phone Storage ................................................... 72
Pinch Protection .................................................82
Placard, Tire And Loading Information ...........335
Power
Brakes .........................................................350
Distribution Center (Fuses) ...... 311, 319, 325
Door Locks .................................................... 2
7
Inverter .......................................................... 77
Mirrors ........................................................... 51
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ................ 76
Seats ..............................................................38
Side Steps ..................................................... 27
Steering ..............................................130, 355
Sunroof ..........................................................81
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column ................30
Windows ........................................................ 79
Power Rear Seats .............................................. 40
Power Seats
Down ..............................................................38
Forward ..........................................................38
Rearward .......................................................38
367
11
Up ...................................................................38
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ................... 249
Preparation For Jacking ...................................276
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ....................................................249
Q
Quadra-Lift ....................................................... 127
Quadra-Trac ......................................................125
R
Radial Ply Tires ................................................ 339
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ............ 307
Radio Operation .............................................. 225
Radio Remote Controls ................................... 210
Rain Sensitive Wiper System ............................ 62
Rear Air Conditioning .........................................67
Rear Axle (Differential) .................................... 310
Rear Camera ...........................................161, 166
Rear Cross P
ath ...............................................236
Rear ParkSense System ..................................146
Rear Seat Entertainment ................................ 215
Rear Seat Reminder ........................................226
Rear Wiper/Washer ...........................................62
Recreational Towing ........................................ 179
Reformulated Gasoline ................................... 351
Refrigerant .......................................................302
Release, Hood ....................................................83
Reminder, Seat Belt ........................................ 244
Remote Control
Starting System ............................................ 22
Remote Keyless Entry ........................................17
Arm The Alarm ...............................................24
Disarm The Alarm ......................................... 24
Programming Additional Key Fobs ...............20
Remote Sound System (Radio) Control ..........210
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode ............................... 23
Remote Starting System ................................... 22
Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 331
Replacement Keys .............................................20
Replacement Tires .......................................... 340
Reporting Safety Defects ................................ 359
Restraints, Child .............................................. 260
Restraints, Head ................................................44
Roll Over Warning .............................................. 11
Rotation, Tires ................................................. 345
S
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle .......................... 270
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ........................271
Safety Defects, Reporting ............................... 359
Safety Information, Tire ...................................331
Safety Tips ....................................................... 269
Safety, Exhaust Gas ......................................... 271
Schedule, Maintenance .................................. 291
Screen, Passenger ...........................................210
Seat Belt Reminder ......................................... 107
Seat Belts ................................................244, 270
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ........................... 2
46
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ..... 246
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage ................................................... 246
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ............249
Child Restraints .......................................... 260
Energy Management Feature .................... 249
Extender ...................................................... 248
Front Seat ...........................................244, 245
Inspection ................................................... 270
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation .....................245
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ....................246
Lap/Shoulder Belts .................................... 244
Operating Instructions ................................245
Pregnant Women ........................................249
Pretensioners ..............................................249
Rear Seat .................................................... 244
Reminder ............................................112, 244
Seat Belt Pretensioner ............................... 249
Seat Belt Reminder .................................... 112
Untwisting Procedure ................................. 246
Seat Belts Maintenance ................................. 348
Seats ..................................................... 33, 38, 42
Adjustment ............................................. 33, 38
Bolster ........................................................... 39
Cushion Extender ..........................................39
Easy Entry ......................................................40
Heated ...........................................................42
Memory ..........................................................31
Power Lumbar ...............................................39
368
Power Massage .............................................41
Rear Folding
.................................................. 33
Tilting ............................................................. 33
Vented ........................................................... 43
Ventilated ...................................................... 43
Second Row USB ................................................76
Security Alarm .....................................24, 25, 107
Arm The System ............................................ 24
Disarm The System .......................................24
Selec-Terrain .................................................... 126
Semi-Automatic ParkSense Active Park
Assist ................................................................156
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ................................... 20
Sentry Key Replacement ...................................20
Service Assistance .......................................... 357
Service Contract .............................................. 359
Service Manuals ..............................................360
Settings ............................................................ 186
Shifting ............................................................. 121
Automatic T
ransmission ....................121, 122
Shoulder Belts ................................................. 244
Side Steps, Power .............................................. 27
Signals, Turn ............................................112, 271
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ..............................343
Snow Tires ........................................................341
Spare Tire Removal ......................................... 277
Spare Tires ..................................... 277, 341, 342
Speed Control
Accel/Decel .................................................133
Accel/Decel (ACC Only) .............................. 137
Cancel ......................................................... 134
Resume .......................................................134
Set ............................................................... 133
Speed Contr
ol (Cruise Control) ..............132, 133
Starting ......................................................22, 115
Button ............................................................21
Cold Weather .............................................. 118
Engine Block Heater ...................................118
Engine Fails To Start ...................................117
Remote .......................................................... 22
Starting And Operating ....................................115
Starting Procedures ........................................ 115
Steering .............................................................. 30
Power ...........................................................130
Tilt Column .................................................... 30
Wheel, Heated ...............................................31
Wheel, Tilt ......................................................30
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ....................... 210
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Controls ............................................................ 210
Steps, Power Side .............................................. 27
Storage ............................................................... 71
Storage, Vehicle ...............................................347
Storing Your Vehicle .........................................347
Streaming .........................................................215
Sun Roof ...................................................... 81, 82
Sun Screens
Second Row Seats ........................................ 74
Sun Visor ............................................................ 50
Sunglasses Storage
........................................... 71
Surroundview Camera .....................................166
Sway Control, Trailer ........................................233
Synthetic Engine Oil ........................................ 300
System, Remot
e Starting .................................. 22
T
Telescoping Steering Column ........................... 30
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ............. 69
Third Party Apps ...............................................214
Third Row USB ....................................................76
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo ..................................... 86
Tilt Steering Column .......................................... 30
Tire And Loading Information Placard ............335
Tire Markings ................................................... 331
Tire Safety Information ....................................331
Tires ....................................... 271, 33
7, 341, 346
Aging (Life Of Tires) .................................... 340
Air Pressure .................................................337
Chains ......................................................... 343
Changing ..................................................... 275
Compact Spare ........................................... 341
General Information .......................... 337, 341
High Speed ................................................. 338
Inflation Pressure ....................................... 338
Life Of Tires .................................................340
Load Capacity ............................................. 335
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) 109, 239
Quality Grading ........................................... 346
Radial .......................................................... 339
Replacement .............................................. 340
Rotation .......................................................345
Safety ..................................................331, 337
369
11
Sizes ............................................................332
Snow Tires ...................................................341
Spare Tires ................................ 2
77, 341, 342
Spinning ...................................................... 339
Trailer Towing ...............................................176
Tread Wear Indicators ................................ 339
Wheel Nut Torque .......................................350
To Open Hood .....................................................83
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight .........................175
Tow/Haul Mode ............................................... 124
Towing .............................................111, 170, 287
Disabled Vehicle ......................................... 287
Guide ........................................................... 173
Recreational ................................................179
Weight ......................................................... 173
Towing Behind A Motorhome .......................... 179
Traction Control ............................................... 233
Traffic Sign Recognition System ..................... 141
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ...............................233
Trailer Towing ................................................... 170
Hitches ........................................................ 172
Minimum R
equirements .............................176
Tips .............................................................. 179
Trailer And Tongue Weight ..........................175
Wiring .......................................................... 178
Trailer Weight ................................................... 173
Transfer Case ................................................... 310
Fluid .............................................................355
Maintenance ...............................................310
Transmission ....................................................122
Automatic ...........................................122, 309
Fluid .............................................................355
Maintenance ...............................................309
Shifting
........................................................121
Transporting Pets .............................................270
Tread Wear Indicators ..................................... 339
Turn Signals ..................................................... 112
U
Uconnect ..........................................................186
Uconnect Settings ........................................... 186
Customer Programmable Features .......27, 29
Passive Entry Programming ...................27, 29
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ............................346
Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) ..52
Unleaded Gasoline .......................................... 351
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt .....................246
USB Ports ............................................................74
V
Vanity Mirrors ..................................................... 50
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ...............350
Vehicle Loading ...................................... 169, 335
Vehicle Maintenance .......................................300
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations .................... 12
Vehicle Security Alarm ....................................... 24
Vehicle Settings ............................................... 186
Vehicle Storage ................................................347
Voice Command ................................................. 47
Voice Recognition System (VR) ......................... 47
W
Warning Flashers, Hazard ...............................273
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster
Descriptions) ....................................................108
Warnings, Roll Over ............................................11
Warranty Information ...................................... 359
Washers, Windshield ................................61, 299
Washing Vehicle ...............................................347
Wind Buffeting ................................................... 80
Window Fogging .................................................70
Windows ............................................................. 79
Power .............................................................79
Reset Aut
o-Up ............................................... 80
Windshield Defroster .......................................270
Windshield Washers .................................61, 299
Fluid .............................................................299
Windshield Wiper Blades ................................304
Windshield Wipers ............................................. 61
Wipers Blade Replacement ............................ 304
Wipers, Intermittent ...........................................61
Wipers, Rain Sensitive .......................................62
Wireless Charging Pad ...................................... 78
370
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust,
do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear
gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also
include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment
described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Radio Instruction Manual
and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and
personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off the road.
Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices by the driver while the vehicle is moving
is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself
unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of
cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Wagoneer vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source for common
questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit mopar.com/om (USA), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local
Chrysler, Dodge, Jeep®, or Ram dealer.
U.S. Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by
calling 1-833-667-4825 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com.
Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet or purchase
a replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal
minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a rideshare, a friend or use public transportation.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms or discontinue the Roadside Assistance Program at any time. The Roadside Assistance Program is subject to restrictions and conditions of use, that are
determined solely by FCA US LLC.
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
24 HOURS, 7 DAYS A WEEK AT YOUR SERVICE.
CALL 1-833-667-4825 OR VISIT WAGONEER.RSAHELP.COM (USA)
CALL 1-800-363-4869 OR VISIT HTTPS://FCA.ROADSIDEAID.COM/ (CANADA)
SERVICES: Flat Tire Service, Out Of Gas/Fuel Delivery, Battery Jump Assistance, Lockout Service and Towing Service
Please see the Customer Assistance chapter in this Owner’s Manual for further information.
2023 GRAND WAGONEER/WAGONEER
OWNER’S MANUAL
2023 GRAND WAGONEER
WAGONEER
Sixth Edition V1
23_WS_OM_EN_USC
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take
following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your Wagoneer brand
vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store® or Google
Play® Store and enter the search keyword “Wagoneer” (U.S. residents only).
©2024 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Wagoneer is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Wagoneer est une
marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
owners.mopar.ca
CanadaUSA
mopar.com/om
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
